Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
iR C3200 Series
iR C3220N PRT
Dec 3 2004
Introduction
Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:
Symbol Description
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other
purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant
Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."
Contents
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 System Construction .......................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 System Construction of the Pickup/Delivery Options ............................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 System Configuration and Print/Transmission Accessories ...................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Functions of Printing/Transmission Accessories ....................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.4 Overview of Printing/Transmitting Accessories ........................................................................................ 1-4
1.2 Product Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.1 Names of Parts ............................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.2.1.1 External View ...................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.1.2 Cross Section ....................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.2 Using the Machine ...................................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power ......................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.2.2 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power Switch ................................................................. 1-9
1.2.2.3 Control Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.2.3 User Mode Items ....................................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.2.3.1 Common Settings .............................................................................................................................. 1-12
1.2.3.2 Timer Settings ................................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.2.3.3 Adjustments and Cleaning ................................................................................................................. 1-13
1.2.3.4 Report Generation ............................................................................................................................. 1-14
1.2.3.5 System Control Settings .................................................................................................................... 1-15
1.2.3.6 Copier Specifications Settings ........................................................................................................... 1-16
1.2.3.7 Transmission/Reception Specifications Settings ............................................................................... 1-16
1.2.3.8 Box Specifications Settings ............................................................................................................... 1-17
1.2.3.9 Printer Specifications Settings ........................................................................................................... 1-18
1.2.3.10 Destinations Table Specifications Settings ..................................................................................... 1-19
1.2.4 User Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 1-19
1.2.4.1 Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................. 1-19
1.2.4.2 Inspection .......................................................................................................................................... 1-20
1.2.5 Safety ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-20
1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser System ................................................................................................................ 1-20
1.2.5.2 Regulations by the Center for Devices and Radiational Heath(CDRH) ........................................... 1-21
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Assembly ........................................................................................................... 1-21
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner .................................................................................................................................. 1-21
1.2.6 Product Specifications .............................................................................................................................. 1-22
1.2.6.1 Type and Functions ........................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.2.7 Function List ............................................................................................................................................. 1-23
1.2.7.1 Print Speed ......................................................................................................................................... 1-23
1.2.7.2 Print Size ........................................................................................................................................... 1-25
1.2.7.3 Others ................................................................................................................................................ 1-27
1.2.7.4 Reader Unit Specifications ................................................................................................................ 1-28
Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Making Pre-Checks ........................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Selecting the Site ........................................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 Site Space ................................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 Sequence of Installing Accessories ............................................................................................................ 2-5
2.1.4 Connecting the Power Cables ..................................................................................................................... 2-6
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
10.10.45.3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) .................................................................... 10-137
10.10.45.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) .................................................................. 10-138
10.10.45.5 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Motor ........................................................................... 10-141
10.10.46 Face-Down Delivery Sensor 1 ........................................................................................................ 10-141
10.10.46.1 Removing the Upper Left Cover ............................................................................................. 10-141
10.10.46.2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ....................................................................................... 10-141
10.10.46.3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) .................................................................... 10-142
10.10.46.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) .................................................................. 10-142
10.10.46.5 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Sensor 1 ......................................................................... 10-145
10.10.47 Center Delivery Tray Full sensor .................................................................................................... 10-146
10.10.47.1 Removing the Upper Left Cover ............................................................................................. 10-146
10.10.47.2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ....................................................................................... 10-146
10.10.47.3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) .................................................................... 10-146
10.10.47.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) .................................................................. 10-147
10.10.47.5 Removing the Center Delivery Tray Full sensor ..................................................................... 10-149
10.10.48 Face-Down Delivery Sensor 2 ........................................................................................................ 10-150
10.10.48.1 Removing the Upper Left Cover ............................................................................................. 10-150
10.10.48.2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ....................................................................................... 10-150
10.10.48.3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) .................................................................... 10-150
10.10.48.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) .................................................................. 10-151
10.10.48.5 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Sensor 2 ......................................................................... 10-153
10.10.49 Delivery Vertical Path Cover Open/Closed Sensor ........................................................................ 10-154
10.10.49.1 Removing the Upper Left Cover ............................................................................................. 10-154
10.10.49.2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ....................................................................................... 10-154
10.10.49.3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) .................................................................... 10-154
10.10.49.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) .................................................................. 10-156
10.10.49.5 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Cover Open/Closed Sensor ......................................... 10-158
10.10.50 Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 1 ............................................................................................... 10-158
10.10.50.1 Removing the Upper Left Cover ............................................................................................. 10-158
10.10.50.2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ....................................................................................... 10-158
10.10.50.3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) .................................................................... 10-159
10.10.50.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) .................................................................. 10-160
10.10.50.5 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover ........................................................................................... 10-162
10.10.50.6 Removing the Cleaner Fan ...................................................................................................... 10-162
10.10.50.7 Removing the Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 1 ................................................................ 10-162
10.10.51 Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 2 ............................................................................................... 10-163
10.10.51.1 Removing the Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 2 ................................................................ 10-163
10.10.52 Face-Down Delivery Roller 1 Drive Belt ....................................................................................... 10-163
10.10.52.1 Removing the Upper Left Cover ............................................................................................. 10-163
10.10.52.2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray ....................................................................................... 10-163
10.10.52.3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (Old) .................................................................... 10-164
10.10.52.4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New) .................................................................. 10-165
10.10.52.5 Removing the Face-Down Delivery Roller 1 Drive Belt ........................................................ 10-167
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Chapter 13 MEAP
13.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................ 13-1
13.2 MEAP Counter .............................................................................................................................................. 13-2
13.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform ............................................................................................................. 13-4
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
16.3.8.3 0105 Jam Code: Occurs with machine having mylar sheet to fixing/feeder sensor flag ............ 16-117
16.3.8.4 JAM CODE 0107 ........................................................................................................................ 16-117
16.3.8.5 JAM CODE 0108, 0207 .............................................................................................................. 16-118
16.3.8.6 JAM CODE 0207 ........................................................................................................................ 16-118
16.3.8.7 0207 Jam Code: Because of deformation of internal delivery roller ........................................... 16-118
16.3.8.8 0A06 Jam Code ........................................................................................................................... 16-119
16.3.8.9 JAM CODE 0A0A: At about 41 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a
duplexing driver PCB failure ................................................................................................................. 16-119
16.3.8.10 JAM CODE 0B00/0105 ............................................................................................................ 16-120
16.3.9 Jam (Document Feeder) ...................................................................................................................... 16-120
16.3.9.1 JAM CODE 008C: frequent occurrence recorded in jam history under service
mode, although unable to reproduce during paper feeding test. ............................................................ 16-120
16.3.10 Error Code ......................................................................................................................................... 16-121
16.3.10.1 E000 Error code detail The rise in temperature in the fixing unit at time of
power-on is inadequate. ........................................................................................................................ 16-121
16.3.10.2 E001 Error code detail The fixing unit is overheating. ........................................................... 16-121
16.3.10.3 E002 Error code detail The rise in temperature of the fixing unit is inadequate. .................... 16-122
16.3.10.4 E003 Error code detai The temperature of the fixing unit is abnormally low after standby. ... 16-123
16.3.10.5 E004 Error code detail The protection circuit of the fixing unit is faulty. ............................... 16-123
16.3.10.6 E004-0003 Error code Or message 'Remove the paper from the finisher trays.': after
implementing countermeasure against malfunction of fixing feeder unit open/closed sensor ............. 16-124
16.3.10.7 E004-0005 Error Code: Because of faulty DC Controller PCB ................................................ 16-124
16.3.10.8 E004-0007 Error Code: Occasionally occurs first in the morning ............................................ 16-125
16.3.10.9 E004-0006/E004-0007 Error Code Descriptions ...................................................................... 16-125
16.3.10.10 E012 Error code detail The drum ITB motor is faulty. .......................................................... 16-126
16.3.10.11 E012-0001 Error code ITB motor not rotating ....................................................................... 16-126
16.3.10.12 E012-0001 Error code At about 37 sec. after the power is turned ON, due
to a drum ITB motor failure ................................................................................................................. 16-126
16.3.10.13 E012-0001 Error code At about 37 sec. after the power is turned ON, due
to a microswitch PCB failure ............................................................................................................... 16-127
16.3.10.14 E012-0001 Error Code: Drum ITB Motor, DC Power Supply PCB and
Fuse PCB work normally ...................................................................................................................... 16-128
16.3.10.15 E012-0001 Error Code: Because Drum ITB Motor is faulty, or Fuse PCB is faulty .............. 16-128
16.3.10.16 E020-0134 Error code Recurring even after replacement of yellow drum unit ..................... 16-129
16.3.10.17 E020 Error code detail There is a fault associated with the drum/developer. ........................ 16-129
16.3.10.18 E020-xx81: generally E020-0181 Error Code ......................................................................... 16-131
16.3.10.19 E020-0081 Error code Displaying when a copy is made with the service case removed ..... 16-132
16.3.10.20 E020-0X34, E020-0X21 Error code Upon installation in a cold season ................................ 16-132
16.3.10.21 E020-04B0 Error code At about 200 to 300 sheets from installation, toner
container motor (Bk) not rotating (Refer to SymptomExplanation.) .................................................... 16-132
16.3.10.22 E020-04B0 Cautions in replacing the drum unit ..................................................................... 16-133
16.3.10.23 E020-0X81 Error Code Displaying because of an open/close failure of the
SALT sensor shutter .............................................................................................................................. 16-134
16.3.10.24 E020-0124 Error Code ........................................................................................................... 16-134
16.3.10.25 E020-OXB0 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-135
16.3.10.26 E020-xx24 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-135
16.3.10.27 E020-xxA0 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-136
16.3.10.28 E020-xxD0 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-136
16.3.10.29 E020-xx34 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-136
16.3.10.30 E020-0125 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-137
16.3.10.31 E020-03B0 Error Code: Overall fogging (no margin) occurred after replacement
of Cyan drum unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-137
16.3.10.32 E032 Error code detail The counter of the NE controller fails to operate. ............................ 16-137
16.3.10.33 E110 Error code detail The operation of the laser scanner motor is faulty. ........................... 16-137
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
16.3.10.84 E602-0001/E602-0002/E602-0003 Error Code: Remedy upon occurrence of error code ...... 16-162
16.3.10.85 E602 Error code detail The hard disk is faulty. ...................................................................... 16-163
16.3.10.86 E602-0001 Error code At about 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a
failure of the Distribution Board PCB Ass'y ........................................................................................ 16-165
16.3.10.87 E602-0001 Error code At about 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a
connection failure of the flat cable between the HDD unit and the main controller ............................ 16-165
16.3.10.88 E602-0202 Error Code: Recovered after performing HD-CHECK ........................................ 16-166
16.3.10.89 E602-0202 Error Code: Because of faulty SRAM Board PCB ............................................... 16-166
16.3.10.90 Progress bar on machine starting-up window is slower than usual, then E602
Error Code is displayed ......................................................................................................................... 16-166
16.3.10.91 E602-0402 Error Code: not recovered after replacement of main controller PCB ................. 16-166
16.3.10.92 E602-0x02 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-167
16.3.10.93 E602-0001 Error Code ............................................................................................................ 16-167
16.3.10.94 E602-0402 Error Code: At power-on upon installation, iRC3220 .......................................... 16-167
16.3.10.95 E604 Error code detail There is a shortage in image memory (SDRAM). ........................... 16-167
16.3.10.96 E604-0000 Error Code: Because of faulty expansion RAM ................................................... 16-168
16.3.10.97 E605 Error code detail The battery for image memory is faulty. ........................................... 16-168
16.3.10.98 E606 Error code detail The hard disk is faulty. ...................................................................... 16-169
16.3.10.99 E674 Error code detail The fax board is faulty. .................................................................... 16-169
16.3.10.100 E677-0002 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-169
16.3.10.101 E711 Error code detail There is a fault in IPC communication.(DADF-K1) ...................... 16-170
16.3.10.102 E711 Error code detail There is a fault in IPC communication. .......................................... 16-170
16.3.10.103 E712 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between the
ADF and the reader unit. ...................................................................................................................... 16-171
16.3.10.104 E713 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between the
finisher and the cassette pedestal. .......................................................................................................... 16-171
16.3.10.105 E716 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between the
cassette pedestal and the printer unit. .................................................................................................... 16-172
16.3.10.106 E716-0000 Error code Recorded only in the error history ................................................... 16-172
16.3.10.107 E717 Error code detail The communication with the NE controller is faulty. ..................... 16-172
16.3.10.108 E719 Error code detail The coin vendor is faulty. ............................................................... 16-173
16.3.10.109 E719-0011 Error code After the cable is disconnected because of a
scanning fault in card reader D1 ............................................................................................................ 16-173
16.3.10.110 E719-0001 Error code When the coin vendor is disconnected, unable to be cleared .......... 16-174
16.3.10.111 E731 Error code detail There is a fault in the UFR board. .................................................. 16-174
16.3.10.112 E732 Error code detail There is a reader communication error. .......................................... 16-174
16.3.10.113 E732-9999 Error Code: Recorded in error log after performing service mode
COPIER> Function> CLEAR> MN-CON ............................................................................................ 16-175
16.3.10.114 E732-0001 Error code A message 'Starting up. Please wait' keeps displaying for
about 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the error code results (DC power
supply unit PCB J158 output failure) ................................................................................................... 16-175
16.3.10.115 E732-0001 Error Code: After turning power ON, message "Starting up. Please
wait" changes to error code indication .................................................................................................. 16-176
16.3.10.116 E732-0001 Error code A message 'Starting up. Please wait' keeps displaying for
about 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the error code results ............................. 16-177
16.3.10.117 E733 Error code detail There is a printer communication error. ......................................... 16-177
16.3.10.118 E733-0001 Error code Printer communication error ........................................................... 16-178
16.3.10.119 E740 Error code detail The Ethernet board is faulty. ........................................................... 16-178
16.3.10.120 E744 Error code detail The language file is faulty. ............................................................. 16-178
16.3.10.121 E745 Error code detail The TokenRing board is faulty. ..................................................... 16-179
16.3.10.122 E747-8702 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-179
16.3.10.123 E747 Error code detail The image processing ASIC or the memory control/
communication ASIC is faulty. ............................................................................................................. 16-179
16.3.10.124 E747-00FF Error code Only with printing operation ......................................................... 16-180
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Chapter 19 Upgrading
19.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................... 19-1
19.1.1 Construction of Firmware ....................................................................................................................... 19-1
19.1.2 Outline of the Service Support Tool ....................................................................................................... 19-2
19.1.3 Network Interface of the Machine with the SST in Use ......................................................................... 19-5
19.2 Making Preparations ...................................................................................................................................... 19-8
19.2.1 Registering the Firmware ....................................................................................................................... 19-8
19.2.2 Making Connections ............................................................................................................................. 19-11
19.3 Formatting the HDD .................................................................................................................................... 19-17
19.3.1 Formatting All Partitions ...................................................................................................................... 19-17
19.3.2 Formatting Selected Partitions .............................................................................................................. 19-18
19.3.3 Formatting the Partitions ...................................................................................................................... 19-20
19.4 Downloading System Software ................................................................................................................... 19-27
19.4.1 Downloading the System Software ....................................................................................................... 19-27
19.4.1.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................... 19-27
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 1
[8]
[1]
[7]
[9]
[6]
[14]
[2] [4] [17]
[10]
[11]
[15]
[16]
*[5]
[12]
[15]
[16] [13]
[3]
F-1-1
T-1-1
*The presence of any of [1] through [3] prevents installation of [4] and [5].
1-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 1
[12]
[9] [8A]
[8B]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5] [7A]
[7B]
[6]
[11]
F-1-2
1-2
Chapter 1
T-1-2
1-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 1
The following gives an outline of individual accessories; for details, see the descriptions found in subsequent
chapters:
1) UFR Printer and Scanner Kit-A2
Adds GDI-UFR printing functions and scanning functions associated with ScanGear.
1-4
Chapter 1
F-1-3
T-1-3
[9] Cassette 2
1-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 1
F-1-4
T-1-4
[4] Upper right cover (small) [11] Manual feed unit cover
1-6
Chapter 1
[6]
[46]
[7]
[45]
[8]
[44]
[43]
[42]
[41]
[40] [9]
[39] [10]
[38]
[11]
[37]
[12]
[13]
[36] [14]
[15]
[16]
[35] [17]
[18]
[34]
[19]
[33]
[20]
[32] [31] [30] [29] [28][27][26] [25] [24] [23] [22] [21]
F-1-5
T-1-5
[9] Registration detention unit [32] Fixing lower roller (pressure roller)
[10] Manual feed pickup tray unit [33] Fixing upper roller (fixing roller)
1-7
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 1
[15] Pickup vertical path roller [38] Delivery vertical path roller 2
The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control panel power switch. Normally, the
machine is supplied with power when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than when it is in power save
mode, low power mode, or sleep mode).
F-1-6
1-8
Chapter 1
T-1-6
Never turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated.
(The machine is accessing its HDD.) Otherwise, the HDD can go out of order (E602).
F-1-7
1.2.2.2 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power Switch 0000-4260
Be sure to turn off the control panel power switch before turning off the main power switch.
1-9
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 1
7 8 9
* 0 # ID
Execution/Memory Error
F-1-8
ON
/O
FF
F-1-9
1-10
Chapter 1
F-1-10
T-1-7
1-11
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 1
*Factory default.
T-1-8
Mode Description
initial functions *copy, fax, box, SEND
alert: *ON/OFF
paper type registration upon cassette auto copier, printer, box, fax, other
selection
select special tray use finisher tray for: copier, box, printer,
fax, other
register standard mode for manually fed enable/disable standard mode for manually
paper fed
paper (ON/*OFF)
1-12
Chapter 1
Mode Description
standard mode for local print paper select (*auto), print count (*1), sorter
(*sort/group/stable), double-sided print
(*off/on),
* factory settings.
T-1-9
Mode Description
auto sleep time 10 min, *15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 40 min, 50 min, 1 hr, 90 min,
2 hr to 3 hr to 4 hr
shift to low-power consumption 10 min, *15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 40 min, 50 min, 1 hr, 90 min,
mode 2 hr to 3 hr to 4 hr
*factory settings.
T-1-10
Mode Description
1-13
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 1
Mode Description
*factory settings.
T-1-11
Mode Description
1-14
Chapter 1
*factory settings.
T-1-12
Mode Description
NetWare setup
AppleTalk setup
SMB settings
SNMB settings
e-mail/i-fax
1-15
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 1
*factory settings.
T-1-13
Mode Description
* factory settings.
T-1-14
Mode Description
1-16
Chapter 1
Mode Description
cassette selection>switch A, B, C, D
T-1-15
Mode Description
set up/register user box box selection (0-99), box name registration ,
ID No. (0 to 9999999), file auto deletion (0/
1/2/3/6/12 hr; 1/2/3/7/30 days; 3 days), reset
1-17
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 1
T-1-16
Mode Description
time-out
(*time-out time (5 to 300 sec; 15)/no)
sorter
(no/sort/rotation sort/rotation group)
transparency interleaf
(*disable, use blank paper, use print paper)
1-18
Chapter 1
T-1-17
Mode Description
F-1-11
F-1-12
1-19
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 1
F-1-13
F-1-14
1.2.5 Safety
1-20
Chapter 1
constructed to prevent leakage of laser light outside it. As such, the light cannot escape the machine as long as the
machine is used for the operations for which it is designed.
1.2.5.2 Regulations by the Center for Devices and Radiational Heath(CDRH) 0000-4275
The Center for Devices and Radiation Heath (CDRH) of the United States put into effect regulations drawn up for
laser products. These regulations apply to laser products that are produced on August 1, 1976, and thereafter, and ban
the sale of laser products without certification indicated by a label obtained from the organization..
Points to Note When Servicing the Area Around the Laser Optical System
- Do not put an object with a high reflectance (e.g., screwdriver) into the path of the laser light.
- Do not wear a watch or ring during work. (They can reflect the laser light, causing damage to your eyes.)
The machinelaser light is red in color, and the covers that can reflect the light are identified with a label [1]. Pay
special attention whenever servicing an area behind these covers.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-1-15
1-21
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 1
Toner Stains
1. If your skin or clothing has come into contact with toner, remove it with dry tissue, and then wash with water.
2. Do not use warm water; otherwise, the toner will become jell-like, permanently fusing with the fibers of the cloth
and resisting removal.
3. Do not bring toner into contact with vinyl material, as they can easily react.
Copyboard Flat-bed
Body Desk-top
Printing resolution read resolution: 600 x 600 dpi write resolution: 9600
(equivalent) x 600 dpi
1-22
Chapter 1
T-1-18
Unit: sec
Full-color Monochrome
A4, plain (64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2) 12.8 (simplex model) 9.5 (simplex model)
Printing Speed
- Plain Paper Mode (64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2)
T-1-19
unit: prints/min
B5 32 19 32 13.5 10.25
A5R 16 16 - 7.5 7
A4 32 19 32 13.5 10.25
STMT-R 16 16 - 8 8
B5R 16 16 - 7.5 7
LTR-R 16 16 - 7.5 7
A4R 16 16 - 7.5 7
B4 16 14 - 6.5 5.5
A3 16 13 - 6.5 5.5
A5 - 16 - - -
320mm x 450mm - 13 - - -
(12.6 x 17.7)
1-23
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 1
T-1-20
unit: prints/min
Paper size Cassette, Manual feeder, Side paper deck, Face-down, Face-up,
single-sided single-sided single-sided double-sided double-sided
A5 - 9.5 - - -
Tab paper - 9 - - -
T-1-21
unit: prints/min
B5 - -
A4 6 6
LTR 6 6
LTR-R 6 6
A4R 6 6
1-24
Chapter 1
- Monochrome, transparency
T-1-22
unit: prints/min
B5 - -
A4 7 7
LTR 7 7
LTR-R 7 7
A4R 7 7
T-1-23
<Paper Size>
279x432[mm]
yes yes no yes yes
(11x17)
305x457[mm]
yes yes no yes yes
(12x18)
320x450[mm]
no yes no no no
(12.6x17.7)
postcard no yes no no no
1-25
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 1
T-1-24
<Paper Type>
transparency*1
yes yes no yes no
(A4/LTR)
Japanese
no yes no no no
paper*1
postcard no yes no no no
1-26
Chapter 1
T-1-25
In standby 50 dB or less
120 V
230 V
In standby 100V:344W*
120V:273W*
230V:350W*
1-27
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 1
T-1-26
Copyboard Fixed
Original size detection Feed sensors, reading CCD; copyboard cover angle
Height (H) 87 mm
Weight 12.5 kg
1-28
Chapter 2 Installation
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Select the site of installation while keeping the following in mind; if possible, visit the user's premises before the
delivery of the machine:
1. The place must provide a source of power that is as rated (±10%) and that may be used exclusively by the machine;
it also must provide a terminal for grounding.
2. The place must fall within the following ranges of temperature and humidity. The site must not be near a water
faucet, water boiler, humidifier, or refrigerator.
Humidity (%RH)
80
75
60
40
25
20
10
0 10 15 20 27.5 30 °C
(32) (50) (59) (68) (81.5)(86) (°F)
Temperature
F-2-1
3. The site must not be near a source of fire or subject to dust or ammonium gas. If exposed to direct rays of the sun,
provide curtains.
4. The amount of ozone generated by the machine in operation is not of a level that would harm the health of
individuals around it. Some, however, may find its order unpleasant, requiring good ventilation for the work
place.
5. Be sure that the machine's feet will remain in contact with the floor and the machine will remain level.
6. Be sure that the machine will be at least 10 cm from all walls and there will be ample space for using the machine.
2-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
100 mm min.
1110 mm
500 mm min.
Without Options
100 mm min.
1120 mm
500 mm min.
2-2
Chapter 2
100 mm
min.
1120 mm
500 mm
min.
1) Be sure the will be 10 cm or more between the machine and any wall and there will be enough space for operating
the machine.
100 mm min.
1110 mm
500 mm min.
2-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
100 mm min.
1120 mm
500 mm min.
100 mm
min.
1120 mm
500 mm
min.
2-4
Chapter 2
F-2-7
200 mm min.
1110mm
500 mm min.
Memo,
If you are installing the machine and its accessories at the same item, be sure to go through the work in the following
sequence:
2-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
When connecting accessories to the machine, be sure to connect the power cables as indicated:
When connecting the pedestal, paper deck, finisher, ADF, anti-condensation heater, and PS print server unit.
DADF-K1
Inlet included with anti-condensation heater)
PS Print Server
Unit-C1
Inlet
Outlet1
Outlet2
Outlet3 Inlet
2-Cassette Pedestal-X1 included with
PS Print Server Unit-C1)
1. If the machine is brought from a cold to warm place, condensation can occur in its optical system, laser unit, or
pickup/feeder unit, leading to image faults. If such is the case, leave the machine alone without unpacking for 1 hr
or more before starting the work.
The term condensation refers to the phenomenon that occurs on a metal surface when it is brought from a cold to
warm location as the result of rapidly cooled vapor. It is seen as droplets of water on the metal surface.
2. The machine weighs about 120 kg (including the reader unit). Be sure to work in a group of 4.
2-6
Chapter 2
F-2-10
T-2-1
[1] Drum unit (Y, M, C, K) 1 pc. 1 pc. [10] Cable clamp (round) 6 pc.
each each
[2] Toner cartridge (Y, M, C, K) 1 pc. [11] Cable clamp (angular) 2 pc.
each
[3] Transfer cleaning unit 1 pc. [12] Size plate label 2 pc.
[6] Power cord (for wall outlet) 1 pc. [15] QR Sheet (100-V model 1 pc.
only)
[8] Grounding cord (100-V 1 pc. [17] CD-ROM (iR C3200 only) 1 pc.
model only)
2.2.2 Configuring the all tape; then, detach the holding plate [1].
2-7
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
[2]
F-2-14
[1]
[2]
F-2-15
F-2-13
2-8
Chapter 2
F-2-16
F-2-17
F-2-20
F-2-18
2-9
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
F-2-21 F-2-23
3) Shift the fixing roller releasing lever [1] back to its 2) Remove the face cap [1]. (Save it for later.)
initial position, and push in the fixing/feeding
assembly.
F-2-24
2-10
Chapter 2
F-2-26
5) Remove the face cap [1], and remove the screw [2]
(1 each); then, detach the 2 small covers [3]. (Put
away the cap; save the screws for later; put away
the cover.) F-2-29
F-2-27
F-2-30
6) Fit the included joint [1] in the hole in the machine's
top as shown. (2 locations at front and rear)
(front)
F-2-28 F-2-31
7) (rear)
2-11
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
8) For both front and rear, secure the joint grounding 10) Secure the reader connection unit [1] using the 2
spring [2] using the screw [1] removed from the included screws [2].
small cover (for the front, tighten over the plate);
then, secure the joint plate (front/rear) [4] using the
2 included screws [3] (1 each at front and rear).
F-2-35
F-2-36
F-2-33 12) Shift down the arm [1] of the reader connection
unit by 90 deg C; then, hook it on the protrusion [2]
(rear) sticking out of the machine.
9) Where the upper right cover (small) has been
removed, fit the positioning pin [A] for the bottom
of the reader connection unit [1].
F-2-37
F-2-34
2-12
Chapter 2
F-2-38 F-2-41
F-2-42
F-2-39
17) Fit the included supports into the 2 holes in the
bottom of the reader unit; then, tighten them firmly
13) Attach the inside cover using the 2 previously
using a screwdriver so that they are fully fitted with
removed screws.
the joints.
F-2-40
F-2-43
14) Attach the center delivery tray using the 2
previously removed screws.
2-13
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
20) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the upper left
cover [2]. (Save all for later.)
F-2-44
F-2-45
19) Remove the face cap [1], and remove the 2 screws
[2]; then, detach the upper left cover (small) [3].
(Save all for later.)
F-2-48
22) Hook the reader unit retainer [1] on the hole in the
reader unit; then, while pushing it down from
above, secure it in place using the 2 included screws
[2].
F-2-46
F-2-49
2-14
Chapter 2
F-2-50
F-2-53
23) Bend and remove the 2 claws [1] found on the top
of the removed upper left cover; then, attach them 26) Remove the 2 mirror fixing screws [1] from the
in place using the 2 previously removed screws. left side of the reader unit. (Store away the removed
(Put away the claws.) mirror fixing screws for later, i.e., for possible
relocation of the machine.)
F-2-51
F-2-54
F-2-52
F-2-55
2-15
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
28) When the positioning pin [1] is fully in place, 2.2.6 Installing the
secure it using the stepped screw [2].
Secondary Transfer
Outside Roller Unit 0006-4664
F-2-57
F-2-59
30) Using the screw [1] removed from the upper right
cover (small) and the included screw [2], secure the
reader connection unit cover [3] in place.
F-2-60
2-16
Chapter 2
F-2-63
F-2-64
2-17
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
F-2-67
F-2-66
F-2-68
2-18
Chapter 2
F-2-71
1) Take out the drum unit (Y) from the packing box.
5) Turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever
2) Take out the drum unit (H) [1] from the packing
[1] in the direction of the arrow.
bag; then, take out the drying agent (silica gel).
F-2-70 F-2-73
3)
2-19
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
F-2-76
F-2-74
9)
F-2-75
8)
F-2-77
2-20
Chapter 2
2-21
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
Perform the following work only if the machine is equipped with printer functions:
If the user's network is in a TCP/IP environment, use the PING function to make sure that the Ethernet PCB has been
installed properly and all network settings have been made properly.
If the user's network is in an IPX/SPX or AppleTalk environment, this check is not needed.
IP address input
Result(OK/NG)
+/- OK
F-2-78
2-22
Chapter 2
You can execute PING using a remote host address, thereby checking the connection to the network.
The term "remote address" refers to the IP address of a PC terminal connected to and operating in a TCP/IP network
environment to which the machine belongs.
1) Inform the system administrator that you will be checking the connection to the network using PING.
2) Check with the system administrator to find out the remote host address.
3) Enter the remote host address you obtained in PING.
4) If the indication is 'OK", the machine is correctly connected to the network.
5) If the indication is 'NG", the machine is not correctly connected to the network. Go through the following
troubleshooting steps:
2-23
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
Go through the following steps only if the machine is connected to the network:
If the connection to the network is not correct, you may suspect the following:
a. poor connection between the network and the Ethernet PCB
b. wrong TCP/IP setting on the machine
c. faulty Ethernet PCB or poorly mounted PCB
d. faulty user network
1) Check to see if the network cable is correctly connected to the Ethernet PCB.
- If the connector is normal, make a check using the PING function and a loopback address or a local host address.
- if not correct, try a check once again using a remote host address.
A loopback address returns before it reaches the network PCB; therefore, executing PING using a loopback address
will enable you to find out whether the TCP/IP settings of the machine are correct.
1) Enter the loopback address (127.0.0.1) to PING.
- if the machine indicates 'NG', check the TCP/IP settings of the machine once again, and then execute PING once
again.
- if the machine indicates 'OK', check the local host address.
The local host address is the IP address of the machine; therefore, executing PING using the local host address, which
returns after it has reached the network PCB, enables you to find out if the network PCB is good or not.
1) Enter the IP address of the machine to PING.
- if the machine indicates 'NG', make the following checks/corrections, and execute PING once again.
a. faulty IP address of the machine: check with the system administrator to find out if the IP address (and its settings)
assigned to the machine is correct.
b. poor connection of the network PC: check the connectors associated with the network PCB.
c. faulty network PCB: replace the network PCB.
- if the machine indicates 'OK', suspect a fault in the user's network environment. Report to the system administrator,
ask for corrective action.
2-24
Chapter 2
Be sure to put back the service book cover; turning on the machine's main power without doing so will cause a fault
associated with error code E020. (The protrusion [A] of the service book cover will push the segment identified as
[B] in the figure when the front cover is closed, thus opening/closing the shutter assembly of the pattern reader unit.)
F-2-79
Place a test sheet on the copyboard glass, and select the cassette 1/2 as the source of paper; then, make copies, and
check the images.
(If a 2-cassette pedestal is used, try cassette 3/4 to check images.)
1) Slide out the manual feed unit and the cassette 1/2; then, open the pickup vertical path cover.
(In the case of a 2-cassette pedestal, cassette 3/4.)
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right front cover [2].
(Do the same also for a 2-cassette pedestal.)
2-25
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
F-2-80
F-2-81
image
L2
2-26
Chapter 2
F-2-83
4) Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the right front stay, and loosen the screw [1] to adjust the position of the
adjusting plate [2].
F-2-84
image
L2
- Check to make sure that the margin (L1) along the leading edge of paper picked from each of the cassettes is 2.5
±1.5 mm; otherwise, make the following adjustments:
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST.
2-27
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
L1
Image
When all work is done, turn the adjuster on the bottom of the pedestal to secure the machine in place.
2-28
Chapter 2
If condensation is expected at the site of installation, enable or disable the sleep mechanism on a monthly basis to
prevent it.
2-29
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
If the machine must be relocated after installation, be sure to perform the following work before relocation:
Do not use the machine's grips when moving it over a step while it is on a pedestal; otherwise, the machine and the
pedestal may separate. Be sure to hold the pedestal.
1) Fix the scanner in place using the scanner fixing screw [1] removed and stored at time of installation.
F-2-87
2) Be sure to put about 10 sheets of paper [1] over the copyboard glass.
[1]
F-2-88
2-30
Chapter 2
Open the shipping box, and check to make sure none of the following is missing.
F-2-89
1) Remove the face cap [1] and 2 screw [2]; then, detach the upper left cover (small) [3].
F-2-90
2) Remove the 3 screws [1] from behind the upper left cover (small), and detach the inside cover [2]; then, attach it
as shown (by changing its orientation).
2-31
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
F-2-91
F-2-92
3)
When attaching, be sure that a card may be inserted with the label on the face side.
Using the 4 included binding screws [1], mount the card reader [2] to the inside cover.
F-2-93
2-32
Chapter 2
4) Secure the grounding wire [1] in place using the included pan-head screw (small) [2]; then, connect the connector
[3] of the card reader to the machine's connector.
F-2-94
5) Attach the upper left cover (small) using the previously removed screw.
6) Turn on the main power switch, and make the following selections in service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD.
Then, enter any number (from 1 to 2000) to serve as the number to identify the first card used by the user.
7) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
1) Check to make sure that IDs (from ID00000001 through ID00001000; i.e., if '1' is entered in
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD in service mode) have been prepareed in user mode (system control
settings>group ID control>count control).
2) Set up the following in user mode (system control settings>network settings>TCP/IP settings>IP address): 'IP
address', 'gateway address', 'subnet mask'.
3)
If you fail to set up 'system control group' and 'system control ID No.', you will not be able to execute 'register card
to device' when setting up NSA.
Enter any number for 'system control group' and 'system control ID No.' in user mode (under 'system administrator
info').
4) Turn off and then on the machine.
2-33
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
Keep the following in mind when installing the controller to its host machine:
1. Be sure that the work complies with the laws and regulations of the country of installation.
2. Be sure that its host machine has properly been installed before starting the work.
3. Be sure to disconnect its host machine's power plug before starting the work.
4. Be sure to identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
5. Be sure to prepare the appropriate settings data on a PC at the service station.
1) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the upper cover [1].
[1] [2]
[2]
F-2-95
2) Connect the connector [3] of the power supply unit to the connector [4] as shown.
[4]
[3]
F-2-96
3) Remove the 6 screws [5], and detach the face plate [3] of the host machine's upper rear cover.
2-34
Chapter 2
F-2-97
4) Connect the cable [7] to the connector (J1511) [8] of the host machine's power distribution PCB.
F-2-98
5) Secure the controller to the host machine's rear cover using the 4 included screws.
[8]
[8]
F-2-99
2-35
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
6) Remove the slack from the cable connecting to the host machine; as necessary, bundle any stray segment of the
cables as shown and secure it in place with a harness band [9].
[9]
F-2-100
7) Shift bit 4 of the DIP switch (SW2) [10] on the PCB to ON (so that the mode used to communicate with the host
machine will be IPC).
[10]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F-2-101
8) If IC6 [11] is found on the PCB, shift bit 7 of the DIP switch (SW2) [12] to ON; otherwise, shift bit 7 of the DIP
switch (SW2) [16] to OFF.
2-36
Chapter 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[12]
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
[11]
CN3 CN2
F-2-102
[13]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F-2-103
T-2-2
2-37
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
10) Connect the power plug of the power supply unit, and check to make sure that LED1 [14] (orange) on the PCB
goes ON.
[14]
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F-2-104
11) Initialize the RAM. Set the bits of the DIP switch (SW2) [15] on the PCB as indicated in the table; then, press
the push switch (SW4) [16] so that LED5 [17] (red) goes ON.
[15]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[17]
LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6
[16] CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F-2-105
2-38
Chapter 2
T-2-3
SW2-2
OFF
SW2-3 ON
SW2-4 ON
SW2-5
OFF
SW2-6
OFF
SW2-8 OFF
12) When LED5 [17] (red) has gone ON, set the bits of the DIP switch (SW2) [15] on the PCB as indicated in the
table, and press the push switch (SW4) [16] so that LED5 [17] (red) goes OFF, indicating the end of RAM
initialization.
[15]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[17]
LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
2
LED4
IC6 [16] CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F-2-106
T-2-4
SW2-2
OFF
SW2-3 OFF
SW2-4 ON
2-39
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
SW2-6
ON
SW2-8 OFF
13) Shift bit 6 of the DIP switch (SW2) [18] on the PCB to OFF.
[18]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F-2-107
14) Connect the telephone line to the controller. If the connection is to the controller alone, connect the modular jack
cable to the connector (LINE) [19]. If the controller's extension function is to be used, connect the existing
telephone or fax to the connector (TEL) [2)] and then connect the telephone line to the connector (LINE) [19].
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
[20] [19]
F-2-108
2-40
Chapter 2
15) Ring the service station for initial settings of the controller. (Upon arrival, LED 4 [21] (red) will start to flash.)
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
[21]
CN3 CN2
F-2-109
16) Ring the service station, and find out if initial settings have been made. If the setup has failed, initialize the RAM
once again (steps 11) through 13)) to start over.
Be sure to check with the service station once again to make sure that the controller settings are correct.
17) Check to make sure that the controller may be used to call up the PC at the service station. Press the push switch
(SW4) [16] on the PCB so that LED6 [22] (red) goes ON. The LED goes OFF when the transmission ends
successfully; otherwise, it will start to flash.
When the push switch (SW4) [16] is pressed while LED6 [22] is flashing, a transmission will be initiated once again.
If the push switch (SW1) [23] is pressed while LED6 [22] is flashing, the ongoing transmission will be cancelled.
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4
[16] 2
IC6 CN4
[22] SW1
[23]
CN3 CN2
F-2-110
18) Check to make sure that the communication with its host machine is normal. Connect the host machine's power
plug, and turn on the power switch; then, check to make sure that LED2 [24] (orange) starts to flash.
[24]
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F-2-111
2-41
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
19) Press the host machine's Start key, and check that LED3 [25] (pink) flashes each time paper is delivered.
[25]
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F-2-112
20) Attach the switch settings label [26] on the top cover, and record the switch settings.
21) Secure the upper cover [1] using 2 screws [2]. When doing so, check to make sure that the power unit cable is
secured to the cable guide inside the controller and is not trapped by the upper cover [1].
[2]
[26]
[1]
[2]
F-2-113
2-42
Chapter 2
Open the shiping box, and check to make sure that none of the fllowing is missing:
F-2-114
1) Fit the 2 included washers [1] and 2 stepped screws [2] to the upper right cover.
F-2-115
2-43
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
2) Separate the original tray into top and lower parts, and hook the cut-off [2] of the reinforcing plate of the original
tray (upper) [1] on the stepped screw [3] previously fitted.
F-2-116
3) Fit it to the original tray (lower) [1] together with the original tray (upper).
F-2-117
2-44
Chapter 2
Open the shipping box, and check to make sure that none of the following is missing:
F-2-118
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the host machine's center delivery tray [2].
F-2-119
2-45
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
F-2-120
3) Slide out the manual feed tray; then, remove tha screw [1], and detach the middle right cover.
F-2-121
4) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the upper right cover [2].
F-2-122
2-46
Chapter 2
5) Fit the plate of the key switch unit [1] into the cut-off of the upper right stay; then, secure it in place using the
included binding screw [2].
F-2-123
F-2-124
7) Attach the upper right cover using the 2 previously removed screws.
8) Attach the printer upper right cover using the 2 right screws.
2-47
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
Be sure to turn off the host machine before starting the work and observe the points to note indicated on the next page.
Open the shipping box, and check none of the following is missing:
F-2-125
T-2-5
[1] Reader heater ... 1 pc. [6] Wire saddle ... 2 pc.
[2] Fuse PCB unit ... 1 pc. [7] Gounding cord (100v ... 1 pc.
model only)
[3] RS tightening screw ... 5 pc. [8] Power supply label ... 1 pc.
(M4x8) (100v model only)
2-48
Chapter 2
ON
/O
FF
1) Remove the copyboard cover. (If an ADF is used, you need not remove it.)
2) Release the 2 cable clamps [1] to free the reader power cable.
[1]
F-2-127
2-49
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
F-2-128
5) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the face plate. (Save it for later.)
F-2-129
6) Using the 2 included screws [1], mount the fuse PCB unit [2].
F-2-130
2-50
Chapter 2
7) Connect the harness [1] of the fuse PCB unit to the connector [2] of the interface PCB.
F-2-131
8)
When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the glass face and the white plate found on the back of
it. (Dirt can cause black lined in the images.)
If soiled, clean it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
F-2-132
2-51
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
F-2-133
Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right glass retainer [2]; then, detach the copyboard glass [3].
F-2-134
9)
When moving the No.1 mirror base, be sure to hold it by the bend [A] of the cut-out in the mirror stay shown in the
figure.
F-2-135
2-52
Chapter 2
F-2-136
F-2-137
When shifting the mirror unit, be sure not to touch the mirror unit. Otherwise, clean it with lint-free papaer moistened
with aocohol.
2-53
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
10) Mount the Reader heater where indicated in the figure. When doing so, be sure that the harness guide of the heater
is above the harness of the fuse PCB.
[2] [1]
F-2-138
11) Using 2 included screws [1], secure the longer segment (silver-coloured) of the Reader heater [2].
F-2-139
12) Holding it where indicated [A], shift the No.1 mirror base to the left.
F-2-140
2-54
Chapter 2
13) Fit the harness guide [1], i.e., fit it in the hole in the base plate, and shift it to the right to secure; then, fit the
harness band [2].
F-2-141
14) Secure the shorter segment (black) of the Reader heater [1] using 2 included screws [2]. (To do so, insert a
screwdriver through the hole in the lens cover.)
F-2-142
15) Connect the connector [1] of the Reader heater to the connector [2] of the fuse PCB unit.
F-2-143
2-55
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
16) Put the No.1 mirror base to its initial position (left edge).
17) Attach the reader unit rear cover.
18)
When removing the copyboard glass, be sure not to touch the glass face or the white plate found on its back. (Dirt
can cause black lines in the images.)
If soiled, clean it with lint-freee paper moistened with alcohol.
F-2-144
F-2-145
2-56
Chapter 2
19) Secure the reader controller communication cable and the reader power supply cable back to their initial
positions.
20) Connect the power cable.
- If a pedestal (2-cassette pedestal or plain pedestal) is connected to the host machine, remove the 2 face stickers [1]
from the upper rear cover.
[1]
F-2-146
Connect the power cable (for wall outlet) [1] and the inlet terminal and the outlet terminal (topmost of the 3) of the
pedestal; then, secure it in place using the 2 included wire saddles.
F-2-147
2-57
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
- If no pedestal (2-cassette pedestal or plain pedestal) is connected to the host machine, connect the power cable (for
wall outlet) [1] to the inlet terminal.
F-2-148
F-2-149
22) Attach the included power supply label [1] to the reader unit rear cover.
F-2-150
2-58
Chapter 2
To install the heater kit, you must obtain a separately available Cassette Heater Unit-24.
Before starting the work, be sure to turn off the host machine; for installation, keep in mind the points to note
indicated on the next page.
Open the shipping box, and check to make sure that none of the following is missing:
F-2-151
T-2-6
[1] Heater PCB unit.....1 pc. [2] RS tightening screw (M4).....2 pc.
F-2-152
T-2-7
2-59
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
Before staritng the work, be sure to perform the following on the host machine in the order indicated:
1. Turn off the control panel power switch.
2. Turn off the main power switch.
3. Disconnect the power cable (for power outlet).
ON
/O
FF
MEMO:
The Cassette Heater Kit-A1 is designed for installation to either a copying machine or a 2-cassette pedestal using the
same installation procedure.
2-60
Chapter 2
F-2-154
3)
MEMO:
When detaching the heater unit PCB cover, slide it upward while pulling the stop [1] mounted to the cover toward
the front.
F-2-155
4)
Before installing the heater PCB unit, be sure to turn off the host machine.
Using the 2 included RS tightening screws [1], mount the heater PCB unit [2], and connect the 2 connectors [3].
2-61
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
F-2-156
5) Connect the included connector of the heater unit with the connector [2] of the heater PCB unit.
F-2-157
6)
When mounting the heater unit, be sure to securely fit the 3 protrusions, and check to make sure there is no gap.
Fit the 3 protrusions [2] of the heater unit [1] into the slits in the base plate; match the holes, and secure it to the
cassette heater unit using the included binding screw [3].
2-62
Chapter 2
F-2-158
F-2-159
7) Mount the heater PCB unit cover using the previously removed screw.
Hereafter, go through the same steps used for the installation to a copier.
2-63
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
1) Take out the drum unit (Y) from its shipping box; then, take out the drum unit (Y) [1] from its packing bag, and
also take out the drying agent [2].
F-2-160
2)
Pull out the releasing hook [1] at the front and the rear.
F-2-161
2-64
Chapter 2
F-2-162
Before starting the work, be sure to perform the following on the host machine in the order indicated:
1. Turn of the control panel power switch.
2. Turn off the main power switch.
3. Pull out the power cable (for wall outlet).
ON
/O
FF
2-65
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
1) Open the copier's front cover, and turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever [1] in the direction of the
arrow.
F-2-164
2) Turn the open/closed lever of the drum unit cover [1] counterclockwise by 90 deg to open the drum unit cover.
F-2-165
3) Match the dent [1] found in the back of the drum unit cover and the protrusion [2] on the bottom face of the
protective cover, and secure it in place.
F-2-166
4)
2-66
Chapter 2
1. Push it in the direction of the arrow [1] indicated on the top edge of the drum unit.
2. After setting the drum unit in place, be sure to store away the protective cover.
Holding the protective cover [2] level, push in the drum unit (Y) [3] to set; the units are Y, M, C, and Bk, starting
from the left.
F-2-167
5)
When pulling out the sealing tape, be sure to hold the drum unit in place so that the drum unit will not slide out.
F-2-168
6) Set the drum units for other colors (M, C, Bk) in the same way.
7) Close the drum unit cover, and shift the open/close lever back to its initial position.
8) Shift the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever back to its initial position.
9) Close the front cover.
2-67
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 2
2-68
Chapter 3 Basic
Operation
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 3
3.1 Construction
3.1.1 Functional Construction 0000-4278
The machine can broadly be divided into the following functional blocks:
[7]
Image
formation system
[8]
[9] [10]
[11]
Pickup/
[12] Side paper
feeder
[13] system deck (option)
2-cassette [14]
pedestal [15]
(option)
F-3-1
T-3-1
3-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 3
The machine's major PCBs are wired as indicated in the following diagram:
Reader unit
[2] J102
J206 J203 J204 J103
J601 J307 J205
[1] [3] [4]
J303
Printer unit
[5]
J511
[6] [7]
J607 J608
J1301
J115 J114
J1209
[9]
J1303
[8]
[10]
J1501,J1502
J102 J1508,J1509
J105
J100 J131 [13]
J814
J75,J92 [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19]
[11]
J90 J95
[12]
J441
J64 J50,J59
J60,J74
J69 J54 J3
[21]
J58
[20]
J158 J5
flat cable.
PCB-to-PCB connector.
F-3-2
T-3-2
3-2
Chapter 3
[10] Main controller PCB (main) [22] DC power supply PCB (1)
The symbol <=> in the diagram indicates major wiring connections, and does NOT indicate the direction of signals.
The major PCBs within the machine's main controller are connected as follows:
J1400 [13]
J1301
[1] J1202
[4] [5]
J1201
[6]
J1203
J1342
[2]
[7]
J1318 J1204
[3] [8]
J1207
[9]
J1205
[10]
J1206 [11]
J1213 J1210
J1513 J1507
[12]
Flat cable/signal.
3-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 3
T-3-3
[5] Image memory (SDRAM-: 512 MB, standard) [12] Power distribution PCB
[6] Image memory (SDRAM: 512 MB, expansion) [13] Differential PCB
The symbol <=> used in the diagram indicates connection between major PCBs, and does NOT indicate the direction
of signals.
3-4
Chapter 3
T-3-4
Period Description
WMUP (warm-up) From when the main power switch is turned on until the surface temperature of
the fixing roller reaches 90 deg C.
SSTBY (scanner standby) From when shading correction ends until the Start key is turned on or the main
power switch is turned off.
WMUPR (warm-up From when the surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 90 deg C until it
rotation) reaches 190 deg C (i.e., the drive system has started up and, in addition, bias
adjustment and image stabilization correction control are under way).
PSTBY (printer standby) From WMUPR ends until the Start key is enabled.
3-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 3
Original lamp
(LA1)
Scanner motor Home position search
(M1)
Starts here if, when the main power is turned
ON, the surface temperature of the fixing roller
is 90˚C or more
Standby (at this time, the surface
temperature of the fixing roller must
Printer unit Main power switch ON have reached 190˚C)
WMUP WMUPR PSTBY
360 sec
Fixing main heater 90˚C
*1
(H1)
Fixing sub heater *1
(H2)
Fixing heat retention
heater (H3)
In the case of a new cartridge,
Development rotates for 30 sec; otherwise,
rotates for 0.3 sec
motor
Drum ITB motor
(M1)
Fixing motor (M24)
3-6
3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations 0000-4281
a. Full-Color
full-color, A4, 2 copies continuous, 100%, cassette 1
T-3-5
Period Description
SSTBY From when shading ends until the Start key is turned ON or the
main power is turned OFF.
SREADY While shading correction is under way after a press on the Start
key.
SCRV While the scanner is returning to the home position after the
original is read (scanner in reverse).
PSTBY (print standby) While the machine is ready to review a print request signal.
PINTR (printer initial rotation) From when a print request signal is received until the image
leading signal is sent.
LSTR (last rotation) From when printing ends until all drive stops.
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 3
Developing bias
Primary charging
roller
Drum ITB motor
(M1)
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette 1 pickup
solenoid (SL3)
Pre-registration
motor (M9)
Registration motor
(M8)
Acceleration, half-speed, constant
speed control (to match transfer
timing and process speed)
*1: The machine executes temperature control using the main heater or the sub heater
according to the difference in the readings of the main thermistor (TH1) and the sub
thermistor (TH2). (control at 190˚C)
F-3-5
b. Monochrome
monochrome, A4, 2 copies continuous, 100%, cassette 1
T-3-6
Period Description
3-8
Chapter 3
Period Description
PSTBY (print standby) While the machine is ready to receive a print request signal.
PSINTR (printer initial rotation) From when a print request signal is received until when the
image leading signal is received.
LSTR (last rotation) From when printing ends until al drive stops.
Image formation
Start key ON ready timing Used to stabilize rotation
Printer unit (2.5 sec)
PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY
Laser scanner
motor (Bk) (M5)
ITOP signal
Laser ON
Toner container
motor (Bk) (M23)
Development
motor (Bk) (M15)
Developing bias
Primary charging
roller
Drum ITB
motor (M1)
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette 1 pickup
solenoid (SL3)
Pre-registration
motor (M9)
Registration
motor (M8)
Acceleration, half-speed, and
constant speed control (to match
transfer timing and process speed)
F-3-6
3-9
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 3
3-10
Chapter 4 Basic
Operations (As a
Printer)
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 4
4.1 Construction
4.1.1 Functional Construction 0000-4447
The machine can roughly be divided into the following functional blocks:
[7]
Image
formation system
[8]
[9] [10] [11]
[12]
Pickup/
[13] Side paper
feeder
[14] system deck (option)
2-cassette [15]
pedestal [16]
(option)
F-4-1
T-4-1
4-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 4
Printer unit
[1]
J511
[2] [3]
J607 J608
J1301
J115 J114
J1209
[5]
J1303
[4]
[6]
J1501,J1502
J102 J1508,J1509
J105
J100 J131 [9]
J814
J75,J92 [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
[7]
J90 J95
[8]
J441
J64 J50,J59
J60,J74
J69 J54 J3
[17]
J58
[16]
J158 J5
flat cable.
PCB-to-PCB connector.
F-4-2
T-4-2
4-2
Chapter 4
The arrow used in the diagram indicates connection of PCBs, and does NOT indicate the direction of signals.
The major PCBs of the machine's main controller are connected as follows:
J1400 [13]
J1301
[1] J1202
[4] [5]
J1201
[6]
J1203
J1342
[2]
[7]
J1318 J1204
[3] [8]
J1207
[9]
J1205
[10]
J1206 [11]
J1213 J1210
J1513 J1507
[12]
F-4-3
T-4-3
4-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 4
The arrow used in the diagram indicates connection of PCBs, and does NOT indicate the direction of signals.
IC1019 IC1016
ATR sensor Bk C M Y
control signal BAT IC1018 IC1017
(0 to 12V)
IC1
J100
F-4-4
4-4
Chapter 4
T-4-4
Period Description
WMUP (warm-up) While the drive system is at rest and, in addition, until the
surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 90 deg C.
WMUPR (warm-up rotation) After the drive system starts up and, in addition, bias
adjustment is under way.
PSTBY (printer standby) While the machine is ready for a copy/print request signal.
4-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 4
Original lamp
(LA1)
Scanner motor Home position search
(M1)
Starts here if, when the main power is turned
ON, the surface temperature of the fixing roller
is 90˚C or more
Standby (at this time, the surface
temperature of the fixing roller must
Printer unit Main power switch ON have reached 190˚C)
WMUP WMUPR PSTBY
360 sec
Fixing main heater 90˚C
*1
(H1)
Fixing sub heater *1
(H2)
Fixing heat retention
heater (H3)
In the case of a new cartridge,
Development rotates for 30 sec; otherwise,
rotates for 0.3 sec
motor
Drum ITB motor
(M1)
Fixing motor (M24)
4-6
Chapter 4
a. Full-Color
full-color, A4, 2 copies continuous, 100%, cassette 1
T-4-5
Period Description
PINTR (printer initial rotation) From when a print request signal is received until an
image signal is sent.
ITOP signal
Laser ON
Toner container motor
(M20 to 23) (Y,M,C,Bk)
Developing motor
(M12 to 15) (Y,M,C,Bk)
Developing bias
Primary charging
roller
Drum ITB motor
(M1)
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette 1 pickup
solenoid (SL3)
Pre-registration
motor (M9)
Registration
motor (M8)
Acceleration, half-speed, constant
speed control (to match transfer
timing and process speed)
*1: The machine executes temperature control using the main heater or the sub
heater according to the difference in the readings of temperature between
the main thermistor (TH1) and the sub thermistor (TH2). (controlled to 190˚C)
F-4-6
4-7
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 4
b. Monochrome
monochrome, A4, 2 copies continuous, 100%, cassette 1
T-4-6
Period Description
PINTR (printer initial rotation) From when a print request signal is received until the
image signal is sent.
PRINT Until all toner is transferred to the paper and the paper
is delivered.
*1: The machine uses the main heater or the sub heater for temperature control
according to the difference in the readings of temperature between the main
thermistor (TH1) and the sub thermistor (TH2). (controlled to 90˚C)
F-4-7
4-8
Chapter 5 Main
Controller
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
5.7.2.8 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (sub) .............................................................................. 5-30
5.7.3 SRAM PCB .............................................................................................................................................. 5-31
5.7.3.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................................................................................................... 5-31
5.7.3.2 Removing the Controller Box Cover ................................................................................................. 5-31
5.7.3.3 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 5-31
5.7.3.4 Removing the SRAM PCB ................................................................................................................ 5-31
5.7.3.5 When Replacing the SRAM PCB ...................................................................................................... 5-31
5.7.4 UFR Board ................................................................................................................................................ 5-32
5.7.4.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................................................................................................... 5-32
5.7.4.2 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ............................................................................................... 5-32
5.7.4.3 Removing the Controller Box Cover ................................................................................................. 5-32
5.7.4.4 Removing the UFR Board ................................................................................................................. 5-32
5.7.5 Ethernet Board .......................................................................................................................................... 5-33
5.7.5.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................................................................................................... 5-33
5.7.5.2 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ............................................................................................... 5-33
5.7.5.3 Removing the Controller Box Cover ................................................................................................. 5-33
5.7.5.4 Removing the Ethernet Board ............................................................................................................ 5-33
5.7.6 Differential PCB ....................................................................................................................................... 5-34
5.7.6.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................................................................................................... 5-34
5.7.6.2 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover ............................................................................................... 5-34
5.7.6.3 Removing the Controller Box Cover ................................................................................................. 5-34
5.7.6.4 Removing the Differential PCB ......................................................................................................... 5-34
5.7.7 Power Distribution PCB ........................................................................................................................... 5-35
5.7.7.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................................................................................................... 5-35
5.7.7.2 Removing the Power Distribution PCB ............................................................................................. 5-35
5.7.8 HDD .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-35
5.7.8.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................................................................................................... 5-35
5.7.8.2 Removing the Controller Box Cover ................................................................................................. 5-35
5.7.8.3 Removing the HDD ........................................................................................................................... 5-35
5.7.8.4 When Replacing the HDD ................................................................................................................. 5-36
5.7.9 Controller Fan ........................................................................................................................................... 5-37
5.7.9.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ....................................................................................................... 5-37
5.7.9.2 Removing the Controller Box Cover ................................................................................................. 5-37
5.7.9.3 Removing the Controller Fan ............................................................................................................ 5-37
Chapter 5
5.1 Construction
5.1.1 Outline 0006-8424
The major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the main controller are as follows:
J1202
J1201
Flash ROM
(for boot program)
IC1003
LSI Ethernet board connector
LSI
slot (for support of
IC1012
IC1015 10BASE-T/100BASE-Tx)
J1203
IC1018
J1204
IC10
IC15
F-5-2
5-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
The machine may be broadly divided into the following functional blocks (main controller indicated with shading):
Reader unit
Boot ROM
DC controller PCB
Main controller
SRAM board
PCB (sub)
Main controller
PCB (main)
Accessory
boards
HDD
Printer unit
• system control
• memory control
• printer output image processing
F-5-3
5-2
Chapter 5
The major mechanisms of the main controller PCB are controlled by the CPU on the main controller PCB.
To save on physical space, the machineís main controller PCB is divided into two: main and sub.
The sub PCB serves to process input images coming from the reader unit, while the main PCB serves to control jobs,
output images going to the printer, and memory.
T-5-1
IC No. Description
network controller
ROM/RAM controller
IC1003, 1018 image processing control of output image data to printer unit
T-5-2
IC No. Description
IC10 image processing control of input image data from reader unit
5-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
T-5-3
Description
The hard disk is divided into 9 partitions (blocks for storage of specific type of data), with each partition possessing
its own functions:
T-5-4
Partition Description
5-4
Chapter 5
DOSDEV
FSTDEV
HDD DOSDEV2
FSTPDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
BOOTDEV
DOSDEV5
F-5-4
T-5-5
5-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
RCON
Reader controller PCB
G3Fax board
G3FAX HDD
BOOT
SYSTEM
Language
RUI
BOOTDEV
BOOTDEV
Main controller PCB
F-5-5
5-6
Chapter 5
The system control software used to control the machine is stored on the HDD. At time of startup, the CPU on the
controller PCB follows the boot program to read the system software from the HDD to the Image Memory (SDRAM)
on the controller PCB.
While the CPU reads the system software from the HDD to the Image Memory (SDRAM), the control panel shows
the following screen, and the startup sequence under way is indicated by the progress bar on the screen.
Progress bar
F-5-6
Never turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated. The HDD is being accessed during the period, and
turning off the power can cause a fault (E602) on the HDD.
5-7
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
When all the foregoing ends normally, the machine becomes ready to accept jobs. (The operation screen will appear
on the control panel, and the LED on the Start key changes from red to green.)
System Image
area area
CPU
HDD
BootROM
System Image
area area
Systems
CPU software
BootROM
5-8
Chapter 5
In the even that the machine suffers a fault associated with E602-xxyy, different actions are required depending on
the detail code:
If the machine indicates E602-xxyy, be sure to turn it off and then on once (so that it will execute automatic
recovery sequence).
T-5-6
xx Partition yy Description
Action:
Turn off the main power. Check the 2 types of cable
(power, IDE) coming from the HDD; then, turn the
power back on.
At this time, check to see that the HDD is rotating and
it is supplied with power.
NG
F D
06 The machine cannot find the system software for the main
controller (sub) CPU in BOOTDEV.
Action:
NG
B F
Action:
NG NG
H E F
5-9
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
T-5-7
xx Partition yy Description
05 DOSDEV3
- if xxyy = 0701, 0702
06 PDLDEV
07 DOSDEV4 Action:
08 BOOTDEV Ask the user to collect address book data,
09 DOSDEV5 transfer settings, and user mode data using RUI
FF not before starting the work.
identified A
NG
C
NG
F
Action:
NG NG
A E F
Action:
NG
B F
- xxyy = 0702
Action:
Ask the user to collect address book data,
transfer settings, and user mode data using RUI
before starting the work.
NG
C F
Action:
NG
B F
Action:
Turn off the main power. Check the 2 types of
cable (power, IDE) coming from the HDD;
then, turn the power back on.
At that time, check to see that the HDD rotates
and it is supplied with power.
NG NG
E F D
5-10
Chapter 5
xx Partition yy Description
Action:
Turn off the main power. Check the 2 types of
cable (power, IDE) coming from the HDD;
then, turn the power back on.
At that time, check to see that the HDD rotates
and it is supplied with power.
NG
F D
Action:
NG NG
A G F
Action:
NG NG
A C F
Action:
NG NG
A E F
Action:
NG
B F
A:
1) Set '0' to the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE.
2) Execute the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CHECK*. (Make these selections, and press the
OK key.)
3) Turn off and then on the main power.
B:
1) By referring to the table "HDD Format," fill 'CHK-TYPE' under the following:
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE.
2) Execute the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CLEAR. (Make these selections, and press the OK key.)
3) Turn off and then on the main power.
C:
1) ** Start up in normal mode (i.e., turn on the main power while holding down the 1 and 7 keys); then, make the
following selections, and press the OK key: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD.
2) Execute DOSDEV4 (formatting) using the SST.
3) Turn off and then on the main power.
5-11
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
D:
1) Replace the main controller (main) board.
2) Mount the image memory (SDRAM) and the boot ROM (removed from the previous board) to the new board.
E:
1) ** Start up in save mode (i.e., turn on the main power while holding down the 2 and 8 keys.)
2) Execute HDD formatting using the SST (ALL); then, download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
3) Turn off and then on the main power.
F:
1) ** Replace the HDD, and start up in safe mode (i.e., turn on the main power while holding down on the 2 and 8
keys).
2) Using the SST, format the HDD (ALL) and download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
3) Turn off and then on the main power.
G:
1) Set '1' to the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE.
2) Execute the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CLEAR. (Make these selections, and press the OK
key.)
3) Turn off and then on the main power.
H:
1) Turn off the main power, and turn on the main power while pressing the 1 and 9 keys. (In response, the machine
will automatically start its recovery program*, and the control panel will turn completely black.)
2) When the screen has turned white, turn off and then on the main power.
T-5-8
- HDD Format
Partition CHK- Data items that will be lost
TYPE
DOSDEV2
FSTPDEV
5-12
Chapter 5
- HDD Format
Partition CHK- Data items that will be lost
TYPE
DOSDEV5 5 -
unselected 0 -
5-13
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
The following diagram shows the flow of images in relation to the machine's various functions:
Other iR machine
Original
A • SEND
Copy Scan • FAX
• PullScan
• E-Mail
A A BOX
PC
F-5-9
5-14
Chapter 5
The machine's major image processing is undertaken by the main controller; the construction of the modules
involved in image processing is as follows:
Reader unit
IC10
DC controller PCB
Main controller
PCB (sub)
C,M IC1003
IC1015 IC1012
Y,Bk IC1018
Main controller
PCB (main)
F-5-10
5-15
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
The image data read by the reader unit (RGB data) is processed by the main controller PCB (sub).
Reader unit
RGB 24
Main controller PCB (sub)
Input direct
mapping
ACS
identification
• Framing
• Blanking
• Frame erasing
RGB
IC1015
5-16
Chapter 5
Reader unit
RGB 24
Main controller
Main controller PCB (sub) PCB (main)
Resolution conversion
Enlargement/reduction JPEG decompression
PC
Rotation
IC1012
Color conversion
IC1003 IC1018
C,M Y,Bk
HDD
F-5-12
5-17
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
In this block, the machine processes image data coming from IC1015 for output to the printer.
Reader unit
RGB 24
Smoothing
C,M • Framing
• Blanking
To DC controller PCB
Y,Bk
5-18
Chapter 5
The following shows the flow of image data when copier functions are used:
Reader unit
RGB 24
Main controller
PCB (sub)
SDRAM
HDD
F-5-14
5-19
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
The following shows the flow of image data when Box functions are used:
Reader unit
RGB 24
Main controller
PCB (sub)
SDRAM
HDD
F-5-15
5-20
Chapter 5
The following shows the flow of image data for SEND functions:
Reader unit
RGB 24
Main controller
PCB (sub)
HDD
SDRAM
Ethernet board
F-5-16
5-21
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
The following is the flow of image data for fax transmission functions:
Reader unit
RGB 24
Main controller
PCB (sub)
MMR Binary
compression processing
HDD
SDRAM
Fax board
F-5-17
5-22
Chapter 5
The following is the flow of image data for fax reception functions:
DC controller PCB
Resolution
conversion
Rotation
HDD
SDRAM
Fax board
F-5-18
5-23
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
Reader unit
Printer unit
Main controller
Main controller PCB (main)
PCB (sub)
SDRAM
DC controller PCB
IC1015
JPEG
IC1003
IC1012
decompression
IC1018 HDD
JPEG compression
RGB
CMYK UFR board
CMYK
RGB
PS Printer Server
Unit-C1
Display list data
processing block
LIPS GDI-UFR
PS data
PC
PS
F-5-19
5-24
Chapter 5
Procedure
5.7.1 Main Controller PCB (main)
Controller PCB Cover 0000-4309 1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power
distribution PCB, and free the harness from the
1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC
wire saddle [2]; then, remove the 6 screws [3], and
controller PCB cover [2].
detach the main controller cover [4].
F-5-20
5-25
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
1) Remove the 4 screws [1] and the flat cable [2], and
disconnect the connector [3]; then, detach the HDD
[4].
F-5-25
F-5-23
F-5-26
F-5-24
5-26
Chapter 5
F-5-29
F-5-30
F-5-31
5-27
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
F-5-34
F-5-32
F-5-35
Be sure to use the image memory (SDRAM) [1] PCB 1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power
and the boot ROM [2] from the old PCB on the new distribution PCB, and free the harness from the
main controller PCB (main). wire saddle [2]; then, remove the 6 screws [3], and
detach the main controller cover [4].
5-28
Chapter 5
F-5-38
F-5-36
1) Remove the 4 screws [1] and the flat cable [2], and
disconnect the connector [3]; then, detach the HDD
[4].
F-5-37
5-29
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
F-5-41
F-5-42
F-5-40
5-30
Chapter 5
F-5-45
F-5-43
5-31
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
5-32
Chapter 5
F-5-48
F-5-50
5-33
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
F-5-51
5-34
Chapter 5
5.7.8 HDD
F-5-56
1) Remove the 4 screws [1] and the flat cable [2], and
disconnect the connector [3]; then, detach the HDD
[4].
5-35
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
5-36
Chapter 5
5.7.9.1 Removing the Upper 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4
Rear Cover 0000-8501 screws [2]; then, detach the controller fan [3].
F-5-59
F-5-58
5-37
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 5
5-38
Chapter 6 Original
Exposure System
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
6.1 Construction
6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0006-0654
The major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the original exposure system are as follows:
T-6-1
Item Description
Reading resolution 600 dpi (main scanning) x 600 dpi (sub scanning)
Scanner drive control No. 1/No. 2 mirror mount (control by a pulse motor M1)
T-6-2
6-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 6
Scanner motor
Scanner HP sensor
Reader controller PCB
Interface PCB
CCD unit
Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
Fuse PCB
Inverter PCB
Anti-condensation heater
Available as option only for Original size sensor
100/230V model (Inch)
Original size sensor
(AB, Inch)
Scanning lamp (LA1)
F-6-1
Copyboard glass
No. 1 mirror base (w/ integrated white plate)
6-2
Chapter 6
Light-blocking plate
Scanning
Scanner HP
lamp (LA1)
sensor (PS2)
(forward)
(reverse)
Light-blocking plate
Scanning
Scanner HP
lamp (LA1)
sensor (SR2)
(forward)
(reverse)
6-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 6
J6
01
J6
02
Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
Scanning lamp
Scanner HP sensor activation control
Inverter PCB
Scanning lamp (LA1)
F-6-5
Scanner motor
Storage of firmware
(flash ROM)
Printer unit DF
Not used
CCD unit
F-6-6
6-4
Chapter 6
Original size
HP sensor
Image Original size
Start Shading leading detection
HP position position edge position
6-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 6
HP sensor
6-6
Chapter 6
The following shows the parts associated with the scanner drive system:
[1]
Reader
controller Interface
PCB PCB [2]
Scanner motor (M1)
[3]
Light-blocking
plate Scanning lamp
(LA1)
(forward)
6-7
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 6
The following shows the construction of the control system of the scanner motor; the motor driver operates in
response to signals from the CPU to turn on/off the scanner motor or to control the direction/speed of its rotation.
Start
position Image leading edge Image trailing edge Stop
Travel
speed
Travel distance
[1] Acceleration area: accelerates to a speed suited to black-and-white/SEND
mode or full-color mode
[2] Approach speed area: allows a margin of acceleration (approach run) to ensure
stable speed
[3] Reading image area: reads images at specific speed (if black-and-white/SEND
mode, twice as fast as in full-color mode)
[4] Deceleration area: decelerates after the image trailing edge for a stop
F-6-13
MEMO:
The scanner is moved at the following speed to suit the selected mode:
- in full-color copy mode, 117 mm/sec.
- in black-and-white copy/black-and-white SEND mode, 234 mm/sec
- full-color SEND mode, 234 mm/sec (300 dpi or less);
117 mm/sec (more than 300 dpi)
6-8
Chapter 6
6.3.2 Enlargement/Reduction
MEMO:
- The speed of scanning is 234 mm/sec in black-and-white copy or black-and-white SEND mode (reduction by 50%);
to make up for the difference, the reading speed of the CCD is doubled, ultimately resulting in a 100%
reproduction ratio.
- The same is true of a resolution of 300 dpi or less in full-color SEND mode.
In copyboard cover mode and ADF mode, reading in main scanning direction is at 100% at all times, and the
reproduction ratio is changed through data processing in the main controller.
In copyboard cover mode and ADF mode, reading in sub scanning direction is at 100% at all times, and the
reproduction ratio is changed through data processing in the main controller.
The items of control related to the scanning lamp and the construction of its control system are as follows:
1) turning on/off the lamp
2) checking for a fault
F-6-14
6-9
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 6
The machine's scanning lamp is a xenon lamp made up of a glass tube in which xenon gas is sealed. On the outside
of the tube are 2 terminals laid in parallel in axial direction, while the inner side of the tube is coated with fluorescent
material. When a high frequency, high voltage is applied to the terminals, the gas starts to discharge, thus causing
the fluorescent material to emit light.
Electrode Electrode
Glass tube
Electrode Electrode
F-6-15
The scanning lamp is turned on/off by the drive signal (LAMP_ON) sent by the CPU on the reader controller PCB.
When the signal is sent, the inverter PCB generates high-frequency, high voltage in the activation control circuit
using the drive voltage (+24 V) supplied by the reader controller PCB for the activation of the xenon lamp.
At time of initial activation (e.g., shading correction), the lamp is checked for a fault (low intensity, activation failure;
i.e., activation error caused by lack of intensity).
The machine identifies the size of originals with reference to the combinations of the outputs of reflection type
sensors and the intensities of the CCD measured at specific points.
- in main scanning direction, of CCD (for AB, 4 points; for Inch, 2 points)
- in sub scanning direction, of reflection type photosensor (for AB, 1 point; for Inch, 2 points)
The machine identifies the size of an original using the following steps:
1. Search for External Light (main scanning direction only)
With the scanning lamp OFF, the level of the CCD at each point of detection is measured.
2. Detection of the Sensor Output Level
The scanning lamp is turned on, and the CCD level at each point of detecting in main scanning direction is
measured.
In addition, the LED of the reflection type photosensor in sub scanning direction is turned on to measure the output
of the sensor.
6-10
Chapter 6
The combination of these outputs is used to identify the size of the original.
For specific operation, see the pages that follow.
For main scanning direction, the No. 1 mirror base is moved to the following positions to measure the intensity of
light at each point of detection. For sub scanning direction, the outputs of the sensors mounted at the following points
are used.
AB-configuration Inch-configuration
Original detection
position1 B5R
Original detection
position2 A4R Original detection
position 1 LTRR LGL
Original detection
position3 B5 B4
Original detection 279.4×431.8mm
Original detection A4 A3
position4 position 2 LTR (11"×17")
T-6-3
6-11
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 6
original OFF
sensor:
6-12
Chapter 6
AB-configuration Inch-configuration
Original CCD detection position Original Original CCD detection Original Original
position
size 1 2 3 4 sensor 1 size 1 2 sensor 1 sensor 2
A3 11" X 17"
B4 LGL
A4R LTRR
A4 LTR
B5 None
B5R
None :change absent : change present
F-6-17
6-13
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 6
F-6-20
820686679349
F-6-21
F-6-18
6-14
Chapter 6
F-6-23
Points to Note When Removing the Copyboard
Glass
When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to
3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right glass
touch the surface of the glass or the white plate behind
retainer [2]; then, detach the copyboard glass [3].
it.
(The presence of dirt will cause lines in the images.)
If dirt is found, be sure to remove it using lint-free
paper moistened with alcohol.
F-6-24
6-15
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 6
F-6-25
F-6-26
F-6-29
F-6-27
6-16
Chapter 6
F-6-31
Points to Note When Removing the Copyboard
Glass
When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to
3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the right glass
touch the surface of the glass or the white plate behind
retainer [2]; then, detach the copyboard glass [3].
it.
(The presence of dirt will cause lines in the images.)
If dirt is found, be sure to remove it using lint-free
paper moistened with alcohol.
F-6-32
F-6-30
F-6-33
6-17
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 6
T-6-4
SW-1 SW-2
AB OFF OFF
A ON OFF
A/INCH OFF ON
AB/INCH ON ON
6-18
Chapter 6
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CL-R-GB
Use it to enter a color displacement correction value
for sub scanning direction.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>BW-R-RG
Use it to enter a color displacement correction value
for sub scanning direction.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>BW-R-GB
Use it to enter a color displacement correction value
for sub scanning direction.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG
Use it to enter a color displacement correction value
for sub scanning direction.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-GB
Use it to enter a color displacement correction value
for sub scanning direction.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>FCCDU-RG
Use it to enter a color displacement correction value
for sub scanning direction.
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>FCCDU-GB
Use it to enter a color displacement correction value
F-6-37
for sub scanning direction.
F-6-38
Points to Note When Removing the Copyboard
Glass
When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to
touch the surface of the glass or the white plate behind
it.
(The presence of dirt will cause lines in the images.)
If dirt is found, be sure to remove it using lint-free
paper moistened with alcohol.
6-19
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 6
F-6-41
1) Remove the 2 cable clamps [1] to free the reader Points to Note Before Removing the Interface PCB
power cable. Without detaching the motor unit, mark its position of
the rear side plate using a scriber [A].
[1]
F-6-40
6-20
Chapter 6
F-6-44
F-6-46
F-6-45
6-21
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 6
F-6-47
F-6-50
6.4.5.2 Removing the CCD Points to Note When Removing the Copyboard
Unit Cover 0000-8288 Glass
1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the CCD unit When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to
cover [2]. touch the surface of the glass or the white plate behind
it.
(The presence of dirt will cause lines in the images.)
If dirt is found, be sure to remove it using lint-free
paper moistened with alcohol.
F-6-49
6-22
Chapter 6
F-6-53
F-6-51
F-6-54
6-23
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 6
F-6-55
[1]
F-6-56
6-24
Chapter 6
F-6-59
F-6-61
F-6-60
6-25
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 6
F-6-63
F-6-66
F-6-64
F-6-67
F-6-65
6-26
Chapter 6
F-6-68
F-6-69
F-6-70
6-27
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 6
F-6-73 F-6-75
[1]
F-6-74
6-28
Chapter 6
F-6-79
F-6-77
F-6-80
F-6-81
6-29
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 6
F-6-82
6-30
Chapter 6
F-6-85 F-6-87
F-6-88
F-6-86
6-31
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 6
F-6-91
F-6-89 [1]
F-6-92
F-6-90
F-6-93
6-32
Chapter 6
F-6-94
F-6-95
F-6-98
6-33
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 6
6-34
Chapter 7 Image
Processing System
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 7
7.1 Outline
7.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0000-4434
The machine's image processing system has the following specifications and functions:
T-7-1
number of pixels:7350
size of pixel:9.3X9.3 um
CCD
Reader controller PCB
Analog A/D
image conversion Controller block
processing Shading processing
CCD/AP PCB
F-7-1
The PCBs of the image processing system have the following functions:
T-7-2
7-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 7
The machine uses the CCD/AP PCB to perform analog image processing for each RGB line; the major operations
involved are as follows:
T-7-3
1
CCD drive
)
2
CCD output gain correction, offset correction
)
3
CCD output A/D conversion
)
J102 J205
CCD/AP PCB
F-7-2
7-2
Chapter 7
The CCD sensor used in the machine is a 3-line (RGB, 1 line each) linear image sensor consisting of photocells of
7350 pixels. The signals photo-converted by the light-receiving block are sent out as analog signals of 2 channels
(even-numbered pixels EVEN and odd-numbered pixels ODD).
Output buffer
Shift register Odd-numbered data
Gate
Light-receiving block
6 5 4 3 2 1
(photodiode)
Gate
shift register Even-numbered data
Output buffer
F-7-3
The analog video signals from the CCD are modified so that the rate of its amplitude is of a specific level (gain
correction); it is also modified so that its output voltage in the absence of incident light is a specific level (offset
correction).
The odd-numbered and even-numbered analog video signals after correction are further converted into 10-bit digital
signals corresponding to the levels of the pixel voltages by the A/D converter.
7-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 7
The machine uses the reader controller PCB for digital image processing; the major operations involved are as
follows:
1. Shading Correction
F-7-4
The output of the CCD is not necessarily uniform even when the density of the original is even for the following
factors:
1. variation in sensitivity among pixels of the CCD
2. difference in transmission between the middle and the edge of the lens
3. difference in the intensity of light between the middle and the edges of the scanning lamp
4. deterioration of the scanning lamp
The machine executes shading correction so as to even out the discrepancies in CCD output. Shading correction may
be shading adjustment, in which a target value is determined in service mode, or shading correction, in which a target
value is determined for each scan of the original.
Shading Adjustment
In shading adjustment, the density of the standard white plate is measured, and the result is stored in memory as
density data; the data is then computed to obtain the target value for shading correction.
Shading Correction
Shading correction is executed for each scan of the original. The density of the standard white plate is measured, and
the shading correction circuit compares the result against the target value stored in memory in advance; the result of
comparison is then used as the shading correction value to make up for the discrepancies among CCD pixels
occurring at time of scans, thus ensuring uniform image density.
7-4
Chapter 7
Characteristics
Target value
before correction
Measurement
taken
White
Density of original
Standard white plate
F-7-5
7-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 7
7-6
Chapter 8 Laser Exposure
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 8
8.1 Construction
8.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0000-4452
T-8-1
Laser light
Output 5 mW
T-8-2
Scanner motor
T-8-3
Polygon mirror
T-8-4
Control mechanisms
PWM control
8-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 8
T-8-5
Name Description
Corrective lens corrects displacement of laser light coming from the guide
mirror in main scanning direction.
Guide mirror
Polygon mirror
Laser driver
Corrective lens
(front)
Displacement
correction motor
(rear)
Photosensitive drum
F-8-1
8-2
Chapter 8
BD detection PCB
BD mirror
F-8-2
PWM
signal ON/OFF
control
Main
APC Main scanning direction
control scanning
sync control
direction
correction
J114(Y)/J116(M)/ control
J118(C)/J120(Bk) J117
J117
J115
J1216
IC for
J113
PWMIC
control
Image data
PWM
control
DC controller PCB Main controller PCB
J129
F-8-3
8-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 8
The laser scanner motor starts to rotate when the Start key is pressed (or the print request signal is issued). When its
rotation has stabilized, the printer unit becomes ready for formation of images, causing the printer side to generate
the sync signal (PTOP).
The machine uses the signal to generate the sub scanning direction signals (Y-TOP, M-TOP, C-TOP, K-TOP) for
individual colors, and turns on the lasers of the corresponding colors.
Used to stabilize
Polygon motor rotation(3.5sec)
(Y,M,C,Bk)
PTOP signal
Y-TOP signal
Laser Y ON
M-TOP signal
Laser M ON
C-TOP signal
Laser C ON
Bk-TOP signal
Laser Bk ON
F-8-4
8-4
Chapter 8
The laser light is turned on/off in keeping with combinations of control signals (TRL0/1/2) from the DC controller
PCB.
T-8-6
0 0 0 OFF OFF
0 1 1 OFF OFF
(bias current applied) (bias current applied)
1 0 0 ON ON
(for factory adjustment) (for factory adjustment)
1 0 1 OFF ON
(bias current applied) (for factory adjustment)
1 1 0 ON OFF
(for factory adjustment) (bias current applied)
1 1 1 ON ON
(for image formation) (for image formation)
8-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 8
Y-CRL-0
Y-CRL-1
Y-CRL-2
J114
for M: J116
for C: J118
for Bk: J120
DC controller PCB
F-8-5
PTOP signal
Y-TOP signal
Laser ON
For laser A
BD detection, APC control ON
For laser B
BD detection, APC control ON
F-8-6
8-6
Chapter 8
- The machine is equipped with a laser unit that can generate 2 channels of laser light (A and B).
- These 2 channels of laser light are based on separate BD signals.
BD signal
J115
A/B
separation
BD for
laser A
BD for
laser B
DC controller PCB
F-8-7
8-7
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 8
BD detection PCB
BD detection signal
The BD signal is separated
into 2 channels for laser A
and laser B.
Clock signals/
sync signals J115
based on the DC controller PCB
BD signal are
generated.
PWMIC A/B
separation
A
B
FIFO
Image signal for laser A
F-8-8
- The synchronization in sub scanning direction is controlled with reference to the PTOP signal (image formation
start signal).
- When the mechanism becomes ready for image formation, the PTOP signal (image formation start signal) is
generated, turning on the individual lasers based on the signal.
8-8
Chapter 8
PTOP signal
Y-TOP signal
Laser Y ON
M-TOP signal
Laser M ON
C-TOP signal
Laser C signal
Bk-TOP signal
Laser Bk ON
F-8-9
The machine uses the photodiode mounted on the laser driver PCB to monitor the intensify of laser light so as to
ensure that it remains at a specific level.
- A single pixel is divided into 32, and a 16-level activation pattern is selected to suit the image data in question.
Pixels
Lowest intensity 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ON
16 levels of
intensity 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ON
Highest intensity 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ON
F-8-10
8-9
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 8
The machine uses the acceleration/deceleration signal to control the speed of rotation of the laser scanner motor so
that the BD signal from individual laser units will be of the same phase as the reference signal (if the BD signal is
behind the reference signal, accelerate; if ahead, decelerates).
Deceleration signal
Acceleration signal
BD signal
J117 J115
IC for
control
Reference
signal
DC controller PCB
F-8-11
The laser light is turned off whenever a cover (indicated) that can let laser light to escape is opened:
- front cover
- manual feed unit
- fixing feeder unit
If any of the covers (units) is opened, the operation voltage applied to the latest driver is turned off and, in addition,
the laser control signal/image signal is also turned off.
8-10
Chapter 8
DC5V
Control signal
DC power
Image signal
supply unit
Front cover
open/closed sensor
PWMIC Control IC
PS23
J129
PS28
J127
F-8-12
8-11
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 8
• Forms an image position correction pattern on the transfer belt (direct transfer).
• Reads the individual pattern (of different colors) using the pattern reader
photo sensors.
Photosensor
LED
Bk
C
M Reader for individual
Y color patterns
Bk
C
M
Y
F-8-14
8-12
Chapter 8
power mode
- 2 hr after the machine has been left alone in standby state
- during quick correction (auto gradation correction)
- after sheet-to-sheet auto correction when 300 sheets (small-size, equivalent in single-sided) have been fed
continuously
- during last rotation auto correction at time of counter increments occurring after intermittent jobs of 300 pages
(small-size, equivalent of single-sided)
- in response to changes in the environment
- when replacing the toner cartridge
The Y pattern is used as the reference. The machine identifies the degree of color displacement in sub scanning
direction with reference to the timing at which other color patterns are checked after a check on the Y pattern.
If the timing is not correct, the machine corrects the laser write start timing in sub scanning direction.
For C
For Bk
rear
For C
For Bk
Displacement in sub
scanning direction
F-8-16
8-13
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 8
The Bk pattern is used as the reference. The machine identifies the angle in main scanning direction with reference
to front/rear discrepancies of individual colors.
rear
Displacement
front
F-8-17
Angle
F-8-18
If the machine detects any angle, it turns on the main scanning direction angle correction motor located inside the
laser unit.
8-14
Chapter 8
Main scanning
direction correction
motor
F-8-19
8-15
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 8
The Bk pattern is used as the reference. The machine compares the length of the center line of the Bk image position
correction pattern (front) and the length of the center line of the image position correction pattern (front) of individual
colors, and identifies the difference between the two as the degree of color displacement in main scanning direction.
When the machine detects color displacement, it corrects the timing at which the laser is started in main scanning
direction.
Displacement in main
scanning direction
F-8-20
Bk C M Y
F-8-21
8-16
Chapter 8
The Bk pattern is used as the reference. The machine copies the center line of the Bk image correction pattern (rear)
and the center line of the individual image position correction patterns (rear), and identifies the difference between
the two as the change in the reproduction ratio in main scanning direction.
When the machine detects any change, it corrects the timing at which the video signals are transferred to the laser
unit.
(rear)
Bk C M Y
F-8-22
8-17
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 8
PWMIC
Frequency
control block
The machine changes the
frequency of the image clock
to change the reproduction DC controller PCB
ratio in main scanning direction.
F-8-23
8-18
Chapter 8
3) Remove the face cap [1] and the screw [2]; then,
while lifting the rear reader unit [3] slightly, detach
the upper inside cover [4].
F-8-24
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the reader ink 4) Shift the arm [1] of the reader link unit 90 deg to
unit cover [2]. support the reader unit.
F-8-25
F-8-28
2) Remove the stepped screw [1], and detach the
positioning pin [2] from the reader link unit. 5) Disconnect the 8 connectors [1], and detach the
harness guide [2].
8-19
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 8
F-8-29 F-8-31
F-8-30
8-20
Chapter 9 Image
Formation
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
9.1 Construction
9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0000-4473
T-9-1
Photosensitive drum
T-9-2
Developing assembly
developing assembly
T-9-3
9-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
T-9-4
Auxiliary brush
T-9-5
Others
T-9-6
T-9-7
Others
T-9-8
9-2
Chapter 9
T-9-9
Image stabili- Descharge current level control to prevent image faults caused by
zation mecha- changes in environment
nism ATVC control to ensure good transfer
Developing cylinder
D-UNIT(Bk)
Developing
assembly Primary
charging
roller
Intermediate
transfer belt Auxiliary
brushes
Photosensitive drum
Intermediate
transfer unit Primary transfer rollers
Secondary transfer
internal roller
F-9-1
9-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
T-9-10
AC component rating specifications range 1300 to 2000 Vp-p (standard: 1500 Vp-p)
T-9-11
Auxiliary charging
T-9-12
Developing bias
T-9-13
Primary transfer
9-4
Chapter 9
Primary transfer
T-9-14
Secondary transfer
0V 0V
-300V
-450V
1800Vp-p 1500Vp-p
Downstream auxiliary
brush
0V
-750V
+250V
+400V 200Vp-p
0V
0V 0V
9-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
T-9-15
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaning 7 collects residual toner from the ITB.
block
Photosensitive drum
1.Charging
10.Toner collection
7.ITB cleaning
ITB
Delivery 5.Secondary
Fixing 6.Separation
transfer Pickup
F-9-3
9-6
Chapter 9
F-9-4
Y M C Bk
Paper
Waste tone container
Secondary
transfer
[2] Moving the toner image
block
from the ITB to paper
F-9-5
9-7
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
If the main power switch is turned on while the surface temperature of the fixing roller is less than 100°C
(e.g., first time in the morning or after a long period of no use),
Characteristics
- the same control timing is used for the Y, M, C, and Bk drum units.
- the machine takes about 300 to 360 sec before it enters PSTBY.
- the machine executes image stabilization control in the following order while it is warming up:
discharge current level control
ATVC control
ATR control
SALT-Dmax control
image position control
SALT-Dhalf control
Main power
switch ON
Exposure (Y)
Charging (DC)
bias (Y)
Charging (AC)
bias (Y)
Development Image stabilization
motor (Y) control (for details,
Developing (DC) see appropriate sections)
bias (Y)
Developing (AC)
Scraping off toner
bias (Y)
by auxiliary brush
Upstream auxiliary (DC)
bias (Y)
Upstream auxiliary (AC)
Scraping off toner
bias (Y)
by auxiliary brush
Downstream auxiliary (DC)
bias (Y)
Primary transfer
Cleaning by second-
bias (Y)
ary transfer roller
Secondary
transfer bias
• Start-up sequence of the drum unit (Y; with surface temperature of fixing roller at 100 or more).
F-9-6
If the main power switch is turned on while the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 100°C or more
(i.e., after it returns from jam recovery*, after it has been forced off and then on, or after its front cover has been
opened and then closed while an imaged is made).
Characteristics
- the same control timing is used for the Y, M, C, and Bk drum units.
- the machine takes about 80 sec before it enters PSTBY.
- the machine executes image stabilization in the following order while it is warming up:
discharge current level control
ATVC control
9-8
Chapter 9
Main power
switch ON
Exposure (Y)
Charging (DC)
bias (Y)
Charging (AC)
bias (Y)
Development
motor (Y) Image stabilization
Developing (DC) control (for details, see
bias (Y) appropriate sections)
Developing (AC)
Scraping off toner
bias (Y)
by auxiliary brush
Upstream auxiliary (DC)
bias (Y)
Upstream auxiliary (AC)
Scraping off toner
bias (Y)
by auxiliary brush
Downstream auxiliary (DC)
bias (Y)
Primary transfer
Cleaning by second-
bias (Y)
ary transfer roller
Secondary
transfer bias
• Start-up sequence of the drum unit (Y; with surface temperature of fixing roller at 100˚C or more).
F-9-7
Start key
ON
Exposure (Y)
Charging (DC)
bias (Y)
Charging (AC)
bias (Y)
Development
motor (Y)
Developing (DC)
bias (Y)
Developing (AC)
bias (Y) Scraping off toner
by auxiliary brush
Upstream auxiliary (DC)
bias (Y)
Upstream auxiliary (AC)
bias (Y) Scraping off toner
by auxiliary brush
Downstream auxiliary (DC)
bias (Y)
9-9
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
Start key
ON
Exposure (Y)
Charging (DC)
bias (Y)
Charging (AC)
bias (Y)
Development
motor (Y)
Developing (DC)
bias (Y)
Developing (AC)
Scraping off toner
bias (Y)
by auxiliary brush
Upstream auxiliary (DC)
bias (Y)
Upstream auxiliary (AC)
Scraping off toner
bias (Y)
by auxiliary brush
Downstream auxiliary (DC)
bias (Y)
Primary transfer Cleaning by second-
bias (Y) ary transfer roller
Secondary
transfer bias
F-9-9
9-10
Chapter 9
SALT-Dmax control
image position correctionSALT-Dhalf control
Exposure (Y)
Charging (DC)
bias (Y)
Charging (AC)
bias (Y)
Development Image stabilization
motor (Y) control (for details, see
appropriate sections)
Developing (DC)
bias (Y)
Developing (AC)
Scraping off toner
bias (Y)
by auxiliary brush
Upstream auxiliary (DC)
bias (Y)
Upstream auxiliary (AC)
Scraping off toner
bias (Y)
by auxiliary brush
Downstream auxiliary (DC)
bias (Y)
Primary transfer
Cleaning by second-
bias (Y)
ary transfer roller
Secondary
transfer bias
F-9-10
When making copies/prints of originals containing a color page, the machine uses the following sequence to avoid
a drop in productivity:
T-9-16
monochrome original: for 3rd and subsequent copies/prints after color page, full-
color mode sequence for 4th and subsequent copies/prints
after color page, monochrome sequence
MEMO:
A switch-over from full-color mode to monochrome mode requires a sequence in which the high voltage of YMC
must be lowered. By reducing the use of such a sequence, the machine avoids an appreciable drop in productivity.
9.3.7 Driving and Controlling the Image Formation System and the
High-Voltage System 0000-4485
Drive Control
The image formation system is driven by the toner container motor, developing motor, and drum ITB motor
through gears. (For details, see the appropriate sections.)
9-11
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
DC
controller
PCB
Drum/ITB motor
drive signal
M1 J105
Developing
motor
F-9-11
High-Voltage Control
The high-voltage unit is used to supply high voltage to each of the blocks in the image formation system.
(For details, see the appropriate sections.)
Y M C Bk
Primary charging
Developing
roller
cylinder
Photosensitive
drum
Downstream
auxiliary
brush
Upstream
auxiliary
brush
Secondary
transfer
external roller
HV1 HV4
(1 each for HV2 (1 for YM; 1 HV3
YMCBk) for CBk)
9-12
Chapter 9
Changes in temperature/humidity or passage of time can cause the machine to produce images of varying quality. To
ensure that the quality of images remain stable, the levels of voltage outputs and volumes of toner supply are
corrected:
T-9-17
environment
T-9-18
9-13
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
T-9-19
New if the number of rotations made by the toner feedscrew has reached the threshold and,
toner in addition, the reading of the ATR sensor is lower than a specific value *8
container YES YES YES YES YES NO about
replacem
190
ent
if the number of rotations of the toner feedscrew has reached a specific value (100%) *8
NO NO NO NO NO NO about 20
T-9-20
T-9-21
T-9-22
Number - cumulative output (number of pages) is 100 or more and less than 200 (LSTR) *3
of pages YES YES YES NO (YES: 300 NO about 30
*10
pages *9 ) (50)
- cumulative output (number of pages) is 100 or more and less than 200 (INTR) *3
9-14
Chapter 9
T-9-23
T-9-24
Return - cover is not opened and closed during low power mode
from low
NO NO NO NO NO NO about 30 *4
power
- cover is opened and closed during low power mode
mode
state YES YES NO NO YES NO about 80 *6
T-9-25
Return - STBY + power save mode lasts 1.9 hr or more before starting sleep mode
from
YES YES YES YES YES YES about 240 *7
sleep
- STBY + power save mode lasts less than 1.9 hr before starting sleep mode *5
state
YES YES (YES) (YES) YES (YES) about 80 *6
(about 240 *7 )
9-15
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
Cumulative output
is 100 pages or
more and less
1st page 2nd page 99th page 105th page next job *1
than 200 pages
Continuous jobs
F-9-13
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>INTROT-1
Use it to change the intervals between sessions of execution of image stabilization control (adjustment set-1) for
initial/last rotation in terms of the number of pages.
Default (at shipment/upon RAM initialization): 100
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>INTROT-2
Use it to change the intervals between execution sessions of image stabilization control (adjustment set-2) for
initial/last rotation in terms of the number of pages.
Default (at shipment/upon RAM initialization): 500
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PPR-1
Use it to change the intervals of execution sessions (adjustment set-1) for image stabilization control between
sheets in terms of the number of pages.
Default (at shipment/upon RAM initialization): 200
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>INTROT-T
Use it to change the intervals of execution sessions for image stabilization control for standby.
Default (at shipment/upon RAM initialization): 2
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>ADJ-LVL
Use it to change the execution mode settings for image stabilization control for a specific number of pages.
Default (at shipment/upon RAM initialization): 0
9-16
Chapter 9
The machine executes ATR control to maintain a specific image density, which otherwise would change as more and
more toner is used.
The machine measures the concentration of toner and adjusts its supply.
ATR control
F-9-14
Bk
C
M
Y
SALT sensor
F-9-15
- The machine controls the level of discharge current so as to ensure the optimum level in keeping with changes in
temperature/humidify. (The term "discharge current"refers to the current that occurs between the primary
charging roller and the photosensitive drum.) The current is controlled to a level that enables prevention of faulty
images in a high humidity environment and, at the same time, permits collection of toner remaining from transfer
to the developing assembly. Operation
1. An AC bias is applied to the primary charging assembly; the level of current occurring at the time is measured by
the high-voltage PCB (HV1-SUB) and is sent to the CPU on the DC controller PCB as feedback.
2. The roller is charged using the AC charging bias corrected by the CPU.
- If thick paper, special paper, or transparency is used, the frequency of the AC bias applied to the primary charging
roller is halved.
9-17
http://www.manuals4you.com
9.4.5 ATVC Control (transfer bias level correction) 0000-4490
The ATVC control mechanism is used to determine the optimum level of transfer voltage for transfer of images from
the photosensitive drum to the ITB, and from the ITB to paper.
The level of transfer voltage is corrected in relation to changes in temperature/humidity, deterioration of rollers, and
types of paper.
Description of Control
1. A reference voltage is applied to the transfer roller, and the level of current that occurs in response is checked by
the high-voltage PCB and communicated to the CPU on the DC controller PCB as feedback.
2. The machine executes transfer using a transfer voltage which is the result of correction by the CPU.
T-9-26
Item Description
Uses the high-voltage PCB (HV-2) to check the level of current, and the result is
fed back to the CPU for determination of the optimum level.
Uses the high-voltage PCB (HV-3) to check the level of current, and the result is
fed back to the CPU for determination of the optimum level.
The PASCAL control mechanism is used to stabilize gradation characteristics of images on paper.
It makes up for the changes in gradation occurring in response to changes in temperature/humidity or as the machine
is used over time.
- PASCAL Control for Half-Speed
The mechanism is used to correct the changes in the gradation characteristics that otherwise would occur when thick
paper, special paper, or transparency is used. The test print used for the mechanism is the same as the test print
used for plain paper.
Description of Control
Start-up
V
Prints out the test pattern stored in the main controller (3 types).
V
Uses the scanner to read the test print (previously printed out) set in the reader.
V
Prepares the image correction table A (data processing).
V
End
Timing of Control
Chapter 9
MEMO;
Differences Among 3 Test Patterns
- Test Print 1
It shows 64 gradations expressed by means of error diffusion processing, which is not subject to moire and,
therefore, used in text/photo/map, print photo, and text mode.
- Test Print 2
It shows 64 gradations expressed by means of screening with a low number of lines, which is suitable for the
expression of gradation and, therefore, is used for print film photo mode and when priority is placed on PDL.
- Test Print 3
It shows 64 gradations expressed by means of screening with a high number of lines, which is suitable for the
achievement of a high resolution and is, therefore, used when priority is placed on PDL resolution.
Test Print
F-9-16
This mechanism is used to stabilize the maximum resolution on the intermediate transfer belt (ITB).
It is used to make up for changes in the maximum density (Dmax), changes in response to deterioration in developer
or the drum, changes in temperature/humidity, or changes occurring as the machine is used over time.
Description of Control
Start-up
V
Measures the light reflected by the surface of the ITB (background measurement).
V
Forms a sample patch of the maximum solid density stored in the DC controller.
9-19
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
V
Uses the SALT sensor to take the reading.
V
Converts density (performs computation using the measurement taken).
V
Determines the charging DC bias, developing DC bias, and primary charging current level.
V
End
Timing of Control
- Service Person InteractionThe mechanism is executed when 'full correction' or 'quick correction' of auto gradation
correction is under way in user mode.
Bk
C
M
Y
SALT sensor
F-9-17
The SALT-Dhalf control mechanism is used to stabilize the gradation of images on the ITB.
It makes up for the changes in gradation characteristics that occur in response to the deterioration in developer or
photopositive drum, changes in temperature/humidity, and changes that occur as the machine is used over time.
Gradation Density Control for Half Speed
The control mechanism is used to make up for the changes in the gradation in images when thick paper, special
paper, or transparency is used.
When the mechanism is enabled in service mode, it is activated when auto control is executed.
The time it takes is about double the time taken when plain paper is used.
Description of Control
Start-up*
V
Measures the light reflected by the surface of the ITB (background measurement).
V
Forms a sample patch of a gradation pattern stored in the main
controller on the ITB.
V
Uses the SALT sensor to take a reading.
9-20
Chapter 9
V
Performs density conversion (performs computation using the measurement taken).
V
Prepares an image correction table B/C (data processing).
V
End
- Non-AutomaticThe mechanism is executed when 'full correction'or 'quick correction' is under way in user mode.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CAL-SW
Use it to change the conditions that initiate automatic control.
default: 0 (disable gradation density control for half speed)
Bk
C
M
Y
SALT sensor
F-9-18
9-21
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
Outline
The auto gradation control mechanism is used to correct image gradation by correcting the laser output so as to obtain
ideal gradation characteristics.
Image density
Actual gradation characteristics
1.45
Ideal
characteristics
0 255
Relationship between laser output
and image density
F-9-19
T-9-27
Full Correction: The machine knows the actual gradation characteristics based on the 64-
gradation density data collected from the scanner.
Quick Correction: The machine knows the actual gradation characteristics based on the 9-
gradation density data.
User Mode
The machine uses 2 types of auto gradation correction mechanisms, combining the best mechanisms to suit
individual requirements.
T-9-28
| |
v v
| |
v |
9-22
Chapter 9
PASCAL control |
(prepares image correction |
table A) |
| |
v v
| |
v v
| |
v v
End End
T-9-29
T-9-30
Characteristics A test print must be printed and The machine does not use (print) a test
read by the machine. print.
9-23
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
The drum unit consists of the developing assembly, photosensitive drum, auxiliary brush, and charging mechanism.
As many as 4 units are used (Y, M, C, Bk), and all of them have the same construction.
Primary charging
roller
Developing
cylinder Cleaning sheet
Developing
assembly
Downstream
auxiliary
brush
Upstream
auxiliary
brush
ATR sensor
Developing Photosensitive
blade drum
F-9-20
9-24
Chapter 9
T-9-31
DC controller PCB
drive signal
signal
Developing
motor (pulse)
M
Drum ITB
motor (DC)
Developing
M
cylinder
Cleaning sheet
Primary changing
roller
Auxiliary brushes
ATR sensor
9-25
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
T-9-32
Component
Developing blade - serves to coat the developing cylinder with a uniform layer
of developerserves to coat the developing cylinder with a uniform layer of
developer
Toner stirring screw - stirs the toner and the developer inside the developing assembly (thus,
charging the toner to a negative potential).
ATR sensor - detects the amount (concentration of toner) inside the developing
assembly.
Developing cylinder
Developing assembly
Toner stirring
screw
F-9-22
9-26
9.5.2.2 Controlling the Developing Bias 0000-4498
1) AC Component
fixed; used to increase the density of output images.
2) DC Component
output suited to the reading of the environment sensor/SALT sensor;
changes the median voltage of the AC bias to adjust the image density
a-1. Route of the Developing Bias
High-voltage unit
J91
HV2-SUB
J85 J87 J86
J76 J82
HV1-SUB HV2
J73 J75 J77 J79 J81
: +24V
: -1kV
F-9-23
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
Environment
sensor SALT sensor
DC controller PCB
J131-A J109 J131-B
DEV_AC_CTRLT_Y,M DEV_CLK-A DEV_AC_CTRLT_C,K
DEV_DC_CTRL_Y,M DEV_CLK-B DEV_DC_CTRL_C,K
DEV_MODE_Y,M DEV_CLK-C DEV_MODE_C,K
High-voltage J88
unit HV2-SUB
J87
DEV_CLK-A
DEV_CLK-B
DEV_CLK-C
HV1-SUB
J73 J75 J77 J79
DEV_AC_CLK1_Y _Y _M _M _C _C _K DEV_DC_CTRL_K
DEV_AC_CLK2_Y DEV_VIN _M DEV_VIN _C DEV_VIN _K DEV_VIN
: control signal.
F-9-24
9-28
Chapter 9
T-9-33
Component
Upstream auxiliary - removes charge from the photosensitive drum. (in preparation for the
brush next image formation session, the latent static image from the previous
session is removed)
- charges the residual toner to a positive potential. (to increase the effects
of charging by the downstream brush as part of the upcoming operation)
F-9-25
9-29
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
T-9-34
High-voltage unit
J91
HV2-SUB
J85 J87 J86
J76
HV1-SUB
J74 J78
: +24V
: -1kV
F-9-26
9-30
Chapter 9
Environment
sensor
DC controller PCB
J131-A J131-B
SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_Y.M SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_K.C
SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_Y.M SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_K.C
SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_Y.M SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_K.C
SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_Y.M SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_K.C
J94 J94
HV4(Y,M) HV4(C,Bk)
J93 J93
: control signal.
F-9-27
9-31
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
High-voltage unit
J91
HV2-SUB
J85 J87 J86
J76 J82
HV1-SUB HV2
J73 J75 J77 J79 J81
DC bias for
downstream
auxiliary brush
: +24V
: -1kV
F-9-28
9-32
Chapter 9
c-2. Route for the Downstream Auxiliary Brush Bias Control Signal
Environment
sensor
DC controller PCB
J131-A J131-B
SUB_LO_DC_CTRL_Y,M SUB_LO_DC_CTRL_C,K
: control signal.
F-9-29
9-33
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
T-9-35
Component
F-9-30
9-34
Chapter 9
T-9-36
High-voltage unit
J91
HV2-SUB
J85 J87 J86
J76 J82
HV1-SUB HV2
J73 J75 J77 J79 J81
: +24V
: -1kV
F-9-31
9-35
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
Environment
sensor SALT sensor
DC controller PCB
J131-A J109 J131-B
CHRG_DC_CTRL CHRG_DC_CTRL
_Y,M CH_CLK _C,K
CHRG_AC_CTRL CHRG_AC_CTRL
_Y,M _C,K
High-voltage J88
unit HV2-SUB
J87
CHRG_AC_CLK
HV1-SUB
J73 J75 J77 J79
CHRG_DC_CTRL
_Y CHRG_AC _M CHRG_AC _C CHRG_AC _K CHRG_AC
CHRG_AC_CTRL _CLK _CLK _CLK _CLK
_Y_SND _M_SND _C_SND _K_SND
: control signal.
F-9-32
9-36
Chapter 9
The toner container consists of toner, stirring blade, and toner feedscrew;
as many as 4 containers are used (Y, M, C, Bk), and all of them are of the same construction.
Stirring blade
Toner
Toner feedscrew
(supplies toner from the container
to the developing assembly)
F-9-33
T-9-37
Toner feedscrew Toner container motor (M20 to 23) driven through gears
DC controller PCB
Y M C Bk Toner feedscrew
F-9-34
9-37
http://www.manuals4you.com
9.6.3 Checking the Level of Toner 0000-4505
The machine checks the level of toner using the following sensors:
T-9-38
Description
relies on the fact that a change in the ratio between carrier (magnetic)
and toner (non-magnetic) changes the force of magnetism.
SALT Sensor
photo sensor
Description
checks the sample toner formed on the intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
at such times as programmed.
photosensor
Description
DC controller PCB
Feedscrew
rotation
sensor
Y M C Bk
SALT
ATR sensor
sensor
: control signal.
F-9-35
1. Developing Assembly
If the ATR sensor identifies a shortage of toner inside the developing assembly, the machine starts control of toner
supply from the toner container to the developing assembly.
DC controller PCB
J124 J126
M20
Toner feedscrew
Developing assembly
Y drum unit
ATR sensor
F-9-36
9-39
http://www.manuals4you.com
9.7 Transfer Unit
9.7.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit
The transfer unit consists of 2 units: intermediate transfer unit and secondary transfer unit:
Intermediate Transfer Unit
intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
primary transfer roller (1 pc. each for Y, M, C, and Bk)
ITB cleaning blade
secondary transfer internal roller
Secondary Transfer Unit
secondary transfer external roller
static eliminator
feed guide
ITB cleaning
blade
Waste toner
feedscrew
Secondary transfer internal roller
Primary transfer
ITB roller
Feed guide
Transfer lower front guide
T-9-39
Secondary transfer external Secondary transfer internal roller driven through gears
roller
DC controller PCB
J105
Drum ITB motor drive signal
Drum ITB
motor M1
9-41
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
Environment
sensor
1_TR_CTRL_Y,M,C,K
High-voltage
unit J88 J91
HV2-SUB
J89
TR1_CTRL_Y,M,C,K
J80
HV2
J83
DC bias for
primary transfer
: +24V
: +1kV
: control signal
F-9-39
9-42
Chapter 9
Environment
sensor
2TR_SEL
2TR_CTRL_P,N
High-voltage
unit J88 J91
HV2-SUB
J90
NCTL
PCTL
Secondary transfer PSEN
high-voltage unit
J95
HV3
T801
: +24V
Secondary transfer DC bias for
external roller secondary transfer : +1kV
: control signal.
F-9-40
9-43
http://www.manuals4you.com
9.7.3 Cleaning
The machine uses a cleaning blade to clean the intermediate transfer belt (ITB).
T-9-40
Cleaning belt: remains in contact with the ITB at all times, and used to scrape
off toner from the ITB.
Cleaning blade
ITB
Scoop-up sheet
Waste toner feedscrew
F-9-41
Chapter 9
Waste Toner
The waste toner is scraped off by the cleaning blade, and is moved to the waste toner box by the waste toner
feedscrew.
Waste Toner Box Full Detection
The waste toner sensor consists of a LED (light-emitting) and a phototransistor (light-receiving) to find out when
the waste toner box becomes full.
Tension roller
+5V
GND
J127
F-9-42
9-45
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
T-9-41
T-9-42
- Attraction Plate
9-46
Chapter 9
ITB
Paper
Feed guide
Attraction plate
Feed guide
Attraction plate
Static eliminator
F-9-43
9-47
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
1) Open the front cover, and slide out the drum unit to
the front.
F-9-46
9-48
Chapter 9
9.8.1.7 Opening the Main 3) Free the controller box from the hook [A/B] at the
Controller Box 0000-4620 top of the main controller box.
F-9-50
F-9-48 F-9-51
F-9-49
9-49
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
F-9-54
F-9-52
F-9-55
F-9-53
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fan duct [2].
9-50
Chapter 9
F-9-58
F-9-59
F-9-57
9-51
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
F-9-62
F-9-61
9-52
Chapter 9
F-9-66
F-9-64
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 3 9.8.2 Drum Drive Unit
screws [2]; then, detach the drum ITB motor base
[3]. 9.8.2.1 Slide Out the Drum Unit 0006-7762
1) Open the front cover, and slide out the drum unit to
the front.
9-53
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
[1]
F-9-69
F-9-70
F-9-68
2) Remove the 9 screws [1] of the main controller box.
9-54
Chapter 9
F-9-71
F-9-74
F-9-72
F-9-75
F-9-73
9-55
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
F-9-78
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fan duct [2].
F-9-79
9-56
Chapter 9
F-9-80
F-9-82
3) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the
developing drive assembly [2].
9.8.2.13 Removing the High-
Voltage Unit 0000-4642
F-9-81
9-57
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
F-9-84
F-9-86
F-9-87
F-9-85
9-58
Chapter 9
F-9-90
F-9-88 1) While picking the tabs at the front and the rear,
slide out the intermediate transfer unit [1]; then,
9.8.3 Drive Roller detach it by holding it by the indicated area [2].
F-9-91
F-9-89
9-59
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
9.8.3.3 Removing the 4) Remove the 4 screws [1] at the rear, and pull out the
Intermediate Transfer Belt 0000-4528 link plate (rear) [2].
F-9-96
5) Fit the boss [1] on the frame at the rear into the
recess [A] in the middle right cover so that the unit
F-9-93
is upright.
F-9-94 F-9-97
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the transfer guide 6) Be sure that the rear link plate [1] is on the opposite
plate [2]. of the middle right cover so that the intermediate
transfer unit will not fall down.
F-9-95
F-9-98
9-60
Chapter 9
7) Remove the 4 screws at the rear [1], and pull out the marking on its surface is to the rear.
link plate (front) [2]; then, rotate it 180 deg.
[1]
F-9-101
F-9-102
[1] [2]
F-9-100
[2] [A] [2] [A]
9-61
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
1)
F-9-104
F-9-106
2) At the front, remove the following: E-ring [1],
washer [2], bearing [3], E-ring [4], washer [5],
spring [6], washer [7], bearing [8], grounding plate
[9].
Points to Note When Attaching
When attaching the washer, spring, and washer at the
front, be sure to fit the E-ring after forcing down the
spring together with the washer until the E-ring
groove [A] of the drive roller shaft is in view.
9-62
Chapter 9
F-9-107
F-9-108
9.8.4 Developing Motor (Bk)
9.8.4.5 Removing the DC
9.8.4.1 Removing the Upper Controller PCB Cover 0000-4577
Rear Cover 0006-7766 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC
controller PCB cover [2].
1) Remove the upper rear cover.
9-63
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
[1]
F-9-110
F-9-113
F-9-114
F-9-115
F-9-112
9-64
Chapter 9
1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free 9.8.5.1 Removing the Upper
all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove Rear Cover 0006-7767
the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB
1) Remove the upper rear cover.
[2] together with its base.
F-9-117
F-9-118
9-65
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC 1) Remove the 2 flat cables [1] used to connect the DC
controller PCB cover [2]. controller PCB and the main controller PCB.
F-9-121
[1]
F-9-122
F-9-120
F-9-123
9-66
Chapter 9
F-9-126
F-9-124
9.8.5.8 Removing the
4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the
Developing Motor (Y/M/C) 0000-4572
main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine,
and open it. 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the main
controller base [2].
F-9-127
F-9-125
F-9-128
9-67
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
F-9-131
F-9-132
2) Hold the grips at the front and the rear, and slide the
front side to the right to pull out the secondary
transfer unit [1].
F-9-130
F-9-133
9-68
Chapter 9
F-9-134
F-9-137
4) Release the escape lever [1].
F-9-135
F-9-138
9-69
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
F-9-139
F-9-141
F-9-142
F-9-143
9-70
Chapter 9
F-9-144
F-9-148
F-9-145
5) Fit the boss [1] on the frame at the rear into the
recess [A] in the middle right cover so that the unit
2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the varistor [2].
is upright.
F-9-146
F-9-149
9-71
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
F-9-152
F-9-150
7) Remove the 4 screws at the rear [1], and pull out the Check to make sure that the secondary transfer
link plate (front) [2]; then, rotate it 180 deg. internal roller is free of soiling. If dirt is found, clean
it with alcohol.
[1]
F-9-151
9-72
Chapter 9
F-9-154
F-9-156
3) Check to make sure that the edge [A] of the belt
does not ride over the rib [B] of the tension roller.
4) Release the escape lever [1].
[1] [2]
F-9-155
F-9-157
F-9-158
9-73
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
F-9-159
F-9-163
F-9-160
5) Fit the boss [1] on the frame at the rear into the
recess [A] in the middle right cover so that the unit
2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the varistor [2].
is upright.
F-9-161
F-9-164
9-74
Chapter 9
F-9-167
F-9-165
7) Remove the 4 screws at the rear [1], and pull out the Check to make sure that the secondary transfer
link plate (front) [2]; then, rotate it 180 deg. internal roller is free of soiling. If dirt is found, clean
it with alcohol.
[1]
F-9-166
9-75
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
F-9-169
[1] [2]
F-9-171
1) Bend over the edge of the sheet [1] at the rear; while
picking the edge [3] of the primary transfer
roller[2], detach it upward.
F-9-172
9-76
Chapter 9
F-9-173
F-9-174
9-77
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
cover [2].
F-9-177
F-9-179
3) Be sure that the spring [1] is securely fitted to the
back of the tab used to remove/attach the roller. 4) Release the escape lever [1].
Pay attention to the orientation of the spring, as
different types are used between front and rear.
F-9-180
F-9-178 1) While picking the tabs at the front and the rear,
slide out the intermediate transfer unit [1]; then,
detach it by holding it by the indicated area [2].
9-78
Chapter 9
F-9-182
F-9-186
F-9-183
5) Fit the boss [1] on the frame at the rear into the
recess [A] in the middle right cover so that the unit
2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the varistor [2].
is upright.
F-9-184
F-9-187
9-79
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
7) Remove the 4 screws at the rear [1], and pull out the [1]
F-9-191
F-9-189
F-9-190
9-80
Chapter 9
[1] [2]
F-9-193
1) Extend the belt frame, and fit the link plate at both 4) Remove the E-ring [1] and the bushing [2] at the
front and rear. front; then, remove the secondary transfer internal
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the roller [3].
positioning block [2] at the rear.
F-9-196
F-9-194
9-81
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
F-9-199
F-9-197
9.8.13 Toner Container Drive Unit 1) Remove the upper rear cover.
1) Open the front cover, and turn the intermediate 1) Remove the lower rear cover.
transfer unit releasing lever [1] to detach the waste
toner container [2]. 9.8.13.4 Removing the Left
Upper Rear Cover 0000-4584
9-82
Chapter 9
[1]
F-9-202
F-9-203
F-9-201
9-83
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
F-9-205
F-9-208
F-9-209
F-9-207
9-84
Chapter 9
F-9-210
F-9-211
F-9-214
F-9-212
9-85
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
F-9-217
F-9-215
F-9-218
9-86
Chapter 9
F-9-219
F-9-221
1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover
distribution PCB, and free the harness from the When attaching the cover, take care so that the cut-off
wire saddle [2]; then, remove the 6 screws [3], and will not come into contact with the latch of the flat
detach the main controller cover [4]. cable. Otherwise, the flat cable can come loose.
9-87
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
[1]
F-9-223
F-9-226
F-9-227
F-9-228
F-9-225
9-88
Chapter 9
F-9-231
F-9-230
F-9-232
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 3
screws [2]; then, detach the toner container drive
unit [3].
9-89
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
F-9-233
F-9-236
F-9-234
F-9-237
F-9-235
9-90
Chapter 9
F-9-238
9.8.16.4 Removing the Left 1) Remove the 8 screws [1], and detach the DC
Upper Rear Cover 0000-4593 controller PCB cover [2].
F-9-240
9-91
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
[1]
F-9-241
F-9-244
F-9-245
F-9-246
F-9-243
9-92
Chapter 9
F-9-249
F-9-248
F-9-250
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 3
screws [2]; then, detach the toner container drive
unit [3].
9-93
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
F-9-251
F-9-254
F-9-252
F-9-255
9-94
Chapter 9
F-9-256
F-9-259
F-9-260
9-95
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
F-9-264
4) Release the escape lever [1]. 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the upper right
cover [2].
F-9-262
F-9-265
9.8.18.2 Removing the
Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000-4532 9.8.18.4 Removing the Pattern
1) While picking the tabs at the front and the rear, Reader Unit 0000-4534
slide out the intermediate transfer unit [1]; then, 1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the
detach it by holding it by the indicated area [2]. screw [2]; then, free the plate [4] from the hook of
the upper right stay [3], and detach the pattern
reader unit [5].
F-9-263
9-96
Chapter 9
F-9-268
F-9-269
9-97
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
F-9-273
F-9-270
F-9-271
F-9-272
9-98
Chapter 9
F-9-277
F-9-278
9-99
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
F-9-279 F-9-281
F-9-280
F-9-282
Points to Note When Attaching the Auto
Registration Sensor PCB 4) Release the escape lever [1].
When Attaching the plate [1], be sure that its edge is
farther on the inner side than the cleaning member [2].
9-100
Chapter 9
F-9-283
1) While picking the tabs at the front and the rear, F-9-286
slide out the intermediate transfer unit [1]; then,
detach it by holding it by the indicated area [2]. 9.8.20.4 Removing the Pattern
Reader Unit 0000-4541
F-9-284
F-9-287
F-9-285
9-101
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
F-9-290
F-9-288
F-9-289
9-102
Chapter 9
F-9-293
F-9-291
F-9-292
9-103
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 9
9-104
Chapter 10 Pickup/
Feeding System
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Chapter 10
10.1 Construction
10.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0005-9871
The major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the pickup feeder system are as follows:
T-10-1
Item Description
Method of paper Front loading
accommodation
Size of paper Cassette 1/2 A3, A4, A4R, B4, B5, B5R,
A5R,
10-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
[1] [8]
[7]
[2]
[6]
T-10-2
10-2
Chapter 10
[2] [1]
[3]
[4]
[23] [22] [21] [20]
[7]
[5]
[19]
[18]
[17]
[6]
[16]
[8]
[14]
F-10-2
T-10-3
[4] Delivery vertical path roller 2 [16] Pickup vertical path roller
[7] Fixing roller (fixing upper roller) [19] Manual feed roller
10-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
Face-down delivery
(center delivery tray)
Face-down
delivery
(copy tray)
Pickup from
manual feeder
Face-up delivery
(side delivery tray)
F-10-3
10-4
Chapter 10
[2] [21]
[3]
[20]
[4]
[19]
[5]
[6] [18]
[7]
[17]
[8]
[16]
[9]
[10]
[15]
[11] [12] [13] [14]
F-10-4
T-10-4
[1] Center delivery tray full sensor (PS8) [14] Cassette 2 paper level sensor (A; PS20)
[2] Face-down delivery sensor 1 (PS12) [15] Cassette 2 paper sensor (PS19)
[3] Face-down delivery sensor 2 (PS6) [16] Cassette 2 retry paper sensor (PS17)
[4] Delivery vertical path cover open/closed sensor (PS13) [17] Caste 1 paper sensor (PS7)
[5] Fixing feeder unit open/closed sensor (PS5) [18] Cassette 1 retry paper sensor (PS16)
[6] Fixing delivery sensor (PS25) 19] Pickup vertical path cover open/closed sensor (PS11)
[7] Fixing inlet sensor (PS27) [20] Manual feed last paper sensor (PS9)
[8] Duplex registration sensor (PS21) [21] Manual fed unit open/closed sensor (PS28)
[9] Duplex horizontal registration sensor (PS22) [22] Manual feed paper sensor (PS10)
[10] Duplex pick sensor (PS24) [23] Front cover open/closed sensor (PS23)
[11] Cassette 1 paper level sensor (B; PS15) [24] Transparency sensor (front; OHP1)
[12] Cassette 1 paper level sensor (A; PS14) [25] Transparency sensor (rear; OHP2)
[13] Cassette 2 paper level sensor (B; PS18) [26] Registration sensor (PS26)
10-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
[1]
[7]
SL
SL SL
[2] [6]
CL
CL
SL
[5]
[3]
SL
[4]
F-10-5
T-10-5
[1] Delivery path switching solenoid 1 (SL2) [5] Cassette 1 pickup solenoid (SL3)
[2] Delivery path switching solenoid 2 (SL5) [6] Duplex pickup solenoid (CL2)
[3] Duplex registration clutch (CL1) [7] manual feed pickup solenoid (SL1)
10-6
Chapter 10
M11
M1
M10 M8 M9
SL1
M24
M6
SL3
CL1
M7
M26 CL2
SL4
F-10-6
T-10-6
10-7
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
Main power
switch ON
Printer unit
WMUP WMUPR PSTBY
360 sec (approx.)
F-10-7
Print start
PRINT LSTR
2.76sec (approx.)
1.3sec (approx.)
Cassette pickup
solenoid (SL3)
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette retry paper
sensor (PS16)
Registration
sensor (PS26)
Pre-registration
sensor (M9)
Registration
motor (M8)
F-10-8
10-8
Chapter 10
The leading edge of paper is not at the sensor within a specific period of time (for feeding) after the motor has gone
ON.
Start key ON
or print start
INTR / PRINT
[1] [1]
Pickup motor
Jam check
Normal Error
Sensor N
T-10-7
A delay jam occurring outside the cassette pickup assembly is identified at the following timing:
The period of time during which paper is moved form the sensor N-1 to the delay jam sensor N in question is
controlled, and a delay jam will be identified if the delay jam sensor N in question does not go ON within a specific
period of time after the sensor N-1 has gone ON.
Start key ON
or PRINT setting
accepted
INTR / PRINT
[1] [1]
Sensor N-1
Jam check
Normal Error
Sensor N
10-9
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
T-10-8
Sensor
Registration sensor (PS26)
A stationary jam will be identified if the sensor N does not go OFF within a specific period of tie after the sensor N
has gone ON.
Start key ON
or print start
INTR / PRINT
L+A L+A
Jam check
Normal Error
Sensor N
T-10-9
Sensor
Cassette 1 retry paper sensor (PS16)
10-10
Chapter 10
The machine checks the absence of paper over the following sensors before it starts initial multiple rotations at
power-on:
T-10-10
Sensor
10-11
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
10.4 Cassette
10.4.1 Identifying the Paper Size 0000-4684
The machine identifies the size of paper into the cassette with reference to the slide guide (15 settings) of the cassette.
The 4-in-a-row actuator designed for the identification of the cassette size found on the machine side goes ON/OFF
according to the position of the slide guide, permitting the machine to identify 15 settings. In the absence of a
cassette, all 4 actuators will go OFF.
Paper size
slide guide
Cassette size
detecting switch
Size detecting
actuator
Cassette
F-10-12
T-10-11
4-in-a-row actuator
Rear Front
1 STMT R ON
2 LTR ON
3 LTR R ON ON
10-12
Chapter 10
4-in-a-row actuator
Rear Front
4 LGL ON ON
5 11X17*1 ON
6 A5 R ON ON
7 A4 ON ON
8 A4 R ON ON
9 A3 ON ON ON
10 B5 ON ON ON
11 B5 R ON ON ON
12 B4 ON ON ON ON
13 12X18*2 ON ON ON
14 U1 ON ON
15 U2 ON
16 no cassette
*1:279 x 431.8[mm]
*2:305 x 457[mm]
10-13
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
The level of paper inside the cassette is detected using the following three sensors:
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]
[8]
F-10-13
T-10-12
10-14
Chapter 10
OFF OFF
If the cassette is half full of paper
Cassette paper Cassette paper Paper
level sensor (B) level sensor (A)
OFF ON
If the cassette has little paper
Cassette paper Cassette paper Paper
level sensor (B) level sensor (A)
F-10-14
T-10-13
Paper level sensor (A) Paper level sensor (B) Paper sensor Level of paper Indication on control panel
10-15
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
The paper inside the cassette is held up by the lifter plate, and the pickup roller is borught down to the paper for
pickup.
The feed roller and the srpaton roller are used to make sure that no more than a single sheet of paper is moved to the
feeing assembly; the pickup vertical path roller/pre-registration roller is then used to move the paper a fara as the
kegistatoin roller (upper, lower).
The pickup vertical path roller and the pre-registration roller are each driven by the pickup 1 motor and the pre-
registration motor, respectively.
[5] [4]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[1]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
F-10-15
T-10-14
10-16
Chapter 10
Print start
PRINT LSTR
2.76sec (approx.)
1.3sec (approx.)
Cassette pickup
solenoid (SL3)
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette retry paper
sensor (PS16)
Registration
sensor (PS26)
Pre-registration
sensor (M9)
Registration
motor (M8)
F-10-16
10-17
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
The paper in the manual feed pickup unit is forced against the pickup feeder roller as the lifter moves up, an a single
sheet of paper is separed and moved ahead by the work of the pickup feeder roller and the separation roller.
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[9]
[8]
[6] [7]
F-10-17
T-10-15
10-18
Chapter 10
Manual feeder
Torque limter
pickup feed roller
Torque delay
mehcainsm
Manual feed
feeder roller
Paper
Tortion spring
Damper core
Spring pin
Separation Separation
roller shaft roller
Torque delay mechanism Separation roller shaft
direction of rotation direction of rotation
F-10-19
Print start
PRINT LSTR
1.9 sec (approx.)
F-10-20
10-19
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
The machine checks the widht of paper in reference to the level of output ffrom the variable resistor operating in
conjunction with the movemetn of the side guide epatle. The side guide plate on the manual feed tray is set by the
user when he/she deposit paper.
Variable resistor
Manual feed tray
F-10-21
10-20
Chapter 10
When paper is placed, its weight pushes down the paper detecting flag, thus enabling the manual feed paper sensor
(PS10) to detect the presence of paper.
Paper detecting
flag Paper
Paper
10-21
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
When the last paper pickup roll rotates, the slit in the roll cuses the output of the last paper sensor (PS9) to beocme
wave-form pusles. The last paper roll rotates only when the last paper is picked up; otherwise, it remains still. The
machine will identify the paper to be the last paper if it detects 4 or more output pules form the lat paper sensor.
Last paper
Manual feed
last paper
sensor (PS9)
Last paper
detecting roll
Last paper
If 4 or more output pulses are detected,
the paper is identified as being the last.
10-22
Chapter 10
The upper registraont roller an the lower registration roller are dreiven by the registration motor (M8), and are used
to make user aht the paper an the image on the intermediate transfer rbelt mach at a specific position. The upper guide
locking arm latches in place when the unit is fitted to the machine.
10-23
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
10-24
Chapter 10
The duplex nit is drivn by the duplex motor (M26), and is sued when making double-sided prints.
[1]
[2]
[3] [7]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
F-10-26
T-10-16
10-25
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
When in duplexing mode, the machine executes horizontal registration detection for paper coming from the duplex
feed assembly to see if there is any discrepancy in main scanning direction (front-rear direction), thus adjusting the
point of laser exposure.
T-10-17
Timing of detection: starts a specifi peirrod of time after pasage over the duplex
registraont neosr (PS21)
Horizontal registration
motor (M25)
Paper
F-10-27
10-26
Chapter 10
The number on a white backgoudn and the nbuer on a black background indicated the 1s side and the 2nd side,
respse3ctively.
1 point of reversal
1 duplex pre-registration
2
1 check on horizontal
registration
(4)
2 3
3
1 4
in wait for
1 re-pickup 2 1
2
10-27
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
1
4
3 2
(8)
1 2
1 1
4 5 3
2
4 3
3 5 4
5
(10)
(9) thereafter, repeats (7) through (10) (11)
3
2
1
(12)
10-28
Chapter 10
5
4
3 4
2 3
1 2
1
(13) (14)
The nbuemr on a white background and the nbuemr on a black backgrdoun indicated the 1st side and he 2nd side,
respectively.
1 point of reversal
1 duplex pre-registration
1
10-29
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
1 check on horizontal
registration
(4)
2 point of reversal
non-contact reversal
2 1 1
1 in wait for 2
re-pickup
(8)
thereafter, repeats (6) through (8)
10-30
Chapter 10
2 3
2
1
1
(9) (10)
10-31
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
10.9 Delivery
10.9.1 Delivery 0000-4698
The machine uses any of the following 3 types of delivery (paper apths):
face-deown delivery (center delivery tray)
face-down delivery (copy tray)
face-up device r(side delivery tray)
Face-down delivery
(center delivery tray)
Face-down delivery
(copy tray)
Face-up delivery
(side delivery tray)
F-10-28
10-32
Chapter 10
After moving thtough the fixing unit, the paper moves along the FU/FD switching flapper now facing downawar; it
then pushes down the plastic sheet to move to the vertical path diecoint for face-down delivery.
Plastic sheet
FU/FD
switching
flapper
F-10-29
10-33
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
After moving through he fixing unit, the paper moves uder the FU/FD swtichign flapper, which has been shfited up
by the delivery path switching solenoid (SL2); at this time the cross path flapper is also siwtched over by the work
of the delivery path switching solenoid 2 (SL5), thus guding the paper into the direction of face-up delivery.
FU/FD
switching
flapper
Face-up delivery
(side delivery tray)
Cross path
flapper
F-10-30
The paper moves while pushing down the plastic sheet, and then moves ahead for center tray delivery.
Plastic sheet
F-10-31
10-34
Chapter 10
The paper meos while pushign down the plastic sheet, and then moves ahead in the direction of the centra tray.
Immeiately after the trailig edge of the paper moves past the palstc film the momevement stops, at which time the
movmeent rverses so that the paper moves along the plastic sheet in the direction of the copy tray.
Paper
Plastic sheet
Paper
Plastic sheet
F-10-32
10-35
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
Procedure
10.10.1 Cassette Pickup Unit
MEMO:
The cassette 1/2 and the pick-up unit 1/2 may also be
removed in the same way.
F-10-34
Right Cover 0006-8859 1) Remove the screw [2] to detach the pickup vertical
path lower cover [1]; then, detach the pickup
1) Slide out the manual feed unit, and open the pickup
vertical path cover [3].
vertical path cover.
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the machine's
front right cover [2].
F-10-35
F-10-33
The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover;
shift it to the direction indicated to detach.
10-36
Chapter 10
F-10-37
MEMO:
The cassette 1/2 and the pick-up unit 1/2 may also be
removed in the same way.
10-37
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
10.10.3.1 Removing the 1) Put your hand through the machine's front; then,
Cassette 0000-4710 pick the tab [A] of the feed roller, and pull it out.
MEMO:
The cassette 1/2 and the pick-up unit 1/2 may also be
removed in the same way.
MEMO:
The cassette 1/2 and the pick-up unit 1/2 may also be
removed in the same way.
MEMO:
The cassette 1/2 and the pick-up unit 1/2 may also be
removed in the same way.
10-38
Chapter 10
F-10-42
10-39
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-46
F-10-44
10.10.6.8 Removing the
Developing Drive Unit 0000-4764
[1]
F-10-47
F-10-45
F-10-48
10-40
Chapter 10
F-10-51
F-10-52
10-41
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-53 F-10-55
10.10.6.12 Removing the Rear 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4
Right Cover 0000-4768 screws [2]; then, detach the cassette pickup motor
unit [3].
The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover;
shift it to the direction indicated to detach.
F-10-56
F-10-54
10-42
Chapter 10
The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover;
shift it to the direction indicated to detach.
F-10-57
MEMO:
The cassette 1/2 and the pick-up unit 1/2 may also be
F-10-59
removed in the same way.
F-10-60
F-10-58
10-43
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-63
F-10-64
F-10-62
10-44
Chapter 10
MEMO:
The cassette 1/2 and the pick-up unit 1/2 may also be
removed in the same way.
F-10-65
1) Slide out the cassette.
2) Fit the 6 locations [A] indicated in the figure firmly
into the holes of the mounting plate; then, secure 10.10.8.2 Removing the Front
the sensor mounting plate [2] in place.
Right Cover 0000-4741
1) Slide out the manual feed unit, and open the pickup
vertical path cover.
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the machine's
front right cover [2].
F-10-66
F-10-68
The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover;
shift it to the direction indicated to detach.
F-10-67
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the rear right
4) Turn the gears to see that the movement is smooth. cover [2].
10-45
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-71
F-10-69
10.10.8.6 Removing the Pick-
10.10.8.4 Removing the Pickup up System Sensor Mounting
Vertical Path Cover 0000-4743 Plate 0000-4745
1) Remove the screw [2] to detach the pickup vertical 1) Remove the 2 screws [1] at the rear, and remove the
path lower cover [1]; then, detach the pickup bracket [2].
vertical path cover [3].
F-10-70
F-10-72
10.10.8.5 Removing the Pickup 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw
Unit 0000-4744 [1]; then, detach the cassette pickup solenoid [3].
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4 Thereafter,remove the 5 screws [4], and detach the
screws [2]; then, detach the pickup unit [3]. sensor mounting plate [5].
10-46
Chapter 10
F-10-75
F-10-76
10-47
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
MEMO:
The cassette 1/2 and the pick-up unit 1/2 may also be
removed in the same way.
F-10-80
F-10-78
10.10.9.5 Removing the Pickup
10.10.9.3 Removing the Rear Unit 0000-4752
Right Cover 0000-4750
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4
screws [2]; then, detach the pickup unit [3].
The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover;
shift it to the direction indicated to detach.
10-48
Chapter 10
F-10-81
F-10-83
10.10.9.6 Removing the Pick-
up System Sensor Mounting 10.10.9.7 Removing the
Plate 0000-4753
Cassette Paper Level Sensor
1) Remove the 2 screws [1] at the rear, and remove the (A/B) 0000-4754
bracket [2].
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the
cassette paper sensor (A/B) [2].
F-10-82 F-10-84
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw 10.10.9.8 Mounting the Pick-
[1]; then, detach the cassette pickup solenoid [3]. up System Sensor Mounting
Thereafter,remove the 5 screws [4], and detach the
Plate 0000-4755
sensor mounting plate [5].
10-49
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
1) Attach the bushing [1] to the frame; then, attach the 10.10.10 Slide Resistor
gear shaft [2].
F-10-85
F-10-88
F-10-86
F-10-89
F-10-87
10-50
Chapter 10
F-10-90 F-10-92
F-10-91
F-10-93
10.10.10.3 Removing the
Manual Feed Tray Upper
Cover/Lower Cover 0000-4997
10-51
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
1) Slide out the manual feed unit, and open the pickup
vertical path cover.
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the machine's
front right cover [2].
F-10-94
The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover;
shift it to the direction indicated to detach.
10-52
Chapter 10
F-10-99
F-10-97
10.10.11.6 Removing the
10.10.11.4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid 0000-4776
Pickup Vertical Path Cover 0000-4774 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2
1) Remove the screw [2] to detach the pickup vertical screws [2]; then, detach the cassette pickup
path lower cover [1]; then, detach the pickup solenoid [3].
vertical path cover [3].
F-10-100
F-10-98
10.10.12 Manual Feed Tray Unit
10.10.11.5 Removing the
Pickup Unit 0000-4775 10.10.12.1 Removing the
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4 Manual Feed Unit Cover 0000-4949
screws [2]; then, detach the pickup unit [3]. 1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right
side to slide out the manual feed unit [2].
10-53
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-101
2) Remove the screw [1], and free the 3 claws [2] and
the 3 snap-ons [3]; then, detach the manual feed
unit cover [4]. F-10-104
F-10-102
F-10-105
10-54
Chapter 10
F-10-106 F-10-108
2) Remove the screw [1] and the stopper plate [2]; 2) Remove the screw [1] and the stopper plate [2];
then, detach the manual feed unit [3]. then, detach the manual feed unit [3].
F-10-107 F-10-109
10.10.14.1 Removing the 1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right
Manual Feed Unit 0000-4960 side to slide out the manual feed unit [2].
F-10-110
10-55
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
2) Remove the screw [1], and free the 3 claws [2] and
the 3 snap-ons [3]; then, detach the manual feed
unit cover [4].
F-10-113
F-10-112
F-10-114
F-10-115
10-56
Chapter 10
F-10-116
F-10-118
When attaching the bushing and the gear at the front,
check to be sure that the claw is hooked on the groove
2) Remove the screw [1] and the stopper plate [2];
of the roller.
then, detach the manual feed unit [3].
F-10-119
10-57
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-120
2) Remove the screw [1], and free the 3 claws [2] and
the 3 snap-ons [3]; then, detach the manual feed
unit cover [4]. F-10-123
F-10-121
F-10-124
10-58
Chapter 10
F-10-125
F-10-128
F-10-129
F-10-127
10-59
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-132
(Free the snap-in claw.) 1) Press the release button [1] on the machine's right
side to slide out the manual feed unit [2].
F-10-131
F-10-133
3) Pick the tab [A] of the manual feed separation roller
[2], and pull it out in the direction of the arrow. 2) Remove the screw [1] and the stopper plate [2];
then, detach the manual feed unit [3].
10-60
Chapter 10
F-10-134
1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the base [2]. 10.10.16.3 Removing the
Manual Feed Tray Upper
Cover/Lower Cover 0000-5002
F-10-135
F-10-137
MEMO:
When attaching the upper cover [1] and the lower
cover [2], match the markings [A] found on the side,
and slide them into place.
10-61
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-138
F-10-139
F-10-140
10-62
Chapter 10
F-10-143
2) Remove the screw [1], and free the 3 claws [2] and
the 3 snap-ons [3]; then, detach the manual feed
unit cover [4].
F-10-146
F-10-144
F-10-147
F-10-145
10-63
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-148
F-10-149 F-10-151
10-64
Chapter 10
F-10-152 F-10-154
F-10-155
2) Detach the rear guide [1] and the middle guide [2].
(Free the snap-in claw.)
F-10-156
10-65
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-159
F-10-157
F-10-160
10-66
Chapter 10
2) Remove the screw [1], and free the 3 claws [2] and
the 3 snap-ons [3]; then, detach the manual feed
unit cover [4].
F-10-161
F-10-162
F-10-163
10-67
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-166
F-10-167
F-10-170
10-68
Chapter 10
[A]
F-10-172 F-10-174
F-10-175
10-69
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-178
2) Remove the screw [1], and free the 3 claws [2] and
the 3 snap-ons [3]; then, detach the manual feed
unit cover [4].
F-10-179
10-70
Chapter 10
F-10-182
F-10-180
10.10.21.2 Removing the
10.10.21 Pre-Registration Motor Manual Feed Unit Cover 0000-4984
F-10-183
2) Remove the screw [1], and free the 3 claws [2] and
the 3 snap-ons [3]; then, detach the manual feed
F-10-181
unit cover [4].
F-10-184
10-71
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-185 F-10-187
F-10-186
10-72
Chapter 10
F-10-191
F-10-190 F-10-192
10-73
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-195
F-10-193
F-10-196
10-74
Chapter 10
F-10-197
F-10-199
F-10-198
F-10-200
10.10.23.3 Removing the
Registration Sensor 0000-4958 10.10.24.2 Removing the
1) While taking care not to touch the light-emitting Fixing/Feeder Unit 0000-4782
face of the transparency sensor [1], detach the 1) Remove the 2 stoppers [1], and detach the fixing/
registration sensor [2]. feeder unit [2].
10-75
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover;
shift it to the direction indicated to detach.
F-10-201
MEMO:
The cassette 1/2 and the pick-up unit 1/2 may also be
F-10-203
removed in the same way.
10.10.25.2 Removing the Front 1) Remove the screw [2] to detach the pickup vertical
path lower cover [1]; then, detach the pickup
Right Cover 0000-4719
vertical path cover [3].
1) Slide out the manual feed unit, and open the pickup
vertical path cover.
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the machine's
front right cover [2].
F-10-204
F-10-202
10-76
Chapter 10
F-10-207
F-10-206
10-77
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-209
F-10-212
1) Free the claw [A] of the gear [1] at the rear, and
detach the gear and the bushing [2].
F-10-213
F-10-211
10-78
Chapter 10
F-10-216
F-10-214
F-10-215
10-79
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
[2].
F-10-218
F-10-219
F-10-221
10-80
Chapter 10
F-10-224
F-10-223
F-10-225
4)
10-81
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-226
F-10-227
Engage the left and right hooks [3] on the machine F-10-229
plate [4] so as to set the new delivery vertical path
unit in place. 10) Mount the new delivery vertical path cover [1] to
the machine; then, fix the delivery inside cover [2]
in place using a screw [3].
10-82
Chapter 10
F-10-230 F-10-232
11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2];
then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and 1) Disconnect the connector [1] and the 4 terminals
put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial [2], and remove the screw [1]; then, detach the
position. fixing/feeder unit open/closed sensor mounting
plate [4].
F-10-231
10-83
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-235
F-10-234
10.10.28 Pickup Vertical Path Cover The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover;
shift it to the direction indicated to detach.
Open/Closed Sensor
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the rear right
10.10.28.1 Removing the cover [2].
Cassette 0000-4726
MEMO:
The cassette 1/2 and the pick-up unit 1/2 may also be
removed in the same way.
1) Slide out the manual feed unit, and open the pickup
vertical path cover. F-10-236
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the machine's
front right cover [2]. 10.10.28.4 Removing the
Pickup Vertical Path Cover 0000-4729
10-84
Chapter 10
F-10-237 F-10-239
10.10.28.5 Removing the 2) Remove the spring [1], and detach the sensor flag
Pickup Unit 0000-4730 [2].
F-10-240
F-10-241
10-85
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-242
F-10-243
F-10-245
10-86
Chapter 10
F-10-246
F-10-247
F-10-249
4)
10-87
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-252
F-10-253
10-88
Chapter 10
F-10-256
11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2];
then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and
put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial
position.
F-10-254
F-10-257
F-10-255
10-89
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-258
F-10-259
MEMO:
The fixing/feeder unit open/closed switches 1 and 2
may be removed in the same way.
10-90
Chapter 10
F-10-265
F-10-263
F-10-266
F-10-264
10-91
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
1) Free the harness [2] from the cable clamp [1], and
disconnect the 2 connectors [3], and remove the 2
screws [4]; then, detach the connector base [5].
F-10-269
F-10-267
F-10-270
10-92
Chapter 10
F-10-271 F-10-273
2) Remove the duct. 5) Remove the gear [1] and the bearing [2] at the rear.
F-10-274
F-10-272
F-10-275
10-93
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-276
8) Free the claw of the gear [1] at the front; then, slide
F-10-279
the roller to the rear, and remove the gear [1] and
the bearing [2].
2) When monting, be sure that the front tip of the
roller shaft is in contact with the grounding plate
[A].
F-10-277
F-10-280
10-94
Chapter 10
[2].
F-10-283
F-10-281
2) Open the cover of the fixing feeder unit [1], and
10.10.33.2 Removing the remove the screw [1], then detach the duct [2].
Fixing/Feeder Unit 0000-4904
F-10-284
3) Remove the screw [1] at the rear, and free the boss
[A] and the hook [B]; then, detach the cover (rear)
[2].
F-10-282
F-10-285
10-95
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and shift the duplex 10.10.34 Duplex Registration Sensor
feeder motor [2] in the direction indicated to detach.
F-10-286
F-10-288
F-10-287
F-10-289
10-96
Chapter 10
F-10-290
F-10-292
1) Stand it so that the fixing feeder unit cover is at the
bottom. 10.10.35 Duplex Horizontal
2) Free the 6 snap-ons [A] and the 3 hooks [B]; then,
detach the sheet [1] from behind the fixing feeder Registration Sensor
assembly.
10.10.35.1 Removing the
Fixing Unit 0000-4890
F-10-291
10-97
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
10.10.35.2 Removing the detach the sheet [1] from behind the fixing feeder
Fixing/Feeder Unit 0000-4891 assembly.
F-10-296
F-10-297
10-98
Chapter 10
F-10-298 F-10-300
F-10-299
10-99
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-302
F-10-305
F-10-303
10-100
Chapter 10
F-10-308
F-10-306
10.10.36.9 Removing the
10.10.36.7 Removing the Rear Pickup Unit 0000-4924
Right Cover 0000-4922 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 4
screws [2]; then, detach the pickup unit [3].
The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover;
shift it to the direction indicated to detach.
F-10-309
10-101
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-310
F-10-312
F-10-311
F-10-313
10-102
Chapter 10
[1]
F-10-314
F-10-317
F-10-318
F-10-319
F-10-316
10-103
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-322
F-10-320
F-10-323
F-10-321
10-104
Chapter 10
F-10-327
F-10-328
10-105
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-332
F-10-329
6) Remove the duplex pickup sensor [1].
F-10-333
4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the lower 10.10.37.1 Removing the
guide plate [2].
Fixing Unit 0000-4876
F-10-331
10-106
Chapter 10
F-10-334 F-10-336
F-10-337
F-10-335
10.10.37.5 Removing the
Duplex Registration Clutch 0000-4880
F-10-338
10-107
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-341
F-10-339
4) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the duplex
registration clutch [2].
F-10-342
F-10-340
Fixing Unit 0000-4897
10-108
Chapter 10
F-10-343
F-10-345
F-10-346
F-10-347
10-109
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
[A]
F-10-351
F-10-348
F-10-349
F-10-352
5) Remove the roller shaft, and remove the E-ring [1];
then, detach the duplex pickup clutch [2].
F-10-350
10-110
Chapter 10
F-10-353
F-10-355
10.10.39.2 Removing the
Center Delivery Tray 0000-4801
10.10.39.4 Removing the
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the center
Delivery Vertical Path Unit
delivery tray [2].
(Old) 0000-4802
F-10-356
10-111
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-357
F-10-359
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 4
screws [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical path
unit [3].
F-10-360
10-112
Chapter 10
F-10-361
F-10-363
4)
6) Attach the strap [1] found on the delivery inside
cover to the new delivery vertical path cover [2];
then, fix it in place using the slip-stop [3].
To detach the delivery vertical path unit, lift the unit
and then pull it out toward the front.
F-10-364
F-10-362
10-113
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-365
F-10-368
11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2];
then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and
put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial
position.
F-10-366
10-114
Chapter 10
F-10-369
F-10-370
10-115
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-373
F-10-375
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 4
screws [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical path
unit [3].
F-10-376
10-116
Chapter 10
F-10-377
F-10-379
4)
6) Attach the strap [1] found on the delivery inside
cover to the new delivery vertical path cover [2];
then, fix it in place using the slip-stop [3].
To detach the delivery vertical path unit, lift the unit
and then pull it out toward the front.
F-10-380
F-10-378
10-117
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-381
F-10-384
11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2];
then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and
put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial
position.
F-10-382
10-118
Chapter 10
F-10-385
F-10-387
F-10-388
10-119
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
Spring
When attaching, shape the grounding leaf plate
10.10.40.7 Removing the Face- removed in 3) into a half-loop, and work so that the
Down Delivery Roller 1 0000-4826 frame plate [1] and the grounding leaf spring [2] are in
contact.
1) Shift up the grounding leaf spring [1] using a flat-
blade screwdriver, and free the 2 claws.
F-10-392
F-10-393
Points to Note When Attaching the grounding Leaf 1) Remove the 2 stoppers [1], and detach the fixing/
10-120
Chapter 10
F-10-396
F-10-397
F-10-395
F-10-398
10-121
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-399
F-10-400
F-10-403
F-10-401
10-122
Chapter 10
F-10-404
F-10-406
5)
F-10-405
10-123
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-408 F-10-410
10.10.42.3 Removing the 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 4
screws [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical path
Delivery Vertical Path Unit
unit [3].
(Old) 0000-4848
F-10-411
10-124
Chapter 10
F-10-412
F-10-414
4)
10.10.42.4 Removing the
Delivery Vertical Path Unit
(New) 0006-8959 To detach the delivery vertical path unit, lift the unit
and then pull it out toward the front.
F-10-415
F-10-413
10-125
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-418
6) Attach the strap [1] found on the delivery inside Engage the left and right hooks [3] on the machine
cover to the new delivery vertical path cover [2]; plate [4] so as to set the new delivery vertical path
then, fix it in place using the slip-stop [3]. unit in place.
F-10-417
10-126
Chapter 10
F-10-422
F-10-423
F-10-421 2) Remove the sensor flag [1], and detach the face-
down delivery sensor 2 [2].
11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2];
then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and
put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial
position.
F-10-424
10-127
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-427
F-10-428
10-128
Chapter 10
F-10-429 F-10-431
10.10.43.3 Removing the 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 4
screws [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical path
Delivery Vertical Path Unit
unit [3].
(Old) 0000-4854
F-10-432
10-129
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-433
F-10-435
4)
10.10.43.4 Removing the
Delivery Vertical Path Unit
(New) 0006-8960 To detach the delivery vertical path unit, lift the unit
and then pull it out toward the front.
F-10-436
10-130
Chapter 10
F-10-439
F-10-438
F-10-440
10-131
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-443
F-10-444
11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2];
then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and
put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial
position.
F-10-445
10-132
Chapter 10
3) Remove the gear [1] and detach the belt [2] at the
rear; then, remove the bushing [3], and detach the
delivery vertical roller 2 [4].
F-10-448
F-10-447
10-133
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-450
F-10-452
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 4
screws [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical path
unit [3].
F-10-453
10-134
Chapter 10
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the delivery (The delivery vertical path cover will no longer be
inside cover [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical used.)
path cover [3] from the machine.
F-10-454
F-10-456
4)
6) Attach the strap [1] found on the delivery inside
cover to the new delivery vertical path cover [2];
then, fix it in place using the slip-stop [3].
To detach the delivery vertical path unit, lift the unit
and then pull it out toward the front.
F-10-457
F-10-455
10-135
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-458
F-10-461
11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2];
then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and
put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial
position.
F-10-459
10-136
Chapter 10
F-10-462
F-10-463
F-10-465
10.10.45 Delivery Vertical Path
10.10.45.3 Removing the
Motor
Delivery Vertical Path Unit
(Old) 0000-4859
10.10.45.1 Removing the
Upper Left Cover 0000-4857
10-137
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-466 F-10-468
F-10-467
F-10-469
10-138
Chapter 10
F-10-472
F-10-471
F-10-473
4)
10-139
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-474
F-10-475
Engage the left and right hooks [3] on the machine F-10-477
plate [4] so as to set the new delivery vertical path
unit in place. 10) Mount the new delivery vertical path cover [1] to
the machine; then, fix the delivery inside cover [2]
in place using a screw [3].
10-140
Chapter 10
11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2];
then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and
put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial
position.
F-10-481
F-10-482
F-10-480
10-141
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-483
F-10-486
F-10-484
10.10.46.4 Removing the
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 4 Delivery Vertical Path Unit
screws [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical path (New) 0006-8963
unit [3].
10-142
Chapter 10
F-10-489
F-10-488
F-10-490
4)
10-143
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-491
F-10-492
Engage the left and right hooks [3] on the machine F-10-494
plate [4] so as to set the new delivery vertical path
unit in place. 10) Mount the new delivery vertical path cover [1] to
the machine; then, fix the delivery inside cover [2]
in place using a screw [3].
10-144
Chapter 10
F-10-495
F-10-498
11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2];
then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and
put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial MEMO:
position. The edge of the sensor flag is cut to an I-shape,
permitting it to be removed upward.
F-10-496 F-10-499
F-10-497
F-10-500
10-145
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-501
F-10-503
10.10.47.2 Removing the
Center Delivery Tray 0000-4863 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the delivery
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the center internal cover [2].
delivery tray [2].
F-10-504
F-10-502
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 4
screws [2]; then, detach the delivery vertical path
unit [3].
10-146
Chapter 10
F-10-505
F-10-506
F-10-508
4)
10-147
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-511
F-10-512
10-148
Chapter 10
F-10-515
11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2];
then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and
put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial
position.
F-10-513
F-10-516
F-10-514
10-149
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-518
F-10-519
F-10-521
10-150
Chapter 10
F-10-522
F-10-523
F-10-525
4)
10-151
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-528
F-10-529
10-152
Chapter 10
F-10-532
11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2];
then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and
put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial
position.
F-10-530
F-10-533
F-10-531
10-153
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
2) Remove the sensor flag [1], and detach the face- remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the upper left
down delivery sensor 2 [2]. cover [3].
F-10-535
F-10-537
F-10-538
F-10-536
10.10.49.3 Removing the
Delivery Vertical Path Unit
(Old) 0000-4806
10.10.49 Delivery Vertical Path
Cover Open/Closed Sensor
In case following models, refer to "Removing the
10.10.49.1 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit (New)".
- flom MLW01838
Upper Left Cover 0000-4804
- flom MLX02392
1) Open the delivery vertical path cover [1], and
10-154
Chapter 10
F-10-539 F-10-541
F-10-540
F-10-542
10-155
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-545
F-10-544
F-10-546
4)
10-156
Chapter 10
F-10-549
F-10-547
9) Using 4 screws, secure the delivery vertical path
7) Remove the dummy connector [1] from the unit [3] in place; then, connect the 3 connectors. At
machine. (The dummy connector will no longer be this time, check to make sure that the machine
used.) positioner [4] is properly in place.
F-10-548
10-157
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2];
then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and
put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial
position.
F-10-554
F-10-555
F-10-553
10-158
Chapter 10
F-10-556
F-10-559
F-10-557
10-159
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-562
F-10-561
F-10-563
4)
10-160
Chapter 10
F-10-566
F-10-564
9) Using 4 screws, secure the delivery vertical path
7) Remove the dummy connector [1] from the unit [3] in place; then, connect the 3 connectors. At
machine. (The dummy connector will no longer be this time, check to make sure that the machine
used.) positioner [4] is properly in place.
F-10-565
10-161
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-568
11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2];
then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and
put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial
position.
F-10-571
F-10-572
F-10-570
10-162
Chapter 10
F-10-573
F-10-574
F-10-576
10-163
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-577
F-10-580
F-10-578
10-164
Chapter 10
F-10-583
F-10-582
F-10-584
4)
10-165
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
F-10-587
F-10-585
9) Using 4 screws, secure the delivery vertical path
7) Remove the dummy connector [1] from the unit [3] in place; then, connect the 3 connectors. At
machine. (The dummy connector will no longer be this time, check to make sure that the machine
used.) positioner [4] is properly in place.
F-10-586
10-166
Chapter 10
F-10-589
11) Fix the upper left cover [1] using 2 screws [2];
then, close the delivery vertical path cover [3], and
put the fixing/feeding unit back in its initial
F-10-591
position.
F-10-590
10-167
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 10
10-168
Chapter 11 Fixing
System
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
11.1 Construction
11.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0005-9875
T-11-1
Item Description
Fixing drive control Fixing roller speed control (by paper type and mode)
T-11-2
11-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
Sub thermistor
Main thermistor
(TH1; non-contact)
Non-contact
separation claw
Thermal switch
(TP1)
Fixing roller
Pressure roller
Fixing roller
Fixing
delivery
sensor Pressure
(PS25) roller Fixing inlet
sensor
(PS27)
F-11-2
11-2
Chapter 11
SUB_FUSER_THM J108-8
FUSER DELI_SNS
FUSER ENTER_SNS
PM-FUSER
H1_ON
H2_ON
J69_1
J69_2
Heater driver
PCB
Fixing motor
Sub
J2_2
J2_3
J2_1
thermistor
(TH2)
Main thermistor
(TH1; non-contact) Fixing delivery
sensor (PS25)
Thermal switch
(TP1)
11-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
*1: The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature control (to 190˚C) according to the
reading of the main thermistor (TH1) or the sub thermistor (TH2).
F-11-4
11-4
Chapter 11
11.2.2 Sequence of Operations (printing; plain paper, for less than 180
sec) 0000-5015
Start
key ON
193˚C
190˚C
185˚C
174˚C
164˚C
*1: The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature control (to 190˚C) according
to the reading of the main thermistor (TH1) or the sub thermistor (TH2).
F-11-5
11-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
Start
key ON
193˚C
190˚C
185˚C
174˚C
164˚C
*1: The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature control (to 190˚C) according to the reading
of the main thermistor (TH1) or the sub thermistor (TH2).
F-11-6
11-6
Chapter 11
The fixing roller is driven by a pulse motor used exclusively for it;
The roller is controlled for the following:
1) speed to suit the type of medium used
2) speed to suit the (large) quantity of printing work
3) configuration to prevent partial deformation otherwise caused by a long period of no use
*PM-FUSER-B _6
Fixing motor
PM-FUSER-B _7
J105B
M24 *PM-FUSER-A _8
PM-FUSER-A _9
Fixing roller
DC controller
PCB
Pressure
roller
F-11-7
T-11-3
Note: The speed of the fixing roller is reduced (to half) to ensure good fixing on thick paper (thick paper speed) or
on a full-color transparency (full-color transparency mode).
11-7
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
If left unattended, the heat of the pressure roller would be absorbed by paper when a large quality of printing is under
way, causing the paper to curl appreciably upon delivery and, thus, making proper stacking difficult.To prevent
excess curling, the speed of the roller is reduced to half (as set in service mode) when as many as 100 large-size sheets
or as many as 200 small-size sheets have been handled.
To prevent deformation otherwise caused by the nip pressure of the fixing roller as occurring when the machine is
left unattended for a long period of time, the fixing roller is rotated for 0.5 sec at half speed (64.55 mm/sec) every 30
min after it has stopped (i.e., during standby/low power mode).
The fixing roller is driven by a pulse motor used exclusively for it;
The roller is controlled for the following:
[1] speed to suit the type of medium used
[2] speed to suit the (large) quantity of printing work
[3] during printing
[4] between long sheet intervals
[5] in response to overheating in non-paper contact area
[6] during return from low-power mode
11-8
Chapter 11
J51_2 H1_ON
J105A_14
H2_ON
J54_12
J54_11
J51_1 J105A_13
SUB_FUSER_THM J108-8
H1_ON
H2_ON
J69_1
J69_2
J2_3
J2_1
Sub thermistor
(TH2)
24V
Main thermistor
(TH1) (non-contact)
Thermal switch
(TP1)
F-11-8
11-9
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
The fixing roller is heated by 2 fixing heaters (main heater H1, sub heater H2).
The main heater repeats remaining ON for 3.5 sec and OFF for 1.5 sec until the fixing temperature reaches 190 deg C.
The sub heater, on the other hand, remains ON throughout.
The pressure roller is kept warm by the heat retaining heater (which remains ON throughout).
The fixing motor starts to rotate when the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 90 deg C.
It keeps rotating for a further 300 sec after the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 190 deg C (warm-up state; so
as to maintain the temperature of the pressure roller; the machine accepts a print job during this period).
360sec
*1
(H1)
Fixing sub heater 90˚C 190˚C *1
(H2)
Fixing heat retain-
ing heater (H3)
Fixing motor
(M24)
300 sec
*1: The main thermistor (TH1) or the sub thermistor (TH2) performs temperature control (to 190˚C)
according to the reading of the main sub heater or the sub heater.
F-11-9
The machine controls the fixing roller (to 190 deg C) according to the reading of the non-contact thermistor TH1 or
sub thermistor TH2.
If the reading of the main thermistor is assumed to be Th1 and that of the sub thermistor is assumed to be Th2,
if Th1 > Th2, the temperature control will be by the sub heater.
if Th1 <= Th2, the temperature control will be by the main heater.
The temperature of the pressure roller is controlled by the heat retaining heater, which repeatedly remains on for 480
sec and, thereafter, remainsON for 4.2 sec and OFF for 1.6 sec.
11-10
Chapter 11
WMUPR PSTBY
Fixing main heater
*1
(H1)
Fixing system
Fixing sub heater
*1
(H2)
Fixing heat retain-
*2
ing heater (H3)
Fixing motor
(M24)
F-11-10
The temperature of the fixing roller is controlled by turning on and off the main heater according to the reading taken
by the main thermistor.
During printing, the control (i.e., timing at which control is initiated) varies according to the type of paper being used.
The following shows the sequence of temperature control when printing on plain paper:
Start
key ON
193˚C
190˚C
185˚C
174˚C
164˚C
Controlled
to 164˚C
*1: The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature control
(to 190˚C) according to the reading of the main thermistor (TH1)
and the sub thermistor (TH2).
F-11-11
11-11
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
If a print job exceeds 180 sec, the fixing roller is rotated for 30 sec after the job
(so that the heat of the fixing roller is transmitted evenly to the pressure roller).
Start
key ON
193˚C
190˚C
185˚C
174˚C
164˚C
*1: The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature control
(to 190˚C) according to the reading of the main thermistor (TH1)
and the sub thermistor (TH2).
F-11-12
The temperature of the fixing roller is controlled over the distance between sheets within a print job:
1. If the distance is 15 sec or more and less than 60 sec,
The fixing temperature sequence and the heater (main/sub) control sequence are continued over the distance.
2. If the distance is 60 sec or more
The fixing temperature control sequence and the heater (main/sub) control sequence are performed over the distance
up to 60 sec; thereafter, only the heater sequence control is performed.
11-12
Chapter 11
Start
key ON
Fixing system Fixing main Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled
*1 to 193˚C to 185˚C to 174˚C to 164˚C to 164˚C to 174˚C to 185˚C to 174˚C to 164˚C *1
heater (H1)
Fixing sub *1 *1
heater (H2)
Fixing heat
retaining
heater (H3)
193˚C
190˚C
185˚C
174˚C
Paper
passed
N
N: sheet-to-sheet
distance after 60 sec.
*1: The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature control
(to 190˚C) according to the reading of the main thermistor (TH1)
and the sub thermistor (TH2).
F-11-13
If the sub thermistor (TH2) registers 195 deg C or more, the machine turns off the sub heater.
If it registers 210 deg C or more, the machine also turns off the main heater.
When the temperature at the ends falls below 210 deg C, the machine turns on the main heater.
If the temperature at the ends falls below 195 deg C, the machine also turns on the sub heater.
If the reading of the main thermistor is below the control temperature at this time, the heaters are turned on.
After a lapse of 30 sec, the machine becomes ready to accept a job only in black mono mode.
In the case of color mode, the machine will not accept a job until the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 190 deg
C after a lapse of 30 sec.
11-13
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
The mechanisms involved in the detection of the passage of paper in the fixing unit are as follows:
1. Fixing Inlet Sensor
Detects passage of paper being moved into the fixing unit.
2. Fixing Delivery Sensor
Detects the passage of paper being moved from the fixing assembly.
Fixing roller
DC controller
Fixing PCB
delivery
sensor Pressure
(PS25) roller Fixing
inlet sensor
(PS27)
+5V
J108_6
J108_5
FUSER_ENTER_SNS
J108_4
+5V
J108_3
J108_2
FUSER_DELI_SNS
J108_1
F-11-14
11-14
Chapter 11
Once its contact has opened, the thermal switch will not return to its initial state even after the error temperature has
been corrected. Be sure to replace it.
If the internal temperature of the thermal switch exceeds 222 -/+8 deg C, the thermal switch goes OFF to cut the
power to the fixing heater.
J105A
13
14
12
9
Q10 Q20
2
1
3
6
J51
Q23 Q11 Q22 Q21
6 J69_7 HRLY_ON
Fuse PCB 3 J69_9 TR_ERR*
J54
2 J69_11 H2_ON
1 J69_12 H1_ON
J2_2
J2_3
TP
H1
Fixing roller
H2
F-11-15
11-15
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
When the sub thermistor mounted at the end of the fixing roller detects 239 deg C, the signal from the DC controller
turns off the heater drive circuit, thus cutting off power to the main heater and the sub heater.
CPU DC controller
PCB
J108 J105
-1
-9
-12
-13
-14
-8
Main thermistor detection signal (by infrared) -10
Main thermistor detection signal (by temperature) -11
-14
CB
J51
Fuse
PCB
RL
SW
J62
-2
-1
TH2 TH1
Fixing roller H1
H2
H3
F-11-16
11-16
Chapter 11
F-11-18
c 1.5mm
Standard:
Paper 8.75mm±0.25mm
movement b (less than
Standard: Center 5000 sheets)
|a c| = 0.5mm or less of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm
F-11-17 (5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm
11-17
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
F-11-21
F-11-20
Service Mode
COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK
Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto
measurement.
F-11-22
11.5.2 Fixing Upper Frame
2) Remove the insulating cover [1].
F-11-23
11-18
Chapter 11
F-11-24
4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the F-11-27
4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3].
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/
thermal switch).
F-11-25
F-11-28
11.5.2.3 Removing the Fixing
Upper Frame 0000-5043 4) Remove the 2 adjusting screws [1].
1) Remove the 2 screws [2] of the grounding wire.
(AC heater line)
F-11-29
F-11-26
11-19
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing 11.5.2.4 After Disassembling
upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2]. the Fixing Unit 0000-5044
F-11-30
F-11-33
c 1.5mm
F-11-31 Standard:
Paper 8.75mm±0.25mm
movement b (less than
Standard: Center 5000 sheets)
|a c| = 0.5mm or less of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm
7) Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower (5000 sheets
or more)
1.5mm
frame, and detach the fixing upper frame [1]. a
F-11-34
F-11-32
11-20
Chapter 11
F-11-36
F-11-35
F-11-37
Service Mode
COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK 2) Remove the insulating cover [1].
Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto
measurement.
11-21
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
F-11-38
F-11-41
F-11-39
4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the
4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3].
F-11-42
F-11-40
11-22
Chapter 11
F-11-43
F-11-46
4) Remove the 2 adjusting screws [1].
7) Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower
frame, and detach the fixing upper frame [1].
F-11-44
F-11-45
11-23
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
F-11-48
F-11-49
3) Pull out the fixing main heater [1] and the fixing
sub heater [2].
F-11-52
F-11-50
11-24
Chapter 11
c 1.5mm
Standard:
Paper 8.75mm±0.25mm
movement b (less than
Standard: Center 5000 sheets)
|a c| = 0.5mm or less of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm
(5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm
F-11-55
F-11-54
11-25
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
F-11-57
F-11-56
Service Mode
COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK
Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto
measurement.
F-11-58
11.5.4 Pressure Roller
2) Remove the insulating cover [1].
F-11-59
11-26
Chapter 11
F-11-60
4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the F-11-63
4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3].
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/
thermal switch).
F-11-61
F-11-64
11.5.4.3 Removing the Fixing
Upper Frame 0000-5068 4) Remove the 2 adjusting screws [1].
1) Remove the 2 screws [2] of the grounding wire.
(AC heater line)
F-11-65
F-11-62
11-27
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing 11.5.4.4 Removing the Fixing
upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2]. Temperature Retainer Heater 0000-5069
F-11-66
F-11-67
F-11-70
7) Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower
frame, and detach the fixing upper frame [1]. 3) Remove the screw [1] at the rear, and detach the
heater retaining plate [2].
F-11-68
11-28
Chapter 11
F-11-71
F-11-74
F-11-72
F-11-75
F-11-73
11-29
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
F-11-77
F-11-76
F-11-78
Service Mode
COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK 2) Remove the insulating cover [1].
Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto
measurement.
11-30
Chapter 11
F-11-79
F-11-82
F-11-80
4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the
4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3].
F-11-83
F-11-81
11-31
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
F-11-84
F-11-87
4) Remove the 2 adjusting screws [1].
7) Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower
frame, and detach the fixing upper frame [1].
F-11-85
F-11-86
11-32
Chapter 11
F-11-89 F-11-90
F-11-91
11.5.5.5 After Disassembling
the Fixing Unit 0000-5077 3) Adjust the balance between the front and the rear:
If you have loosened the adjusting screw used to 4) If the median value of the measured nip is toward
secure the upper frame and the lower frame of the the lower limit of the standard, tighten the screw on
fixing unit in place (as when replacing a roller), be the side with a lower nip value at the edge.
sure to adjust the nip of the fixing roller as follows:
1) Turn the adjusting screw [1] at the front/rear so that MEMO:
the length of the pressure spring is 31.5mm. A 1/2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about
0.4 mm.
A 1/2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the
nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the
rear by 0.2 mm.
11-33
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
F-11-93
F-11-92
Service Mode
COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK
Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto
measurement.
F-11-94
11.5.6 Fixing Sub Thermistor
2) Remove the insulating cover [1].
F-11-95
11-34
Chapter 11
F-11-96
4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the F-11-99
4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3].
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/
thermal switch).
F-11-97
F-11-100
11.5.6.3 Removing the Fixing
Upper Frame 0000-5081 4) Remove the 2 adjusting screws [1].
1) Remove the 2 screws [2] of the grounding wire.
(AC heater line)
F-11-101
F-11-98
11-35
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing 11.5.6.4 Removing the Fixing
upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2]. Sub thermistor 0000-5082
F-11-102
F-11-103
F-11-106
F-11-104
11-36
Chapter 11
c 1.5mm
Standard:
Paper 8.75mm±0.25mm
movement b (less than
Standard: Center 5000 sheets)
|a c| = 0.5mm or less of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm
(5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm
F-11-107
MEMO:
A 1/2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about
0.4 mm.
A 1/2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the
F-11-108
nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the
rear by 0.2 mm.
Service Mode
If the median value of the measured nip is toward the
COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK
higher limit of the standard, tighten the screw on the
Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto
side with a higher nip value at the edge.
measurement.
If the nip needs adjustment while the nip balance is
correct, the adjusting screw both at the front and rear
may be given a 1/2 turn so that the nip may change by
about 0.3 mm. 11.5.7 Fixing Thermal Switch
11-37
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
F-11-109 F-11-112
11.5.7.2 Removing the 4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the
Delivery Upper Guide 0000-5086 4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3].
1) Remove the insulating cover fixing plate [1]. (3
snap-on claws)
F-11-113
F-11-110
F-11-111
11-38
Chapter 11
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2].
connector [2].
F-11-118
F-11-115
6) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/ upper frame/lower frame) at the front.
thermal switch).
F-11-116 F-11-119
4) Remove the 2 adjusting screws [1]. 7) Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower
frame, and detach the fixing upper frame [1].
F-11-117
F-11-120
5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing
11-39
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
F-11-122
F-11-123
11-40
Chapter 11
11.5.7.5 After Disassembling nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the
the Fixing Unit 0000-5089 rear by 0.2 mm.
F-11-124
c 1.5mm
Standard: F-11-126
Paper 8.75mm±0.25mm
movement b (less than
Standard: Center 5000 sheets)
|a c| = 0.5mm or less of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm
(5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm
Service Mode
F-11-125 COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK
Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto
3) Adjust the balance between the front and the rear: measurement.
4) If the median value of the measured nip is toward
the lower limit of the standard, tighten the screw on
the side with a lower nip value at the edge.
MEMO:
A 1/2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about
0.4 mm.
A 1/2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the
11-41
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
F-11-129
F-11-127
F-11-128
F-11-131
11-42
Chapter 11
F-11-134
F-11-132
F-11-135
F-11-136
11-43
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
F-11-139
F-11-137
2) Remove the 2 screws [1] from the end of the heater
7) Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower at the front.
frame, and detach the fixing upper frame [1].
F-11-140
F-11-138
3) Pull out the fixing main heater [1] and the fixing
11.5.8.4 Remove the Fixing sub heater [2].
Main Heater and the Fixing
Sub Heater 0000-5049
F-11-141
11-44
Chapter 11
11.5.8.5 After Disassembling nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the
the Fixing Unit 0000-5050 rear by 0.2 mm.
F-11-142
c 1.5mm
Standard: F-11-144
Paper 8.75mm±0.25mm
movement b (less than
Standard: Center 5000 sheets)
|a c| = 0.5mm or less of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm
(5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm
Service Mode
F-11-143 COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK
Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto
3) Adjust the balance between the front and the rear: measurement.
4) If the median value of the measured nip is toward
the lower limit of the standard, tighten the screw on
the side with a lower nip value at the edge.
11.5.9 Fixing Heat Retaining Heater
MEMO:
A 1/2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about 11.5.9.1 Removing the Fixing
0.4 mm. Unit 0000-5060
A 1/2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit.
11-45
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing unit 3) Remove the rear cover [1]. (2 snap-on claws)
[2].
F-11-148
F-11-145
4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the
11.5.9.2 Removing the 4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3].
Delivery Upper Guide 0000-5061
F-11-149
F-11-146
11.5.9.3 Removing the Fixing
2) Remove the insulating cover [1]. Upper Frame 0000-5062
F-11-147
11-46
Chapter 11
F-11-150
F-11-153
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer
connector [2]. 5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing
upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2].
F-11-151
F-11-154
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/
thermal switch). 6) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing
upper frame/lower frame) at the front.
F-11-152
11-47
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
F-11-158
F-11-159
F-11-157
F-11-160
11-48
Chapter 11
11.5.9.5 After Disassembling nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the
the Fixing Unit 0000-5064 rear by 0.2 mm.
F-11-161
c 1.5mm
Standard: F-11-163
Paper 8.75mm±0.25mm
movement b (less than
Standard: Center 5000 sheets)
|a c| = 0.5mm or less of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm
(5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm
Service Mode
F-11-162 COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK
Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto
3) Adjust the balance between the front and the rear: measurement.
4) If the median value of the measured nip is toward
the lower limit of the standard, tighten the screw on
the side with a lower nip value at the edge.
MEMO:
A 1/2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about
0.4 mm.
A 1/2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the
11-49
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
11.5.10 Fixing Inlet Guide 1) Turn the adjusting screw [1] at the front/rear so that
the length of the pressure spring is 31.5mm.
F-11-166
F-11-164 2) Fit the fixing unit in the machine, and execute the
following service mode to measure the nip:
11.5.10.2 Removing the Fixing COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK
Inlet Guide 0000-5038
c 1.5mm
Standard:
1) While pushing its claw [2] at the front, detach the Paper 8.75mm±0.25mm
movement b (less than
fixing inlet guide [1] to the front. Standard:
|a c| = 0.5mm or less
Center 5000 sheets)
of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm
(5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm
F-11-167
MEMO:
A 1/2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about
F-11-165 0.4 mm.
A 1/2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the
11.5.10.3 After Disassembling nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the
the Fixing Unit 0000-5039 rear by 0.2 mm.
11-50
Chapter 11
F-11-169
F-11-168
F-11-170
11-51
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
F-11-172 F-11-174
4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the 11.5.12.2 Removing the
4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3]. Delivery Upper Guide 0000-5104
F-11-173
F-11-175
F-11-176
11-52
Chapter 11
F-11-177
4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the F-11-180
4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3].
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/
thermal switch).
F-11-178
F-11-181
11.5.12.3 Removing the Fixing
Upper Frame 0000-5105 4) Remove the 2 adjusting screws [1].
1) Remove the 2 screws [2] of the grounding wire.
(AC heater line)
F-11-182
F-11-179
11-53
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing 11.5.12.4 Removing the Fixing
upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2]. Temperature Retainer Heater 0000-5106
F-11-183
F-11-184
F-11-187
7) Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower
frame, and detach the fixing upper frame [1]. 3) Remove the screw [1] at the rear, and detach the
heater retaining plate [2].
F-11-185
11-54
Chapter 11
F-11-188
F-11-191
F-11-189
11-55
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
Guide
When mounting, be sure to set the spring [1] on either
end of the delivery lower guide as indicated.
F-11-193
F-11-196
F-11-194
F-11-197
4) Remove the delivery lower guide [1] from the front/
rear side plate.
F-11-195
11-56
Chapter 11
F-11-198
c 1.5mm F-11-200
Standard:
Paper 8.75mm±0.25mm
movement b (less than
Standard: Center 5000 sheets)
|a c| = 0.5mm or less of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm
(5000 sheets
or more) Service Mode
a 1.5mm
F-11-199 COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK
Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto
3) Adjust the balance between the front and the rear: measurement.
4) If the median value of the measured nip is toward
the lower limit of the standard, tighten the screw on
the side with a lower nip value at the edge. 11.5.13 Fixing Inlet Sensor
11-57
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
F-11-201 F-11-204
11.5.13.2 Removing the 4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the
Delivery Upper Guide 0000-5092 4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3].
1) Remove the insulating cover fixing plate [1]. (3
snap-on claws)
F-11-205
F-11-202
F-11-203
11-58
Chapter 11
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the drawer upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2].
connector [2].
F-11-210
F-11-207
6) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/ upper frame/lower frame) at the front.
thermal switch).
F-11-208 F-11-211
4) Remove the 2 adjusting screws [1]. 7) Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower
frame, and detach the fixing upper frame [1].
F-11-209
F-11-212
5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing
11-59
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
F-11-215
MEMO:
A 1/2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about
F-11-213 0.4 mm.
A 1/2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the
11.5.13.5 After Disassembling nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the
rear by 0.2 mm.
the Fixing Unit 0000-5095
F-11-214
11-60
Chapter 11
F-11-217
F-11-216
Service Mode
COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK
Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto
measurement.
F-11-218
11.5.14 Fixing Delivery Sensor
2) Remove the insulating cover [1].
F-11-219
11-61
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
F-11-220
4) Pick the tab [2] of the lower guide [1], and free the F-11-223
4 snap-ons to detach the delivery upper guide [3].
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] (for the thermistor/
thermal switch).
F-11-221
F-11-224
11.5.14.3 Removing the Fixing
Upper Frame 0000-5099 4) Remove the 2 adjusting screws [1].
1) Remove the 2 screws [2] of the grounding wire.
(AC heater line)
F-11-225
F-11-222
11-62
Chapter 11
5) Remove the shaft [1] (used to secure the fixing 11.5.14.4 Removing the Fixing
upper frame/lower frame) in place and the gear [2]. Delivery Sensor 0000-5100
F-11-226
F-11-227
F-11-230
11-63
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
c 1.5mm
Standard:
Paper 8.75mm±0.25mm
movement b (less than
Standard: Center 5000 sheets)
|a c| = 0.5mm or less of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm
(5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm
F-11-231
MEMO:
A 1/2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about
0.4 mm.
A 1/2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the
nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the
rear by 0.2 mm.
F-11-232
If the median value of the measured nip is toward the
higher limit of the standard, tighten the screw on the
side with a higher nip value at the edge.
Service Mode
If the nip needs adjustment while the nip balance is
COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK
correct, the adjusting screw both at the front and rear
Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto
may be given a 1/2 turn so that the nip may change by
measurement.
about 0.3 mm.
11-64
Chapter 11
1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover
distribution PCB, and free the harness from the When attaching the cover, take care so that the cut-off
wire saddle [2]; then, remove the 6 screws [3], and will not come into contact with the latch of the flat
detach the main controller cover [4]. cable. Otherwise, the flat cable can come loose.
[1]
F-11-235
F-11-236
F-11-234
11-65
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
F-11-237
F-11-240
F-11-238
F-11-241
F-11-239
11-66
Chapter 11
F-11-242
F-11-244
2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and remove the base plate
[2]; then, detach the high-voltage unit [3].
2) Remove the mounting screw [1] of the high-voltage
cable, and free the high-voltage cable [2] from the
cable clamp [3]; then, detach it from the edge
saddle [4] of the high-voltage unit base.
F-11-243
11-67
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
F-11-246
F-11-248
F-11-247
11-68
Chapter 11
1)
F-11-249
F-11-250
11-69
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 11
11-70
Chapter 12 Externals and
Controls
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Chapter 12
The machine's control panel consists of PCBs, LCD, and touch panel as shown below; the control panel is associated
with the following functions:
- LCD indication
- contrast adjustment
- touch switch input
- hard key input
J511A,J511B
Color LCD
J1119 J1116,J1117
Control Keypad PCB
panel
inverter PCB
Control panel
F-12-1
The CPU on the main controller PCB sends data (display information) to the control panel CPU PCB as instructed
by various programs.
The data is moved through the control panel CPU PCB to reach the color LCD.
The machine is equipped with a dial on its control panel designed for use by the user for adjustment of the LCD
contrast.
12-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
- Monitoring key inputs (relays the inputs made by keypad keys and function keys to the CPU on the main controller
PCB)
- Controlling the buzzer sound
- Turning on/off thecontrolpanel LEDs
12-2
Chapter 12
12.2 Counters
12.2.1 Outline 0000-5114
The machine is equipped with counters that keep track of the number of prints made according to the type of print;
a specific counter reading is shown in response to a press on the Check key on the control panel.The particulars of
the counter settings made at time of shipment from factory and grouped by model are as follows:
T-12-1
230V Total 1 Total Copy + print Copy + print Total Total (duplex)
(*4) (B&W 1) (full color/ (full color/ (mono
large) small) color/1)
12-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
240V Total 1 total (full total (full color total (black- total (black- scan (total 1)
(*5) color + + mono color; and-white; and-white;
mono small) large) small)
color;
large)
230V Total 1 total (full total (full color total (black- total (black- scan (total 1)
(*7) color + + mono color; and-white; and-white;
mono small) large) small)
color;
large)
230V Total 1 total (full total (full color total (black- total (black- scan (total 1)
(*8) color + + mono color; and-white; and-white;
mono small) large) small)
color;
large)
230V Total 1 total (full total (full color total (black- total (black- scan (total 1)
(*9) color + + mono color; and-white; and-white;
mono large) large) small)
color;
large)
230V Total 1 total (full total (full color total (black- total (back- scan (total 1)
(*10) color + + mono color; and-white; and-white;
mono large) large) small)
color;
large)
12-4
Chapter 12
T-12-2
Guide to Notation:
COPIER>OPTION>USER>COUNTER1 through 6
These counters may be set in service mode to serve for different counter readings. (In the case
of the 120/230V model, all counters may be assigned different counter readings.)
T-12-3
When making a single-side print or printing on the 2nd side of a double-side print, the counter reading is incremented
when the trailing edge of paper leaves the machine, as indicated by the output of the following sensor:
T-12-4
Condition Sensor
Finisher absent face-down delivery (center tray): center delivery tray full sensor (PS8)
The machine identifies the end of printing on the 1st side of a double-sided print and increments the counter reading
when the duplex pickup sensor (PS24) goes ON.
12-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
12.3 Fans
12.3.1 Outline 0000-5118
The names and functions of the fans used inside the machine are as follows:
T-12-5
FM3 machine cooling fan cools the drum cartridge and the developing
motor
FM2 fixing heat exhaust fan discharges the heat generated by the fixing
assembly to the outside of the machine
FM6 manual feed cooling fan cools the pre-registration motor (duplex model
only)
FM7
FM6
FM3
FM2
FM8
FM4
FM1
F-12-2
12-6
Chapter 12
The following is the sequence of operations used by the machine to drive the fans:
When the control panel power switch is pressed to start sleep mode, the control panel LCD goes OFF. If the reading
of the environment sensor is 30 deg C or higher at this timing, the machine rotates the fixing heat discharge fan,
power supply cooling fan, and cleaner cooling fan for 30 min continuously and, thereafter, moves into sleep mode.
Main
Control panel power
Main power Print request power switch switch
switch ON signal OFF OFF
Warm-up Standby Printing Standby Low-power mode Power-save mode Sleep mode
F-12-3
12-7
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
The reader unit is supplied with 24 VDC by the printer unit at the following timing of operation:
Standby
PSTBY
DC 24V
F-12-4
The power supply of the printer unit and the various accessories are wired as follows:
The anti-condensation heater inside the reader unit and the power supply cable are as shown. The machine's power
supply uses no more than 2 lines to connect to any external power outlet.
T-12-6
12-8
Chapter 12
Finisher-
M1/N1/N2
PS Print Server
Unit-C1
Outlet1
Cable for Outlet2
deck heater
Outlet3 Inlet
Pedestal
If a pedestal is installed,
connect the pedestal power
cable to its outlet 2.
F-12-5
The machine uses the I/F PCB to produce the following types of DC voltage from the 24 VDC supplied by the printer
unit:
- 5 VDC (for sensors)
- 3.3 VDC (for ICs)
- 2.5 VDC (for ICs)
- 15 VDC (for scanner motor drive)
- 24 VDC (for scanner motor drive)
The reader controller PCB produces the following type of DC voltage:
- 12 VDC (for CCD unit)
12-9
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
Interface PCB
24 VDC
J3
06
05
J3
01
24 VDC J3 04
From printer unit J3 09 J2
11 J3
J2 06
01 J2
100/230 VAC
24 VDC
J6
01
100/230 VAC
Fuse PCB
The machine's DC power supply is fed with power by the 2 DC power supply PCB (DCP1, DCP2) and the DC power
supply PCB (for accessories) built inside the pedestal (plain, cassette pedestal).
DC Power Supply PCB
- generates DC power from AC power
- protects against current/voltage
- supplies DC power to loads
DC Power Supply PCB for Accessories (inside pedestal)
- generates DC power from AC power
- protects against overcurrent/voltage
- supplies DC power to accessories (paper deck, finisher)
12-10
Chapter 12
Leakage
breaker
Main
Heater
power
control PCB
switch
Main
3.3V controller panel unit
Power 3.3VAN PCB (sub)
distribution
24V
Intermediate Drum
24V 24VATR
transfer motor drive unit
24V (Y,M,C,K)
Duplex
5V
driver PCB
3.3V HVI(Y,M,C,K)
3.3VAN FAX board
5V (option) HVI-SUB
5VAN
HV2
24V
HV2-SUB
HV4(YM/CK)
HV3
High-voltage unit
VAN: All Night Voltage
24V,5V Cassette
feeder
unit 1/2
F-12-7
The rated output and the power supply tolerance of the DC power supply PCB (DCP1 PCB, DCP2 PCB) of the
printer unit are as follows:
T-12-7
12-11
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
The machine's power supply PCB and the power supply PCBs of its accessories are equipped with an overcurrent/
voltage protective mechanisms that prevent damage to the power supply circuit by automatically cutting off the
output voltage in the event of an overcurrent/voltage caused, for example, by a short-circuit in any of its loads.
If the protective function has gone ON, turn off the power switch of the printer unit, disconnect the power plug of
the printer unit or the accessories power supply circuit, and remove the cause of activation; then, leave the machine
alone for about 3 min, and turn it on to reset.
The SRAM PCB and the DC controller PCB of the machine's main controller PCB are each equipped with a lithium
battery for backup in the event of a power outage or disconnection of the power plug.
T-12-8
T-12-9
The lithium battery must be replaced only with the one indicated in the Parts Catalog; otherwise, it may trigger
a fire or explosion.
Do not charge, disassemble, or incinerate the lithium battery; mishandling can lead to a fire or a chemical explosion.
Keep the lithium battery out of reach of children. Be sure to dispose of a used battery strictly in accordance with all
applicable regulations.
12-12
Chapter 12
1. Standby Mode
In standby mode, the machine is in operation or is ready to operate, with all its parts supplied with power.
2. Power-Save Mode
The term "power-save mode" is used generically to refer to the following modes, in which the machine is supplied
with power differently than it is in normal mode: power-save, low-power, sleep. A shift in the direction of 'resent
power-save mode' to 'low-power mode' and then to 'sleep' mode occurs automatically.
- Power-Save Mode
T-12-10
Shift: A shift to power-save mode is initiated only in response to a press on the Save
Power button on the control panel.
Description: The power used by the machine is reduced according to the settings made in
user mode (immediate recovery, -10%, -25%, -50%; the fixing unit is
controlled to 190 deg C).
T-12-11
Shift: A shift is made only in response to the passage of time (auto low-power shift
time) selected in user mode.
Description: The power used by the machine is reduced to enable the machine to remain in
a state that satisfies the standards under Energy Star.The power supplied to the
reader unit will remain ON except the +24V power, which the reader unit uses
to generate internal power. (All operations remain at rest.)
The printer unit keeps the temperature of the fixing unit to a specific level (190
deg C) which is lower than when the machine is in normal operating mode.
T-12-12
Shift: A shift is made in response to the passage of time (auto sleep shift time)
specified in user mode or in response to a press on the control panel software
power switch.
12-13
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
Description: In sleep mode 1 (relatively higher power consumption), the fixing assembly
is totally deprived of power. The DC controller PCB, however, remains
supplied with power.
In sleep mode 2 (relatively lower power consumption), on the other hand, the
printer unit (including the fixing assembly) remains OFF; the main controller
PCB is supplied with all-night power as indicated in the table:
T-12-13
3. AC OFF Mode
AC OFF mode occurs when the main power switch is turned off, i.e., all parts of the machine is deprived of power.
The supply of power to the various systems of the machine in each of the foregoing modes is as follows:
T-12-14
+12VAN ON ON ON ON ON OFF
12-14
Chapter 12
F-12-10
12-15
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-11 F-12-14
2) Remove the 9 screws [1] of the main controller box. 4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the
main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine,
and open it.
F-12-12
F-12-15
F-12-13
12-16
Chapter 12
F-12-16 F-12-18
F-12-17
F-12-19
12-17
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-20
F-12-22
F-12-21
12-18
Chapter 12
[1]
F-12-26
F-12-24
12-19
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-27 F-12-30
2) Remove the 9 screws [1] of the main controller box. 4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the
main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine,
and open it.
F-12-28
F-12-31
F-12-29
12-20
Chapter 12
F-12-32
F-12-34
12.5.2.8 Removing the Fixing
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the
Heat Discharge Fan 0000-5153
connector [2]; then, detach the heat exhaust fan unit
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the
[3].
connector [2]; then, detach the fixing heat discharge
fan [3].
F-12-35
F-12-33
12-21
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-37
F-12-39
3) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the
developing drive assembly [2].
2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and remove the base plate
[2]; then, detach the high-voltage unit [3].
F-12-38
12-22
Chapter 12
F-12-40
F-12-43
F-12-41
12-23
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-46
F-12-47
12-24
Chapter 12
F-12-51
12-25
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-52
F-12-54
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the
control panel [2]. 12.5.7.5 Removing the Control
Panel LCD Unit 0000-5191
F-12-53
12-26
Chapter 12
1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover
distribution PCB, and free the harness from the When attaching the cover, take care so that the cut-off
wire saddle [2]; then, remove the 6 screws [3], and will not come into contact with the latch of the flat
detach the main controller cover [4]. cable. Otherwise, the flat cable can come loose.
[1]
F-12-58
F-12-59
F-12-57
12-27
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
1) After replacing the DC controller PCB, use the 1) Removing the left rear upper cover.
following service mode to initialize the memory of
the DC controller PCB: 12.5.9.4 Removing the
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DC-CON Controller Box Cover 0000-5317
2) Enter the settings indicated on the service label
1) Disconnect the connector J1512 [1] from the power
using the following service mode:
distribution PCB, and free the harness from the
COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>PVE-OFST
wire saddle [2]; then, remove the 6 screws [3], and
Use it to enter an adjustment value for the laser
detach the main controller cover [4].
beam position.
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST
Use it to adjust the timing at which the registration
roller clutch goes ON.
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REFE
Use it to adjust the horizontal registration for re-
pickup.
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A4R
Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for the
manual feed tray.
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A6R
Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for the
manual feed tray.
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A4
Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for the
manual feed tray.
3) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
4) Make the following selections in service mode: F-12-60
COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER>L-ADJ-0.
5) Press the OK key. (The machine starts auto 12.5.9.5 Removing the DC
adjustment and will indicate 'END' at its end.) Controller PCB Cover 0000-5318
12-28
Chapter 12
F-12-63
[1]
F-12-64
F-12-62
12-29
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-66
F-12-68
4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the
main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine, 12.5.10 Fuse PCB
and open it.
F-12-69
12-30
Chapter 12
F-12-71
1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect all 12.5.11.5 Removing the
connectors of the fuse PCB; then, detach the DC
Leakage Breaker 0000-5302
power supply unit [2].
1) Remove the 5 screws [1], and disconnect the
connectors from the fuse PCB; then, detach the
power supply PCB base [2].
12-31
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-76
F-12-73
2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the protective 12.5.12 Duplex Driver PCB
plate [1].
12.5.12.1 Removing the Upper
Rear Cover 0000-5311
3) Remove the 4 terminals [1] and the 2 screws [2]; connectors; then, detach the lattice connector
Mounting [2].
then, detach the leakage breaker [3].
F-12-75
F-12-77
12-32
Chapter 12
F-12-79
F-12-78
12.5.13.5 Removing the DC
12.5.13 Relay PCB 1 Controller PCB Cover 0000-5306
12-33
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
[1]
F-12-81
F-12-84
F-12-85
F-12-86
F-12-83
12-34
Chapter 12
1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free 1) Open the front cover and the drum unit cover.
all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove 2) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the inside
the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB cover [2].
[2] together with its base.
F-12-89
F-12-87
F-12-88
F-12-90
12.5.14 Control Panel CPU PCB 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the
control panel [2].
12.5.14.1 Removing the Upper
Left Cover (small) 0000-5179
12-35
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-91
F-12-92
F-12-94
12.5.15 Control Panel Key Switch
PCB 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the
control panel [2].
12-36
Chapter 12
F-12-95
F-12-97
12.5.15.4 Removing the
Control Panel Back Plate 0000-5177 12.5.16 Control Panel Inverter PCB
1) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] from the CPU
PCB, remove the 2 flat cables [2], disconnect the 2 12.5.16.1 Removing the Upper
connectors [3] from the inverter PCB, remove the
Left Cover (small) 0000-5183
binding screw [4], and remove the 8 self-tapping
1) Remove the upper left cover (small).
screws [5]; then, detach the control panel back plate
[6].
12.5.16.2 Removing the Inside
Cover 0000-5184
F-12-96
12-37
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-99
F-12-101
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the
control panel [2]. 12.5.16.5 Removing the
Control Panel Inverter PCB 0000-5186
F-12-100
12-38
Chapter 12
F-12-103
F-12-104
F-12-105
12-39
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
[1]
F-12-110
F-12-108
12-40
Chapter 12
F-12-111 F-12-114
2) Remove the 9 screws [1] of the main controller box. 4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the
main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine,
and open it.
F-12-112
F-12-115
F-12-113
12-41
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-118
F-12-116
12.5.19 Front Cover Open/Closed
12.5.18.8 Removing the Sensor
Registration Unit Open/
Closed Sensor Mounting 0000-5234 12.5.19.1 Removing the
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the Tonner Container release
screw [2]; then, detach the registration unit open/
Lever 0006-2360
closed sensor mounting [3].
1) Open the front cover.
2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and the 4 tonner container
release levers [2].
F-12-117
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 12.5.19.2 Removing the
registration unit open/closed sensor [2]. Cleaner Fan Cover 0000-5216
12-42
Chapter 12
F-12-120
F-12-122
12-43
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-126
F-12-125
12-44
Chapter 12
[1]
F-12-129
F-12-130
F-12-128
12-45
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-132
F-12-135
F-12-136
12-46
Chapter 12
F-12-139
F-12-137
2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and remove the base plate
[2]; then, detach the high-voltage unit [3].
12.5.20.10 Removing the
Lattice Connector Mounting 0000-5201
F-12-140
12-47
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-142
F-12-143 F-12-144
12-48
Chapter 12
F-12-147
F-12-145
[1]
F-12-146
F-12-149
12.5.21.6 Opening the Main 3) Free the controller box from the hook [A/B] at the
Controller Box 0000-5241
top of the main controller box.
12-49
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-150
F-12-152
4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the
main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine, 12.5.21.8 Removing the
and open it.
Registration Unit Open/
Closed Sensor Mounting 0000-5243
F-12-151
12-50
Chapter 12
F-12-156
F-12-154
F-12-157
12-51
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
1) Removing the left rear upper cover. 1) Disconnect all connectors from the PCB, and free
all harnesses from the cable clamps; then, remove
12.5.22.7 Removing the DC the 7 screws [1], and detach the DC controller PCB
Controller PCB Cover 0000-5210 [2] together with its base.
F-12-160
[1]
F-12-161
12-52
Chapter 12
F-12-164
F-12-162
12.5.23.2 Removing the
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the front cover Cleaner Fan 0000-5292
open/close switch [2].
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the 3 claws;
then, detach the cleaner fan [2].
F-12-163
12-53
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-167
[1]
F-12-166
12-54
Chapter 12
F-12-169 F-12-172
2) Remove the 9 screws [1] of the main controller box. 4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the
main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine,
and open it.
F-12-170
F-12-173
F-12-171
12-55
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-174
F-12-176
F-12-177
F-12-178
12-56
Chapter 12
F-12-181
F-12-182
F-12-180
12-57
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-183
12-58
Chapter 12
[1]
F-12-186
F-12-189
F-12-190
F-12-191
F-12-188
12-59
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-193
12-60
Chapter 12
F-12-195
F-12-197
12.5.27 Delivery Cooling Fan
12.5.27.4 Removing the Left
12.5.27.1 Removing the Upper Lower Rear cover 0000-5288
Rear Cover 0000-5285
1) Removing the left lower rear cover.
1) Remove the upper rear cover.
12.5.27.5 Removing the
12.5.27.2 Removing the Lower Secondary Transfer High-
Rear Cover 0000-5286 Voltage Unit 0000-5289
1) Remove the lower rear cover. 1) Free the DC harness [1] from the edge saddle [2];
then, disconnect the 3 connectors [3], and remove
12.5.27.3 Removing the High- the 2 screws [4].
Voltage Unit 0000-5287
F-12-198
F-12-196
12-61
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-201
F-12-202
F-12-200
12.5.28 Machine Heat Discharge Fan
4) Remove the secondary transfer high-voltage unit
together with the delivery cooling fan.
5) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the
12.5.28.1 Removing the Upper
connector [2]; then, detach the secondary transfer Rear Cover 0000-5272
high-voltage unit [3]. 1) Remove the upper rear cover.
12-62
Chapter 12
F-12-204
[1]
F-12-203
12-63
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-206 F-12-209
2) Remove the 9 screws [1] of the main controller box. 4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the
main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine,
and open it.
F-12-207
F-12-210
1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fan duct [2].
F-12-208
12-64
Chapter 12
F-12-211
F-12-213
12-65
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-216
[1]
F-12-217
F-12-215
12-66
Chapter 12
F-12-219
F-12-221
4) Engage the hook [1] found on the right side of the
main controller box on the stay [2] of the machine, 12.5.29.8 Removing the Fixing
and open it.
Heat Discharge Fan 0000-5333
F-12-220
[2] together with its base. 1) Disconnect the connector [2] of the developing
motor [1], and free the harness [3] from the cable
clamp [4].
12-67
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-223
F-12-226
F-12-224
F-12-227
F-12-225
12-68
Chapter 12
F-12-228
F-12-230
F-12-231
12-69
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 12
F-12-234
F-12-232
F-12-235
F-12-233
12-70
Chapter 13 MEAP
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 13
The term MEAP stands for Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform, and is used to generically refer to a
platform for software built into MFPs and peripheral equipment. The architecture is based on Java (J2ME, i.e., Java
2 Platform Micro Edition), and is designed to enable the execution of Java applications.
A MEAP application behaves independently from its host printer's system software, and may be installed or
uninstalled using SMS (Service Management Service), which is an interface that runs as part of the browser on a PC.
As long as the device supports MEAP, most MEAP applications may be added to the device in the field.
13-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 13
In addition to the commonly found print counters, a device that supports MEAP is equipped with a counter
mechanism used to keep track of which functions are used as well as how often they are used for individual MEAP
applications that are installed. The MEAP counter readings may be checked by making the following selections on
the device control panel: Counter Check Key>MEAP Counter Check. A device may possess the following MEAP
counters, and which counter to use and, therefore, to display all depend on the application in question.
A counter reading may be of a type that is forced to increase as a job is expected or of a type that is increased when
the application sends instructions; or, it may be of a type that increases independently of the host device, thus
increasing solely in response to the application being run; specifics are as follows:
T-13-1
forced total
total (black-and-white 1)
scan (total 1)
black-and-white scan 2
black-and-white scan 3
black-and-white scan 4
application-independent free 1
free 2
free 3
free 4
free 5
free 6
free 7
free 8
free 9
free 10
free 11
free 12
13-2
Chapter 13
Notes:
forced: the device forces the counter to increase its reading in response to execution of a job.
in response to instructions from application: the counter increases its reading only in response to instructions from
the application.
application independent: the counter operates according to the specifications of the application.
13-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 13
In addition to the installation of the system software, language file, and RUI, a printer equipped with MEAP functions
calls for the installation of MEAP content, which offers functions (system services) needed to run MEAP
applications and class libraries needed by the MEAP applications to control the device.
It is important that the version of the system software be fully compatible with the version of the MEAP content,
calling for special care. (In the case of a mismatch, the device will not be able to run the MEAP application.) For
version information, refer to the Service Information bulletin that is released in conjunction with the system software.
[6]
[2] [4]
[3]
F-13-1
13-4
Chapter 14 Maintenance
and Inspection
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 14
Some parts of the machine must be periodically replaced to ensure a specific level of product performance (i.e., they
may not show wear but can significantly affect the machine performance once they fail). If possible, schedule any
periodical replacement so that it coincides with scheduled servicing.
The guide to periodical replacement is subject to change according to the site of installation and habits of use.
The reader unit/Color Image Reader-C1 does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
The printer unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
14-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 14
Some parts of the machine may require replacement once or more over the life of the product because of deterioration
or damage. Replace them as needed by referring to the guide.
Find Out When to Replace
Use the following service mode to find out when it is best to replace a specific durable part.
- Copier
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1
- Option
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2
The reader unit/Color Image Reader-C1 does not have parts that are designated as "durables."
T-14-1
as of May 2004
[10] Feed roller (each cassette FB6-3406 2 250,000 prints* actual number of
holder) prints
14-2
Chapter 14
as of May 2004
[12] Feed roller (manual feeder) FB1-8581 1 120,000 prints* actual number of
prints
[8] [7]
[12]
[6]
[13]
[9]
[10]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[11]
[1]
[16] [15]
[5]
[16]
F-14-1
14-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 14
T-14-2
- If you used solvent for cleaning, be sure that the solvent has completely dried before mounting the part back to the
machine.
- Unless specifically mentioned, do not use a wet (moist) cloth for cleaning.
- See to it that scheduled servicing and replacement are conducted as indicated.
14-4
Chapter 14
Scanning lamp
Dry wipe with lint-free paper.
Reflecting plate
Clean with a blower brush.
No. 1 through No. 3 mirror Copyboard glass
Use a blower brush; if dirt Clean the face/back and white plate.
cannot be removed, dry wipe
with lint-free paper. Scanner rail
Lubricate.
Lens Original size sensor
Scanner cable Use a blower brush. Use a blower brush.
Inspect.
Face-down
delivery roller 1
Intermediate
Face-down transfer belt
delivery roller 2 (ITB; when
replacing it)
Reversing roller
Duplex feed
roller
Delivery upper
Secondary Duplex Secondary Duplex Registration
guide
transfer rear feed transfer feed lower roller
Delivery lower
guide guide roller internal roller
Fixing inlet guide roller
(when replacing
Dry wipe with the ITB)
lint-free paper.
14-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 14
T-14-3
Maintenance
intervals
14-6
Maintenance
intervals
- If you used solvent for cleaning, be sure that the solvent has completely dried before mounting the part back to the
machine.
- Unless specifically mentioned, do not use a wet (moist) cloth for cleaning.
- See to it that scheduled servicing and replacement are conducted as indicated.
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 14
Scanning lamp
Dry wipe with lint-free paper.
Reflecting plate
Clean with a blower brush.
No. 1 through No. 3 mirror Copyboard glass
Use a blower brush; if dirt Clean the face/back and white plate.
cannot be removed, dry wipe
with lint-free paper. Scanner rail
Lubricate.
Lens Original size sensor
Scanner cable Use a blower brush. Use a blower brush.
Inspect.
Face-down
delivery roller 1
Intermediate
Face-down transfer belt
delivery roller 2 (ITB; when
replacing it)
Reversing roller
Duplex feed
roller
Delivery upper
Secondary Duplex Secondary Duplex Registration
guide
transfer rear feed transfer feed lower roller
Delivery lower
guide guide roller internal roller
Fixing inlet guide roller
(when replacing
Dry wipe with the ITB)
lint-free paper.
14-8
Chapter 15 Standards and
Adjustments
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 15
8
2.5±1.5mm
(2nd side of double-sided
copy: 2.5±2.0mm) 10
F-15-4
15-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 15
F-15-5
F-15-7
15-2
Chapter 15
Image
L2
15-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 15
[1]
left right
F-15-15
15-4
Chapter 15
820686679349
F-15-16
15-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 15
15-6
Chapter 15
15-7
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 15
15.5 Fixing System A 1/2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about
0.4 mm.
A 1/2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the
15.5.1 After Disassembling nip at the front by 0.3 mm, decreasing the nip at the
the Fixing Unit 0000-5361
rear by 0.2 mm.
If you have loosened the adjusting screw used to If the median value of the measured nip is toward the
secure the upper frame and the lower frame of the higher limit of the standard, tighten the screw on the
fixing unit in place (as when replacing a roller), be side with a higher nip value at the edge.
sure to adjust the nip of the fixing roller as follows: If the nip needs adjustment while the nip balance is
1) Turn the adjusting screw [1] at the front/rear so that correct, the adjusting screw both at the front and rear
the length of the pressure spring is 31.5mm. may be given a 1/2 turn so that the nip may change by
about 0.3 mm.
F-15-17
c 1.5mm
Standard:
F-15-19
Paper 8.75mm±0.25mm
movement b (less than
Standard: Center 5000 sheets)
|a c| = 0.5mm or less of paper 9.25mm±0.25mm
(5000 sheets
or more)
a 1.5mm Service Mode
F-15-18 COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK
Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto
3) Adjust the balance between the front and the rear: measurement.
4) If the median value of the measured nip is toward
the lower limit of the standard, tighten the screw on
the side with a lower nip value at the edge.
MEMO:
15-8
Chapter 15
15-9
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 15
15-10
Chapter 15
15-11
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 15
Image
L2
F-15-27
15-12
Chapter 15
F-15-28
Image
L2
15-13
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 15
15-14
Chapter 16 Correcting
Faulty Images
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
16.3.10.70 E540 Error code detail There is a fault in the ascent/descent of the tray. .............................. 16-154
16.3.10.71 E577 Error code detail There is a fault in stack processing (counterclockwise direction). .... 16-154
16.3.10.72 E580 Error code detail There is a fault in ascent/descent of the stack tray. .......................... 16-155
16.3.10.73 E584 Error code detail There is a fault in feed operation (No. 2). ......................................... 16-155
16.3.10.74 E5F0 Error code detail There is a fault in paper positioning for the saddle. .......................... 16-156
16.3.10.75 E5F1 Error code detail There is a fault in paper folding for the saddle. ............................... 16-156
16.3.10.76 E5F2 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle guide. ................................................... 16-157
16.3.10.77 E5F3 Error code detail There is a fault in saddle alignment. ................................................ 16-157
16.3.10.78 E5F4 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling at the saddle rear. ................................... 16-158
16.3.10.79 E5F5 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling at the saddle front. ................................. 16-158
16.3.10.80 E5F6 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling by the saddle paper pushing plate. ......... 16-159
16.3.10.81 E5F8 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle connector. ........................................... 16-160
16.3.10.82 E5F9 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle switch. ................................................ 16-160
16.3.10.83 E601-0xdd: after performing [COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT-Y/M/C/K] to improve
faint image ............................................................................................................................................. 16-161
16.3.10.84 E602-0001/E602-0002/E602-0003 Error Code: Remedy upon occurrence of error code ...... 16-162
16.3.10.85 E602 Error code detail The hard disk is faulty. ...................................................................... 16-163
16.3.10.86 E602-0001 Error code At about 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a failure of the
Distribution Board PCB Ass'y .............................................................................................................. 16-165
16.3.10.87 E602-0001 Error code At about 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a connection
failure of the flat cable between the HDD unit and the main controller ............................................... 16-165
16.3.10.88 E602-0202 Error Code: Recovered after performing HD-CHECK ......................................... 16-166
16.3.10.89 E602-0202 Error Code: Because of faulty SRAM Board PCB ............................................... 16-166
16.3.10.90 Progress bar on machine starting-up window is slower than usual, then E602 Error
Code is displayed ................................................................................................................................... 16-166
16.3.10.91 E602-0402 Error Code: not recovered after replacement of main controller PCB ................. 16-166
16.3.10.92 E602-0x02 Error Code ............................................................................................................. 16-167
16.3.10.93 E602-0001 Error Code ............................................................................................................. 16-167
16.3.10.94 E602-0402 Error Code: At power-on upon installation, iRC3220 .......................................... 16-167
16.3.10.95 E604 Error code detail There is a shortage in image memory (SDRAM). ............................ 16-167
16.3.10.96 E604-0000 Error Code: Because of faulty expansion RAM ................................................... 16-168
16.3.10.97 E605 Error code detail The battery for image memory is faulty. ........................................... 16-168
16.3.10.98 E606 Error code detail The hard disk is faulty. ...................................................................... 16-169
16.3.10.99 E674 Error code detail The fax board is faulty. ..................................................................... 16-169
16.3.10.100 E677-0002 Error Code ........................................................................................................... 16-169
16.3.10.101 E711 Error code detail There is a fault in IPC communication.(DADF-K1) ...................... 16-170
16.3.10.102 E711 Error code detail There is a fault in IPC communication. ........................................... 16-170
16.3.10.103 E712 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between the ADF
and the reader unit. ................................................................................................................................ 16-171
16.3.10.104 E713 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between the finisher
and the cassette pedestal. ....................................................................................................................... 16-171
16.3.10.105 E716 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between the cassette
pedestal and the printer unit. .................................................................................................................. 16-172
16.3.10.106 E716-0000 Error code Recorded only in the error history ................................................... 16-172
16.3.10.107 E717 Error code detail The communication with the NE controller is faulty. ..................... 16-172
16.3.10.108 E719 Error code detail The coin vendor is faulty. ............................................................... 16-173
16.3.10.109 E719-0011 Error code After the cable is disconnected because of a scanning fault
in card reader D1 .................................................................................................................................... 16-173
16.3.10.110 E719-0001 Error code When the coin vendor is disconnected, unable to be cleared ........... 16-174
16.3.10.111 E731 Error code detail There is a fault in the UFR board. .................................................. 16-174
16.3.10.112 E732 Error code detail There is a reader communication error. ........................................... 16-174
16.3.10.113 E732-9999 Error Code: Recorded in error log after performing service mode
COPIER> Function> CLEAR> MN-CON ............................................................................................ 16-175
16.3.10.114 E732-0001 Error code A message 'Starting up. Please wait' keeps displaying for about
Contents
2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the error code results (DC power supply
unit PCB J158 output failure) ............................................................................................................... 16-175
16.3.10.115 E732-0001 Error Code: After turning power ON, message "Starting up. Please wait"
changes to error code indication ............................................................................................................ 16-176
16.3.10.116 E732-0001 Error code A message 'Starting up. Please wait' keeps displaying for
about 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the error code results ............................. 16-177
16.3.10.117 E733 Error code detail There is a printer communication error. ......................................... 16-177
16.3.10.118 E733-0001 Error code Printer communication error ........................................................... 16-178
16.3.10.119 E740 Error code detail The Ethernet board is faulty. ........................................................... 16-178
16.3.10.120 E744 Error code detail The language file is faulty. ............................................................. 16-178
16.3.10.121 E745 Error code detail The TokenRing board is faulty. ..................................................... 16-179
16.3.10.122 E747-8702 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-179
16.3.10.123 E747 Error code detail The image processing ASIC or the memory control/
communication ASIC is faulty. ............................................................................................................. 16-179
16.3.10.124 E747-00FF Error code Only with printing operation ......................................................... 16-180
16.3.10.125 E747-8701 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-180
16.3.10.126 E747-00FF Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-180
16.3.10.127 E751-0304 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-181
16.3.10.128 E804 Error code detail The power supply cooling fan is faulty. .......................................... 16-181
16.3.10.129 E804-0004 Error Code .......................................................................................................... 16-181
16.3.10.130 E804-0004 Error code Displaying if the jack of the controller fan (FM7) which is
fixed on the controller box ................................................................................................................... 16-182
16.3.10.131 E804-0004 due to faulty fuse PCB Error Code .................................................................... 16-182
16.3.10.132 E805 Error code detail The cleaner fan is faulty. ................................................................ 16-182
16.3.10.133 E805 Error code detail The fixing heat discharge fan is faulty. .......................................... 16-183
16.3.11 FAX # Code ...................................................................................................................................... 16-183
16.3.11.1 Åî037 ......................................................................................................................................... 16-183
16.3.12 FAX ## Code .................................................................................................................................... 16-183
16.3.12.1 ##111, ##228 FAX Error Code ................................................................................................. 16-183
16.3.12.2 ##281/##104 FAX Error Code .................................................................................................. 16-184
16.3.12.3 ##796 FAX Error Code ............................................................................................................. 16-184
16.4 Outline of Electrical Components ............................................................................................................. 16-185
16.4.1 Clutch/Solenoid ................................................................................................................................... 16-185
16.4.1.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-185
16.4.1.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-185
16.4.2 Motor ................................................................................................................................................... 16-186
16.4.2.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-186
16.4.2.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-186
16.4.3 Fan ....................................................................................................................................................... 16-188
16.4.3.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-188
16.4.3.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-188
16.4.4 Sensor .................................................................................................................................................. 16-189
16.4.4.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-189
16.4.4.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-190
16.4.5 Switch ................................................................................................................................................. 16-192
16.4.5.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-192
16.4.5.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-192
16.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ................................................................................................................ 16-194
16.4.6.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-194
16.4.6.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-194
16.4.7 PCBs ................................................................................................................................................... 16-195
16.4.7.1 Reader Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-195
16.4.7.2 Printer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 16-196
16.4.8 Plane Pedistal ...................................................................................................................................... 16-198
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
a. Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess of a specific level.
b. If a transparency is used, check to make sure that it is placed in the correct orientation in the manual feed tray.
Check the table of durables to see if any has reached the end of its life.
Check the scheduled servicing table and the periodically replaced parts table, and replace any part that has reached
the time of replacement.
[Reader Unit]
- Check the optical system (mirror, while plate, copyboard glass, reflecting plate) for damage and foreign matter.
- Check the mirror base to see that it moves smoothly and its rail is free of dirt.
- Check the scanning lamp to see it is free of flickering.
- Check the scanner cable to see that it is correctly routed.
- Check the scanner to see that it is free of condensation.
[Process System]
- Check to see that the toner container contains toner.
- Check to see that the drum unit is properly fitted.
- Check the photosensitive drum to see that it is free of damage and dirt.
16-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16-2
Chapter 16
If a machine is brought from a cold to warm place, condensation can occur inside it, leading to various problems:
a. condensation on the BD sensor can cause problems associated with E110.
b. condensation on the LDE lens can cause image in sub scanning direction to be too light.
c. condensation on the mirror of the reader unit or on the copyboard glass can cause images to be too light.
d. condensation on the pickup or feeder guide can cause paper feeding faults.
If any of the foregoing (a through c) occurs, use the following service mode to correct it
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>DRY-RT
Use it to eliminate condensation at time of installation work.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SLPOFF01 to SLPOFF12
Use it to disable sleep mode.
16-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
The machine offers 6 types of test prints (TYPE), enabling identification of a fault in images with reference to test
prints.
If a fault appearing on a normal print does not show on a test print, the cause may be assumed to be on the PDL input
side or the reader unit side.
T-16-1
0 normal copy/print
1 to 3 - (for R&D)
4 16 gradations
5 full halftone
6 grid
7 to 9 - (for R&D)
11 - (for R&D)
12 64 gradations
13 - (for R&D)
16-4
Chapter 16
Use this test print to check gradation, fogging, white lines, or uneven density at the front/rear.
a. Gradation
If the reproduction of 16 gradations is not as expected, suspect a fault in the drum unit or the laser exposure system.
b. Fogging
If fogging is limited to the white area of the following illustration, suspect a fault in the drum unit or the laser
exposure unit.
c. Vertical White Lines/Black Lines
If a white line is found in the image, suspect a fault in the developing system.
d. Uneven Density at the Front/Rear
If uneven density is found at the front/rear, suspect a fault in the drum unit, laser exposure system, or transfer unit.
16 gradations
F-16-1
Use this test print to check transfer failure, black lines, white lines, or irregular intervals.
MEMO:
1. You can select a specific color to develop in user mode using 'COLORY/M/C/K' in service mode
(COPIER>TEST>PG).
2. If you want to change the density of the test print, use the following in service mode: TEST>PG>DENS-Y/M/C/K.
a. Transfer Failure
If transfer failure occurs, suspect a fault in the transfer (intermediate/secondary) unit.
b. Uneven Density in Horizontal Direction
If uneven density occurs in horizontal direction, suspect a fault in the photosensitive drum drive unit, drum ITB
motor, or drum unit.
c. Uneven Density in Vertical Direction
If uneven density occurs in horizontal direction, suspect dirt on the LDE lens, a fault in the drum unit, or
deterioration of the intermediate transfer belt.
16-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
COLOR-M=1, COLOR-Y/C/K=0
F-16-2
Use this test print to check color displacement, right angle, or straight line.
a. Color Displacement
If color displacement occurs, suspect a fault in any of the laser exposure system, transfer (intermediate/secondary)
unit, or photosensitive drum drive unit.
b. Right Angle, Straight Line
If right angles or straight lines are faulty, suspect a fault in the laser exposure system, registration
(upper/lower) roller, or secondary external roller (i.e., the shape of the rollers).
F-16-3
16-6
Chapter 16
Use this test print to check the density of dark areas of individual colors, balance among colors, and white lines in
relation to development.
a. Solid Density of Colors and Balance Among Colors
- The density must not be appreciably low (light).
- If the density of a specific color is too low, suspect a fault in the developer, primary transfer roller, laser exposure
system, or high-voltage system used for that color.
b. White/Black Lines
If a white/black line occurs for a specific color, suspect a fault in the drum unit used for that color or dirt in the laser
optical path.
c. Uneven Density at the Front/Rear
If uneven density occurs for a specific color, suspect a fault in the drum unit, laser exposure system, or transfer
(intermediate/secondary) unit.
If uneven density occurs for all colors, suspect deterioration of the intermediate transfer unit.
2.5±1.5 mm
2.0±1.5 mm
F-16-4
16-7
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Use this test print to check the reproduction of gradation for all colors (YMCBk) at once.
F-16-5
Use this test print to check gray balance, the reproduction of gradation for individual colors (YMCBk), or fogging.
a. Gray Balance
Check to see if each color is reproduced at an even level of density in the gray scale area.
b. Gradation
Check the reproduction of gradation of individual colors (YMCBk) and for the difference, if any, in density.
c. Fogging
If fogging occurs in the white area, suspect a fault in the developing system or the photosensitive drum, or improper
adjustment of the laser exposure system.
Light area
F-16-6
16-8
Chapter 16
16.3 Troubleshooting
16.3.1 Symptoms
The following is a collection of faulty images that can occur on A4 or larger paper; they have been artificially created,
and may slightly differ from actual faulty copies.
A. Image Fault Case Samples
1. Light Image in Middle
F-16-7
F-16-8
16-9
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
F-16-9
F-16-10
F-16-11
16-10
Chapter 16
6. Mottled Image
F-16-12
F-16-13
8. Toner Stray
F-16-14
16-11
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
F-16-15
F-16-16
F-16-17
16-12
Chapter 16
F-16-18
F-16-19
F-16-20
16-13
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
F-16-21
The following is a collection of faulty images that can occur on A3 or larger paper; they have been artificially created,
and may slightly differ from actual faulty copies.
1. White Spot on Edge
F-16-22
16-14
Chapter 16
F-16-23
F-16-24
16-15
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
F-16-25
F-16-26
16-16
Chapter 16
F-16-27
F-16-28
16-17
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.2.3.1 Density is light on paper corresponding to machine rear side: Occurs concurrently with
diagonal uneven density of 12mm intervals when continuously outputting high image duty
original 0002-3362
[ Manual-related ]
Cause
This symptom occurs because toner replenishment cannot keep pace with toner consumption.
Field Remedy
In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> SLV-UP], select "1" or "2".
Note: The drum life will be shortened as a negative effect of "1". In addition to this, the print productivity will
decrease as a negative effect of "2".
16.3.2.3.2 Density fluctuation: appreciable after outputting images of a high color ratio continuously 0002-3372
Cause
The balance in toner inside the developing assembly fails; when the image stabilization mechanism goes ON in
this condition, the machine tends to base its contrast potential on the existing condition. When the balance
between the toner and the carrier inside the developing assembly returns, the density fluctuates in relation to the
selected contrast potential.
Field Remedy
Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>auto gradation correction>full correction
16-18
Chapter 16
16.3.2.3.3 Uneven density of 12mm intervals in diagonal direction/Density at the rear is light: when
continuously generating an image with a high color ratio 0002-3391
Symptom
When an image with a high color ratio is generated continuously, the density at the rear tends to become too
low (light). It tends to occur simultaneously with uneven density in diagonal direction at intervals of 12 mm.
Cause
The amount of toner supplied cannot keep up with the amount of toner being consumed.
Field Remedy
Set '1'or '2'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SLV-UP.adverse effect of setting it
to'1' the life of the drum unit will decrease.
adverse effect of setting it to '2' the life of the drum unit will decrease, and the print productivity will also
decrease.
16.3.2.3.4 Uneven gloss of 155mm width along the leading edge of the 1st print: when attempting to
print an image with a high color ratio on thick paper (209g or more and coated paper) 0002-3398
Symptom
Uneven gloss (about 155 mm) occurs along the leading edge of the 1st print when an image with a high color
ratio is printed on thick paper (209 g or more and coated paper).
Cause
There is an appreciable difference in temperature between the 1st rotation of the fixing roller and its 2nd and
subsequent rotations (with a peripheral length of 155 mm).
Field Remedy
If prints are made continuously, the fault does not occur on the 2nd and subsequent prints.If prints are made
continuously, the fault does not occur on the 2nd and subsequent prints.
16.3.2.3.5 Flow image along the edges of the sheet: after the machine has been left alone in a high
humidity environment for a long time (e.g., 2 days) 0002-3411
Symptom
If the machine has been left alone in a high humidity environment for a long time (e.g., 2 days), flow image can
occur along the edges of the sheet.
Cause
The chemical elements on the surface of the photosensitive drum absorbs moisture from the atmosphere, thus
decreasing the resistance on the surface of the drum.
16-19
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Add a cassette heater (to keep the inside of the machine warm).
Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>internal cleaning.
The symptom may disappear when several prints have been made on A3 paper.
16.3.2.3.6 Traces of delivery roller on thick paper (particularly, coated paper): When making copy
of high image duty original 0002-3503
[ Manual-related ]
Description
If thick paper (particularly, coated paper) is used on machines manufactured in the early stage of production (old
type of the delivery vertical path ass'y is installed), there might occur a difference in gloss between the area where
the delivery rollers come in contact and the other area, when the paper passes through the rollers, depending on
the paper in use and the toner duty of the original document.
Field Remedy
1. Replace the three parts listed below with a new one respectively.
2. In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> CTM-MARK], change the set value to "1".
Note: As a result of the setting change above, the paper delivery speed when the delivery vertical path ass'y is used
will be changed and thus the productivity might be affected. Therefore, be sure not to change it if the machine
operates normally.
FG6-9654 Delivery Vertical Path Ass'y
FG6-9655 Vertical Path Panel Ass'y
VS1-6318-003 Snap Tight Connector
16.3.2.3.7 Traces of pickup roller in Bk solid image printed on paper with a high moisture content 0002-3506
Symptom
Traces of the pickup roller occur in Bk solid images printed on moist paper.
Cause
The moisture content of the area coming into contact with the pickup roller is low, showing a resistance higher
than the areas with a higher moisture content.
Field Remedy
Add a cassette heater and/or cassette internal sheet.
16.3.2.3.8 Uneven density of 12mm intervals in diagonal direction/Density at the rear is light: when 0002-4598
Symptom
When an image with a high color ratio is generated continuously, the density at the rear tends to become too
low (light) and, thereafter, the overall density tends to decrease.
Cause
The amount of toner supplied cannot keep up with the amount of toner being consumed.
16-20
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Set '1'or '2'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SLV-UP.adverse effect of setting it
to '1' the life of the drum unit will decrease.
adverse effect of setting it to '2' the life of the drum unit will decrease, and the print productivity will also
decrease.
16.3.2.3.9 Light image at the rear side: 1cm from the edge of paper, when making a copy with A4 or
A3 0002-4782
Symptom
Light image at the rear side: 1cm from the edge of paper, when making a copy with A4 or A3
Description
This symptom occurs only on copied images, not on the test print or printed images.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the CCD unit was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Make a reduction copy, and if the portion of light image moves together with the image, replace the CCD unit
with a new one.
16-21
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
F-16-29
Symptom
Light image: appearing all over the page
Cause
As a result of inspection, reinstallation of the secondary transfer external roller solved the symptom.
Field Remedy
It is possible that the secondary transfer external roller is not installed properly, thus reinstall it again.
16-22
Chapter 16
F-16-30
16.3.2.3.11 Fine lines are not printed sharply when printing via UFR 0004-2919
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
On the window of UFR printer properties, press 'Quality' tab and select 'Designs (CAD)' that appears under
'Objective'.
16.3.2.3.12 When executing UFR printing in monochrome, density of color area of original is too
light 0005-1894
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
There is a case in the field that the setting changes on the printer driver improved the symptom.
16-23
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.2.4.1 Ground color of cut-and-paste newspaper transferred to the copied image 0002-3252
Symptom
When you use a cut-and-paste newspaper as an original, the ground color of the newspaper remains on the
printed document.
Description
When you put newspaper on the whole copy board glass for an original, the ground color of the newspaper can
be suppressed with the AE Function.
Cause
The AE measurement fails, because the cut-and-paste newspaper is located outside of the AE measurement
coverage.
Spot Disposal
Expalin to the users that they should select 'Application Mode>Image adjustment> Ground Color Suppression'
to make a copy in using a cut-and-paste newspaper as an original.
16.3.2.4.2 Fogging on the entire Magenta image: as if it were combed with a brush 0002-3322
Symptom
Image appears to have been given a magenta wash.
Cause
The earth plate of the magenta drum unit contacts the earth pin of the main unit drum unit door guide (FF6-
2110-000). The earth pin is moved out of place or there is contact failure due to soiling.
Field Remedy
Correct or clean the magenta earth pin of the drum unit door guide.
16.3.2.4.3 Fogging appears on the entire image as if it were combed with brush: all colors affected 0002-3327
[ Case in the field ]
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the grounding pins of the drum unit door guide, which come in contact
with the grounding plates of each color's drum unit, were misaligned or soiled and finally had poor contact with the
grounding plate.
Field Remedy
Align or clean the grounding pin for the affected color in the drum unit door guide.
16-24
Chapter 16
F-16-31
16.3.2.4.4 Fogging appearing on the entire Black image as if it were combed with a brush 0002-3330
Symptom
Image appears to have been given a black wash.
Cause
The earth plate of the black drum unit contacts the earth pin of the main unit drum unit door guide (FF6-2110-
000). The earth pin is moved out of place or there is contact failure due to soiling.
Field Remedy
Correct or clean the black earth pin of the drum unit door guide.
16.3.2.4.5 Density fluctuation (increase): immediately after replacement of the drum unit in a high
humidity environment 0002-3368
Symptom
In a high humidity environment, the density tends to fluctuate (increase) immediately after replacement of the
drum unit.In a high humidity environment, the density tends to fluctuate (increase) immediately after
replacement of the drum unit.In a high humidity environment, the density tends to fluctuate (increase)
immediately after replacement of the drum unit.In a high humidity environment, the density tends to fluctuate
(increase) immediately after replacement of the drum unit.
16-25
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Cause
The developer is exposed to the moisture of the environment and, as a result, the charge on the toner decreases
to increase the density.
Field Remedy
Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>auto gradation adjustment>full correction.
16.3.2.4.6 Reverse fogging: appreciable when the drum unit has been in use for a long time in a low
humidity environment 0002-3373
Symptom
In a low humidity environment, reverse fogging tends to occur when the drum unit has been in use for a long
time.
Cause
The toner has deteriorated, thus not being able to take on adequate negative charge.
Field Remedy
Replace the drum unit of the color in question.As a temporary measure, turn off and then on the main power
switch so that the formation of a sample image (for image stabilization control) will remove the faulty toner
from the drum.
16.3.2.4.7 Fogging in Y area: appreciable after the machine has been left along for a long time (e.g.,
2 days) in a high humidity environment 0002-3375
Symptom
In a high humidity environment, fogging occurs in Y areas if the machine has been left alone for a long time
(e.g., 2 days).
Cause
The toner (MCBk) charged to a positive potential and existing on the photosensitive drum is drawn to the Y
toner charged to a negative potential and existing on the ITB.
Field Remedy
Generate about 10 prints of solid images of the color in question using A3 paper.
16.3.2.4.8 Fogging in Y area: appreciable after the machine has been left along for a long time (e.g.,
2 days) in a high humidity environment 0002-3377
Symptom
Toner collection occurs along image end when the machine is left alone for a long time (e.g., 1 week).
16-26
Chapter 16
Cause
When the machine is left alone for a long time, the level of charge on the toner tends to decrease.
Field Remedy
Generate about 10 prints of solid images of the color in question using A3 paper.
16.3.2.4.9 Color shift/Uneven density (rough texture): when continuously generating an image with
low color ratio 0002-3406
Symptom
The hues are not appropriate or the density is not even when images with a low color ratio have been generated
continuously.
Cause
The toner inside the developing assembly has remained unconsumed without being stirred for a long time, thus
increasing the charge of the toner and, ultimately, causing re-transfer or mixing of colors.
Field Remedy
Set '1'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DEVL-PTH.
Adverse effect of setting it to'1' the life of the toner container will decrease.
Symptom
Yellow spots or yellow ghosting on skin colored-area
Description
This symptom appears only on copied images, not on printed ones.
Cause
Main Controller PCB Ass'y is faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the Main Controller PCB Ass'y with a new one.
16.3.2.4.11 Light density at center of halftone image: appreciable after feeding transparencies in a
high humidity environment 0002-4638
Symptom
In a high humidity environment, the middle of a halftone image tends to become low in density after passage of
a transparency.
Cause
The coating agent on the surface of the transparency sticks to the ITB, making transfer of toner from the ITB to
paper difficult.
16-27
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>internal cleaning.
F-16-32
16-28
Chapter 16
F-16-33
16-29
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
CCD unit:FM2-0023
READER CONTROLLER:FG3-2570
SUB CONTROLLER:FG3-3129
F-16-34
16-30
Chapter 16
If the symptom still recurs, press [Fine Adjustment] that appears by the side of 'Remove Background' key to
adjust the density of the background you want to remove. Adjusting it to the direction of 'minus' will lighten
the background.
F-16-35
16-31
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
F-16-36
16.3.2.4.20 Fogging in Magenta appearing at position corresponding to machine front side, during
continuous copying 0004-9720
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
There is a case in the field that the symptom was corrected by adjusting the auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment). So, execute it in user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning> Auto Gradation Adjustment> Full
Adjustment].
This service mode switches a bias of the lower auxiliary brush under low humidity environment from -800V to
-850V. If fogging occurs under low humidity environment, upgrade DCON to Ver.10.02 and later. The current
setting can be checked in the service mode below.
16-32
Chapter 16
16.3.2.4.22 Fogging with BK cartridge that has been used for a certain period of time 0004-9776
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
Ever since DCON Ver.10.02 (DCON software which is to be installed simultaneously with System Ver.10.01),
the service mode described below has been newly added in order to ease fogging which might occur with the
BK cartridge that has been used for a certain period of time.
This service mode switches the amount of toner in the BK developing assembly whose cartridge has been used
for a certain period of time. If fogging occurs under such environment, upgrade DCON to Ver.10.02 and later.
- Enables to switch a bias of the lower auxiliary brush under low humidity environment (-800V to -850V):
Service mode (level2) [COPIER> Option> BODY>LSUB-DWY/DWM/DWC]
- Enables to change the toner amount in the developing ass'y which has been used for a certain period of time:
Service mode (level2) [COPIER> Option> BODY>BKTC-DWN]
16-33
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.2.4.25 Fogging in reddish purple appears on entire page, Message [Correctly place the test
print on the platen glass.] is displayed: No problem on print from computer and test print 0005-1922
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that the Reader Controller PCB was faulty. If this symptom occurs,
replace it with a new one.
F-16-37
16.3.2.4.26 Fogging in Cyan on entire page; no problem with test prints 0005-6106
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the flat cable connecting to J203 on
the Reader Controller PCB was not securely fitted. Unplug and reinsert the flat cable of J203 once again.
16.3.2.4.27 Overall fogging with margins: Occurs only on black-and-white copies, no problem with
color copies and test prints 0006-4448
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the CCD unit was faulty.
Field Remedy
16-34
Chapter 16
F-16-38
16.3.2.5.1 Uneven color around characters: when being printed on half-tone background in
combination with MacOS and QuarkXpress 0002-3290
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In the field, the setting change on Mac side improved the symptom. Select [Printer Functions> Halftone>
Resolution].
Description
When "Resolution" is selected for the Halftone setting, the reproductivity for halftone will be improved and thus
uneven color will be relieved.
16-35
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.2.5.2 Uneven density at about 6mm intervals in the sub scanning direction 0002-3292
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
As a result of inspection, this symptom occurred because the secondary transfer roller was not properly installed at
the designated position.
Field Remedy
Reinstall the secondary transfer roller once again.
16.3.2.5.3 Uneven density at 44 mm intervals: when the drum unit has been in use for a long time 0002-3389
Symptom
Uneven density at an angle and at 12 mm intervals; tending to occur simultaneously with low density at the rear
or over the entire image when an original of a high color ratio is printed continuously.
Cause
Toner sticks to the charging roller, and soils it.
Field Remedy
Set '1'or '2'to the following in service mode:COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SLV-UP.
adverse effect of setting it to '1' the life of the drum unit will decrease.
adverse effect of setting it to '2' the life of the drum unit will decrease, and the print productivity will also
decrease.
16.3.2.5.4 Uneven density in vertical direction occurs when images with a high color ratio are
generated in large volumes. 0002-3393
Symptom
Uneven density in vertical direction occurs when images with a high color ratio are generated in large volumes.
Cause
Filming (white soiling) occurs on the surface of the photosensitive drum, affecting exposure.
Field Remedy
Be sure to refer to the instructions indicated on how to clean the photosensitive drum (dry wiping the
photosensitive drum of the color in question).
Symptom
Uneven density occurs at 0.8 mm intervals, tending to be noticeable in halftone images.
Cause
The rotation of the photosensitive drum drive gear is uneven.
16-36
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Set '2'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TMC-SLCT.
16.3.2.5.6 Mottled image: when large numbers of prints are made daily and, the drum unit has been
in use for a long time 0002-3400
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
The toner in the developing assembly is caking into lumps.
Field Remedy
Clean the inside of the machine in user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning> Cleaning inside Main Unit].
Note: It is recommended to execute the mode every 4000 prints or more, as a guide.
16.3.2.5.8 Uneven density (rough texture) in Bk solid images: in a high humidity environment 0002-3408
Symptom
In a high humidity environment, uneven density occurs in Bk solid images. (rough texture)
Cause
The level of secondary transfer current is too high, thus decreasing the transfer efficiency because of re-transfer.
Field Remedy
Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>auto gradation correction>full correction. Or, add a cassette
heater.
16.3.2.5.9 Toner scattering around image with a high color ration in a low humidity environment 0002-3413
Symptom
Toner stray tends to occur around an image with a high color ratio in a low humidity environment.
Cause
The level of the secondary transfer current is too low, thus failing to transfer the toner from the ITB.
16-37
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
With care, use the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>2TR-TGT/2TR-SHR/TR-ENV/
TR-PPR/TR-CLR/TR-DUP.
Adverse effect of changing the setting: it can worsen white spots, transfer faults, or fogging (rough texture).
16.3.2.5.10 Uneven image in main scanning direction: when copying in a single color 0002-8530
Symptom
Uneven image in main scanning direction: when copying in a single color
Cause
As a result of inspection, reinstallation of the secondary transfer external roller solved the symptom.
Field Remedy
It is possible that the secondary transfer external roller is not installed properly, thus reinstall it again.
F-16-39
16-38
Chapter 16
16.3.2.5.12 Coarse image or brushed image only on Cyan areas: Occurs on both copies and test
prints 0006-4447
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the DC Controller PCB was faulty.
Field Remedy
Follow the steps below:
1. Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted between the DC Controller PCB (J117 and J118) and the Cyan
laser unit (J613, J614, and J616).
2. Swap the Cyan laser unit with a different color's and check the image once again. If the symptom occurs with
the different color, the laser unit is likely to be faulty. So, replace it with a new one. If the symptom is not changed,
the DC Controller PCB is likely to be faulty. So, replace it with a new one.
Laser Unit: FG6-8962
DC Controller PCB: FG3-2356
F-16-40
16-39
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.2.6.1 Torsion spring coming off or displaced: locating close to the back of the pattern reader
unit 0002-3218
Symptom
Printed image is displaced, because a spring of the attaching part (on the main body), in the backside of the
pattern reader unit, has come off, or because the spring hook is not properly located.
Cause
Because a spring of the attaching part (on the main body), in the backside of the pattern reader unit, has come
off, or because the spring hook is not properly located, the pattern reader unit is not fixed in the proper position
and is free, which displaces image output by laser, leading to the printed image displacement.
Items to Check
Remove the two screws on the right inside cover, and you can check whether a spring is attached to the pattern
reader unit. Remove the pattern reader unit, referring to the service manual, and you can check whether the
springs is properly located.
Field Remedy
Attach the spring FB6-3289-000.
Symptom
Color displacement occurs (several mm) in sub scanning direction.
Cause
Toner has stuck to the ITB drive roller, causing the ITB to slip against the ITB drive roller.
Field Remedy
Clean the ITB drive roller, tension roller, and secondary transfer internal roller.
Symptom
Image misalignment in main scanning direction/Black is copied in green
Cause
CCD unit is faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the CCD unit with a new one.
16-40
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
An adjustment for duplex side registration has been added with System software Ver.4.03. It can be made in
service mode [COPIER>Adjust>FEED-ADJ>REGIST2].
16.3.2.6.5 Color registration failure on thick paper in sub scanning direction 0003-6310
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Simptom
Color registration failure on thick paper in sub scanning direction
Field Remedy
A solution against color registration failure of thick paper has been added with System software Ver.3.16. In
service mode level 2 [COPIER>Option>CLR-SHIFT], set it as '1' to activate the solution. Note that this will
decrease the productivity of thick paper to approx. one-third.
1. Inspect whether the 42T gear in the ITB unit is broken or not. If a breakage is confirmed, replace it with a new one.
2. Clear RAM of the DC controller PCB in service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> DC-CON].
3. Replace the ITB unit with a new one.
4. Replace the ITB drive unit with a new one.
FU3-0266 42T Gear
FG6-8942 Inter Transfer Belt Ass'y
FG6-9663 ITB Drive Ass'y
16-41
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.2.6.8 Color displaces approx. 3mm away from right position in sub scanning direction 0005-1908
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
If the back side of the ITB soils after long usage, the ITB is not driven properly and each color displaced
approximately 3mm away from their right position.
If this symptom occurs, clean the back side of the ITB and the drive gears by following the instructions in the
attachment.
F-16-41
16-42
Chapter 16
16.3.2.6.10 Image is shifted in main scanning direction when printing via UFR, no problem on
copied or scanned images 0005-6104
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was
faulty.
Unplug and reinsert the connectors on it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Main): FG3-2854
16.3.2.6.11 Abnormal images (image shift in main scanning direction, color void) when making pull
scan 0005-6128
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was faulty. Unplug and reinsert
the connectors on it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Main): FG3-2854
Symptom
Black lines at 2mm intervals in main scanning direction
Description
Once this symptom occurs, it keeps occurring continuously.
Cause
High voltage transformer PCB ass'y (FG6-9673) is faulty.
FieldRemedy
Replace the high voltage transformer PCB ass'y (FG6-9673) with a new one.
16-43
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
F-16-42
16.3.2.7.2 White spots like bubbles and wave-shaped white spots: 5cm of the rear 0002-3291
Symptom
White spots like bubbles and wave-shaped white spots: 5cm of the rear
Cause
A ground is unstable because of a warpage of the grounding plate for the secondary transfer at the rear side of
the machine.
Field Remedy
There is a possibility that a ground cannot be established because of a warpage of the grounding plate for the
secondary transfer at the rear side of the machine. Visually inspect the grounding plate for warpage.
Location of the grounding plate
16-44
Chapter 16
F-16-43
16.3.2.7.3 47mm horizontal line on full color image: when the amount of toner deposited on the
drum changes abruptly over the entire length of the drum axis 0002-3419
Symptom
An abrupt change occurs in the amount of toner deposited over the entire length of the drum axis when full color
image is made. It is a 47-mm horizontal line.
Cause
An abrupt change (increase) has occurred in the amount of toner on the photosensitive drum, causing uneven
rotation of the drum and, ultimately, a discrepancy in exposure.
Field Remedy
Set '2'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TMC-SLCT.
16-45
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.2.7.4 47mm horizontal line on Bk image: when the amount of toner deposited on the drum
changes abruptly over the entire length of the drum axis 0002-3421
Symptom
An abrupt change occurs in the amount of toner deposited over the entire length of the drum axis when
monochrome image is made. It is a 47-mm horizontal line.
Cause
An abrupt change (increase) has occurred in the amount of toner on the photosensitive drum, causing uneven
rotation of the drum and, ultimately, a discrepancy in exposure.
Field Remedy
Set'1'to the following in service mode:COPIER>OPTION>BODY>BK-4CSW.
Symptom
A 47-mm horizontal line occurs in the leading edge of paper.
Cause
A yellow pattern made in blank (for progress in image) has occurred uneven rotation of the drum and ultimately,
causing a discrepancy in exposure.
Field Remedy
Set '2'to the following in service mode:COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TMC-SLCT.
16.3.2.7.6 An abrupt change occurs in the amount of toner deposited over the entire length of the
drum axis. It is a 100-mm horizontal line. 0002-3426
Symptom
An abrupt change occurs in the amount of toner deposited over the entire length of the drum axis. It is a 100-
mm horizontal line.
Cause
An abrupt change (increase) has occurred in the amount of toner on the intermediate transfer belt, causing
uneven rotation of the belt and, ultimately a discrepancy in primary transfer.
Field Remedy
Set '2'for the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>Y-PTN.adverse effect of setting it to '2'
the white area and the image on the paper tend to show a yellowish hue.
16-46
Chapter 16
16.3.2.7.7 White spots along trailing edge of halftone image on the 2nd side of duplex print made
after generating several sheets of simplex print in a high humidity environment (e.g. for the first
time in the morning) 0002-3429
Symptom
In a high humidity environment, a white spot occurs along the trailing edge of a halftone image on the 2nd side
of a double-sided print made after generating a single-sided print and turning on the power (e.g., for the first
time in the morning).
Cause
The fixing heat causes the moisture in the paper to evaporate, causing condensation on the delivery guide; if it
moves to the leading edge of the 1st side of a double-sided print, a transfer fault will occur along the trailing
edge of the 2nd side.
Field Remedy
Allow about 10 min between making a single-sided print and making a double-sided print so as to prevent
condensation on the delivery guide (thus the symptom).
16.3.2.7.8 White spots in a print made after power-on (e.g., for the first time in the morning) in a low
humidity environment 0002-3433
Symptom
A white spot occurs in a print made after power-on (e.g., for the first time in the morning) in a low humidity
environment.
Cause
The resistance of the secondary transfer external roller is too low, causing the voltage lower limit limiter to go
ON (the level of the secondary transfer current is too high)
Field Remedy
With care, make use of the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>2TR-TGT/2TR-SHR/TR-
ENV/TR-PPR/TR-CLR/TR-DUP.adverse effect of changing the setting: toner can move astray, worsening
white spots.
16.3.2.7.9 White spots along the trailing edge: when feeding dry paper (e.g., freshly opened paper) 0002-3455
Symptom
White spots occur along the trailing edge when dry paper is used (e.g., fresh out of package).
Cause
When the trailing edge of paper moves past the nip area of the secondary transfer external roller, the current
flowing to the trailing edge of the paper is limited.
16-47
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Adjust the setting of the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK>BLANK-B.The symptom
maybe corrected when the trailing edge margin is increased by about 4 mm.
16.3.2.7.10 White spots (like small flower) along the leading edge: when feeding paper with high
resistance in a low humidity environment 0002-3457
Symptom
White spots (like small flower) occurs along the leading edge, where the resistance tends to be high in a low
humidity environment.
Cause
A transfer fault occurs during secondary transfer (i.e., the level of the secondary transfer current is too high).
Field Remedy
With care, make use of the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>2TR-TGT/2TR-SHR/TR-
ENV/TR-PPR/TR-CLR/TR-DUP.
adverse effect of changing the setting: toner may move astray, worsening the occurrence of white spots.
16.3.2.7.11 A fine, white line around 30mm of the trailing edge on A3 paper 0002-3460
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
When the temperature at both ends of the fixing roller rises, the roller pressure becomes higher there. Under this
condition, it is possible the trailing edge of paper jumps.
Field Remedy
Install the Spur (FG6-9649) to the ITB locking shaft. For the installation procedure, refer to Service Manual
[Troubleshooting > Correcting Faulty Images > Image Fault Case Studies > The output has transfer faults/lines. >
Mounting the Spur (FG6-9649)].
Symptom
White spots occur in images (mottled).
Cause
Paper lint sticks to paper from the pre-registration roller, causing a transfer fault during secondary transfer.
Field Remedy
Clean the clips (2 pc. above the pre-registration roller).
16-48
Chapter 16
16.3.2.7.14 A single line in the drum axial direction on solid image 0002-3482
Symptom
A single line occurs in the drum axial direction when a solid image is generated.
Cause
The tube of the fixing roller was inadvertently given a crease during production.
Field Remedy
Replace both fixing roller and pressure roller; or, replace the fixing unit.
16.3.2.7.15 Traces of pickup roller along the leading edge of transparency when its source is
cassette. 0002-3504
Symptom
Traces of the pickup roller occur along the leading edge of a transparency when the source of the transparency
is the cassette.
Cause
When a stack of transparencies is used, the leading edge of the bottom transparency is subjected to friction at
time of pickup, thus causing it to develop a scratch.
Field Remedy
Fan out the stack before placing it to correct the fault. Recommend the use of manual feeding.
16.3.2.7.16 White spots along trailing edge of halftone image on the 2nd side of duplex print in a
high humidity environment 0002-4666
16-49
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Symptom
In a high humidity environment, a white spot occurs along the edge of the paper in a halftone image on the 2nd
side of a double-sided print.
Cause
The paper is moist, and tends to become wavy after fixing on its 1st side; as a result, the wavy area prevents
proper transfer on the 2nd side and, ultimately, causes a white spot.
Field Remedy
Add a cassette heater, or recommend replacement of paper.
16.3.2.7.17 White spots in a print made after power-on (e.g., for the first time in the morning) in a
low humidity environment 0002-4671
Symptom
A 20 to 30 mm white spot occurs along the trailing edge of prints made on A3 paper.
Cause
The paper arches between the secondary transfer external roller and the fixing roller, and discharge occurs when
the trailing edge of the paper leaves the intermediate transfer belt, leaving traces.
Field Remedy
Set '1'for the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FX-SPD.
Adverse effect of changing the setting: parallel lines may fail to be parallel along the trailing edge.
16-50
Chapter 16
16.3.2.7.19 Void appearing at approx. 9.5mm from the edge (corresponding to machine's front side)
in sub scanning direction 0004-0688
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because grease was transferred to the secondary
transfer roller.
Field Remedy
1. It is possible that grease adheres to the surface of the secondary transfer roller. So, remove grease from the roller.
If it cannot be removed completely, replace the secondary transfer roller or the Secondary Transfer Ass'y with a new
one.
2. It is possible that excessive amount of grease has been applied to the lower registration roller. Inspect the affected
area and wipe grease off the roller if excessive amount of grease is confirmed. Refer to the attached files for the
location. In addition, make sure that grease does not adhere to the paper path between the lower registration roller
and the secondary transfer roller.
FB6-3131 Secondary Transfer Roller
FG6-8993 Secondary Transfer Ass'y
F-16-44
16-51
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
F-16-45
16-52
Chapter 16
F-16-46
16.3.2.7.22 Streaks appearing in sub scanning direction when making a copy of color and
monochrome originals at a time 0004-9761
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
This problem has been corrected with System Ver.10.01. So, if this happens, upgrade the system to Ver.10.01
and later.
16-53
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.2.7.23 Color voids at image lead edge when outputting SRA3 or 12x18" paper 0004-9762
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
When outputting SRA3 or 12x18" paper under the measure for color displacement on thick paper activated in
service mode, color voids may occur at the image lead edge.
This symptom has been corrected with the System Ver.10.01, so upgrade it to Ver.10.01 and later if this
happens.
If the following service mode is set at [1], the measure for color displacement is activated: Service mode (level
2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> CLR-SHIFT> 1].
16.3.2.7.24 PS-C1: When outputting data created with Illustrator on MacOS9.2.2, image is printed
partially 0004-9763
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
When outputting the data created with Illustrator 8/9/10 on MacOS9.2.2, most of the image may lack.
This symptom has been corrected with the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1, so upgrade it to Ver1.1.1 and later if this
happens.
16.3.2.8 Smudged/Streaked
Symptom
Soiled image due to waste toner
Cause
The gear at the rear side in the waste toner feed unit is missing. As the waste toner screw is not activated, waste
toner overflows without being delivered.
Field Remedy
Install the gear (25T Gear: FS7-0579) driving the waste toner screw.
16.3.2.8.2 Black lines randomly appear on the printed image when the original is set on the ADF. 0002-1581
Symptom
Black lines randomly appear on the printed image when the original is set on the ADF.
Description
Black lines randomly appear on the printed image when the original is set on the ADF.
Field Remedy
By decreasing the value of the Parameter instructedbelow by 10 from factory setting, the reading possition will
16-54
Chapter 16
be moved 1mm toward the delivery (rear) side In service mode no 6 SCANNER>7.CCD>>Parameter 018(xxx)
If you implement the procedure above mentioned, the position is moved 1mm forward, and then increase the
following value by 10 from the factory setting so that the leading registration can be adjusted by 1mm. In service
mode NO 6 SCANNER>7 CCD>Parameter 024(xxx).
If damage appears on the image by implementing the process above, we suggest that you chaange those setting
to default setting.
16.3.2.8.3 Vertical streaks of charging roller: when the drum unit has been in use for a long time 0002-3465
Symptom
Vertical lines (charging roller) occur when the drum unit has been in use for a long time.
Cause
Toner sticks to the charging roller, thus soiling it.
Field Remedy
Replace the drum unit of the color in question. (Generate a 16-gradation test pattern (TYPE=4) to identify the
color.
Symptom
Vertical lines occur.
Cause
The while plate/mirror of the reader unit is soiled. The copyboard glass is soiled with foreign matter.
Field Remedy
Clean the white plate/mirror with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
16.3.2.8.5 Back of paper soiled: first in the morning after generating a double-sided print of a
halftone image in Bk as the last job of the previous day 0002-3471
Symptom
The back of a print made after power-on (e.g., for the first time in the morning) is soiled after making a double-
sided print of a halftone image in Bk as the last job of the previous day.
Cause
The surface temperature of the fixing roller has grown too high causing toner to move from paper to the fixing
roller; the toner then moves to the surface of the pressure roller, soiling the back of the 1st print made for the
first time when the power is turned on the next time.
16-55
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
The symptom is limited to 120 mm along the leading edge of the 1st print (on the back; 120 mm being the
peripheral length of the pressure roller).
Symptom
A black spot occurs (64 mm).
Cause
Foreign matter (non-conductive) exists on the secondary transfer internal roller.
Spot Disposal
Clean the secondary transfer internal roller.
16.3.2.8.9 Shade of original appears at lead edge of output image when making a copy by selecting
'Entire Image' 0003-2777
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
If one-by-one (direct) copy is selected, shade of the original will not appear on the output image because it
should be printed on the lead edge margin area. On the other hand, in the case of 'Entire Image' copy, the
original will be scaled down and the shade should be printed inside the lead edge margin area, appearing on the
output image.
Field Remedy
In service mode [COPIER>Adjust>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X], increase the set value so that the scanning start position
will be shifted backward and shade of the original will not appear. However, note that backward-shifting of the
scanning start position will widen the lead edge of original that is not printed on the output image.
16-56
Chapter 16
16.3.2.8.10 Lines as if noise occurred appearing in sub scanning direction: when printing via UFR 0003-8737
[ Case in the field ]
Cause
There is a case in the field that the symptom was solved by replacement of the UFR board.
Field Remedy
Reinstall the UFR board. If the symptom still recurs, replace the UFR board with a new one.
F-16-47
16.3.2.8.11 35mm-wide lines in sub scanning direction appearing at a location corresponding to the
machine's rear side 0003-8742
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
As a result of inspection, the main controller PCB was found to be faulty. (In this inspection, the symptom
continuously occurred once it started; however, it did not always occur.)
Field Remedy
Try replacing the main controller PCB with a new one.
FG3-3129
16-57
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
F-16-48
16-58
Chapter 16
F-16-49
2. If the soiling occurs with mixed colors, the ITB cleaning failure is likely to be a cause. So, inspect the ITB
cleaning unit.
16.3.2.8.14 Streaks appearing as if they had been caused by cleaning failure (with all four colors) 0004-9714
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
It is possible that a symptom like this can occur because the secondary transfer roller is not securely fitted,
causing a leak. So, reinstall the secondary transfer roller securely.
16-59
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.2.8.15 Lines on entire image when making copy using preset zoom feature 0005-6129
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was faulty. Unplug and reinsert
the connectors on it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Main): FG3-2854
16.3.2.8.16 When printing via UFR, lines appear only on images that are pasted on document: no
problem with document containing texts only 0005-6180
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the UFR board was faulty. Remove and install it once again. If the
symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
UFR Board Ass'y: FG6-8983
16.3.2.8.17 Lines appear in main scanning direction on A4-sized copies, in sub scanning direction
on A3-sized copies 0005-9418
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Reader Controller PCB was
faulty. So, unplug and reinsert the connectors on the PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace the PCB with a
new one.
Reader Controller PCB: FG3-2570
16.3.2.9.1 Ghost Repeating images which seem to be caused by inferior cleaning at approximately
10cm intervals 0002-1792
Symptom
Ghost Repeating images which seem to be caused by inferior cleaning at approximately 10cm intervals
Cause
As a result of inspection, the following causes are found:
1. The degree of auxiliary charging is not appropriate because of a broken spring installed at the auxiliary brush
in the drum unit.
2. High voltage transformer PCB (FG6-9673) is faulty.
Field Remedy
1. If ghosting is accompanied by fogging as shown in Image1, replace the drum unit(s) of the color in which the
symptom appears.
2. If ghosting is NOT accompanied by fogging as shown in Image2, replace the high voltage transformer PCB
(FG6-9673) with a new one.
16-60
Chapter 16
Image1
F-16-50
Image2
F-16-51
16-61
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.2.9.2 Drum positive ghost in halftone image: occurring after outputting solid images 0002-3486
Symptom
A drum positive ghost occurs in a halftone image after generation of a solid image.
Cause
A residual charge exists on the photosensitive drum.
Field Remedy
Set '2'for the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TMC-SLCT.
16.3.2.9.3 Drum reverse ghost: on halftone image after outputting solid images and on solid image
after outputting images having larger areas of halftone 0002-3491
Symptom
A drum reverse ghost occurs in a solid image after generation of a halftone image or an image of white against
a black background following the generation of a solid image.
Cause
A residual charge exists on the photosensitive drum.
Field Remedy
Set '1'or '2'to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>NEGA-GST.
16.3.2.9.4 Slipping ghost: after generating fine lines with a high color ratio 0002-3494
Symptom
A slipping ghost occurs after generation of fine lines with a high color ratio.
Cause
Toner remains on the photosensitive drum (from collection of toner to the developing assembly).
Field Remedy
Execute the following in user mode: adjust/clean>auto gradation correction>full correction.
16.3.2.10.1 Poor fixing: due to failure of the fixing temperature control (mostly E004 is displayed.) 0002-3545
Symptom
Poor fixing: due to failure of the fixing temperature control (mostly E004 is displayed.)
Cause
16-62
Chapter 16
1. Because of chattering of the fixing feeder unit open/closed sensor, the DC controller PCB mistakenly
considers the fixing feeder unit to be slid out and starts the temperature control of the fixing unit at 0 degrees C.
2. Because of a software bug, the cooling fan does not rotate in the low power mode, which causes a heat
deformation of the fixing/feeder sensor flag. Accordingly, even after the fixing feeder unit is closed, chattering
occurs and a failure of the temperature control also occurs as in the case of '1'.
Field Remedy
1. Upgrade the system to Ver4.03 and the DCON to Ver6.02.
16-63
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.2.11.1 White area becomes gray when making a copy by selecting 'Nega/Posi' 0003-8641
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
Color reproductivity for 'Nega/Posi' copy has been improved to the level of the previous models with System
software Ver.9.05. If the machine you are servicing is earlier than Ver.9.05, upgrade it to Ver.9.05 and later.
F-16-52
16-64
Chapter 16
16.3.2.11.3 Color of output image is different from that of original: when thick paper is used 0003-2775
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Auto gradation adjustment has two different modes: for plain paper and for thick paper. If color reproductivity
is not stabilized with thick paper, execute auto gradation adjustment by selecting 'thick paper' mode.
16.3.2.11.4 Image is normal at 10cm area from image lead edge; however, right and left images
become interchanged on rearward area: paper size is A3 0004-9718
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
There is a case in the field that the problem was solved by clearing the reader controller PCB's RAM. Turn the
power OFF/ON, and if the symptom still recurs, clear the reader controller PCB's RAM.
Before clearing the RAM, print the service mode setting values in service mode [COPIER> Function> MISC-
P> P-PRINT] in order to enter them as necessary after clearing the RAM.
Clear of RCON RAM can be done in service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> R-CON].
This symptom has been corrected with the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1, so upgrade it to Ver.1.1.1 and later if this
happens. Then, run 'ColorCAL' again.
16.3.2.12 Stretching/Shrinking
16-65
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Symptom
Multiple transparencies are moved at the same time.
Cause
The transparencies are attracted to each other by the work of static charge.
Field Remedy
Fan out the transparencies.
16.3.3.1.2 Multifeed (gloss paper, tracing paper, or some thick paper) 0002-3532
Symptom
Multiple sheets of gloss paper, tracing paper, or some thick paper are moved at the same time.
Cause
The bonding between sheets is too strong, causing the separation mechanism to fail.
Field Remedy
Recommend the use of the manual feed tray, feeding the sheets individually.Types of media in question: gloss
paper (coated), tracing paper, and thick paper.
16-66
Chapter 16
16.3.3.3 Wrinkle
16.3.3.3.1 Paper wrinkle: when there are only few sheets remaining in the cassette in a high
humidity environment 0002-3534
Symptom
Paper tends to wrinkle when there are only few sheets remaining in the cassette at time of pickup in a high
humidity environment.
Cause
The paper is likely to be moist, thus tending to become wavy.
Field Remedy
Add a cassette internal sheet.
16.3.3.4 Ripple/Curl
16.3.3.4.1 Jam of special postcard (such as double-sided postcard with adhesive inside) 0004-0701
[ Case in the field ]
Description
Because the double-sided portion swells out when it passes though the fixing unit.
Cause
There is a case in the field that this symptom was corrected by changing the fixing temperature control.
Field Remedy
Try changing the fixing temperature control in service mode [COPIER>Option>BODY>TEMP-TBL].
0: 190 C (default)
1: 185 C
2: 180 C
16-67
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.3.5 Wrap
16.3.3.5.1 Paper separation failure at fuser: when generating an image with a high color ratio in a
high humidity environment 0002-3538
Symptom
The leading edge of paper tends to resist separation in a high humidity environment and when the image has a
high color ratio.
Cause
The rigidity of paper is too low so that it tends to wrap around the fixing roller, preventing it from separating
from the roller at time of delivery.
Field Remedy
Add a cassette heater.
16.3.4 Malfunction
16.3.4.1 No Power
16.3.4.1.1 No power: Even after three minutes have passed from the power-ON, neither the power
lamp nor the control panel lights up. (Output failure of the DC power supply PCB J156) 0002-2493
Symptom
Even after three minutes have passed from the power-ON, neither the power lamp nor the control panel lights
up. (Output failure of the DC power supply PCB J156) <Refer to SymptomExplanation>
Description
When the power is turned ON, initialization of finisher and feeder should start if the main unit operates
normally. In this case, however, there is no initialization.
Cause
DC power supply PCB failure
Items to Check
1) Check whether DC line is supplied to the fuse PCB J56 from the DC power supply PCB J156. If no, check
the DC power supply PCB.
2) Check whether AC line is supplied to the DC power supply PCB. If there is no problem with the AC supply,
replace the DC power supply PCB.
Field Remedy
DC Power Supply PCB Part No. FG6-8970-000 (100/120V), FG6-8971-000 (220/240V)
16-68
Chapter 16
16.3.4.1.2 Machine not booting up, LCD not lighting up: Even after three minutes have passed from
the power-ON, only the power lamp lights up, but not the LCD. (Output failure of the DC power
supply PCB J157) 0002-2501
Symptom
Even after three minutes have passed from the power-ON, neither the power lamp nor the control panel lights
up. (Output failure of the DC power supply PCB J157) <Refer to SymptomExplanation>
Description
When the power is turned ON, initialization of the finisher and the feeder should start if the main unit operates
normally.
Cause
DC power supply PCB failure
Items to Check
1) Check whether DC line is supplied to the fuse PCB J57 from the DC power supply PCB J157. If no, check
the DC power supply PCB.
2) Check whether AC line is supplied to the DC power supply PCB. If there is no problem with the AC supply,
replace the DC power supply PCB.
Field Remedy
DC Power Supply PCB Part No. FG6-8970-000 (100/120V), FG6-8971-000 (220/240V)
16.3.4.1.3 When the power is turned ON, initialization of the finisher and the feeder should start if
the main unit operates normally. In this case, however, there is no initialization. 0002-2504
Symptom
Even after three minutes have passed from the power-ON, neither the power lamp nor the control panel lights
up. (Output failure of the DC power supply PCB J153) <Refer to SymptomExplanation>
Description
When the power is turned ON, initialization of the finisher and the feeder should start if the main unit operates
normally. In this case, however, there is no initialization.
Cause
DC power supply PCB failure
Items to Check
1) Check whether DC line is supplied to the fuse PCB J53 from the DC power supply PCB J153. If no, check
the DC power supply PCB.
2) Check whether AC line is supplied to the DC power supply PCB. If there is no problem with the AC supply,
replace the DC power supply PCB.
16-69
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
DC Power Supply PCB Part No. FG6-8970-000 (100/120V), FG6-8971-000 (220/240V)
16.3.4.1.4 PS-C1: Not start up while 'Please Wait' keeps displaying. iRC3200 Ver.9.05, PS-C1
Ver1.1.1 0005-3242
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
< Field Remedy >
Shut down the power of PS-C1 and iRC3200, and unplug the LAN cable connecting to network. Then, turn ON
the power of both devices.
a. If PS-C1 starts up normally
It is possible that the IP address for communication between PS-C1 and the user's LAN environment and the
one for communication between PS-C1 and iRC3200 might be identical. Download the patch file (1-
7RJ592.ps) into PS-C1 for a solution against overlap of IP addresses.
b. If PS-C1 does not start up normally while 'Please Wait' keeps displaying
Reinstall the system of PS-C1 Ver.1.1.1 again. If the patch file (1-7RJ592.ps) has already been downloaded,
follow the steps below:
1. After reinstalling the System of PS-C1 Ver.1.1.1, shut down the power of PS-C1.
2. On iRC3200, in service mode [COPIER> Option> INT-FACE> IMG-CONT], set at [0]. Then, shut down
and turn on the power of iRC3200.
3. On iRC3200, in service mode [COPIER> Option> INT-FACE> IMG-CONT], se at [3]. Then, shut down the
power of iRC3200.
4. Turn on the power of PS-C1 and then iRC3200. After making sure that the both devices start up normally,
download the patch file (1-7RJ592.ps) into PS-C1.
16.3.4.1.5 DADF-K1: iRC3200 does not start up while progress bar is stopping halfway, with
DADF-K1 installed 0005-6120
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that the Interface PCB was faulty. Unplug and reinsert the connectors on
it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
Interface PCB: FM2-0036
16.3.4.2.1 iRC3200 does not start up: After indication of message 'Starting up. Wait a moment.',
LCD alternates between black and blue 0002-3343
[ Case in the field ]
Cause
Due to faulty soldering of J1204 (for the Ethernet board) on the Main Controller PCB, a problem occurs with the
LCD during a power-on communication checking.
16-70
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
When this symptom occurs, replace the Main Controller PCB with a new one.
FG3-2854 Main Controller PCB
16.3.4.2.2 LCD on control panel not lighting up, remaining black 0002-3464
Symptom
LCD on control panel not lighting up, remaining black
Description
The main power indicator lights up and the machine starts the initial rotation.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the SDRAM on the main controller was found not to be fitted securely on the main
controller PCB.
Field Remedy
Check whether the SDRAM is securely fitted on the main controller PCB. If not, reinsert it securely.
16.3.4.2.3 LCD on control panel does not come on remaining black 0003-2353
[ Case in the field ]
Description
In the field, this symptom was solved by an insertion of the BootROM, the connector of the HDD, the Resolution
Switching Board and the SDRAM.
Field Remedy
Perform the steps below in the order presented. Note that there are relatively many cases that reinsertion of the
BootROM solved the problem in the field.
1. Remove and insert the BootROM.
2. Unplug and insert the connectors of the HDD.
3. Remove and insert the Resolution Switching Board.
4. Remove and insert the SDRAM. If the symptom still recurs, replace the SDRAM with a new one.
WA7-2645 SDRAM DIMM Ass'y
16-71
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.4.2.5 'Send' screen does not appear although SEND board has been installed 0005-6116
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
1. Make sure that [UI-SEND] is set to [1] in service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> UI-SEND].
2. Execute setup once again. In the middle of setup, if a message is displayed saying that the option has been
already installed, it means normal completion of setup. If it is not displayed, continue to setup.
3. Since this symptom occurred in the field because the Resolution Switch PCB was faulty, remove and reinstall
it once again. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
Resolution Switch PCB: FG3-2728
16.3.4.2.6 Control panel switch (ON/OFF key) does not work although control panel is replaced 0005-6133
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom was solved by unplugging/reinserting the cable that connects the Main Controller
PCB (Sub) to the control panel CPU PCB. Unplug and reinsert the connectors J1304 on the Main Controller
PCB and J1221 that connects to the control panel CPU PCB.
16.3.4.2.7 Streaks appear at intervals of 2cm; recurs after replacement of control panel 0005-9419
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Sub) was
faulty. If the symptom still recurs even after replacement of the control panel, replace the Main Controller PCB
(Sub) with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Sub): FG3-2855
16.3.4.3.1 Card Reader-D1: Counter does not increment after executing PWD-CLR, although
copying is possible 0005-6119
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
When executing PWD-CLR in service mode, it is necessary to set up the card reader once again. In service
mode [COPIER> Function>INSTALL>CARD], enter [1] and then start up the host machine again.
Symptom
'Close the front cover' is indicated
16-72
Chapter 16
Cause
Static noise would be happened if optinal cassette unit and iR1600 are not connected well to ground. It causes
bad communication between optinal cassette unit and iR1600, then iR1600 stopps paper feeding.'Close the front
cover' message would be indicated when paper jam happen caused by reason above, the message will be
indicated though jammed paper is removed and front cover is closed.
Field Remedy
Fix the grounding plate of optinal cassette unit located on the rear side of the iR1600 by binding screw with
washer.
16.3.4.4.2 Document detection failure of DADF-K1: Open/close of DADF-K1 not detected 0002-3026
Symptom
Installed DADF-K1 but the feeder open/ close detection is not working, so documents cannot be detected.
Cause
During installation, the cover plate had not been fitted to the reader upper assembly cover, so the open/close
sensor could not switch ON/ OFF.
Field Remedy
Attach the cover plate.
16.3.4.4.3 Service mode [COPIER>Function>SYSTEM>HDD] not completed for two hours 0002-3262
Symptom
When service mode > COPIER > Function > SYSTEM > HDD is run, the operation is still not finished two
hours later.
Cause
Even though this service mode was not being run, service mode was being displayed.
Field Remedy
Alternative service modes are as follows.
When service mode level 1 > COPIER > Function > SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE is set to '0' and run, a check and
recovery is run on the whole hard disk.
16-73
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.4.4.4 Host machine reboots when "Reservation copies can be made." message is displayed on
LCD: FAX unit is installed 0002-3467
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
As a result of inspection, the SRAM Board PCB was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Clear RAM of the SRAM in service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> MN-CON].
If the symptom still recurs, replace the SRAM Board PCB with a new one.
Note: Clearing the RAM or replacement of the SRAM Board PCB will erase all the image data inside the HDD.
FG3-2856 SRAM Board PCB Ass'y
16.3.4.4.5 Host machine locks up with message "Starting up. Please wait." 0002-8527
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
As a result of inspection, the SRAM Board PCB was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Check whether E719-0000 was recorded in ERR of service mode. If it was, it is possible the SRAM Board PCB is
faulty. Accordingly, make sure that it is properly installed. If the symptom still recurs, replace the SRAM Board
PCB with a new one.
Description
In this case, the machine locked up when the progress bar which appears at start up reached at the end. E719-0000
was recorded in the error log; however, there was no indication on the LCD. E719-0000 is an error code occurring
when the coin vendor cannot be detected. The machine, in this case, is not equipped with a coin vendor.
FG3-2856 SRAM Board PCB Ass'y
16.3.4.4.6 Unable to start copy operation even by pressing Start key 0002-8532
Symptom
Unable to start copy operation even by pressing Start key
Description
This symptom occurs after the FAX board was installed.
Cause
There is a case in the field that reinstallation of the FAX board solved the problem.
Field Remedy
Reinstall the FAX board.
16-74
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Initialize 'Copy Settings'. In user mode [Copy Settings>Initialize Copy Settings], select 'Yes'.
16.3.4.4.8 Machine rebooting or hanging up (locking up/nonoperational) upon release of FAX line 0003-8643
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
This symptom has been corrected with System software Ver.9.05. If the machine you are servicing is earlier
than Ver.9.05, upgrade it to Ver.9.05 and later.
16.3.4.4.9 Machine hanging up (locking up/nonoperational) during auto gradation adjustment (full
correction) 0003-8645
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
This symptom has been corrected with System software Ver.7.01. If the machine you are servicing is earlier
than Ver.7.01, upgrade it to Ver.7.01 and later.
16.3.4.4.10 Set values in service mode (level 2) [COPIER>Adjust>COLOR (to adjust color balance
for each level of density)] return to '0' after power OFF/ON0Ç…ñ?ÇÈ 0003-8652
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
This symptom was corrected with System software Ver.9.05. Upgrade it to Ver.9.05 and later.
16.3.4.4.13 iRC3200 displays Mailbox window on touch panel, not Copy, after startup is completed 0005-6102
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Interface PCB was faulty. Unplug
and reinsert the connectors on it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
Interface PCB: FM2-0036
16-75
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.4.4.15 iRC3200 locks up while displaying 'Copying' even when pressing Start key 0005-6122
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that the Interface PCB was faulty. Unplug and reinsert the connectors on
it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
Interface PCB: FM2-0036
16.3.4.4.16 iRC3200 shuts down and reboots unintentionally during FAX transmission 0005-6160
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Resolution Switch PCB was faulty. Remove and install it once
again. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
Resolution Switch PCB: FG3-2728
16.3.4.4.18 When making copy, iRC3200 goes back to ready state and fails to output paper after
scanning: FAX Board is installed 0005-6163
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In this case, this symptom did not occur without the original FAX board but recurred when installing other FAX
board. It was found in the field that the DC fuse PCB was faulty. Unplug and reinsert the connectors on the
DC fuse PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace the PCB with a new one.
DC Fuse PCB: FG3-2337
16.3.4.4.19 iRC3220 reboots when progress bar reaches right end and it almost starts up following
power-on upon installation 0008-1577
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
The captioned symptom occurred because the connector J308 on the Reader Controller PCB in the reader unit.
16-76
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Check the connection of J308 on the Reader Controller PCB. If poor contact is found, reinsert it once again.
FG3-2570 Reader Controller PCB
16.3.4.5 Noise
Field Remedy
Slightly decrease the tension of the ADF transfer belt. Shifting the position of the stoppers at the front and the
rear can adjust the tension.
16.3.4.5.2 DADF-K1 Continuous scanning sound is noisy: How to set DADF silent scanning mode 0003-8648
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
In service mode level 2 [COIPIER>Option>ACC>DF-MUTE], set at '1' to activate the DADF silent reading
mode. However, the speed of scanning the originals will slow down from 750mm/s to 420mm/s.
16-77
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.4.5.6 Abnormal noise from fixing exhaust fan (FM2): Because delivery cooling fan cable 0008-1578
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
The cable was connected to the delivery cooling fan in order to prevent the internal delivery roller from being
deformed by heat; however, abnormal noise was heard from the fixing exhaust fan or the cable was cut because
the cable was not fixed into the two cable cramps and interfered with the fixing exhaust fan.
Field Remedy
Inspect the cable to check whether it is fixed with two cable cramps securely. And, if you pull out the cable for
any service work, be sure to fix it with the cable cramps after the work.
FG3-3973 Delivery Cooling Fan Cable
Symptom
Indication of message 'Replace the toner container.'
Cause
There is a possibility that the waste toner container moves a little during operational vibration because of its
backlash, leading to misdetection.
Field Remedy
Clean the upper part of the waste toner container and a pair of waste toner sensors (light-emitting and receiving).
As a factory measure, a small part has been attached to the back of the front cover in order to hold the waste
toner container.
16-78
Chapter 16
Symptom
Copying cannot be started as 'Waiting' is displayed.
Field Remedy
Although a specific cause has not been determined, try turning the power OFF/ON.
FYI
1) Status line = 'Waiting', Dialog = 'Waiting':
The above are displayed when the job cannot be started for some reasons during the waiting status.
16.3.4.6.3 'Check network settings' not disappearing: even by swithcing 'Auto Detect' OFF in user
mode [System Settings>Network Settings>Ethernet Driver Settings] 0002-2523
Symptom
In user mode > System Settings > Network Settings > Ethernet Driver Settings, 'Auto Detect' is switched OFF
but a message 'Check network settings' cannot turn off.
Cause
This is a specification of this product.
Field Remedy
In service mode level 2 COPIER > OPTION > NWERR-SW, change the value from '1' to '0' and turn the power
OFF/ON.
0: Not display, 1: Display [Factory setting value/ post-RAM clear value]
16.3.4.6.4 How to indicate the timing when the drum should be changed. 0002-2538
Symptom
Want to show the timing when the drum should be changed.
Cause
The default settings (in service mode) of this product is as follows: Whether the degree of wear of the
photosensitive drum is displayed or not --> not displayed, whether the drum unit is suspended when it has
reached to the drum life --> not suspended. In other words, there is no indication available to encourage the
user to change the drum unit.
16-79
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Items to Check
The drum life can be checked in the following service mode.
Service mode level 1 COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > Y, M, C, K-DRM-LF
Drum unit life (Y/M/C/K ) appropriate range is 0 to 100.
Field Remedy
The default settings can be changed according to the following service mode:
*Service mode level 1 COPIER > OPTION > BODY >DLIFE-SW
Whether or not the degree of wear of the photosensitive drum is displayed.
0: not displayed [factory setting/post-RAM clear value)]
1: displayed (the degree of wear of the drum unit is displayed on user screen under 'System status' >
'Consumables'.
*Service mode level 2 COPIER > OPTION > USER > P-CRG-LF
Whether or not the drum unit is suspended when it has reached to the drum life.
0: not suspended [factory setting/post-RAM clear value]
1: suspended
(Method 1) DLIFE-SW '1', P-CRG-LF '1'
In the user screen, under 'System status' > 'Consumables', the degree of wear is shown in the form of a progress
bar (showing the amount of life remaining). Also, a warning is given at 90% and a message 'Replace drum (all
colors)' is shown at 100% and the machine will be suspended.
(Method 2) DLIFE-SW '0', P-CRG-LF '1'
In the user screen, under 'System status' > 'Consumables', the degree of wear is NOT shown in the form of a
progress bar. Also, when the drum life reaches 100%, the error lamp flashes red and the machine will be
suspended.
(Method 3) DLIFE-SW '1', P-CRG-LF '0'
In the user screen, under 'System status' > 'Consumables', the degree of wear is shown in the form of a progress
bar (showing the amount of life remaining). Also, even when the drum life has exceeded 100%, the machine
will not be suspended and still can be used.
(Method 4) DLIFE-SW '0', P-CRG-LF '0' (default settings)
In the user screen, under 'System status' > 'Consumables', the degree of wear is NOT shown in the form of a
progress bar. Also, even when the drum life has exceeded 100%, the machine will not be suspended and still
can be used.
16.3.4.6.5 When an arbitrary paper size is programmed in user mode [Common Settings>Stack
Bypass Standard Settings], paper of different paper sizes cannot be copied from the manual feed
tray. 0002-3350
Symptom
When an arbitrary paper size is programmed into user mode > common spec. settings > manual feed paper
standard mote registration, different sized paper is set in the manual feed tray and copies cannot be made.
Cause
If you register optional paper size in " User Mode> Common Specification Setting > Standard Mode
Registration for Manual Feed Paper", you can make a copy only on the registered size paper through manual
feeding. This is specified on this machine.
16-80
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
If you want to use paper of several sizes on manual feeding tray, explain to your users that they should not select
the "Standard Mode for Manual Feed Paper" in User Mode.
In service mode [COPIER>I/O>DC-CON>P05>bit11], check the operation of the sensor. If a problem is found,
replace the front cover open/closed sensor (FH7-7312) with a new one.
16.3.4.6.7 Indication of paper size that has been registered as Stack Bypass Standard Settings
disappears by removing paper from manual tray 0003-8639
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
This symptom has been corrected with System software Ver.9.05 so that the registered paper size keeps
displaying although no paper is loaded in the manual tray. If the machine you are servicing is earlier than
Ver.9.05, upgrade it to Ver.9.05 and later.
16.3.4.6.8 When attempting to use Remote UI, 'RUI Model Version 0902' message appears on a
computer display and unable to access host machine 0004-0721
[ Case in the field ]
Description
System Version: Ver.9.05
RUI: Ver.4.02
Cause
This symptom is caused by a mismatch in versions between System and Remote UI.
Field Remedy
Upgrade Remote UI to Ver.9.03.
16.3.4.6.9 Message 'Replace the waste toner container.' is displayed even after addition of sponge to
fix the waste toner container 0004-9851
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
This symptom has been corrected with the System Ver.10.01, so upgrade it to Ver.10.01 and later if this
happens.
16-81
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
This symptom has been corrected with the System Ver.10.01, so upgrade it to Ver.10.01 and later if this
happens.
16.3.4.6.11 When installing Send Kit, message 'Protect Key Device is not connected.' is displayed 0005-1900
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
It is possible that the Protect Key Device Driver is not installed. Double-click [hdd32.exe] in [iR Series Send
System Setup Tool] and install [Protect Key Device Driver] by following the instructions on the monitor. Then,
execute the setup.
16.3.4.6.13 Message 'The file attachment cannot be processed by Internet Fax. No programs can
process the file attachment.' is printed out with text of received I-Fax 0005-4587
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
This symptom can occur when the files (images) that are attached to received I-fax documents are not
compatible with this machine. In that case, the machine does not process (print, forward, or store) these files,
but erases them instead. The names of the erased files and the message above is printed out with the text of the
received I-fax.
For your information, iRC3200 I-Fax can support only TIFF format (MH, MR, MMR).
16.3.4.6.14 #899 User Error Code: After e-mail or I-Fax transmission 0005-6092
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
#899 can be displayed when the e-mail or I-Fax has been successfully sent; however, it is unknown whether or
not reception has been complete because transmission was relayed via multiple servers.
16-82
Chapter 16
16.3.4.6.16 When attempting to access iRC3200 via Remote UI, message 'User information is
invalid' is displayed 0005-6207
[ Case in the field ]
It is impossible that the above message will be displayed when the privacy preference setting is set to 'High'.
Try changing the privacy preference setting to 'Medium'.
In the Internet Explorer's case, click [Tool]> [Internet Option]> [Privacy].
Symptom
Pick up roller of ADF-J1 remains down
Cause
It is caused by faulty spring clutch which should be locked as pick up roller is raised.
Field Remedy
Replace spring clutch. Part number is FG3-3485-000
16-83
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.4.7.2 Flaming or Blanking inoperative: When a document is set on the ADF, the function
[Special Features>Area Designation>Pen Entry>Flaming or Blanking] is inoperative. 0002-2517
Symptom
When a document is set on the ADF, the following feature is not available: Special Features > Area Designation
> Pen Entry > Flaming or Blanking.
Cause
This is a specification of this product. However, the following feature is available: Special Features > Area
Designation > Numeric Key Entry > Flaming or Blanking.
Field Remedy
Explain to customer.
16.3.4.7.3 [Two-page Separation] is inoperative: When a document is set on the ADF, [Special
Features>Two-page Separation] is inoperative. 0002-2520
Symptom
When a document is set on the ADF, Special Features > Two-page Separation is not available.
Cause
This is a specification of this product.
Field Remedy
Explain to customer.
16.3.4.7.4 When attempting to view each item through the remote UI on the client PCs, only
'Device' can be seen. When the user attempts to view 'Job', 'Copy', 'Box', 'Address' and 'U 0002-2533
Symptom
When attempting to view each item through the remote UI on the client PCs, only 'Device' can be seen. When
the user attempts to view 'Job', 'Copy', 'Box', 'Address' and 'User mode', he is prompted to enter 'User name' and
'Password', and the items cannot be viewed.
Symptom
This is a specification of this product. Please refer to 'SpotDisposal' for more information.
Field Remedy
When the card reader C1/D1 is installed or 'Dept. ID Management' is activated in user mode, the following items
cannot be viewed: 'System Manager ID' and 'System Password' in service mode, and information related to print
volume and billing through the remote UI.. 'System Manager ID' and 'System Password' which are registered
in user mode should be entered into 'User name' and 'Password', respectively. Then, all the items can be viewed
through the remote UI.
16-84
Chapter 16
Symptom
Card Reader-D1: Cautions upon installation
Field Remedy
The installation procedures for the Card Reader-D1 is that the lowest number of the cards that are to be used
should be entered in service mode [COPIER>Function>INSTALL>CARD], and then the power is turned OFF/
ON.
DO NOT turn the power OFF until the entered number is displayed on the LCD (it will take 5 to 10 seconds).
It is possible that a mismatch in the data of SDRAM will occur and the machine will not start up with a message
'Starting up. Please wait.'.
16.3.4.7.6 Paper stacking failure: when outputting media of low rigidity in a high humidity
environment 0002-3536
Symptom
The medium tends to wave or curl if stacking is poor, as when the medium is of high rigidity and used in a high
humidity environment.
Cause
The medium absorbs moisture, and tends to curl appreciably downward.
Field Remedy
Set'1'for the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DEVL-FAN
16-85
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.4.7.9 Even after installing send kit, 'SEND' tab is not displayed on LCD 0004-0681
[ Case in the field ]
Description
Installation of the send kit has been successfully completed.
Cause
There is a case in the field that the symptom was corrected by reinstalling the Resolution Switching Board.
Field Remedy
It is possible that the Resolution Switching Board is not properly recognized. So, try reinstalling it. If the
symptom is not corrected, replace it with a new one.
0: 190 C (default)
1: 185 C
2: 180 C
16-86
Chapter 16
16.3.4.7.13 PS-C1: Screen does not change while 'Please Wait' screen keeps displaying 0004-9713
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
When 'Please Wait' screen appears, it does not change until pressing Close button. This symptom has been
corrected with a combination of the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1 and iRC3200 system Ver.10.01 so that the next
screen will automatically appear without pressing Close button.
16.3.4.7.14 PS-C1: Not start up after turning power of host machine OFF/ON 0004-9849
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
If only the host machine is turned OFF/ON, it is possible that the system of PS-C1 does not start up normally.
This symptom has been corrected with the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1, so upgrade it to Ver.1.1.1 or later if this
happens.
16.3.4.7.15 PS-C1: Machine locking up (hanging up/nonoperational) after forcibly outputting paper 0004-9850
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
After a paper size error occurs during printing, if the job is forcibly output through an operation on the host
machine control panel, PS-C1 can lock up. This symptom has been corrected with the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1,
so upgrade it to Ver.1.1.1 and later if this happens.
16.3.4.7.16 PS-C1: PS error when outputting image prepared with PhosoShop6 on Mac OS9 0004-9859
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
When attempting to output the binary mode image file prepared with PhosoShop6 on Mac OS9, PS error might
occur. This symptom has been corrected with the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1, so upgrade it to Ver.1.1.1 or later if
this happens.
16-87
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.5 Printing/scanning
16.3.5.1 No Output
Symptom
E747-00FF: only with printing operation Error Code
Cause
UFR board is faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the UFR board with a new one.
Symptom
Unable to print
Description
A print job can be sent from a PC, and PING also worked fine.
Field Remedy
If the setting in user mode [System Settings>Dept. ID Management>Accept Jobs With Unknown ID] is set at
'OFF', the same symptom will occur. Change it to 'ON'.
16-88
Chapter 16
16.3.5.1.4 Machine locking up when attempting to output massive size of data: machine is
configured as a UFR printer 0003-2360
[ Case in the field ]
Description
This symptom occurred with a 3.7MB PDF file.
Cause
There is a case in the field that replacement of the UFR board solved the problem.
Field Remedy
Upgrade the printer driver to the latest version. If the problem is not still solved, try replacing the UFR board
with a new one.
Field Remedy
In user mode [Printer Settings>Utility>Reset Printer], initialize the printer.
16-89
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.5.1.8 Unable to output attached file in e-mail sent from computer to iRC3200 0004-0658
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
A file attached to an e-mail from a computer to iRC3200 should be: A4, monochrome, resolution 200x200dpi
and TIFF format. If not, it will result in an error.
Note that there is no limitation when an e-mail is sent from iRC3200 to a computer.
16.3.5.1.9 Machine locking up when attempting to print during sleep mode 0004-0723
[ Case in the field ]
Cause
There is a case in the field that this symptom was corrected after the setting of energy consumption in sleep
mode was set at 'High'.
Field Remedy
In user mode [Common Settings> Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode], set it 'High'.
16.3.5.1.10 When attempting to print document selected with Envelope and stored in Inbox, unable
to print with message 'The paper type cannot be used with this mode.' 0004-2929
Field Remedy
If 'Envelope' is selected for the paper type, the finisher mode cannot be set. (The finisher mode is set by default.)
So, cancel the finisher mode and make a print. Refer to Mail Box Guide on page 5-9.
16.3.5.1.12 PS-C1: Unable to print Text file attached to body of email when attempting to print
using E-mail client, resulting in PDL error 0004-9760
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This is a specification of this product. Text file attached to the body of the email cannot be printed.
16.3.5.1.13 PS-C1: Unable to print texts in body of email when attempting to print using E-mail
client 0004-9771
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This is a specification of this product. Text in the body of the email cannot be printed. For more details, refer
to the Printing Guide on page 8-3.
16-90
Chapter 16
16.3.5.1.14 Second sheet and later are not output during LPR printing 0005-4294
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
As a temporary solution, do not launch Norton Firewall so that printing can be made properly.
As a permanent solution, update the file by executing LiveUpdate of Norton Firewall.
16.3.5.1.15 iRC3200 keeps displaying 'Processing' and does not print any data from computer 0005-6101
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was faulty. Unplug and reinsert
the connectors on it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Main): FG3-2854
16.3.5.1.16 When printing via UFR, iRC3200 locks up (becomes unoperational) with 'Waiting to
print' after outputting documents, unable to cancelé~LJÇÝǴǻǢ 0005-6218
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was faulty. Unplug and insert the
connectors on the PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace the PCB with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Main): FG3-2854
16.3.5.1.17 When printing through UFR, host machine halts with message 'Canceling' 0005-6596
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
< Field Remedy >
When the print job reaches the upper impression limit that has been specified using [Dept. ID Management]
feature, the host machine may halt with a message 'Canceling'. This symptom has been corrected with the UFR
Ver.1.02, so upgrade the UFR driver applicable to your computer's operating system to Ver.1.02 and later when
it occurs.
For your information, a temporary solution is to enable [Print After Completing RIP] in user mode [Printer
Settings> Settings> Print After Completing RIP> On]. (This process is not necessary when UFR is upgraded
to Ver.1.02 and later.)
16-91
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.5.3.1 Tip for scanning with Acrobat under auto duplex mode by using ADF 0002-1577
Symptom
Tip for scanning with Acrobat under auto duplex mode by using ADF
Description
When documents are set on the ADF and scanned under auto duplex mode, the pages of a PDF file get out of
order.
Cause
This is a specification limitation of Adobe Acrobat 5.x.
Field Remedy
Set the scanning settings on Acrobat at 'Simplex'.
Symptom
Duplex printing is inoperative with Illustrator10.x.
Description
Even when a file containing multiple pages are printed in duplex mode, it is output in simplex.
Field Remedy
Save the file in a form of Illustrator9.0 compatibility and print it in duplex mode from Illustrator9.x.
16-92
Chapter 16
16.3.5.3.3 Printing unavailable with PS-C1: Setup menu not displayed 0002-1859
Symptom
Printing unavailable with PS-C1: Setup menu not displayed
Field Remedy
PS-C1 is applicable only with MN-CONT Ver.6.02 and later.
16.3.5.3.4 Some fonts are garbled when using 'Image Combination' or 'Image Separation' functions. 0002-1892
Symptom
Some fonts are garbled when using 'Image Combination' or 'Image Separation' functions.
Description
This symptom concerns only Japanese fonts.
16.3.5.3.5 Black image: when scanned with iRC3200 PS-C1 using Fiery Scan3.4 0002-3563
Symptom
Black image: when scanned with iRC3200 PS-C1 using Fiery Scan3.4
Cause
Fiery Scan3.4 does not support iRC3200.
Field Remedy
If a scanning is done with iRC3200 PS-C1, install Fiery RemoteStan5 which is contained in a CD supplied with
iRC3200 PS-C1.
16-93
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.5.3.8 Output order is retrograde when making a copy from DF after 'Tray B' has been
designated as a delivery tray for copy 0003-2402
[ Manual-related ]
Cause
This is the specification of this product.
Field Remedy
If the side delivery tray (referred to as 'Tray B') is designated as a delivery tray for copy in a state of none of the
finisher products being installed, the back-side up delivery function becomes ineffective. This means that the
printed paper will be delivered right-side up and the output order will be retrograde against the original.
16.3.5.3.9 How to adjust image density when printing via UFR 0003-2781
[Manual-related]
Field Remedy
In user mode [Printer Settings>Settings>Image Quality>Density], adjust the density of each color.
16.3.5.3.10 PS-C1: Color around texts is different from background when outputting data of Quark
Xpress (for Mac4.1) 0004-0645
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
Check the settings for printerfont on Mac side. If there are any fonts on which a check mark is not placed for
'Font exists', place the check mark on all the fonts.
16.3.5.3.11 When merging multiple documents in inbox, print settings for individual documents
become ineffective 0004-0696
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
If you combine multiple documents and print them as one document, they are printed using the Standard Local
Print settings in stead of the individual settings of the respective documents. When the print is completed, the
individual settings become effective again.
For the detail of merging documents, refer to Mail Box Guide on page 5-28. For the standard local print settings,
refer to Reference Guide on page 4-48.
16.3.5.3.12 Document stored in Inbox from computer cannot be printed in monochrome 0004-2954
Field Remedy
A document stored in Inbox from a computer cannot be printed in monochrome mode. Refer to Mail Box Guide
on page 5-25 for more details.
16-94
Chapter 16
16.3.5.3.13 PS-C1: When outputting to Direct queue on MacOS, halftone setting specified on
Illustrator not reflected on actual printing 0004-9765
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
When outputting to Direct queue, the halftone setting specified on Illustrator may not be reflected to the actual
printing but changed to the default setting.
This symptom has been corrected with the PS-C1 system Ver.1.1.1, so upgrade it to Ver.1.1.1 and later if this
happens.
16.3.5.3.14 PS-C1: When attempting to duplex print with Custom paper size, it is printed by
Simplex 0004-9789
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Field Remedy
When attempting to duplex print with Custom paper size, the job can be printed by Simplex depending on the
size. The supported size is [182 - 457.2] x [105 - 305]mm.
16.3.5.3.15 PS-C1: 11x17-sized paper is not output in proper direction when attempting to output
LTR and 11x17 simultaneously 0004-9865
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
Select 'Large Paper Only' for [Rotate 180] in Print Options. For more details, refer to Appendix A: Print Options
in the Printing Guide.
16.3.5.3.16 Color of output image is different from that shown on computer monitor when printing
via UFR: Windows2000 or XP-equipped PC is used 0005-3351
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
On the window of UFR printer driver properties, click [Quality] tab> [Manual Color Settings]> [Color
Settings], and select [ICM Mode] for Matching Mode and [Perceptual (Monitor Color Matched)] for Matching
Method.
16-95
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.5.3.17 Print settings made in printer driver were not effective when printing multiple sheets of
MS Excel data 0005-4584
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
In order to print multiple sheets of MS Excel data with some special features (e.g. duplex mode, specifying a
particular paper source), it is necessary to make those settings for every sheet. Before printing, make the
appropriate settings in [Properties] of the printer driver for every sheet.
16.3.5.3.18 When printing three-page document (PDF in this case) via UFR, 1st page is misaligned
and iRC3200 locks up with 'Waiting to print' indication during printing 3rd page 0005-6179
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was faulty. Unplug and insert the
connectors on the PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace the PCB with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Main): FG3-2854
16.3.5.3.19 PS-C1: Image data attached to document becomes mirror image 0003-8610
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ]
Description
This symptom can occur in the combination below:
Operating System: Windows 98/Me
Application Software: Word2000
Field Remedy
This symptom has been corrected with a patch file '1-9C5YH'. Install it at the time of its occurrence.
16.3.5.3.20 To Activate ICC Profile when ICM Mode Is Selected in Printer Driver 0002-5425
Symptom
To Activate ICC Profile when ICM Mode Is Selected in Printer Driver
Overview
Select a color profile when you select ICM Mode for the Matching Mode in the Color Settings dialog.
Cause
There are two tab sheets for ICM controls on the driver. Without properly setting the relevant controls, you cannot
get the print results as desired.
Field Remedy
Field Countermeasure
Take the following steps for setting a color profile.
1. Open the Color Management tab sheet in the Properties for the printer.
2. Select Manual radio button.
Note: When Automatic is selected, the printer driver automatically selects the printer profile that matches the printer.
When Manual is selected, the color profile selected in the Color Profiles list box is used for printing.
3. If the list does not have the desired profile, click Add button, select the desired profile, and click Add button to
add the profile in the list.
16-96
Chapter 16
4. Select a profile from the list and click Set As Default button.
5. Click OK button to close the properties.
Then, select ICM Mode from the Matching Mode list box on the Matching tab sheet in the Color Settings dialog and
submit the job to the printer.
Remarks
Note that selecting improper profiles may cause undesirable print results.
ICC
F-16-53
16-97
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
ICM
F-16-54
16-98
Chapter 16
PrinterPropaties
F-16-55
F-16-56
16-99
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
F-16-57
16-100
Chapter 16
Select the defined paper size from the Output Size dropdown list box on the Page Setup tab sheet.
Output Size
(Fig)
OutPutSize
F-16-58
16-101
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
F-16-59
16-102
Chapter 16
F-16-60
16-103
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Select Start > Settings > Printers and select the printer for setting custom paper size. On the menu bar in Printers
window, select File > Server Properties.
Server Properties
(Fig)
Server Propaties
F-16-61
16-104
Chapter 16
On Form tab sheet, select the Create a New Form option. Enter an appropriate name in the Form Description text
box. Under Measurements, enter appropriate values for Paper Size and Printer Area Margins fields.
Notes:
For setting Paper Size and Printer Area Margins, enter values within the range specified for the printer. The printer
driver does not show the custom paper sizes with values that exceed the specified range.
Enter 5 mm or larger values for the margins.
In Form to Tray Assignment dialog, select Stack Bypass from the Paper Source list and the defined paper size from
the Paper Size dropdown list box.
(Fig)
Create a new form
F-16-62
16-105
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Remarks
If the LPR is used for protocol, transmitted data is not buffered in the NIC so that the symptom does not occur.
SNMP OFF
F-16-63
16-106
Chapter 16
16.3.6 Network
16.3.6.1.1 Utility software (e.g. Network ScanGear) cannot be used, no problem with other
functions 0005-6123
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
< Field Remedy >
It is possible that [SNMP Settings] and [Enable Dedicated Port] are set to 'Off'. If so, change them to 'On'.
In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> SNMP Settings> On
In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> Enable Dedicated Port> On
[SNMP Settings]: If you want to set or browse each item of the machine with utility software that uses SNMP
to obtain information, set it to 'On'.
[Enable Dedicated Port]: If you want to set or browse detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer
driver or utility software, set it to 'On'.
16.3.6.2.1 Facsimile mark is occasionally displayed at lower-left corner of LCD, message 'POP
server connection error' is displayed 0004-0729
[ Case in the field ]
Description
This symptom can occur when the host machine has been configured to receive e-mail or I-fax via POP server.
Field Remedy
It is possible that the host machine is not properly connected to the POP server. Check the connection settings
of POP server:
In user mode [System Settings>Network Settings>E-mail/I-Fax], check [POP Server], [POP Address] and
[POP Password].
16-107
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
F-16-64
16.3.7 Transmission/Fax-Related
Symptom
##796 displaying at FAX transmission
Field Remedy
This error is related to ECM.
Try to make 'ECM TX' invalid or replace the FAX board.
16-108
Chapter 16
Symptom
##765 only with a specific destination
Description
The result is the same even by dialing the fax number on numerical keys.
Field Remedy
Change the following settings as below:
1. Transmission speed: 9600 bps
2. Echo protect tone in high speed transmission (SW03-1): Send
3. Bit output from DIS signal bit 33 onward (SW05-3): Prohibit
4. Protocol signals final flag sequences (SW04-2): 2
16.3.7.1.3 E674-0001: When the START button is pressed to send a G3 Fax, a beep sound is heard
and no transmission can be made. Also, E674-0001 is recorded in the error history. (Output
failure of the fuse PCB J61) <Refer to SymptomExplanation> 0002-2506
Symptom
When the START button is pressed to send a G3 Fax, a beep sound is heard and no transmission can be made.
Also, E674-0001 is recorded in the error history. (Output failure of the fuse PCB J61) <Refer to
SymptomExplanation>
Description
There was no indication that this problem had occurred as far as the following were checked: 'Sending Job
Status', 'Receiving Job Status' and 'Job History'.
Items to Check
1) Check whether DC line is supplied to the Super G3 Fax board PCB J560 from the fuse PCB J61. If no, check
the output of J61 on the fuse PCB.
2) If there is no DC output from the fuse PCB J61, check whether DC is input into the fuse PCB J53, J56, J57
and J58 from the DC power supply PCB. If DC is supplied from the DC power supply PCB, the fuse PCB is
likely faulty.
Field Remedy
Perform CheckItem and replace the fuse PCB ass'y, if faulty.
16-109
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.7.1.4 Lines in the main scanning direction at about 4mm intervals: on FAX received image at
receiving side 0002-4750
Symptom
Lines in the main scanning direction at about 4mm intervals: on FAX received image at receiving side
Description
This symptom does not occur on copied images.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the main controller PCB was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the main controller PCB with a new one.
F-16-65
16-110
Chapter 16
16.3.7.1.6 Message 'Data exceeds available size.' is displayed at iFAX transmission 0003-2334
[ Case in the field ]
Cause
It is possible that the data size of the document exceeds the upper limit specified in user mode.
Field Remedy
In user mode [System Settings>Communications Settings>E-mail/I-FAX Settings>Maximum Data Size For
Sending], try increasing the data size.
16.3.7.1.8 Documents stored in Memory RX Inboxes are sent in a file after selecting all documents
(pressing 'Select All') 0003-8603
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
When attempting to send all documents stored in Memory RX Inboxes by pressing 'Select All', they will be sent
in a file, not in a separate file if MTIFF or PDF is selected as a file type.
In order to send the documents in a separate file, select 'TIFF' or 'JPEG' as a file type.
16-111
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.7.1.12 PS-C1: Unable to download PDF files from FieryDownloader with Direct connection 0004-9712
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This is a specification of this product. When attempting to download PDF files with Direct connection, the print
job will be spooled to the Print queue and then printed. If the Print queue is not enabled, the job is spooled to
the Hold queue and must be released for printing by the operator.
16-112
Chapter 16
16.3.7.1.14 Message like 'Check the settings for the server.' is displayed when attempting to send
push scan to computer; push scan to Inbox is available 0004-9847
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
If push scan to any Inboxes can be sent, the Resolution Switching Board and the sending function operate
normally. So, check the settings for the file server on the network. Refer to the Network Guide, on page 3-46
for FTP server, and on page 5-16 for configuration of the shared folder for Windows.
16.3.7.1.16 E-mail cannot be sent: Field of e-mail address of iRC3200 is blank 0005-4293
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
E-mail cannot be sent if the e-mail address of iRC3200 is not registered. Register the e-mail address in user
mode [System Settings> Network Settings> E-mail/I-Fax> E-mail Address].
16.3.7.1.17 iRC3200 displays 'Too many jobs are specified.' upon FAX TX, with Resolution Switch
PCB installed 0005-6107
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that the Resolution Switch PCB was faulty. Replace it with a new one.
Resolution Switch PCB: FG3-2728
16.3.7.1.18 When attempting to send FAX, iRC3200 does not dial destination's number after
scanning 0005-6176
[ Case in the field ]
Field Remedy
In this case, this symptom recurred even after installing other Fax board. It was found in the field that the DC
fuse PCB was faulty. Unplug and reinsert the connectors on the DC fuse PCB. If the symptom still recurs,
replace the PCB with a new one.
DC Fuse PCB: FG3-2337
16-113
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.7.1.19 Fax number is not entered partially (in the actual failure case, 2nd digit) 0007-4511
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Description
If you enter a fax number using the numerical keys without pressing the "Fax" key immediately after switching to
the "Send" screen (this is not a proper procedure), the machine has to start up the entry screen of the fax number
and cannot accept any entry of the numerical keys in a fraction of a second because of software constraints. This
is to prevent any operational error even if some key operations are done during transition of the screens. In this
failure case, one digit of the fax number was not entered because the operator pressed the number during the
affected period of time.
Field Remedy
According to the proper procedure, press the "Fax" key after switching to the "Send" screen, and then enter the fax
number using the numerical keys. Or, enter the number slowly after making sure that the screen has been switched.
For more details, refer to Sending and Facsimile Guide [Basic Sending Methods> Specifying Destinations> Using
the New Address Tab> Specifying a Fax Number].
Overview
When registering the Address Book for the Fax driver, users of the Users group cannot select Address Book List on
Windows XP in NTFS drive.
Cause
Users of the Users group for Windows do not have the privilege to access the Address Book file.
Field Remedy
Field Countermeasure
To edit the Address Book, the user must have the privilege for the Power Users or higher group.
Remarks
In FAT32 drives, users who have the privilege lower than the Power Users can edit the Address Book.
Question
Sending a mail from iR C3200 to the mail server of the provider results in End Code # 899. What does the End Code
mean?
Answer
The chapter 12 in the Sending Guide has descriptions for this code, as shown below.
Cause
The iR C3200 has successfully sent out the email or ifax from the SMTP server, but cannot confirm that it has arrived
16-114
Chapter 16
Cause
The # 899 proves that the iR C3200 itself has sent the mail successfully.
In the Simple mode for iFax or email, iR C3200 is responsible for sending out data from its SMTP server but is not
responsible for tracing further transmission pathway to the recipient's mail server. Thus, it cannot judge if the
recipient can receive the data properly. In this sense, iR C3200 displays the # 899 to notify that it has sent data out
from the SMTP server successfully.
Field Remedy
Please explain the users the meaning of the # 899.
Remarks
This code appears when data is transmitted in Canon FTP with iW Gateway.
16.3.7.2.1 Faint lines in the main scanning direction at about 1mm intervals: on FAX received image 0002-4748
Symptom
Faint lines in the main scanning direction at about 1mm intervals: on FAX received image
Description
This symptom does not occur on copied images.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the main controller PCB was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the main controller PCB with a new one.
16.3.7.2.2 iRC3200 displays 'Printing' after FAX reception and does not output RX documents 0005-6100
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was faulty. Unplug and reinsert
the connectors on it. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Main): FG3-2854
16-115
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.7.2.3 iRC3200 does not output FAX RX documents although reception has been completed
successfully 0005-6108
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Resolution Switch PCB was faulty. Remove and reinsert the
PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace it with a new one.
Resolution Switch PCB: FG3-2728
16.3.7.3.1 Alarm tone (Success tone, Error tone) emitted upon completion of sending/receiving fax 0004-8987
[ Manual-related ]
Description
According to Sending Guide/Facsimile Guide, the alarm volume is the tone that is emitted when an original has
been successfully sent/received using a fax, or when a send/receive error has occurred. However, the alarm tone
is not emitted upon completion of sending/receiving fax.
Field Remedy
In order to emit the alarm tone, the following setting change is required in service mode. So, set it upon request
from your customer.
16.3.8.1 Paper not picked up: although the paper sensor detects paper inside the
cassette 0002-3284
Symptom
Sensor detects cassette paper, though no paper is present.
Cause
When the cassette is set, though the pickup roller should descends and stop on the paper surface, the pickup
assembly spring (FS7-2800-000) was out of place so the roller returned to the original position and paper could
not be picked up.
Field Remedy
Remove the pickup assembly and attach the spring (FS7-2800-000).
16-116
Chapter 16
16.3.8.3 0105 Jam Code: Occurs with machine having mylar sheet to fixing/feeder
sensor flag 0002-3570
16-117
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Symptom
JAM CODE 0108, 0207
Cause
Pins of the connectors in the delivery vertical path unit are bent.
Field Remedy
Because of a bend, there is a possibility that the connectors are not securely connected. Correct the bend if the
pins are bent.
* Replacement of the fixing ass'y often solved the problem in the field; however, there are several cases where
toner adhering to the internal delivery roller or pinched wires of delivery vertical path motor caused this
symptom.
16.3.8.7 0207 Jam Code: Because of deformation of internal delivery roller 0007-9931
16-118
Chapter 16
16.3.8.9 JAM CODE 0A0A: At about 41 sec. after the power is turned ON, due to a
duplexing driver PCB failure 0002-2026
Symptom
About 41 sec. after the power is turned ON, a jam (0A0A) occurs due to a failure of the duplexing driver PCB.
Cause
Duplexing driver failure
Items to Check
1) Check whether DC line is output from the fuse PCB J70.
2) Check whether DC line is supplied to the duplexing driver PCB J440 from the fuse PCB J70.
16-119
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Perform CheckItem and replace the duplexing driver PCB, if faulty.
Symptom
JAM CODE 0B00/0105:
0B00 Front Cover Open/Close Sensor Jam
0105 Registration Delay Jam
Field Remedy
JAM CODE 0B00 is for front cover open/close jam and JAM CODE 0105 is for registration delay jam.
Check whether the delivery vertical path cover open/close sensor in the delivery vertical path ass'y is securely
installed. In the past, displacement of this sensor caused this
16.3.9.1 JAM CODE 008C: frequent occurrence recorded in jam history under
service mode, although unable to reproduce during paper feeding test. 0002-3047
Symptom
Service mode history shows frequent feeder document jams (008C). However, the jams are not reproduced
when a paper feed test is run.
Cause
Jams happened because mixed documents of the same size system were copies without pressing the 'Mixed
sized documents' key.
Field Remedy
Explain to the customer that she must press the 'Mixed size documents' key to copy mixed size documents.
Also, explain that documents of different size systems cannot be mixed.
16-120
Chapter 16
16.3.10.1 E000 Error code detail The rise in temperature in the fixing unit at time
of power-on is inadequate. 0002-1288
Symptom
E000 The rise in temperature in the fixing unit at time of power-on is inadequate. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-2
16.3.10.2 E001 Error code detail The fixing unit is overheating. 0002-1380
Symptom
E001 The fixing unit is overheating. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-3
16-121
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.3 E002 Error code detail The rise in temperature of the fixing unit is
inadequate. 0002-1593
Symptom
E002 The rise in temperature of the fixing unit is inadequate. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-4
16-122
Chapter 16
16.3.10.4 E003 Error code detai The temperature of the fixing unit is abnormally
low after standby. 0002-1594
Symptom
E003 The temperature of the fixing unit is abnormally low after standby. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-5
16.3.10.5 E004 Error code detail The protection circuit of the fixing unit is faulty. 0002-1615
Symptom
E004 The protection circuit of the fixing unit is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-6
16-123
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.6 E004-0003 Error code Or message 'Remove the paper from the finisher
trays.': after implementing countermeasure against malfunction of fixing feeder
unit open/closed sensor 0002-4676
Symptom
E004-0003 or message 'Remove the paper from the finisher trays.': after implementing countermeasure against
malfunction of fixing feeder unit open/closed sensor Error Code
Description
This symptom occurs after attaching a sheet of mylar to the sensor flag for the fixing feeder unit open/closed
sensor as a countermeasure against malfunction
Cause
1. While attaching a sheet of mylar to the sensor flag, the delivery vertical path cover open/closed sensor comes
off and short-circuited due to a contact with the sheet metal. Finally, the DC fuse PCB (FG3-2337) is broken.
2. Since the face-down delivery sensor 1 comes off, a message 'Remove the paper from the finisher trays.' is
displayed.
Field Remedy
1. Replace the DC fuse PCB with a new one.
2. Reinstall the face-down delivery sensor 1.
Note: When implementing the countermeasure, be careful not to detach the face-down delivery sensor 1 and the
delivery vertical path cover open/closed sensor.
16-124
Chapter 16
16.3.10.8 E004-0007 Error Code: Occasionally occurs first in the morning 0006-4441
[ Manual-related ]
Description
E004-0006 can be displayed when temperature monitored by the main thermistor becomes 150 degrees C or lower
during printing. The main cause is that the main thermistor is faulty.
E004-0007 can be displayed when temperature monitored by the sub thermistor becomes 140 degrees C or lower
during printing. The main cause is that the sub thermistor is faulty.
16-125
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.10 E012 Error code detail The drum ITB motor is faulty. 0002-1616
Symptom
E012 The drum ITB motor is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-7
0001 The ITB drum motor The lock (normal state) signal is not detected
fails to rotate. within 2 sec after the ITB drum motor control
signal has gone ON or the motor speed has been
changed.
0002 The ITB drum motor The lock (normal state) signal stops 0.5 sec later.
fails to rotate after it has
rotated.
Symptom
E012-0001: ITB motor not rotating
Field Remedy
There is a possibility that the long arm is unable to actuate the front door switch because it almost comes off.
Make sure that the arm is placed securely.
16.3.10.12 E012-0001 Error code At about 37 sec. after the power is turned ON,
due to a drum ITB motor failure 0002-2015
Symptom
About 37 sec. after the power is turned ON, E012-0001 is displayed due to a drum ITB motor failure.
Cause
Rotational failure of drum ITB motor
16-126
Chapter 16
Items to Check
1) In service mode level 1 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR, enter 1 and press the OK key.
2) In service mode level 1 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR-ON, press the OK key to check
whether the motor is working normally.
3) Check whether 24V is supplied to J93 on the ITB drum motor. If yes, the ITB motor likely faulty.
4) If 24V is not supplied to the ITB drum motor, check whether 24V is output from fuse PCB J70-3 to the ITB
drum motor.
Also, check whether 24V is output from the fuse PCB J71-1 to the microswitch PCB and also whether 24V is
supplied to the fuse PCB J71-2 from the microswitch PCB.
5) If there is no problem between the fuse PCB J71-1, -2 and the microswitch PCB, the fuse PCB is likely faulty.
If 24V is output from the fuse PCB J71-1 to the microswitch PCB and not supplied to the fuse PCB J71-2, check
the microswitch PCB.
Field Remedy
Replace the drum ITB motor.
16.3.10.13 E012-0001 Error code At about 37 sec. after the power is turned ON,
due to a microswitch PCB failure 0002-2018
Symptom
About 37 sec. after the power is turned ON, E012-0001 is displayed, due to a microswitch PCB failure.
Cause
Rotational failure of drum ITB motor
Items to Check
1) In service mode level 1 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR, enter 1 and press the OK key.
2) In service mode level 1 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR-ON, press the OK key to check
whether the motor is working normally.
3) Check whether 24V is supplied to J93 on the ITB drum motor. If yes, the ITB motor likely faulty.
4) If 24V is not supplied to the ITB drum motor, check whether 24V is output from fuse PCB J70-3 to the ITB
drum motor.
Also, check whether 24V is output from the fuse PCB J71-1 to the double switch PCB (microswitch PCB) and
also whether 24V is supplied to the fuse PCB J71-2 from the double switch PCB.
5) If there is no problem between the fuse PCB J71-1, -2 and the double switch PCB, the fuse PCB is likely
faulty.
If 24V is output from the fuse PCB J71-1 to the double switch PCB and not supplied to the fuse PCB J71-2,
check the double switch PCB.
16-127
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
Replace the double switch PCB.
16.3.10.14 E012-0001 Error Code: Drum ITB Motor, DC Power Supply PCB and
Fuse PCB work normally 0005-6214
For your information, if 24V is not supplied to the Fuse PCB, the relay on the PCB does not work and
consequently 24V is not supplied to the Drum ITB motor that is required to drive the ITB.
16.3.10.15 E012-0001 Error Code: Because Drum ITB Motor is faulty, or Fuse
PCB is faulty 0006-4440
16-128
Chapter 16
Symptom
E020-0134: recurring even after replacement of yellow drum unit
Cause
The ITB is not properly pressurized and a sample patch for ATR control is not formed on the ITB.
Field Remedy
There is a possibility that the ITB is not pressurized due to a breakage of the lock lever in the are applying the
pressure to the ITB. Also, there is a report from the field that the tension spring was broken.
16.3.10.17 E020 Error code detail There is a fault associated with the drum/
developer. 0002-1627
Symptom
E020 There is a fault associated with the drum/developer. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-8
xx24 There is a fault/open circuit in the The fault can occur as when a new drum
SALT sensor. unit has been fitted. It is detected during
ATR control or in about 150 sec after
idle rotation of the developing
assembly.
16-129
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
xx25 There is a fault/open circuit in the The fault can occur as when a new drum
SALT sensor. unit has been fitted. It is detected during
The ITB has deteriorated. ATR control or in about 150 sec after
idle rotation of the developing
assembly.
xx30 There is a fault/open circuit in the The fault can occur as when a new drum
ATR sensor. The setting of the ATR unit has been fitted. It is detected in
sensor computation value is wrong. about 90 to 120 sec after idle rotation of
The drum unit is not fitted properly, or the developing assembly.
is faulty.
xx34 The sample image fails to be drawn in The fault can occur as when a new drum
ATR control. There is a fault/open unit has been fitted. It is detected during
circuit in the SALT sensor. The drum ATR control or in about 150 sec after
unit is faulty. The ITB has idle rotation of the developing
deteriorated. assembly.
xx35 There is a fault/open circuit in the The fault can occur as when a new drum
SALT sensor. unit has been fitted. It is detached
during ATR control or in about 150 sec
after idle rotation of the developing
assembly.
xx40 The ATR sensor communication The fault can occur as when a new drum
value is faulty. There is a fault/open unit has been fitted. It is detected in
circuit in the ATR sensor. The drum about 90 to 120 sec after idle rotation of
unit has been fitted improperly. (The the developing assembly.
machine cannot detect the drum unit).
The drum unit is faulty.
xx60 The developer concentration target The fault occurs when an image is
value is faulty (set when a new drum is being formed. It is detected when toner
fitted; the value is extremely small). supply operation is started.
xx70 The developer concentration target The fault occurs when an image is
value is faulty (set when a new drum being formed. It is detected when toner
unit is fitted; the value is extremely supply operation is started.
small).
xx80 The actual value is considerably high The fault occurs while ATR control is
in relation to the ITB surface being executed.
reflectance when a new drum unit is
fitted. The SALT sensor is faulty.
16-130
Chapter 16
xx81 The actual value is considerably high The fault occurs while ATR control is
in relation to the ITB surface being executed.
reflectance when a new drum is fitted.
xxA0 The measured value of the developer The fault occurs when an image is
concentration is considerably low. being formed. It is detected when toner
The ATR sensor is faulty. The SALT supply operation is started.
sensor is faulty. The ITB is soiled.
xxB0 The drum unit is approaching the end The fault occurs when an image is
of its life and is causing the T/D ratio being formed. It is detected when toner
to drop. The ATR sensor has an open supply operation is started.
circuit.
xxC0 The supply of toner for the toner The fault occurs when an image is
container to the developing assembly being formed.
is faulty. The developing assembly is
supplied with toner excessively. The
ATR sensor has an open circuit.
xxD0 The supply of toner for the toner The fault occurs when an image is
container to the developing assembly being formed and, in addition, when the
has failed. The toner cartridge motor T/D ratio drops while 20 prints are
fails to rotate. The toner container is being made continuously. It is detected
empty. The toner supply mouth of the when toner supply operation is started.
drum unit is damaged. The ATR
sensor has an open circuit.
Symptom
E020-xx81: generally E020-0181 Error Code
Description
This error code is displayed when the coefficient of the SALT sensor contamination becomes lower than the
specified value; 70 or less in service mode [COPIER>Display>DENS>WINDOW-Y/M/C/K].
Cause
1. E020-0181: Since the service case storing the service book is not installed inside the front door, the SALT
sensor shutter is not opened. Consequently, the SALT sensor is unable to measure the density of sample patches
formed by the ATR control on the transfer belt.
2. E020-xx81: Since the SALT sensor is soiled, it is unable to precisely measure the density of sample patches
formed by the ATR control.
16-131
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
1. When E020-0181 occurs, first check whether the service case is installed inside the front door. If not, install
it to the designated position.
2. Check whether the SALT sensor is soiled with toner. If it is, slide the cleaning device several times or clean
the sensor with a blower brush. Do not rub the sensor surface with a dry cloth as it can be electrically charged
and soiled with toner again.
If E020-xx81 recurs even performing the above, replace the SALT sensor (FH7-7601) with a new one.
16.3.10.19 E020-0081 Error code Displaying when a copy is made with the service
case removed 0002-2508
Symptom
When a copy is made with the service case removed, E020-0081 is displayed.
Cause
There is a projection on the service case, which opens/closes the SALT sensor shutter. Therefore, if a copy is
made without the service case, E020-0081 is displayed.
Field Remedy
Re-attach the service case.
16.3.10.20 E020-0X34, E020-0X21 Error code Upon installation in a cold season 0002-3219
Symptom
The E020-0X34, or the E020-0X21 lights on when you install this machine in the cold season.
Cause
If you carry in this machine which has been placed in cold environment, condensation occurs because of the
temperature difference between the body and the room.
Condensation on the surface of the drum prevents toner from attaching to the drum, which causes the E020-
0X34 to light on.
Condensation on the patch sensor decreases the amount of light of the patch detecting sensor, which causes the
E020-0X24 to light on.
Field Remedy
Leave it as it is for about 15 minutes until condensation recovers.
16.3.10.21 E020-04B0 Error code At about 200 to 300 sheets from installation,
toner container motor (Bk) not rotating (Refer to SymptomExplanation.) 0002-3278
16-132
Chapter 16
Symptom
After installation, when about 200 to 300 sheets have been fed through, the toner container motor (Bk) does not
rotate and error E020-04B0 is displayed. (Supplementary reference)
Description
* E020-0xB0 detection timing
Reduced T/D ratio due to life of drum unit. Broken wire in ATR sensor.
If the toner container motor does not rotate and toner is not supplied to the drum unit, the toner in the drum unit
will gradually run out and the T/D ratio will get lower.
This can be checked in service mode COPIER > Display > DENS > DENS-K.
Cause
Upon shipment from the factory, the cable relay jack (J674) of the toner container motor (Bk), leading from
the DC controller PCB was loose.
Items to Check
1 The operation of the toner container motor (Bk) can be checked with the following service mode procedure.
Under service mode level 1 COPIER > Function > PART-CHK > MTR, enter 5 and press OK.
2 Under service mode level 1 COPIER > Function > PART-CHK > MTR-ON, press OK.
If everything is normal, the toner container motor (Bk) will come ON in 10 seconds.
The problem in this case was that the motor did not rotate.
Field Remedy
First, check the listed items.
If the toner container motor is not operating, check the cables from the DC controller PCB J126-B4 to the cable
relay jack (J674) and to the toner container motor (Bk).
If the toner relay jack is loose, secure it.
If there is no toner container motor (Bk) drive signal output from the DC controller J126-B4, check the DC input
to the DC controller and, if there is nothing wrong, replace the DC controller.
Symptom
Caution when replacing drum unit when E020-04B0 is displayed.
Cause
The treatment for E020-0xB0 is explained under Field Action.
16-133
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Field Remedy
* E020-0xB0 detection timing
Reduced T/D ratio due to life of drum unit. Broken wire in ATR sensor.
If the toner container motor does not rotate and toner is not supplied to the drum unit, the toner in the drum unit
will gradually run out and the T/D ratio will get lower.
This can be checked in service mode COPIER > Display > DENS > DENS-Y/M/C/K. If the level is between -
3.0% and -4.0%, an error will be generated.
Symptom
SALT sensor open/ close failure caused E020-0X83
Description
E020-0x83 detection timing
When the ITB surface reflection ratio measurement value detected by the SALT sensor is extremely low.
Cause
Faulty detection because SALT sensor shutter does not open/close properly due to failure of service book cover
SALT sensor shutter open/close rod assembly not pressing home against the main unit, due to a loose screw in
the service book cover, or similar.
Field Remedy
Check for any play in the front cover. Check that the screws in the service book cover are properly tightened.
Symptom
E020-0124 Error Code
Description
This error code is displayed when the density of a sample patch generated in ATR control is higher than the
specified value.
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that pins of the connectors connecting the pattern reader ass'y and the DC
controller PCB were bent, causing a malfunction.
Field Remedy
Check whether the pins of the connectors are straight.
16-134
Chapter 16
F-16-66
Symptom
E020-0XB0
Cause
This error code is displayed when the toner concentration inside the developing ass'y becomes low. It is also
displayed when the drum unit has exceeded the end of its life.
Field Remedy
1. Visually inspect the contacts on both the drum unit side and the main unit side.
2. As a contact failure is possible, try pulling out and installing the drum cartridge.
3. Check whether the sealing tape in the toner cartridge blocks the opening for toner supply. If it does, remove
it completely and replace the drum unit with a new one.
4. If the DCON is Ver4.03 or smaller, upgrade it to Ver5.05 or higher.
Symptom
E020-xx24
Cause
This error code is displayed when the density of a sample patch generated in ATR control is higher than the
specified value.
Field Remedy
Visually inspect the SALT sensor for condensation on its surface. Even if there is condensation, do NOT wipe it off
with a dry cloth, but air-dry or use a hair dryer. If the error recurs, replace the SALT sensor with a new one.
Please note that the surface of the sensor can electrically be charged by wiping with a dry cloth and toner
contamination can occur.
16-135
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Symptom
E020-xxA0
Cause
This error code is displayed when the toner concentration inside the developing ass'y has exceeded the specified value.
The measured value of developer concentration is 15 or less in service mode
[COPIER>Display>DENS>SGNL-Y/M/C/K].
Field Remedy
1. Check whether the cables of the ATR sensor in the developing ass'y are broken or not. If the value displayed
by selecting service mode [COPIER>Display>DENS>SGNL-Y/M/C/K] is 0, the cables can be broken.
2. Visually inspect the contacts on both the drum cartridge side and the main unit side. As a contact failure is
possible, try pulling out and installing the drum cartridge.
Symptom
E020-xxD0
Cause
This error code is displayed when the toner concentration inside the developing ass'y drops while 20 prints are
being made continuously.
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the opening for toner supply of the toner cartridge is not damaged. If it is damaged, replace the
toner cartridge with a new one.
2. Make sure that the connectors of the toner container motors (M20 to M23) are securely inserted. If they are
unplugged, insert them securely.
Symptom
E020-xx34
Cause
This error code is displayed when the density of a sample patch generated in ATR control is lower than the specified
value.
Field Remedy
Visually inspect the SALT sensor for condensation on its surface. Even if there is condensation, do NOT wipe
it off with a dry cloth, but air-dry or use a hair dryer. If the error recurs, replace the SALT sensor with a new one.
Please note that the surface of the sensor can electrically be charged by wiping with a dry cloth and toner
contamination can occur.
16-136
Chapter 16
As a result of inspection, it was found that a pin of the connector of the SALT sensor was deformed, causing
poor contact. Check whether the pin of the connector is deformed.
16.3.10.31 E020-03B0 Error Code: Overall fogging (no margin) occurred after
replacement of Cyan drum unit 0004-8989
For your information, when the overall fogging with no margin occurs, there is a high possibility that there is a
problem with the DC controller PCB or the H.V. transformer PCB. On the other hand, if there is a margin, it is
possible that the main controller PCB or the sub controller PCB is faulty.
16.3.10.32 E032 Error code detail The counter of the NE controller fails to
operate. 0002-1631
Symptom
E032 The counter of the NE controller fails to operate. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-9
16.3.10.33 E110 Error code detail The operation of the laser scanner motor is
faulty. 0002-1634
Symptom
E110 The operation of the laser scanner motor is faulty.(Error code detail)
16-137
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Description
T-16-10
0110 The rotation of the Y laser The motor lock signal remains in an unlock
scanner motor is faulty. state for 1 sec or more while the laser scanner
motor is in operation.
0210 The rotation of the M laser The motor lock signal remains in an unlock
scanner motor is faulty. state for 1 sec or more while the laser scanner
motor is in operation.
0310 The rotation of the C laser The motor lock signal remains in an unlock
scanner motor is faulty. state for 1 sec or more while the laser scanner
motor is in operation.
0410 The rotation of the K laser The motor lock signal remains in an unlock
scanner motor is faulty. state for 1 sec or more while the laser scanner
motor is in operation.
16-138
Chapter 16
16.3.10.35 E202 Error code detail A fault has occurred in detecting the No. 1
mirror home position. 0002-1639
Symptom
E202 A fault has occurred in detecting the No. 1 mirror home position. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-11
0000 The No. 1 mirror base moves in The home position sensor does not
reverse but does not move to its home go ON within a specific period of
position. time.
0001 The No. 1 mirror base moves forward The home position sensor does not
but does not move from its home go OFF within a specific period of
position. time.
Symptom
E202-0000 Error Code
Description
E202-0000 is displayed when the optical home position sensor (SR2) does not go ON within a specific period
of time.
Cause
There is a case in the field that unplugging/reinserting the connector on the interface PCB solved the problem.
Field Remedy
Check whether the optical home position sensor (SR2) operates normally in service mode [COPIER>I/O>R-
CON>P004>bit5].
If there is no problem with the sensor (SR2), unplug and insert the connectors on the interface PCB (J301, J305,
J306, J309, J311).
16-139
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.37 E220 Error code detail A fault has occurred in activating the scanning
lamp. 0002-1641
Symptom
E220 A fault has occurred in activating the scanning lamp. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-12
16.3.10.38 E220-0000 Error Code: Entire image sometimes becomes tinged with
red 0002-2536
F-16-67
16-140
Chapter 16
F-16-68
[Normal Image]
Symptom
E220-0000
Description
Although the power lamp lights up once, E220-0000 is displayed immediately.
Cause
Poor contact of the flat cable (J102) which is connected to the CCD unit.
Poor contact of the flat cable (J205) which is connected to the RCON.
Field Remedy
Securely insert the flat cables.
CCD unit side: J102
RCON side: J205
16.3.10.40 E220-0000 Error code Faulty connection in the flat cable from the
CCD unit into R-CON J205 causes. 0002-3358
Symptom
Faulty connection in the flat cable from the CCD unit into R-CON J205 causes E220-0000.
Cause
Connection failure in the flat cable that goes into R-CON J205.
Field Remedy
Insert the flat cable properly.
16-141
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.41 E220-0000 Error Code: Scanning lamp did not light up after turning
power ON 0004-8991
Unplug and insert the flat cable connecting the CCD unit and the reader controller PCB (CCD side: J102, RCON
side: J205). If the symptom still recurs, replace the reader controller PCB with a new one because its
replacement solved the problem in the field.
16.3.10.42 E220-0000 Error Code when turning power ON while opening platen
cover 0005-6111
16.3.10.43 E220-0000 Error Code: No problem with CCD unit and Reader
Controller PCB 0005-6124
16-142
Chapter 16
16.3.10.45 E240 Error code detail The communication between the main motor
controller and the DC controller is faulty. 0002-1644
Symptom
E240 The communication between the main motor controller and the DC controller is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-13
16.3.10.46 E243 Error code detail The control panel is faulty. 0002-1645
Symptom
E243 The control panel is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-14
16-143
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.47 E302 Error code detail A fault has occurred in relation to shading
correction. 0002-1647
Symptom
E302 A fault has occurred in relation to shading correction. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-15
0000 A time-out has occurred in The shading processing does not end 1
shading operation. sec after it has started.
16.3.10.48 E315 Error code detail The image data is faulty. 0002-1650
Symptom
E315 The image data is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-16
Symptom
E315-0010 Error Code: only for FAX is transmitted
Cause
Resolution Switching Board is faulty.
Field Remedy
Resolution Switching Board is faulty.
16-144
Chapter 16
16.3.10.50 E351 Error code detail The ECO-ID PCB is faulty. 0002-1651
Symptom
E351 The ECO-ID PCB is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-17
16.3.10.52 E402 Error code detail There is a fault in the feeder motor. 0002-1653
Symptom
E402 There is a fault in the feeder motor. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-18
The feeder motor (M2) fails to The feeder motor encoder pulse is not
rotate. The feeder motor clock detected within 0.3 sec after the DF
sensor (SR1) is faulty. feeder motor drive signal has been
turned ON.
16-145
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Cause
There is a case in the field that an adjustment of the ADF transfer belt solved the problem.
Field Remedy
Check whether the feeder motor (M2) and the feeder motor clock sensor (SR1) are operating normally. If there
is no problem, adjust the tension of the belt.
16.3.10.54 E404 Error code detail There is a fault in the delivery motor. 0002-1656
Symptom
E404 There is a fault in the delivery motor. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-19
Symptom
E500 There is a fault in finisher communication. (Finisher-N1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-20
16-146
Chapter 16
Symptom
E500 There is a fault in finisher communication. (Finisher-M1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-21
16.3.10.57 E503 Error code detail There is a fault in saddle communication. 0002-1673
Symptom
E503 There is a fault in saddle communication. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-22
0002 There is a fault in data The communication between the saddle stitcher
communication. controller PCB and the finisher controller PCB
remains disrupted for 5 sec or more.
16-147
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.58 E504 Error code detail There is a fault in stack size detection. 0002-1675
Symptom
E504 There is a fault in stack size detection. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-23
0001 The height sensor (PS1) is The communication between the height
faulty. sensor and the finisher controller PCB is
prevented. Or, there is a fault in the
communication data.
0002 The height sensor (PS1) is The communication between the height
faulty. sensor and the finisher controller PCB is
prevented for 0.1 sec or more.
0004 The DIP switch for the There is a fault in the adjustment of the
height sensor (PS1) is not sensor by the DIP switch.
adjusted correctly.
16.3.10.59 E505 Error code detail There is a fault in the backup RAM. 0002-1677
Symptom
E505 There is a fault in the backup RAM. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-24
0001 The checksum value of the finisher controller This fault is detected at
PCB is faulty. power-on.
16-148
Chapter 16
16.3.10.60 E512 Error code detail There is a fault in delivery. (Finisher-N1) 0002-1679
Symptom
E512 There is a fault in delivery.(Finisher-N1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-25
0001 The delivery roller, feed motor The delivery motor clock sensor fails to
(M2), or feed motor clock generate the target number of clock
sensor (PI10) is faulty. pulses within 10 sec at the start of
operation.
0002 The delivery roller, feeder There is no clock pulse for a feed
motor (M2), or feeder motor equivalent for 0.2 during
clock sensor (PI10) is faulty. communication.
16.3.10.61 E512 Error code detail There is a fault in delivery. (Finisher-M1) 0002-1687
Symptom
E512 There is a fault in delivery. (Finisher-M1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-26
The delivery motor (M1) or the The delivery clock sensor signal is
delivery clock sensor (S1) is faulty. not detected when the delivery
The connector is disconnected. motor has been driven for 70 mm.
16-149
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.62 E514 Error code detail There is a fault in stack processing (clockwise
direction) 0002-1692
Symptom
E514 There is a fault in stack processing (clockwise direction). (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-27
The stack processing motor (M2) or The stack delivery lever fails to
the stack delivery lever home position reach its home position when the
sensor (S8) is faulty. The connector is stack processing motor has been
disconnected. The stack delivery belt driven for a specific period of time
or the return roller is faulty. at start of operation.
Symptom
E530 There is a fault in alignment.(Finisher-N1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-28
0001 There is an excess load on the The aligning plate does not leave the
alignment motor (M3), aligning aligning plate home position sensor
plate home position sensor (PI6), when the alignment motor has been
or aligning plate. driven for 2 sec.
0002 There is an excess load on the rear The aligning plate does not return to its
alignment motor (M3), rear home position when the aligning plate
aligning plate home position sensor motor has been driven for 2 sec.
(PI6), or rear aligning plate.
16-150
Chapter 16
16.3.10.64 E530 Error code detail There is a fault in rear alignment. (Finisher-M1) 0002-1698
Symptom
E530 There is a fault in rear alignment.(Finisher-M1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-29
The rear alignment motor (M4) The rear aligning plate fails to reach the
or the rear aligning plate home home position sensor or fails to leave the
position sensor (S7) is faulty. aligning plate home position sensor when
An excess load is imposed on the rear aligning plate has been driven for
the rear aligning plate. a specific period of time.
16.3.10.65 E531 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-M1) 0002-1700
Symptom
E531 There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-M1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-30
The stapler motor (M6) or The stapler fails to leave the stapling home
the stapling home position position sensor when the stapler shift motor
sensor (S17) is faulty. The has been driven for 0.5 sec, or does not return
stapler harness is faulty. to the stapler home position sensor.
16-151
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.66 E531 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-N1) 0002-1702
Symptom
E531 There is a fault in stapling. (Finisher-N1) (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-31
0001 The stapler motor (M6) or the The stapler does not leave the
stapling home position detecting stapler shift position when the
switch (MS7) is faulty. stapler shift motor has been driven
for 0.5 sec.
0002 The stapler motor (M6) or the The stapler does not return from the
stapling home position detecting stapler shift position when the
switch (MS7) is faulty. stapler shift motor has been driven
for 0.5 sec.
16.3.10.67 E532 Error code detail There is a fault in the shift of the stapler 0002-1704
Symptom
E532 There is a fault in the shift of the stapler. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-32
0001 The stapler shift motor (M4) or the The stapler shift base does not
stapler shift home position sensor leave the stapler shift home
(PI7) is faulty. There is a fault in the position sensor when the stapler
path of the stapler shift base. shift motor has been driven for 4
sec.
0002 The stapler shift motor (M4) or the The stapler shift base does not
stapler shift home position sensor return from the stapler shift home
(PI7) is faulty. There is a fault in the position sensor when the stapler
path of the stapler shift base. shift motor has been driven for 4
sec.
16-152
Chapter 16
16.3.10.68 E535 Error code detail There is a fault in the swing mechanism. 0002-1706
Symptom
E535 There is a fault in the swing mechanism. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-33
0001 The swing motor (M7) or the The swing guide closed switch does not
swing guide open sensor (PI18) go ON when the swing motor has been
is faulty. rotated in reverse for 1 sec.
0002 The swing motor (M7) or the The swing guide open switch does not go
swing guide closed switch ON when the swing motor has been
(MS6) is faulty. rotated in reverse for 1 sec.
0003 The safety area switch (MS3) The swing guide closed switch is OFF
or the swing guide switch 2 when the tray 1/2 is in the OFF position
(MS6) is faulty. of the safety area switch while the tray
ascent/ descent motor is in operation.
0004 The swing motor (M7) or the There is no clock pulse for 0.2 sec while
swing motor clock sensor swinging operation is under way.
(PI20) is faulty.
16.3.10.69 E537 Error code detail There is a fault in front alignment. 0002-1709
Symptom
E537 There is a fault in front alignment. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-34
The front alignment motor The aligning plate fails to reach the
(M3) or the front aligning plate aligning plate home position sensor when
home position sensor (S6) is the rear alignment motor has been driven
faulty. An excess load is for a specific period of time, or fails to
imposed on the front aligning leave the aligning plate home position
plate. sensor.
16-153
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.70 E540 Error code detail There is a fault in the ascent/descent of the tray. 0002-1711
Symptom
E540 There is a fault in the ascent/descent of the tray. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-35
0001 The tray ascent/descent motor The ascent/descent operation does not end
(M5), the tray ascent/descent within 15 sec after the tray assent/descent
motor clock sensor (PI9/PI19), motor has been driven; or, the tray home
or tray home position sensor position is not detected when it has been
(PIE) is faulty. driven for 15 sec.
0002 The tray upper limit detecting The tray upper limit detecting switch is
switch (MS5) is faulty. ON during tray ascent/descent operation.
0003 The tray ascent/descent motor There is no clock pulse for 0.2 sec or more
(M5) or the tray ascent /descent from the clock sensor when the tray
motor clock sensor 1/2 (PI9/ ascent/descent motor has been driven.
PI19) is faulty.
Symptom
E577 There is a fault in stack processing (counterclockwise direction). (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-36
The stack processing motor (M2) or the The return roller fails to reach the
return controller home position sensor return roller home position sensor
(S3) is faulty. The connector is when the stack processing motor
disconnected. The stack delivery lever has been driven for a required
or the return roller is faulty. period of time.
16-154
Chapter 16
16.3.10.72 E580 Error code detail There is a fault in ascent/descent of the stack
tray. 0002-1716
Symptom
E580 There is a fault in ascent/descent of the stack tray. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-37
The stack tray ascent/descent The stack tray upper limit sensor goes
motor (M5), stack tray paper ON while the stack tray ascent/descent
height sensor (S10), or the stack motor is in operation, or the clock pulse
tray ascent/descent motor clock of the stack tray direction motor clock
sensor (S9) is faulty. The sensor is not detected 15 times or more
connector is disconnected. An within 0.8 sec.
excess load is imposed on the The stack tray does not reach the stack
stack tray ascent/descent motor. tray height sensor within 4 sec after the
stack tray ascent/descent motor has
started ascent operation.
16.3.10.73 E584 Error code detail There is a fault in feed operation (No. 2). 0002-1718
Symptom
E584 There is a fault in feed operation (No. 2). (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-38
0001 The No. 2 feed motor (M8) The shutter open sensor does not go ON
or the shutter open sensor when the No. 2 feed motor has been rotated
(PI5) is faulty. in reverse for 1 sec or more.
0002 The No 2 feed motor (M8) or The shutter closed switch does not go ON
the shutter closed switch when the No. 2 feed motor has been rotated
(MS4) is faulty. in reverse for 1 sec or more.
0003 The safety area detecting The shutter closed switch is OFF when the
switch (MS3) or the shutter tray 1/2 is in the OFF position of the safety
closed switch (MS4) is area switch while the tray ascent/ descent
faulty. motor is in operation.
16-155
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.74 E5F0 Error code detail There is a fault in paper positioning for the
saddle. 0002-1719
Symptom
E5F0 There is a fault in paper positioning for the saddle. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-39
0001 The paper positioning plate The paper positioning plate home
motor (M4S) or the paper position sensor does not go ON when the
positioning plate home position paper positioning plate motor has been
sensor (PI7S) is faulty. driven for 1.33 sec.
0002 The paper positioning plate The paper positioning plate home
motor (M4S) or the paper position sensor does not go OFF when the
positioning plate home position paper position plate motor has been
sensor (PI7S) is faulty. driven for 1 sec.
16.3.10.75 E5F1 Error code detail There is a fault in paper folding for the saddle. 0002-1720
Symptom
E5F1 There is a fault in paper folding for the saddle. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-40
0001 The paper fold motor (M2S) or The number of detection pluses of the
the paper fold motor clock paper fold motor clock sensor falls below
sensor (PI4S) is faulty. a specific value.
0002 The paper fold motor (M2S) or The state of the paper fold home position
the paper fold motor clock sensor remains unchanged when the paper
sensor (PI4S) is faulty. fold motor has been driven for 3 sec.
16-156
Chapter 16
16.3.10.76 E5F2 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle guide. 0002-1722
Symptom
E5F2 There is a fault in the saddle guide. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-41
0001 The guide motor (M2S) or the The guide home position sensor does not
guide home position sensor go ON when the guide motor has been
(PI13S) is faulty. rotated for 0.455 sec.
0002 The guide motor (M3S) or the The guide home position sensor does not
guide home position sensor go OFF when the guide motor has been
(PI13S) is faulty. driven for 1 sec.
16.3.10.77 E5F3 Error code detail There is a fault in saddle alignment. 0002-1743
Symptom
E5F3 There is a fault in saddle alignment. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-42
0001 The alignment motor (M5S) or The aligning plate home position sensor
the aligning plate home does not go ON when the alignment motor
position sensor (PI5S) is faulty. has been driven for 0.5 sec. (initially,
driven for 1.67 sec)
0002 The alignment motor (M5S) or The alignment plate home position sensor
the aligning plate home does not go OFF when the alignment
position sensor (PI5S) is faulty. motor has been driven for 1 sec.
16-157
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.78 E5F4 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling at the saddle rear. 0002-1752
Symptom
E5F4 There is a fault in stapling at the saddle rear. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-43
0001 The stapler motor (rear, M6S) The stitching home position sensor does
or the stacking home position not go OFF when the stitch motor (rear)
sensor (rear, MS5S) is faulty. has been rotated clockwise for 0.5 sec.
0002 The stitch motor (rear, M67S) The stitching home position sensor does
or the stitching home position not go ON when the stitch motor (rear)has
sensor (rear, MS5S) is faulty. been rotated in reverse for 0.5 sec or more.
16.3.10.79 E5F5 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling at the saddle front. 0002-1753
Symptom
E5F5 There is a fault in stapling at the saddle front. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-44
0001 The stitch motor (front, M7S) The stitching home position sensor does
or the stitching home position not go OFF when the stitch motor (front)
sensor (front, MS7S) is faulty. has been driven clockwise for 0.5 sec or
more.
0002 The stitch motor (front, M7S) The stitching home position sensor does
or the stitching home position not go ON when the stitch motor (front)
sensor (front, MS7S) is faulty. has been driven in reverse for 0.5 sec or
more.
16-158
Chapter 16
16.3.10.80 E5F6 Error code detail There is a fault in stapling by the saddle paper
pushing plate. 0002-1756
Symptom
E5F6 There is a fault in stapling by the saddle paper pushing plate. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-45
0001 The paper pushing plate motor The paper pushing plate home position
(M8S) or the paper pushing sensor does not go ON when the paper
plate home position sensor pushing plate motor has been driven for
(PI14S) is faulty. 0.3 sec or more.
0002 The paper pushing plate motor The paper pushing plate home position
(M8S) or the paper pushing sensor does not go OFF when the paper
plate home position sensor pushing plate motor has been driven for
(PI14S) is faulty. 80 msec.
0003 The paper pushing plate motor The paper pushing plate leading edge
(M8S) or the paper pushing position sensor does not go OFF when the
plate leading edge position paper pushing plate motor has been
sensor (PI15S) is faulty. driven for 80 msec.
0004 The paper pushing plate motor The number of detection pulses of the
(M8S) or the paper pushing paper pushing plate motor clock sensor
plate motor clock sensor has dropped below a specific value.
(PI1S) is faulty.
0005 The paper pushing plate motor The paper pushing plate leading edge
(M8S) or the paper pushing positioning sensor does not go ON when
plate leading edge position the paper pushing plate motor has been
sensor (PI15S) is faulty. driven for 0.3 sec or more.
16-159
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.81 E5F8 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle connector. 0002-1758
Symptom
E5F8 There is a fault in the saddle connector. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-46
0001 The connector of the guide The connector of the guide home position
home position sensor (PI13S) sensor has been identified to have been
is faulty. disconnected.
0002 The connector of the paper The connector of the paper pushing plate
pushing plate home position home position sensor is identified to have
sensor (PI14S) is faulty. been disconnected.
0003 The connector of the paper The connector of the paper pushing plate
pushing plate leading edge position sensor is identified to have been
position sensor (PI15S) is disconnected.
faulty.
16.3.10.82 E5F9 Error code detail There is a fault in the saddle switch. 0002-1759
Symptom
E5F9 There is a fault in the saddle switch. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-47
0001 The inlet cover switch The inlet cover switch is identified to be open for
(MS1S), front cover 1 sec or more after the start of initial rotation or of
switch (MS2S), or printing in the host machine with any of the
delivery cover switch following sensor identifying the cover to be
(MS3S) is faulty. closed:
. inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
. front cover open/closed sensor (PI2S)
. delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
16-160
Chapter 16
0002 The front cover switch The front cover switch is identified to be open for
(MS2S) or the delivery 1 sec or more after the start of initial rotation or of
cover switch (MS3S) is printing in the host machine with any of the
faulty. following sensors identifying the cover to be
closed:
. inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
. front cover open/closed sensor (PI2S)
. delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
0003 The delivery cover The delivery cover switch is identified to be open
switch (MS3S) is faulty. for 1 sec or more after the start of initial rotation
or of printing in the host machine with any of the
following sensors identifying the cover to be
closed:
. inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
. front cover open/closed sensor (PI2S)
. delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
Symptom
When adjusting faint image in service mode level 2 COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT-Y/M/C/K, E061-0xdd is
displayed.
Cause
The adjustment range of service mode level 2 COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT-Y/M/C/K is -30 to +30. When
adjusted in the + direction, the image gets darker.
Depending on the life of the drum, as the adjustment moves in the + direction, the charge DC exceeds the upper
limit and E061-0xdd is generated.
Field Remedy
Adjust image faintness as described below.
1 In service mode level 1 COPIER > DISPLAY > Y/M/C/K-DRM-LF, check the drum life. The correct range
is from 0 to 100%. If the life has been exceeded, replace the drum.
2 Perform user mode > adjust/ cleaning > automatic gradation correction > full correction.
3 In service mode level 1 COPIER > TEST > PG > THRU, set 0 (default) and 1, and output at each setting with
service mode level 1
COPIER > TEST >PG > TYPE=14
Compare the maximum density areas output at 'THRU 0' and 'THRU 1' and if the densities are different proceed
to step 4.
4 Adjust in service mode level 1 COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-P-Y/M/C/K, and again, in service
mode level 1 COPIER > TEST > PG > THRU, set 0 (default) and 1. With each setting, output service mode
level 1 COPIER > TEST >PG > TYPE=14.
16-161
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
If the maximum density areas at 'THRU 0' are the same as those of 'THRU 1', carry out user mode > adjust/
cleaning > automatic gradation correction > full correction.
*Make a test copy. If the correct density is produced, the procedure is finished.
*If the correct density is not produced, go to step 5.
5 In service mode level 2 COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > CHG-DC-Y/M/C/K, check the Vd value.
6Again, in in service mode level 1 COPIER > TEST > PG > THRU, set 0 (default) and 1. With each setting,
output service mode level 1 COPIER > TEST >PG > TYPE=14.
If 'THRU 0' is faint, adjust in service mode level 2 COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT > VCONT-Y/M/C/K (1
unit: 10V). If the image is faint, increase the value.
Input a value that is 650V or lower when added to the the original value (as displayed in CHG-DC-Y/M/C/K)
by VCONT. If this value is exceeded, E061-0xdd will be generated and then the full correction performed in
step 7 will be disabled.
7 Perform user mode > adjustment/ cleaning> automatic gradation correction> full correction.
[ Manual-related ]
Description
The captioned error codes are displayed when:
a. E602-0001: the host machine detects that the system is not properly installed in the HDD when the HDD starts
up.
b. E602-0002: the host machine detects an error during reading the data from the HDD when the HDD starts up.
c. E602-0003: there occurs a discrepancy between the control data for the data stored in the HDD and the actual
data. (HDD sector Write Abort)
Field Remedy
a. E602-0001
Check a connection between the HDD and the Main Controller PCB. If there is no problem, replace the HDD with
a new one and reinstall the system software.
Or, replace the Main Controller PCB with a new one if it is faulty.
b. E602-0002
Reinstall the system software.
c. E602-0003
There are four partitions inside the HDD. The following are solutions depending on in which sector a write abort
occurs.
c-1. Write Abort in Image Storage Area
Turn the power OFF/ON, which can recover errors automatically.
c-2. Write Abort in other areas than Image Storage Area
c-2-1. If you can enter service mode:
c-2-1-1. In service mode [COPIER> Function> STSTEM> CHK-TYPE], select "0" and perform [HD-CHECK].
The required time depends on a capacity of the HDD, usually approximately 20 to 40 minutes.
c-2-1-2. Turn the power OFF/ON to make sure that the machine starts up normally.
c-2-1-3. If no, perform [HD-CLEAR] by selecting "1" and "2".
c-2-1-4. Reinstall the system software.
16-162
Chapter 16
16.3.10.85 E602 Error code detail The hard disk is faulty. 0002-1776
Symptom
E602 The hard disk is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-48
0002 The startup file is absent. The program for the main CPU
does not exist on the HD, in BOOTDEV/BOOT or the like.
0006 The auxiliary startup file is absent. The correct SUB CPU
program does not exist on the HD or in BOOTDEV/BOOT
or the like.
0007 The color profile file does not exist. The correct color profile
file does not exist in BOOTDEV/PDL or the like.
16-163
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16-164
Chapter 16
16.3.10.86 E602-0001 Error code At about 5 sec. after the power is turned ON,
due to a failure of the Distribution Board PCB Ass'y 0002-2029
Symptom
About 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, E602-0001 is displayed due to a failure of the Distribution Board
PCB Ass'y.
Cause
Distribution board failure
Items to Check
1) Check whether 12V DC is input to the HDD unit J44-1 and 5V to J44-4. If no, check whether 12V DC is
output from the distribution board PCB J1505-1 and 5V from J1505-4.
If there is DC output from the distribution board PCB J1505, check the connection of the flat cable between the
HDD and the main controller. If there is no problem there, the HDD is likely faulty.
2) If there is no DC output from the distribution board PCB J1505, check whether 5V is input to the distribution
board PCB J1501-1 and 12V to J1501-8. If no, check the fuse PCB.
Field Remedy
Replace the distribution board PCB Ass'y.
16.3.10.87 E602-0001 Error code At about 5 sec. after the power is turned ON,
due to a connection failure of the flat cable between the HDD unit and the main
controller 0002-2486
Symptom
About 5 sec. after the power is turned ON, E602-0001is displayed due to a connection failure of the flat cable
between the HDD unit and the main controller.
Cause
Faulty connection of the flat cable between the HDD unit and the main controller
Items to Check
Check whether 5V DC is supplied to J44-1 and 12V to J44-4 on the HDD unit.
If No, the distribution board PCB Ass'y or the DC power supply PCB Ass'y.
Field Remedy
Securely insert the flat cable between the HDD unit and the main controller.
16-165
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.89 E602-0202 Error Code: Because of faulty SRAM Board PCB 0002-3476
16.3.10.90 Progress bar on machine starting-up window is slower than usual, then
E602 Error Code is displayed 0004-4203
HDD: WM2-5188
16-166
Chapter 16
Symptom
E604 There is a shortage in image memory (SDRAM). (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-49
16-167
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.97 E605 Error code detail The battery for image memory is faulty. 0002-1782
Symptom
E605 The battery for image memory is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-50
16-168
Chapter 16
16.3.10.98 E606 Error code detail The hard disk is faulty. 0002-1783
Symptom
E606 The hard disk is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-51
16.3.10.99 E674 Error code detail The fax board is faulty. 0002-1785
Symptom
E674 The fax board is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-52
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
E677-0002 can be displayed when executing [Run Setup] of PS-C1 during printing. [Run Setup] must be
executed when the status is Idle.
16-169
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Symptom
E711 There is a fault in IPC communication.(DADF-K1)(Error code detail)
Description
T-16-53
16.3.10.102 E711 Error code detail There is a fault in IPC communication. 0002-1789
Symptom
E711 There is a fault in IPC communication. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-54
16-170
Chapter 16
16.3.10.103 E712 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between
the ADF and the reader unit. 0002-1793
Symptom
E712 There is a fault in the communication between the ADF and the reader unit. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-55
16.3.10.104 E713 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between
the finisher and the cassette pedestal. 0002-1796
Symptom
E713 There is a fault in the communication between the finisher and the cassette pedestal. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-56
16-171
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.105 E716 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between
the cassette pedestal and the printer unit. 0002-1798
Symptom
E716 There is a fault in the communication between the cassette pedestal and the printer unit.(Error code detail)
Description
T-16-57
16.3.10.106 E716-0000 Error code Recorded only in the error history 0002-3272
Symptom
The service mode error history shows E716-0000. However, the main unit was operating normally.
Cause
When the main unit is in standby, if the power cord from the cassette pedestal is pulled out, an error is generated.
The main cause is that, when the main unit is moved forward, the power cord from the pedestal gets tugged out
and the power cord from the main unit is prone to being pulled out.
Items to Check
Check that the cassette pedestal power cord is not being tugged by something.
Field Remedy
If the power cord is being pulled out, explain to the user that, if the power cord is pulled out while the main unit
is activated, an error will be generated.
16.3.10.107 E717 Error code detail The communication with the NE controller is
faulty. 0002-1800
Symptom
E717 The communication with the NE controller is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
16-172
Chapter 16
T-16-58
16.3.10.108 E719 Error code detail The coin vendor is faulty. 0002-1801
Symptom
E719 The coin vendor is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-59
Symptom
E719-0011 is displayed when the cable is disconnected because of a scanning fault in card reader D1.
Description
At the time of installation of the card reader, service mode COPIER > Function > INSTALL > CARD is
performed and then the main unit communicates with the card reader D1. At this time, if the cable is suddenly
disconnected, E000719-0011 will occur.
Cause
Communication error when the card reader D1 cable is disconnected.
Field Remedy
1) In service mode level 1 COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERR, press OK and then turn OFF the main switch.
3) When the main unit starts up, 'Department ID and Personal Identification Number entry window' will appear.
Press OK in service mode level 1 COPIER > Function > CLEAR > PWD-CLR and close service mode.
16-173
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.110 E719-0001 Error code When the coin vendor is disconnected, unable
to be cleared 0002-1991
Symptom
When the coin vendor is disconnected, E719-0001 is displayed and cannot be cleared, even in the service mode.
Cause
A communication error occurs between the main unit and the coin vendor because the power is turned ON
without resetting the value in service mode COPIER>Option>ACC>COIN from '1' to '0'.
Field Remedy
Reset the value in service mode COPIER>Option>ACC>COIN from '1' to '0', and turn the power OFF/ON.
16.3.10.111 E731 Error code detail There is a fault in the UFR board. 0002-1803
Symptom
E731 There is a fault in the UFR board. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-60
16.3.10.112 E732 Error code detail There is a reader communication error. 0002-1809
Symptom
E732 There is a reader communication error. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-61
9999 The reader unit cannot be detected. The display indicates "Turn the main power switch OFF & ON again".
16-174
Chapter 16
16.3.10.113 E732-9999 Error Code: Recorded in error log after performing service
mode COPIER> Function> CLEAR> MN-CON 0002-2011
[ Manual-related ]
Description
On a machine equipped with a reader unit, when you perform service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR>
MN-CON], the set value will be changed from "1" to "0" in service mode [COPIER> Option> BODY> W/
SCNR]. This indicates that the machine is set up as a printer model. At that time, a communication error occurs
between the reader unit, causing E732-9999 to be recorded in the error log. Then, a message like "Turn the
power OFF/ON" appears, and turning the power OFF/ON will automatically make the machine detect the reader
once again (the set value in [W/SCNR] will return from "0" to "1").
Consequently, there is no problem in the machine operation if E733-9999 appears in the error log.
Note: Take notice the following when you need to perform [MN-CON].
- Before performing [MN-CON], be sure to explain to your customer that all the images stored in the Inboxes
will be cleared.
- Before performing [MN-CON], be sure to output "P-PRINT" and "USER-PRINT". After performing,
compare the values on the both prints and enter the original values if they are changed.
16.3.10.114 E732-0001 Error code A message 'Starting up. Please wait' keeps
displaying for about 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the
error code results (DC power supply unit PCB J158 output failure) 0002-2012
Symptom
About 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, a message 'Starting up. Please wait' is displayed and then
E732-001 (DC power supply unit PCB J158 output failure) is displayed. (Refer to SymptomExplanation.)
Description
When the power is turned ON, initialization of finisher and feeder should start if the main unit operates
normally.
Cause
DC power supply unit PCB (1) failure
Items to Check
1) Check whether DC line is supplied to the fuse PCB J58 from the DC power supply PCB J158. If there is no
input, check the DC power supply PCB.
2) Check whether AC line is supplied to the DC power supply PCB. If there is no problem with the AC line
input, the DC power supply PCB is likely faulty.
Field Remedy
Perform CheckItem and replace the DC power supply PCB, if faulty.
DC Power Supply PCB Ass'y Part No. FG6-8970-000 (100/120V), FG6-8971-000 (220/240V)
16-175
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.115 E732-0001 Error Code: After turning power ON, message "Starting
up. Please wait" changes to error code indication 0002-2049
16-176
Chapter 16
16.3.10.116 E732-0001 Error code A message 'Starting up. Please wait' keeps
displaying for about 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, and then the
error code results 0002-2488
Symptom
About 2 min. 40 sec. after the power is turned ON, the message 'Starting up. Please wait' is displayed and then
E732-001 is displayed.
Cause
DC output failure from the DC fuse PCB J67
Items to Check
1) Check whether the lattice connector of the interface cable is securely inserted. The lattice connector connects
the reader and the printer (located at the back).
2) Check whether the wiring from the lattice connector to the distribution board J67 is secured.
4) If no, check whether DC line is output to the fuse PCB J53, J56, J57 and J58 from the DC power supply PCB.
If yes, the fuse PCB Ass'y is likely faulty.
Field Remedy
Perform CheckItem and replace the fuse PCB ass'y, if faulty.
16.3.10.117 E733 Error code detail There is a printer communication error. 0002-1811
Symptom
E733 There is a printer communication error. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-62
16-177
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
SymptomTitle
E733-0001: Printer communication error Error Code
SpotDisposal
Since there is a possibility that the connector J112 on the DC controller PCB is not securely connected, check
the connection.
In the past, the flat cable connected to the main controller PCB was unintentionally disconnected at the time of
installation of the Resolution Switching Board, resulting in this error code.
16.3.10.119 E740 Error code detail The Ethernet board is faulty. 0002-1816
Symptom
E740 The Ethernet board is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-63
16.3.10.120 E744 Error code detail The language file is faulty. 0002-1817
Symptom
E744 The language file is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-64
0001 The version of the language file on the HDD and the
bootable version differ.
0002 The size of the language file on the HDD is too big.
16-178
Chapter 16
16.3.10.121 E745 Error code detail The TokenRing board is faulty. 0002-1818
Symptom
E745 The TokenRing board is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-65
16.3.10.123 E747 Error code detail The image processing ASIC or the memory
control/communication ASIC is faulty. 0002-1836
Symptom
E747 The image processing ASIC or the memory control/communication ASIC is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-66
--- IC1010 (for image processing ASIC) on the main controller PCB
or IC1012 (memory control/ communication control ASIC,
CPU) has a fault (e.g., image data transfer error).
16-179
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
Symptom
E747-00FF: only with printing operation Error Code.
Cause
UFR board is faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the UFR board with a new one.
Symptom
E747-8701 Error Code
Cause
There is a case in the field that replacement of the interface PCB solved the symptom.
Field Remedy
It is possible that the connectors on the interface PCB (J301, J305, J306, J309, J399) are not connected properly.
Unplug and insert all of them. If the symptom is not still solved, replace the PCB with a new one.
16-180
Chapter 16
Cause
As a result of inspection, the memory PCB was found to be faulty.
Field Remedy
Replace the memory PCB (FG3-2345) with a new one.
16.3.10.128 E804 Error code detail The power supply cooling fan is faulty. 0002-1839
Symptom
E804 The cooling fan is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-67
0000 The power supply cooling The DC controller tried to start it up, but the fan has
fan is faulty been identified as being at rest for 5 sec continuously.
0004 The controller fan is faulty. The controller fan has been identified as being at rest.
Symptom
E804-0004 Error Code
Description
This error code is displayed when a halt of the cooling fan (FM7) in the main controller ass'y is detected.
Cause
The connector of the cooling fan (FM7) attached to the rear cover of the main controller ass'y is disconnected.
Field Remedy
Check whether the snap tight connector of the cooling fan (FM7) is securely connected. If not, securely connect
it.
16-181
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
16.3.10.130 E804-0004 Error code Displaying if the jack of the controller fan
(FM7) which is fixed on the controller box 0002-2937
Symptom
Don't know where to install the jack of the controller fan (FM7) that is installed onto the controller box cover.
If the fan jack is not inserted, E804-000 is displayed.
Cause
The controller fan (FM7) cable should be inserted into J1512 on the distribution board PCB at the bottom of the
controller box, but the position can't be seen because of the cables inside the machine.
Field Remedy
Insert the controller fan (FM7) cable into J1512 on the distribution board PCB.
Symptom
E804-0004 due to faulty fuse PCB Error Code
Description
E804-0004 is displayed when a halt of the controller fan (FM7) is detected.
Cause
As a result of inspection, the fuse PCB was found to be faulty (FU12 was burnt.).
Field Remedy
There is a snap-tight connector of the controller fan (FM7) at the rear cover of the main controller. Check the
connection.
- If the connection is poor, reinsert the connector.
- If there is no problem in the connection, it is possible that the fuse (FU12) has been burnt. So, check whether
it is burnt or not. If it seems to be burnt, replace the fuse PCB with a new one.
16.3.10.132 E805 Error code detail The cleaner fan is faulty. 0002-1841
Symptom
E805 The cleaner fan is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-68
0001 The DC controller tried to start it, but the fan has been
identified as being at rest for 5 sec continuously.
16-182
Chapter 16
16.3.10.133 E805 Error code detail The fixing heat discharge fan is faulty. 0002-1844
Symptom
E805 The fixing heat discharge fan is faulty. (Error code detail)
Description
T-16-69
0000 The DC controller tried to start it up, but the fan has been
identified as being at rest for 5 sec continuously.
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This code indicates that an image memory over error has occurred upon FAX reception. It can be cleared by
turning the power OFF/ON.
Field Remedy
This symptom has been corrected with System software Ver.9.05. If the machine you are servicing is earlier
than Ver.9.05, upgrade it to Ver.9.05 and later.
16-183
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
##281: Displayed when the number of re-transmissions of the procedure signal has been exceeded.
##104: Displayed when RTN or PIN has been received.
2. If the symptom still recurs, in service mode [FAX>#1SSSW SW03>bit4], set at '1' in order to prevent any
error occurrences caused by an echo.
3. If the symptom still recurs, in service mode [FAX>#1SSSW SW04>bit2], set at '1' so that the procedure
signal can be detected more easily by other party.
4. If the symptom still recurs, in service mode [FAX>#2MENU 005], set at '1' in order to activate the NL
equalizer.
16-184
Chapter 16
T-16-70
Solenoid SL1 manual feed pickup solenoid controls the timing of pickup for
the manual feed block.
SL5 delivery path switching solenoid 2 switches over the paths in the
delivery/feeder unit.
16-185
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
SL1
CL2
SL3
SL5 SL4
CL1
SL2
F-16-69
16.4.2 Motor
T-16-71
T-16-72
16-186
Chapter 16
M10 delivery vertical path motor drives the delivery vertical path roller 2.
M11 face-down delivery motor drives the delivery vertical path roller 1.
M16 image slope correction motor (Y) corrects image slope (Y).
M17 image slope correction motor (M) corrects image slope (M).
M18 image slope correction motor (C) corrects image slope (C).
M19 image slope control motor (Bk) corrects image slope (Bk).
M20 toner container motor (Y) stirs toner inside the toner container (Y).
M21 toner container motor (M) stirs toner inside the toner container (M).
M22 toner container motor (C) stirs toner inside the toner container (C).
M23 toner container motor (Bk) stirs toner inside the toner container (Bk).
M25 horizontal registration motor matches the horizontal registration position for paper.
16-187
http://www.manuals4you.com
M1
M9
M8
M26
M25
M2 M11
M3
M4 M16
M17 M10
M5 M20
M18
M21
M19
M22
M23 M12
M13 M24
M14
M15
M1
M6
M7
F-16-70
16.4.3 Fan
T-16-73
Fan FM 1 power supply cooling fan cools the power supply unit.
FM2 fixing heat discharge fan discharges heat from the fixing unit.
FM3 machine heat discharge fan discharges heat from inside the machine.
FM6 manual feed cooling fan cools paper for manual feeding.
FM7
FM6
FM3
FM2
FM5
FM4
FM1
F-16-71
16.4.4 Sensor
T-16-74
16-189
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
T-16-75
Sensor PS1 toner feedscrew rotation sensor detects the rotation of the feedscrew
(Y) inside the toner container (Y).
PS2 toner feedscrew rotation sensor detects the rotation of the feedscrew
(M) inside the toner container (M)
PS3 toner feedscrew rotation sensor detects the rotation of the feedscrew
(C) inside the toner container (C)
PS4 toner feedscrew rotation sensor detects the rotation of the feedscrew
(Bk) inside the toner container (Bk)
PS5 fixing feeder unit open/closed detects the sate (open/closed) of the
Sensor fixing feeder unit.
PS8 center delivery tray full sensors detects the state (full of paper) inside
the face-down delivery assembly.
PS9 manual feed last paper sensor detects paper in the manual feed unit.
PS10 manual feed paper sensor detects paper in the manual feed unit.
PS11 pickup vertical path cover open/ detects the state (open/closed) of the
closed sensor pickup vertical path cover.
PS13 delivery vertical path cover detects the state (open/closed) of the
open/closed sensor delivery vertical path cover.
PS14 cassette 1 paper level sensor (A) detects the level of paper inside the
cassette 1 (A)
PS15 cassette 1 paper level sensor (B) detects the level of paper inside the
cassette 1 B
PS16 cassette 1 retry paper sensor detects paper retry operation for the
cassette 1
PS17 cassette 2 retry paper sensor detects paper retry operation for the
cassette 2
PS18 cassette 2 paper level sensor (B) detects the level of paper inside the
cassette 2 (B)
16-190
Chapter 16
PS20 cassette 2 paper level sensor (A) detects the level of paper inside the
cassette 2 (A)
PS23 front cover open/closed sensor detects the state (open/closed) of the
front cover.
PS24 duplex pickup sensor detects pickup from the duplex unit.
PS28 manual feed unit open/closed detects the state (open/closed) of the
Sensor manual feed unit.
16-191
http://www.manuals4you.com
PS16
PS7
PS14
CF2 PS15
CF1 PS17
PS19
SR1 SR2
PS20
PS18
VR1
PS10
PS9
OHP2
PS26
OHP1
PS25 PS22
PS27
PS21
PS23
PS4 PS28
PS3
PS2 EV1
PS8
PS1
TS4
PS13 TPS1
PS12 TS3
PS6
TS2
TS1
PS5
PS24
TH2
PS11
TH1
TP1
F-16-72
16.4.5 Switch
T-16-76
Switch SW1 main power switch turns on/off the main power.
SW2 cassette 1 size detecting detects the size of paper inside the
switch cassette 1.
Chapter 16
SW3 cassette 2 size detecting detects the size of paper inside the
switch cassette 2.
MSW3 manual feed unit open/closed detects the state (open/closed) of the
detection switch 1 manual feed unit.
MSW4 manual feed unit open/closed detects the state (open/closed) of the
detection switch 2 manual feed unit.
MSW5 fixing feeding unit open/ detects the state (open/closed) of the
closed detection switch 1 fixing feeder unit.
MSW6 fixing feeding unit open/ detects the state (open/closed) of the
closed detection switch 2 fixing feeder unit.
MSW5
MSW6
MSW1
MSW2
MSW3
MSW4
SW2
SW1
SW3
F-16-73
16-193
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
T-16-77
T-16-78
Heater H1 fixing main heater main main heater (controls the temperature
of the fixing roller)
16-194
Chapter 16
H2
LA1
H1
H1
H2
H3
H4
SP1
ELCB1
PLG1
F-16-74
16.4.7 PCBs
T-16-79
[2] interface PCB communicates image information read by the reader unit to
the printer unit.
16-195
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
T-16-80
[6] DC controller PCB controls the power supply to the printer unit/
accessories
[7] Laser driver PCB (Y) controls the drive of the laser unit (Y)
[8] Laser driver PCB (M) controls the drive of the laser unit (M)
[9] Laser driver PCB (C) controls the drive of the laser unit (C)
[10] Laser driver PCB (Bk) controls the drive of the laser unit (Bk)
[15] Waste toner detection PCB (light- detects the level of toner inside the waste
emitting) toner container
[16] Waste toner detection PCB (light- detects the level of toner inside the waste
receiving) toner container
[17] Auto registration sensor F (light- reads the image position correction pattern
emitting) detection PCB
[18] Auto registration sensor F (light- reads the image position correction pattern
receiving) detection PCB
[19] Auto registration sensor R (light- reads the image position correction pattern
emitting) detection PCB
[20] Auto registration sensor R (light- reads the image position correction pattern
receiving) detection PCB
[21] Duplex driver PCB controls the sensors and motors inside the
duplex unit
16-196
Chapter 16
[38] Main controller PCB (main) processes image data for output to the printer
unit
[39] Main controller PCB (sub) processes conversion input image data of
signals from the reader unit
[42] Control panel KEY PCB controls the input from the keypad
[43] Control panel inverter PCB controls the backlight of the LCD
16-197
http://www.manuals4you.com
[33]
[10]
[39]
[9]
[8] [14]
[7] [13]
[38]
[12] [42]
[35]
[11]
[43]
[34] [25] [41]
[26]
[24]
[23]
[15]
[16]
[5]
[3]
[4] [36]
[37] [2]
[1]
[40]
[18]
[19] [31]
[20]
[32]
[27]
[27]
[24]
[28]
[31]
[27]
[27]
[21]
F-16-75
T-16-81
[1]
[2]
F-16-76
16.4.9 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by
PCB
16.4.9.1 Adjusting the Variable Resistors (VR), the Light-Emitting Diodes (LED),
and the Check Pins by PCB 0001-0494
Of the resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes (LED), and check pins used in the machine, those needed in servicing
the machine in the field are discussed:
Those VRs and check pins that are not found in the lists are designed exclusively for use at the factory, requiring
special tools and measuring instruments. Do not touch them in the field.
Some LEDs permit flow of current when OFF; this is a normal condition, and must be kept in mind.
16-199
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
LED1001
LED1002 LED1003
F-16-77
T-16-82
Notation Description
LED1001 in operation
16-200
Chapter 16
T-16-83
Notation Description
SW1
F-16-79
T-16-84
Notation Description
16-201
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 16
1 2 1 2 1 2
AB configuration A configuration Inch configuration
F-16-80
VR31
F-16-81
T-16-85
Notation Description
LED1
F-16-82
T-16-86
Notation Description
16-202
Chapter 17 Self
Diagnosis
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 17
T-17-1
E000 The rise in temperature in the fixing unit at time of power-on is inadequate.
17-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 17
E003 The temperature of the fixing unit is abnormally low after standby.
17-2
Chapter 17
0001 The ITB drum motor fails to The lock (normal state) signal is not
rotate. detected within 2 sec after the ITB
drum motor control signal has gone
ON or the motor speed has been
changed.
0002 The ITB drum motor fails to The lock (normal state) signal stops
rotate after it has rotated. 0.5 sec later.
xx=01: Y
xx=02: M
xx=03: C
xx=04: Bk
17-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 17
xx20 There is a fault/open circuit in the The fault can occur as when a new
ATR sensor. The drum unit is not drum unit has been fitted. It is
fitted normally, or is faulty. detected in about 90 to 120 sec after
idle rotation of the developing
assembly.
xx24 There is a fault/open circuit in the The fault can occur as when a new
SALT sensor. drum unit has been fitted. It is
detected during ATR control or in
about 150 sec after idle rotation of
the developing assembly.
xx25 There is a fault/open circuit in the The fault can occur as when a new
SALT sensor. drum unit has been fitted. It is
The ITB has deteriorated. detected during ATR control or in
about 150 sec after idle rotation of
the developing assembly.
xx30 There is a fault/open circuit in the The fault can occur as when a new
ATR sensor. The setting of the drum unit has been fitted. It is
ATR sensor computation value is detected in about 90 to 120 sec after
wrong.. The drum unit is not idle rotation of the developing
fitted properly, or is faulty. assembly.
xx34 The sample image fails to be The fault can occur as when a new
drawn in ATR control. There is a drum unit has been fitted. It is
fault/open circuit in the SALT detected during ATR control or in
sensor. The drum unit is faulty. about 150 sec after idle rotation of
The ITB has deteriorated. the developing assembly.
xx35 There is a fault/open circuit in the The fault can occur as when a new
SALT sensor. drum unit has been fitted. It is
detached during ATR control or in
about 150 sec after idle rotation of
the developing assembly.
xx40 The ATR sensor communication The fault can occur as when a new
value is faulty. There is a fault/ drum unit has been fitted. It is
open circuit in the ATR sensor. detected in about 90 to 120 sec after
The drum unit has been fitted idle rotation of the developing
improperly. (The machine cannot assembly.
detect the drum unit). The drum
unit is faulty.
17-4
Chapter 17
xx80 The actual value is considerably The fault occurs while ATR control
high in relation to the ITB surface is being executed.
reflectance when a new drum unit
is fitted. The SALT sensor is
faulty.
xx81 The actual value is considerably The fault occurs while ATR control
high in relation to the ITB surface is being executed.
reflectance when a new drum is
fitted.
xxA0 The measured value of the The fault occurs when an image is
developer concentration is being formed. It is detected when
considerably low. The ATR toner supply operation is started.
sensor is faulty. The SALT
sensor is faulty. The ITB is
soiled.
xxB0 The drum unit is approaching the The fault occurs when an image is
end of its life and is causing the being formed. It is detected when
T/D ratio to drop. The ATR toner supply operation is started.
sensor has an open circuit.
xxC0 The supply of toner for the toner The fault occurs when an image is
container to the developing being formed.
assembly is faulty. The
developing assembly is supplied
with toner excessively. The ATR
sensor has an open circuit.
17-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 17
xxD0 The supply of toner for the toner The fault occurs when an image is
container to the developing being formed and, in addition, when
assembly has failed. The toner the T/D ratio drops while 20 prints
cartridge motor fails to rotate. are being made continuously. It is
The toner container is empty. The detected when toner supply
toner supply mouth of the drum operation is started.
unit is damaged. The ATR sensor
has an open circuit.
For the first 2 digits of detail code
xxEE,
xx=00: fault in access to drum
unit
xx=01: fault in access to toner
container
0110 The rotation of the Y laser The motor lock signal remains in an
scanner motor is faulty. unlock state for 1 sec or more while
the laser scanner motor is in
operation.
0210 The rotation of the M laser The motor lock signal remains in an
scanner motor is faulty. unlock state for 1 sec or more while
the laser scanner motor is in
operation.
0310 The rotation of the C laser The motor lock signal remains in an
scanner motor is faulty. unlock state for 1 sec or more while
the laser scanner motor is in
operation.
0410 The rotation of the K laser The motor lock signal remains in an
scanner motor is faulty. unlock state for 1 sec or more while
the laser scanner motor is in
operation.
E202 A fault has occurred in detecting the No. 1 mirror home position.
0000 The No. 1 mirror base moves in The home position sensor does not
reverse but does not move to its go ON within a specific period of
home position. time.
17-6
Chapter 17
0001 The No. 1 mirror base moves The home position sensor does not
forward but does not move from go OFF within a specific period of
its home position. time.
E240 The communication between the main motor controller and the DC controller is faulty.
17-7
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 17
17-8
Chapter 17
The feeder motor (M2) fails to The feeder motor encoder pulse is
rotate. The feeder motor clock not detected within 0.3 sec after the
sensor (SR1) is faulty. DF feeder motor drive signal has
been turned ON.
0001 The height sensor (PS1) is faulty. The communication between the
height sensor and the finisher
controller PCB is prevented. Or,
there is a fault in the
communication data.
0002 The height sensor (PS1) is faulty. The communication between the
height sensor and the finisher
controller PCB is prevented for 0.1
sec or more.
0004 The DIP switch for the height There is a fault in the adjustment of
sensor (PS1) is not adjusted the sensor by the DIP switch.
correctly.
17-9
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 17
0001 The delivery roller, feed motor The delivery motor clock sensor
(M2), or feed motor clock sensor fails to generate the target number
(PI10) is faulty. of clock pulses within 10 sec at the
start of operation.
0002 The delivery roller, feeder motor There is no clock pulse for a feed
(M2), or feeder motor clock equivalent for 0.2 during
sensor (PI10) is faulty. communication.
The stack processing motor (M2) The stack delivery lever fails to
or the stack delivery lever home reach its home position when the
position sensor (S8) is faulty. The stack processing motor has been
connector is disconnected. The driven for a specific period of time
stack delivery belt or the return at start of operation.
roller is faulty.
0001 There is an excess load on the The aligning plate does not leave
alignment motor (M3), aligning the aligning plate home position
plate home position sensor (PI6), sensor when the alignment motor
or aligning plate. has been driven for 2 sec.
0002 There is an excess load on the The aligning plate does not return to
rear alignment motor (M3), rear its home position when the aligning
aligning plate home position plate motor has been driven for 2
sensor (PI6), or rear aligning sec.
plate.
0001 The stapler motor (M6) or the The stapler does not leave the
stapling home position detecting stapler shift position when the
switch (MS7) is faulty. stapler shift motor has been driven
for 0.5 sec.
0002 The stapler motor (M6) or the The stapler does not return from the
stapling home position detecting stapler shift position when the
switch (MS7) is faulty. stapler shift motor has been driven
for 0.5 sec.
0001 The stapler shift motor (M4) or The stapler shift base does not leave
the stapler shift home position the stapler shift home position
sensor (PI7) is faulty. There is a sensor when the stapler shift motor
fault in the path of the stapler has been driven for 4 sec.
shift base.
17-10
Chapter 17
0002 The stapler shift motor (M4) or The stapler shift base does not
the stapler shift home position return from the stapler shift home
sensor (PI7) is faulty. There is a position sensor when the stapler
fault in the path of the stapler shift motor has been driven for 4
shift base. sec.
0001 The swing motor (M7) or the The swing guide closed switch does
swing guide open sensor (PI18) is not go ON when the swing motor
faulty. has been rotated in reverse for 1 sec.
0002 The swing motor (M7) or the The swing guide open switch does
swing guide closed switch (MS6) not go ON when the swing motor
is faulty. has been rotated in reverse for 1 sec.
0003 The safety area switch (MS3) or The swing guide closed switch is
the swing guide switch 2 (MS6) OFF when the tray 1/2 is in the OFF
is faulty. position of the safety area switch
while the tray ascent/descent motor
is in operation.
0004 The swing motor (M7) or the There is no clock pulse for 0.2 sec
swing motor clock sensor (PI20) while swinging operation is under
is faulty. way.
The front alignment motor (M3) The aligning plate fails to reach the
or the front aligning plate home aligning plate home position sensor
position sensor (S6) is faulty. An when the rear alignment motor has
excess load is imposed on the been driven for a specific period of
front aligning plate. time, or fails to leave the aligning
plate home position sensor.
0002 The tray upper limit detecting The tray upper limit detecting
switch (MS5) is faulty. switch is ON during tray ascent/
descent operation.
0003 The tray ascent/descent motor There is no clock pulse for 0.2 sec
(M5) or the tray ascent /descent or more from the clock sensor when
motor clock sensor 1/2 (PI9/ the tray ascent/descent motor has
PI19) is faulty. been driven.
17-11
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 17
The stack processing motor (M2) The return roller fails to reach the
or the return controller home return roller home position sensor
position sensor (S3) is faulty. The when the stack processing motor
connector is disconnected. The has been driven for a required
stack delivery lever or the return period of time.
roller is faulty.
The stack tray ascent/descent The stack tray upper limit sensor
motor (M5), stack tray paper goes ON while the stack tray
height sensor (S10), or the stack ascent/descent motor is in
tray ascent/descent motor clock operation, or the clock pulse of the
sensor (S9) is faulty. The stack tray direction motor clock
connector is disconnected. An sensor is not detected 15 times or
excess load is imposed on the more within 0.8 sec.
stack tray ascent/descent motor. The stack tray does not reach the
stack tray height sensor within 4 sec
after the stack tray ascent/descent
motor has started ascent operation.
0001 The No. 2 feed motor (M8) or the The shutter open sensor does not go
shutter open sensor (PI5) is ON when the No. 2 feed motor has
faulty. been rotated in reverse for 1 sec or
more.
0002 The No 2 feed motor (M8) or the The shutter closed switch does not
shutter closed switch (MS4) is go ON when the No. 2 feed motor
faulty. has been rotated in reverse for 1 sec
or more.
0003 The safety area detecting switch The shutter closed switch is OFF
(MS3) or the shutter closed when the tray 1/2 is in the OFF
switch (MS4) is faulty. position of the safety area switch
while the tray ascent/descent motor
is in operation.
0001 The paper positioning plate The paper positioning plate home
motor (M4S) or the paper position sensor does not go ON
positioning plate home position when the paper positioning plate
sensor (PI7S) is faulty. motor has been driven for 1.33 sec.
0002 The paper positioning plate The paper positioning plate home
motor (M4S) or the paper position sensor does not go OFF
positioning plate home position when the paper position plate motor
sensor (PI7S) is faulty. has been driven for 1 sec.
17-12
Chapter 17
0001 The paper fold motor (M2S) or The number of detection pluses of
the paper fold motor clock sensor the paper fold motor clock sensor
(PI4S) is faulty. falls below a specific value.
0002 The paper fold motor (M2S) or The state of the paper fold home
the paper fold motor clock sensor position sensor remains unchanged
(PI4S) is faulty. when the paper fold motor has been
driven for 3 sec.
0001 The guide motor (M2S) or the The guide home position sensor
guide home position sensor does notgo ON when the guide
(PI13S) is faulty. motor has been rotated for 0.455
sec.
0002 The guide motor (M3S) or the The guide home position sensor
guide home position sensor does not go OFF when the guide
(PI13S) is faulty. motor has been driven for 1 sec.
0001 The alignment motor (M5S) or The aligning plate home position
the aligning plate home position sensor does not go ON when the
sensor (PI5S) is faulty. alignment motor has been driven
for 0.5 sec. (initially, driven for
1.67 sec)
0002 The alignment motor (M5S) or The alignment plate home position
the aligning plate home position sensor does not go OFF when the
sensor (PI5S) is faulty. alignment motor has been driven
for 1 sec.
0001 The stapler motor (rear, M6S) or The stitching home position sensor
the stacking home position does not go OFF when the stitch
sensor (rear, MS5S) is faulty. motor (rear) has been rotated
clockwise for 0.5 sec.
0002 The stitch motor (rear, M67S) or The stitching home position sensor
the stitching home position does not go ON when the stitch
sensor (rear, MS5S) is faulty. motor (rear) has been rotated in
reverse for 0.5 sec or more.
0001 The stitch motor (front, M7S) or The stitching home position sensor
the stitching home position does not go OFF when the stitch
sensor (front, MS7S) is faulty. motor (front) has been driven
clockwise for 0.5 sec or more.
17-13
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 17
0002 The stitch motor (front, M7S) or The stitching home position sensor
the stitching home position does not go ON when the stitch
sensor (front, MS7S) is faulty. motor (front) has been driven in
reverse for 0.5 sec or more.
0001 The paper pushing plate motor The paper pushing plate home
(M8S) or the paper pushing plate position sensor does not go ON
home position sensor (PI4S) is when the paper pushing plate motor
faulty. has been driven for 0.3 sec or more.
0002 The paper pushing plate motor The paper pushing plate home
(M8S) or the paper pushing plate position sensor does not go OFF
home position sensor (PI14S) is when the paper pushing plate motor
faulty. has been driven for 80 msec.
0003 The paper pushing plate motor The paper pushing plate leading
(M8S) or the paper pushing plate edge position sensor does not go
leading edge position sensor OFF when the paper pushing plate
(PI15S) is faulty. motor has been driven for 80 msec.
0004 The paper pushing plate motor The number of detection pulses of
(M8S) or the paper pushing plate the paper pushing plate motor clock
motor clock sensor (PI1S) is sensor has dropped below a specific
faulty. value.
0005 The paper pushing plate motor The paper pushing plate leading
(M8S) or the paper pushing plate edge positioning sensor does not go
leading edge position sensor ON when the paper pushing plate
(PI15S) is faulty. motor has been driven for 0.3 sec or
more.
0001 The connector of the guide home The connector of the guide home
position sensor (PI13S) is faulty. position sensor has been identified
to have been disconnected.
0002 The connector of the paper The connector of the paper pushing
pushing plate home position plate home position sensor is
sensor (PI14S) is faulty. identified to have been
disconnected.
0003 The connector of the paper The connector of the paper pushing
pushing plate leading edge plate position sensor is identified to
position sensor (PI15S) is faulty. have been disconnected.
17-14
Chapter 17
0001 The inlet cover switch (MS1S), The inlet cover switch is identified
front cover switch (MS2S), or to be open for 1 sec or more after
delivery cover switch (MS3S) is the start of initial rotation or of
faulty. printing in the host machine with
any of the following sensor
identifying the cover to be closed:
- inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
- front cover open/closed sensor
(PI2S)
- delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
0002 The front cover switch (MS2S) or The front cover switch is identified
the delivery cover switch (MS3S) to be open for 1 sec or more after
is faulty. the start of initial rotation or of
printing in the host machine with
any of the following sensors
identifying the cover to be closed:
- inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
- front cover open/closed sensor
(PI2S)
- delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
17-15
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 17
17-16
Chapter 17
17-17
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 17
0000
E712 There is a fault in the communication between the ADF and the reader unit.
E713 There is a fault in the communication between the finisher and the cassette pedestal.
17-18
Chapter 17
E716 There is a fault in the communication between the cassette pedestal and the printer unit.
17-19
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 17
17-20
Chapter 17
E747 The image processing ASIC or the memory control/communication ASIC is faulty.
17-21
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 17
17-22
Chapter 18 Service Mode
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
18.1 Outline
18.1.1 Service mode screen configuration 0000-5388
As shown below, the service modes use three screen levels: initial screen → main/intermediate item screen → sub-
item screen.
One set of modes are used for normal maintenance (Level 1 modes), and another set are used for troubleshooting
(Level 2 modes).
User screen
( )(2,8)( )
Reset key
Initial screen
(Level 1)
Initial screen
( )(2) (Level 2)
(Select an item.)
Main/intermediate
(Select a main item from the top of screen.)
(The corresponding intermediate items are item screen
then displayed and can be selected.) (Level 2)
Previous/next page
F-18-1
18-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
COPIER
FEEDER
DISPLAY Status display mode
SORTER
I/O I/O display mode
BOARD
ADJUST Adjustment mode
F-18-2
To execute a copier operation using a service mode, remove the cable from the external controller or the cable from
the network before entering the desired mode. Take care when using the FUNCTION (operation/inspection mode)
mode, as the copier may malfunction and be damaged if a print job is received from outside while an operation is
executing with this mode in effect.
F-18-3
18-2
Chapter 18
When the reset key is pressed once, the display returns to the service mode initial screen (F00-102-01).
When the reset key is pressed twice, the service modes are exited, and the display returns to the user screen (standard
screen).
When using the ADJUST, FUNCTION or OPTION service mode, be sure to turn the main power switch ON/OFF
after exiting the mode.
Each copier is adjusted at time of factory shipment, and the adjusted values are written on the service labels.
If you replace the reader controller PCB or DC controller PCB, or clear the RAM, the adjusted ADJUST and
OPTION values are restored to their default values, Therefore, always enter the new service mode values on the
service labels when you change the values as a result of adjusting the copier in the market, If the item you need to
enter is not listed on the service label, enter it in a balnk box.
- Reader controller PCB service label:
Back side of reader unit's left cover [1]
[1]
F-18-4
[1]
F-18-5
18-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
COPIER
Initial items
FEEDER
Touch an item to
select it.
SORTER
BOARD
F-18-6
ACC-STS
ANALOG
Intermediate items
CST-STS
Touch an item to
select it. JAM
ERR
F-18-7
18-4
Chapter 18
Number of pages
F-18-8
F-18-9
18-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18.2.1.1 VERSION
VERSION
USER
ACC-STS DENS
ANALOG
JAM MISC
ERR ALARM-2
F-18-10
18-6
Chapter 18
18-7
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18.2.1.2 ACC-STS
18-8
Chapter 18
18.2.1.3 ANALOG
18-9
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18.2.1.4 JAM
F-18-11
T-18-1
AA
T-18-2
BBBB
Date of jam
T-18-3
CCCC
Time of jam
18-10
Chapter 18
T-18-4
DDDD
T-18-5
Jam location
0: Copier
1: DADF
2: Finisher
T-18-6
FFff
Jam code
T-18-7
T-18-8
HHHHHH
T-18-9
IIIII
Paper size
18-11
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
T-18-10
T-18-11
18-12
Chapter 18
T-18-12
18-13
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
T-18-13
18-14
Chapter 18
18-15
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
Paper feed cover OPEN 0082 SR2 Paper feed unit cover was
opened when copier was
stopped due to lack of paper.
Document not removed 0088 SR4, SR5 Attempt to start paper feed was
made with document left on
document stand glass. Detected
by reverse paper delivery
inlet sensor (SR4) and reverse
paper delivery registration
sensor (SR5).
18-16
Chapter 18
18-17
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
T-18-14
Code Description
0 Except for 1 to 10
1 Cassette 1
2 Cassette 2
3 Cassette 3
4 Cassette 4
6 to 8 not used
9 duplex unit
18.2.1.5 ERR
F-18-12
T-18-15
AA
18-18
Chapter 18
T-18-16
BBBB
Date of error
T-18-17
CCCC
Time of error
T-18-18
DDDD
Time error was restored
T-18-19
EEEE
Error code
T-18-20
FFff
Detail code
"0000" if none.
T-18-21
Error location
0: Main controller
1: DADF
2: Finisher
3: Unused
4: Reader unit
5: Printer unit
6: PDL boards
7: Fax board
18-19
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18.2.1.6 DENS
T-18-22
T-18-23
T-18-24
18-20
Chapter 18
18.2.1.7 MISC
T-18-25
T-18-26
18.2.1.8 ALARM-1
18-21
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18.2.1.9 ALARM-2
F-18-13
T-18-27
T-18-28
18-22
Chapter 18
18-23
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18-24
Chapter 18
18.2.1.10 ENVRNT
F-18-14
18-25
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
T-18-29
Item Description
No. number of a data piece (higher the number, older the data piece)
18.2.2 FEEDER
T-18-30
For paper names, see COPIER > OPTION > CST > CST-U1,
CST-U2.
VERSION CCD
USER DPOT
DENS
CST-STS
MISC
F-18-15
18-26
Chapter 18
VERSION
- LANG-CS (indicates the version of the Czech language file)
- LANG-DA (indicates the version of the Danish language file)
- LANG-EL (indicates the version of the Greek language file)
- LANG-ES (indicates the version of the Spanish language file)
- LANG-ET (indicates the version of the Estonian language file)
- LANG-FI (indicates the version of the Finnish language file)
- LANG-HU (indicates the version of the Hungarian language file)
- LANG-KO (indicates the version of the Korean language file)
- LANG-NL (indicates the version of the Dutch language file)
- LANG-NO (indicates the version of the Norwegian language file)
- LANG-PL (indicates the version of the Polish language file)
- LANG-PT (indicates the version of the Portuguese language file)
- LANG-RU (indicates the version of the Russian language file)
- LANG-SL (indicates the version of the Slovenian language file)
- LANG-SV (indicates the version for the Swedish language file)
- LANG-TW (indicates the version of the classical Chinese language file)
- ECO-ID (Use it to check the ECO-ID number)
- LANG-ZH (indicates the version of the simplified Chinese language file)
- LANG-BU (indicates the version fort the Bulgarian language file)
- LANG-CR (indicates the version of the Croatian language file)
- LANG-RM (indicates the version of the Rumanian language file)
- LANG-SK (indicates the version of the Slovakian language file)
- LANG-TK (indicates the version of the Turkish language file)
CST-STS
- WIDTH-ME (indicates the paper width for the manual feed tray; in mm)
DPOT
- 2TR-PPR (indicates the output level of the paper assigned voltage for the secondary transfer DC voltage generated
most recently)
- 2TR-BASE (indicates the output level of the reference voltage for the secondary transfer DC voltage generated
most recently)
- 1TR-DC-Y/M/C/K (indicates the output level of the primary transfer DC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated most
recently)
- CHG-AC-Y/M/C/K (indicates the output level of the primary charging AC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated most
recently)
18-27
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
DENS
- CHG-DC-Y/M/C/K (indicates the output level of the primary charging DC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated most
recently)
- DEV-DC-Y/M/C/K (indicates the output level of the developing DC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated most recently)
- DENS-S-Y/M/C/K (indicates the detected density level (Y/M/C/Bk) for the sample image to be created at time of
ATR control)
- D-Y/M/C/K -TRGT (indicates the detected density level (Y/M/C/Bk) for the sample image to be created at time of
ATR control)
- P-SENS-P/S (indicates the detected light intensity (P wave/S wave) of the background (ITB) for ATR control)
- D-CRNT-P/S (indicates the measurements (P waste/S wave) of the dark current at time of ATR control)
CCD
- GAIN-OB (indicates the gain level adjustment value of blue for the odd-numbered bits of the CCD; for color)
- GAIN-OG (indicates the gain level adjustment value of green for the odd-numbered bits of the CCD; for color)
- GAIN-OR (indicates the gain level adjustment value of red for the odd-numbered bits of the CCD; for color)
- GAIN-EB (indicates the gain level adjustment value of blue for the even-numbered bits of the CCD; for color)
- GAIN-EG (indicates the gain level adjustment value of green for the even-numbered bits of the CCD; for color)
- GAIN-ER (indicates the gain level adjustment value of red for the even-numbered bits of the CCD; for color)
- GAINB-OB (indicates the gain level adjustment value of blue for the odd-numbered bits of the CCD; for black-
and-white)
- GAINB-OG (indicates the gain level adjustment value of green for the odd-numbered bits of the CCD; for black-
and-white)
- GAINB-OR (indicates the gain level adjustment value of red for the odd-numbered bits of the CCD; for black-and-
white)
- GAINB-EB (indicates the gain level adjustment value of blue for the even-numbered bits of the CCD; for black-
and-white)
- GAINB-EG (indicates the gain level adjustment value of green for the even-numbered bits of the CCD; for black-
and-white)
- GAINB-ER (indicates the gain level adjustment of red for the even-numbered bits of the CCD; for black-and-white)
18.2.4.1 COPIER
18.2.4.1.1 VERSION
<LANG-CS> 0001-0125
Use it to check the version of the Czech language file.
<LANG-DA> 0001-0126
Use it to check the version of the Danish language file.
<LANG-EL> 0001-0127
Use it to check the version f the Greek language file.
18-28
Chapter 18
<LANG-ES> 0001-0128
Use it to check the version of the Spanish language file.
<LANG-ET> 0001-0129
Use it to check the version of the Estonian language file.
<LANG-FI> 0001-0130
Use it to check the version of the Finnish language file.
<LANG-HU> 0001-0131
Use it to check the version of the Hungarian language file.
<LANG-KO> 0001-0132
Use it to check the version of the Korean language file.
<LANG-NL> 0001-0133
Use it to check the version of the Dutch language file.
<LANG-NO> 0001-0134
Use it to check the version of the Norwegian language file.
<LANG-PL> 0001-0135
Use it to check the version of the Polish language file.
<LANG-PT> 0001-0136
Use it to check the version of the Portuguese language file.
<LANG-RU> 0001-0138
Use it to check the version of the Russian langue file.
<LANG-SL> 0001-0139
Use it to check the version of the Slovenian language file.
<LANG-SV> 0001-0140
Use it to check the version of the Swedish language file.
<LANG-TW> 0001-0141
Use it to check the version of the Chinese language file (traditional text).
<LANG-ZH> 0001-0143
Use it to check the version of the Chinese language file (simplified text).
<ECO-ID> 0007-6055
Use it to check the ECO-ID number
<LANG-BU> 0001-0144
Use it to check the version of the Bulgarian language file.
<LANG-CR> 0001-0145
Use it to check the version of the Croatian language file.
<LANG-RM> 0001-0146
Use it to check the version of the Romanian language file.
<LANG-SK> 0001-0147
Use it to check the version of the Slovakian language file.
<LANG-TK> 0001-0148
Use it to check the version of the Turkish language file.
18-29
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18.2.4.1.2 CST-STS
<WIDTH-MF> 0001-0149
Use it to check the width of paper in the manual feed tray (in mm).
18.2.4.1.3 CCD
GAIN-OB 0006-1757
CCD odd numbered bit's BLUE gain level adjusted value - for color
GAIN-OG 0006-1758
CCD odd numbered bit's GREEN gain level adjusted value - for color
GAIN-OR 0006-1759
CCD odd numbered bit's RED gain level adjusted value - for color
GAIN-EB 0006-1760
CCD even numbered bit's BLUE gain level adjusted value - for color
GAIN-EG 0006-1761
CCD even numbered bit's GREEN gain level adjusted value - for color
GAIN-ER 0006-1762
CCD even numbered bit's RED gain level adjusted value - for color
GAINB-OB 0006-1763
CCD odd numbered bit's BLUE gain level adjusted value - for black and white
GAINB-OG 0006-1764
CCD odd numbered bit's GREEN gain level adjusted value - for black and white
GAINB-OR 0006-1765
CCD odd numbered bit's RED gain level adjusted value - for black and white
GAINB-EB 0006-1766
CCD even numbered bit's BLUE gain level adjusted value - for black and white
GAINB-EG 0006-1767
CCD even numbered bit's GREEN gain level adjusted value - for black and white
GAINB-ER 0006-1768
CCD even numbered bit's RED gain level adjusted value - for black and white
18.2.4.1.4 DPOT
<2TR-PPR> 0001-0150
Use it to check the output value of the paper separation voltage of the secondary transfer DC voltage generated last.
<2TR-BASE> 0001-0152
Use it to check the output value of the reference voltage of the secondary transfer DC voltage generated last.
<1TR-DC-Y> 0001-0153
Use it to check the output value of the primary transfer DC voltage (Y) generated last.
<1TR-DC-M> 0001-1231
Use it to check the output value of the primary transfer DC voltage (M) generated last.
<1TR-DC-C> 0001-1232
Use it to check the output value of the primary transfer DC voltage (C) generated last.
18-30
Chapter 18
<1TR-DC-K> 0001-1233
Use it to check the output value of the primary transfer DC voltage (K) generated last.
CHG-AC-Y 0005-9754
output value of primary charge AC voltage (Y) output last
CHG-AC-M 0005-9755
output value of primary charge AC voltage (M) output last)
CHG-AC-C 0005-9756
output value of primary charge AC voltage (C) output last)
CHG-AC-K 0005-9752
output value of primary charge AC voltage (Bk) output last)
18.2.4.1.5 DENS
<DENS-S-Y/M/C/K> 0001-0157
Use it to check the density value (Y/M/C/Bk) detected of the sample image formed at time of ATR control.
<D-Y/M/C/K-TRGT> 0005-9757
target value (Y/M/C/Bk) of developer concentration
<DEV-DC-Y/M/C/K> 0001-0156
Use it to check the output value of the developing DC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated last.
<CHG-DC-Y/M/C/K> 0001-0155
Use it to check the output value of the primary DC voltage (Y/M/C/Bk) generated last.
<D-CRNT-P/S> 0001-0160
Uses it to indicate the value (P wave/S wave) measured of the dark current at time of ATR control.
<P-SENS-P/S> 0005-9768
detected light quantity value (P wave/S wave) of backing (ITB) during ATR control
18-31
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
The COPIER > I/O screen is shown below. The screen items (only the items required for
market service) are described on the next page.
DC-CON
R-CON
FEEDER
SORTER
MN-CONT
F-18-16
0
7
F-18-17
18-32
Chapter 18
T-18-31
(input)
1 Cassette 1 size
detection 1
2 Cassette 1 size
detection 2
3 Cassette 1 size
detection 3
5 Cassette 2 size
detection 1
6 Cassette 2 size
detection 2
7 Cassette 2 size
detection 3
18-33
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
T-18-32
4-ream actuator
Inner Front
1 STMT R 0 1 1 1
2 LTR 1 0 1 1
3 LTR R 0 1 0 1
4 LGL 1 0 1 0
5 11×17 1 1 0 1
6 A5 R 0 1 1 0
7 A4 0 0 1 1
8 A4 R 1 0 0 1
9 A3 0 1 0 0
10 B5 0 0 1 0
11 B5 R 0 0 0 1
12 B4 0 0 0 0
13 12×18 1 0 0 0
14 U1 1 1 0 0
15 U2 1 1 1 0
16 No cassette 1 1 1 1
0: Actuator pressed
T-18-33
4 For R&D
5 For R&D
6 For R&D
7 For R&D
9 For R&D
18-34
Chapter 18
10 For R&D
4 For R&D
5 For R&D
6 For R&D
7 For R&D
9 For R&D
10 For R&D
11 For R&D
12 For R&D
13 For R&D
14 For R&D
15 For R&D
2 For R&D
3 For R&D
4 For R&D
5 For R&D
6 For R&D
7 For R&D
8 For R&D
18-35
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
6 For R&D
12 For R&D
18-36
Chapter 18
2 For R&D
3 For R&D
4 24-V ON 0: ON
1: Negative output
8 For R&D
9 For R&D
10 For R&D
11 For R&D
12 For R&D
14 For R&D
18-37
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
12 For R&D
13 For R&D
14 For R&D
15 For R&D
(output)
5 Cleaner fan 1: ON
10 For R&D
11 For R&D
12 For R&D
13 For R&D
14 For R&D
15 For R&D
3 For R&D
4 For R&D
5 For R&D
18-38
Chapter 18
8 For R&D
9 For R&D
10 For R&D
11 For R&D
12 For R&D
13 For R&D
14 For R&D
15 For R&D
to P018
(for R&D)
(input)
(input)
18-39
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
3 PS3D Deck lifter upper limit sensor 1: Lifter has reached upper
limit
0: Lift UP
to P025
(for R&D)
18-40
Chapter 18
4 For R&D
5 For R&D
6 For R&D
7 For R&D
3 For R&D
4 For R&D
5 For R&D
4 For R&D
5 For R&D
6 For R&D
7 For R&D
18-41
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
T-18-34
0 0 100%
1 0 70%
0 1 31%
1 1 0%
T-18-35
0 0 100%
1 0 70%
0 1 50%
1 1 35%
T-18-36
(input/ 1 12 V, 24 V 0: 12 V supply,
output) 1: 24 V supply
2 For R&D
5 For R&D
6 For R&D
18-42
Chapter 18
4 For R&D
5 For R&D
6 For R&D
7 For R&D
2 For R&D
3 For R&D
6 For R&D
7 For R&D
(output)
2 For R&D
3 For R&D
4 For R&D
5 For R&D
6 For R&D
7 For R&D
18-43
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
T-18-37
3 - -
4 - -
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
P002 0 to 7 -
(for R&D)
4 -
5 -
6 -
7 -
P004 0
3 -
4 -
5 -
6 -
18-44
Chapter 18
7 -
P005 0 to 7 -
(for R&D)
3 - -
5 Brake 1: ON
7 - -
P007 0 - -
3 LED2 0: Lit
P008 0 - -
(input) 1 - -
2 Push switch 1: ON
6 - -
7 - -
P009 0 to 7 - -
(for R&D)
18-45
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
2 DIP SW bit 3 1: ON
3 DIP SW bit 4 1: ON
4 DIP SW bit 5 1: ON
5 DIP SW bit 6 1: ON
6 DIP SW bit 7 1: ON
7 DIP SW bit 8 1: ON
T-18-38
P002 0 to 7 - -
(for R&D)
(input)
18-46
Chapter 18
3 - - -
(input) 1 - - -
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
(input/
output)
1 - - -
3 - - -
18-47
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
6 - - -
7 - - -
P006 0 - - -
(output) 1 - - -
4 - - -
5 - - -
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
18-48
Chapter 18
(input/ 1 - - -
output)
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - 24VP detection -
P009 0 to 7 - - -
(for R&D)
(output)
0: Current medium
5 - LED1 0: ON
6 - LED2 0: ON
7 - LED3 0: ON
18-49
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
2 - DIPSW1 bit 3 0: ON
3 - DIPSW1 bit 4 0: ON
4 - DIPSW1 bit 5 0: ON
5 - DIPSW1 bit 6 0: ON
6 - DIPSW1 bit 7 0: ON
7 - DIPSW1 bit 8 0: ON
T-18-39
P001 0 - - -
(output) 1 - - -
6 M3 Matching motor B -
phase output
7 M3 Matching motor A -
phase output
8 to 15 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 - - -
18-50
Chapter 18
7 M5 Tray UP/DOWN 1: UP
motor UP/DOWN
drive output
8 to 15 - - -
P003 0 - - -
2 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
P004 0 - - -
(output) 1 - 24 V output -
interruption
detection signal
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
18-51
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
(output) 1 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
P007 0 - - -
(output) 1 - - -
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 M5 Tray UP/DOWN -
motor clock
detection signal 1
6 M5 Tray UP/DOWN -
motor clock
detection signal 2
18-52
Chapter 18
8 to 15 - - -
2 - Stacker unit -
EEPROM CS
3 - * LWR (input/ -
output)
4 - * HWR (input/ -
output)
5 - * RD (input/output) -
6 - * AS (input/output) -
7 - Stacker unit -
EEPROM data input
(input)
8 to 15 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
18-53
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
P010 0 to 15 - - -
(for R&D)
P011 0 to 15 - - -
(for R&D)
2 - - -
4 - - -
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
P013 0 to 15 - - -
(not used)
P014 0 to 15 - - -
(not used)
2 - - -
18-54
Chapter 18
8 to 15 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
18-55
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
2 - - -
3 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
(output) 1 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
P020 0 - - -
(output) 1 - - -
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
18-56
Chapter 18
8 to 15 - - -
2 - - -
4 - Flapper solenoid 1: ON
drive signal
5 - Paddle solenoid 1: ON
drive signal
6 - Solenoid timer -
output
7 - Retraction solenoid 1: ON
drive signal
8 to 15 - - -
T-18-40
18-57
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
8 to 15 - - -
P024 0 - - -
(output) 1 - - -
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 - Conveyor plate- 1: ON
adjoining solenoid
drive signal
6 - - -
8to 15 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
18-58
Chapter 18
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
(output)
6 - - -
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
18-59
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
(output)
6 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
18-60
Chapter 18
8 to 15 - - -
(output)
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
(output) connector
connection detection
connector
connection detection
connection detection
18-61
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
sensor connector
connection detection
sensor connector
connection detection
6 - - -
7 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
P032 0 to 15 - - -
8 to 15 - - -
18-62
Chapter 18
8 to 15 - - -
P035 to - - - -
P050
T-18-41
3 For R&D
(output)
2 For R&D
18-63
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
11 For R&D
12 For R&D
13 For R&D
(input)
6 For R&D
7 For R&D
8 For R&D
7 For R&D
8 For R&D
9 For R&D
10 For R&D
18-64
Chapter 18
18.4.1.1 ADJ-XY
T-18-42
Used to adjust the optical image leading edge position (image read
start position in the sub-scanning direction).
Adjustment method - If the image's blank width is larger than the standard value, the
setting value should be decreased.
- If areas outside the document are also copied, the setting value
should be increased.
(The image read range moves in the direction of the trailing edge.)
Caution 2 After changing the setting value of this item, enter the new value on
the service label.
Image’s leading
edge Platen glass
Vertical size plate (incorporating white plate)
White plate
Document
18-65
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
T-18-43
Used to adjust the CCD's read start cell position (image read start
position in the main scanning direction).
Adjustment method - If the image's blank width is larger than the standard value,
method the setting value should be decreased.
- If areas outside the document are also copied, the setting value
should be increased.
18-66
Chapter 18
T-18-44
Used to enter the adjusted value of the optical shading measurement position.
- If white or black lines appear in the image after executing COPIER > FUNCTION
> CCD > SH-PS-ST (to automatically adjust the shading measurement position), you
can adjust the shading measurement position manually by changing the setting value.
- Decreasing the setting value by 1 moves the shading measurement position by 0.1
mm in the direction of the leading edge.
Adjustment method - If you have cleared the reader controller PCB's RAM or replaced the reader
controller PCB, enter the value on the service label.
Adjustment range 120 to 150 (Value at time of factory shipment: Factory-adjusted value)
18.4.1.2 CCD
T-18-45
Adjustment method - If you have cleared the reader controller PCB's RAM or replaced the reader
controller PCB, enter the values on the service label.
- If you have replaced the platen glass, enter the values on the platen glass (see
figure below).
* 820686679349 *
18-67
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
T-18-46
Adjustment - If you have cleared the reader controller PCB's RAM or replaced
method the reader controller PCB, enter the value on the service label.
- If you have replaced the CCD unit, enter the value on the label
attached to the CCD unit
T-18-47
Adjustment - If you have cleared the reader controller PCB's RAM or replaced
method the reader controller PCB, enter the value on the service label.
18-68
Chapter 18
T-18-48
Adjustment - If you have cleared the reader controller PCB's RAM or replaced
method the reader controller PCB, enter the value on the service label.
T-18-49
Adjustment - If you have cleared the reader controller PCB's RAM or replaced
method the reader controller PCB, enter the value on the service label.
18-69
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
T-18-50
18.4.1.3 IMG-REG
T-18-51
Adjustment method - If you have cleared the DC controller PCB's RAM or replaced
the DC controller PCB, enter the value on the service label.
18-70
Chapter 18
18.4.1.4 BLANK
T-18-52
Adjustment - If you have cleared the main controller PCB's RAM or replaced
method the SRAM PCB, enter the value on the service label.
T-18-53
T-18-54
18-71
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
T-18-55
Adjustment - If you have cleared the main controller PCB's RAM or replaced
method the SRAM PCB, enter the value on the service label.
18.4.1.5 PASCAL
T-18-56
Adjustment Increasing the value makes the image after automatic gradation
method compensation (full compensation) denser.
18.4.1.6 FEED-ADJ
T-18-57
Adjustment - Increasing the value by 1 moves the image by 0.1 mm in the direction
method of the leading edge of the paper.
18-72
Chapter 18
18.4.1.7 CST-ADJ
T-18-58
Used to enter the basic value for the manual feed tray's paper width
(A4R).
Adjustment - If you have cleared the DC controller PCB's RAM or replaced the
method DC controller PCB, enter the value on the service label.
Adjustment 0 to 255
range
(Value at time of factory shipment: Factory-adjusted value)
18.4.1.8 MISC
T-18-59
Used to adjust the text and photo separation level for text/photo/
map mode.
18-73
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18.4.2 FEEDER
T-18-60
Used to adjust the document stop position during ADF paper feed
(document tray paper feed).
Note - Increasing the value makes the leading edge blank smaller.
Caution Delivering the document makes the setting value valid, so be sure
to press the OK key to deliver the document.
2) Select the item, use the numeric keypad to change the setting
value, then press the OK key to set it.
4) Open the ADF carefully, and check the stop position of the
document.
L4
Paper
F-18-21
T-18-61
- If the document is farther left than the arrow in the figure below: Increase the value (the
leading edge blank is made smaller).
18-74
Chapter 18
Document position
alignment mark Horizontal size plate
Paper
T-18-62
- If the document is farther right than the arrow in the figure below: Decrease the value
(the leading edge blank is made larger).
Document position
alignment mark Horizontal size plate
Paper
T-18-63
5) Carefully close the ADF and press the OK button to deliver the document to the
document tray.
18-75
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18.4.3.1 COPIER
18.4.3.1.1 DENS
T-SPLY-Y 0007-6096
T-18-64
Adjustment Enter a value of the service label when RAM of the DC controller
method PCB has been cleared/the DC controller has been replaced.
T-SPLY-M 0007-6098
T-18-65
Adjustment Enter a value of the service label when RAM of the DC controller
method PCB has been cleared/the DC controller has been replaced.
T-SPLY-C 0007-6106
T-18-66
Adjustment Enter a value of the service label when RAM of the DC controller
method PCB has been cleared/the DC controller has been replaced.
T-SPLY-K 0007-6107
T-18-67
Adjustment Enter a value of the service label when RAM of the DC controller
method PCB has been cleared/the DC controller has been replaced.
18-76
Chapter 18
18.4.3.1.2 V-CONT
VCONT-Y/M/C/K 0001-2375
- VCONT-Y/M/C/K (Used to adjust electric potential for image contrast.)
Adjustment range: -30 to 30 (10 V units) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
The larger the setting value, the higher the density.
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
VBACK-Y/M/C/K 0006-0862
- VBACK-Y/M/C/K (Used to adjust electric potential for removing image fog.)
Adjustment range: Y/M -6 to 12 (5 V units) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
C/K -12 to 6 (5 V units) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
The larger the setting value, the more fog is reduced.
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
VD-LIM-Y 0007-6165
Adjusting the upper limit of charge DC.
Adjustment range:
-10 to 0 (1 step: 25V) [Factory default/After RAM clear:0]
Change a setting value when either of the following faulty images occurs.
- Color blanking in the highlight area (especially on low-density image)
- Fogging (when making a large number of low-density image copies)
VD-LIM-M 0007-6166
Adjusting the upper limit of charge DC.
Adjustment range:
-10 to 0 (1 step: 25V) [Factory default/After RAM clear:0]
Change a setting value when either of the following faulty images occurs.
- Color blanking in the highlight area (especially on low-density image)
- Fogging (when making a large number of low-density image copies)
VD-LIM-C 0007-6168
Adjusting the upper limit of charge DC.
Adjustment range:
-10 to 0 (1 step: 25V) [Factory default/After RAM clear:0]
Change a setting value when either of the following faulty images occurs.
- Color blanking in the highlight area (especially on low-density image)
- Fogging (when making a large number of low-density image copies)
VD-LIM-K 0007-6169
Adjusting the upper limit of charge DC.
Adjustment range:
-10 to 0 (1 step: 25V) [Factory default/After RAM clear:0]
Change a setting value when either of the following faulty images occurs.
- Color blanking in the highlight area (especially on low-density image)
- Fogging (when making a large number of low-density image copies)
18-77
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18.4.3.1.3 COLOR
LD-OFS-Y/M/C/K 0001-2382
- LD-OFS-Y/M/C/K (Used to adjust low-density color balance.)
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
MD-OFS-/Y/M/C/K 0006-0885
- MD-OFS-Y/M/C/K (Used to adjust medium-density color balance.)
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation. (Recommended setting value: -1)
HD-OFS-Y/M/C/K 0006-0888
- HD-OFS-Y/M/C/K (Used to adjust high-density color balance.)
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation. (Recommended setting value: -2)
18.4.3.1.4 HV-PRI
USUB-Y/M/C/KAC 0001-2384
- USUB-Y/M/C/KAC (Used to adjust upstream auxiliary brush charge voltage.)
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
DIS-TGY/M/C/K 0006-0890
- DIS-TGY/M/C/K (Used to adjust the offset to the target current used in discharge current control (normal paper).)
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
DIS-TGY2/M2/C2/K2 0006-0892
- DIS-TGY2/M2/C2/K2 (Used to adjust the offset to the target current used in discharge current control (card/special
paper/transparencies).)
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
18.4.3.1.5 HV-TR
Outline 0001-2385
The adjusted offset doesn't become valid unless all of the following 6 items are entered: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-
PPR, TR-ENV, TR-CLR and TRDUP.
The settings entered for all 6 items make up a single pattern. 8 patterns can be stored in memory.
2TR-TGT1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 0006-0896
- 2TR-TGT1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (Used to adjust the offset to the secondary transfer target current.)
Adjustment range: -5 to +5 (2 µA units) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after
RAM clear: 0)
Increasing the setting value: Effective for images with toner spatter/water droplets.
Decreasing the setting value: Effective for images with white marks, white blotches,
rough-textured half-tones.
2TR-SHR1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 0006-0898
- 2TR-SHR1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (Used to adjust the offset to the secondary transfer paper-portion voltage.)
Adjustment range: -5 to +5 (100 V units) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
Increasing the setting value: Effective for images with toner spatter/water droplets.
Decreasing the setting value: Effective for images with white marks, white blotches, rough-textured half-tones.
18-78
Chapter 18
TR-PPR1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 0006-0899
- TR-PPR1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (paper type item for secondary transfer offset adjustment)
1: Plain(Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 1)
2: Recycled
3: Bond
4: Tracing Paper
5: Heavy1
6: Heavy2
7: Special paper 1 (including labels)
8: Glossy paper
9: Special paper 2 (including Japanese paper)
10: Postcards/envelopes
11: Transparencies (color)
12: Transparencies (monochrome)
TR-ENV1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 0006-0900
- TR-ENV1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (environmental item for secondary transfer offset adjustment)
Enter value of COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > ENV-TR.
1: Low-humidity environment (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 1)
2: Normal-humidity environment
3: High-humidity environment
TR-CLR1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 0006-0901
- TR-CLR1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (color mode item for secondary transfer offset adjustment)
1: Full-color mode (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 1)
2: Monochrome mode
TR-DUP1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 0006-0902
- TR-DUP1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 (one/two-sided item for secondary transfer offset adjustment)
1: One-sided (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 1)
2: Automatic two-sided
3: Manual feed two-sided
1TR-TGY 0007-6172
Adjusting target current offset of primary transfer ATVC (Y)
Adjustment range: -5 to 5 (unit: 0.5 uA) (default: 0)
It is enabled when COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PTATVCSW = 1 (primary ATVC control is enabled).
Change a setting value when any of the following faulty images occurs.
- Mottle marks/Mark of the auxiliary brush due to remaining transfer toner (when color density of the brush mark is
high)/Transfer ghost: Primary transfer current is low. -> Change a setting value to the '+' direction.
- Fogging due to re-transfer/Mark of the auxiliary brush due to remaining re-transfer toner (when color density of the
former station is higher than that of the brush mark): Primary transfer current is high -> Change a setting value to the
'-' direction.
18-79
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
1TR-TGM 0007-6174
Adjusting target current offset of primary transfer ATVC (M)
Adjustment range: -5 to 5 (unit: 0.5 uA) (default: 0)
It is enabled when COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PTATVCSW = 1 (primary ATVC control is enabled).
Change a setting value when any of the following faulty images occurs.
- Mottle marks/Mark of the auxiliary brush due to remaining transfer toner (when color density of the brush mark is
high)/Transfer ghost: Primary transfer current is low. -> Change a setting value to the '+' direction.
- Fogging due to re-transfer/Mark of the auxiliary brush due to remaining re-transfer toner (when color density of the
former station is higher than that of the brush mark): Primary transfer current is high -> Change a setting value to the
'-' direction.
1TR-TGC 0007-6176
Adjusting target current offset of primary transfer ATVC (C)
Adjustment range: -5 to 5 (unit: 0.5 uA) (default: 0)
It is enabled when COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PTATVCSW = 1 (primary ATVC control is enabled).
Change a setting value when any of the following faulty images occurs.
- Mottle marks/Mark of the auxiliary brush due to remaining transfer toner (when color density of the brush mark is
high)/Transfer ghost: Primary transfer current is low. -> Change a setting value to the '+' direction.
- Fogging due to re-transfer/Mark of the auxiliary brush due to remaining re-transfer toner (when color density of the
former station is higher than that of the brush mark): Primary transfer current is high -> Change a setting value to the
'-' direction.
1TR-TGK1 0007-6178
Adjusting target current offset of primary transfer ATVC (K: Black (monochrome) mode)
Adjustment range: -5 to 5 (unit: 0.5 uA) (default: 0)
It is enabled when COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PTATVCSW = 1 (primary ATVC control is enabled).
Change a setting value when any of the following faulty images occurs.
- Mottle marks/Mark of the auxiliary brush due to remaining transfer toner (when color density of the brush mark is
high)/Transfer ghost: Primary transfer current is low. -> Change a setting value to the '+' direction.
- Fogging due to re-transfer/Mark of the auxiliary brush due to remaining re-transfer toner (when color density of the
former station is higher than that of the brush mark): Primary transfer current is high -> Change a setting value to the
'-' direction.
1TR-TGK4 0007-6181
Adjusting target current offset of primary transfer ATVC (K: 4C mode)
Adjustment range: -5 to 5 (unit: 0.5 uA) (default: 0)
It is enabled when COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PTATVCSW = 1 (primary ATVC control is enabled).
Change a setting value when any of the following faulty images occurs.
- Mottle marks/Mark of the auxiliary brush due to remaining transfer toner (when color density of the brush mark is
high)/Transfer ghost: Primary transfer current is low. -> Change a setting value to the '+' direction.
- Fogging due to re-transfer/Mark of the auxiliary brush due to remaining re-transfer toner (when color density of the
former station is higher than that of the brush mark): Primary transfer current is high -> Change a setting value to the
'-' direction.
18-80
Chapter 18
18.4.3.1.6 MISC
ACS-EN 0006-0903
- ACS-EN (Used to adjust ACS recognition zone.)
Increasing the setting value expands the recognition zone.
ACS-CNT 0006-0904
- ACS-CNT (Used to adjust color recognition pixel count zone during ACS recognition.)
Increasing the setting value expands the recognition zone.
ACS-DF 0006-0905
- ACS-DF (Used to adjust ACS recognition zone during DF use.)
Increasing the setting value expands the recognition zone.
18-81
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18.5.1.1 INSTALL
T-18-68
18.5.1.2 CCD
T-18-69
MEMO:
When you turn the main power switch ON, the same automatic adjustment operation done by this item is performed.
18-82
Chapter 18
18.5.1.3 LASER
T-18-70
1) Remove all 4 color drum units, and close the front cover.
Note The DC controller uses the photo diode in the laser unit to
automatically measure the light quantity when each laser emits
its minimum light quantity. This operation is used to
compensate the time the laser lights during minimum light
quantity emission.
18.5.1.4 CST
T-18-71
Operation method 1) Place A4R size paper in the manual feeder, and set the size guide to the A4R
width.
2) In this service mode, select 'MF-A4R' to display the item in reverse. Press the
OK key to perform automatic adjustment and register the value.
3) Repeat Steps 1) and 2) to register the basic values for the A6R and A4 sizes.
18-83
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18.5.1.5 CLEANING
T-18-72
18.5.1.6 FIXING
T-18-73
Operation method 1)If the finisher is connected, remove it from the copier and pull out the
lattice cable.
3)Press the OK key (the paper in the manual feed tray is fed).
4)When the fed paper is pressed by the fixing roller, it stops, and is
delivered about 15 seconds later.
5)Check that the nip width of the delivered paper is the standard value.
1.5 mm
Paper
advance Standard value:
direction b Paper 8.75 mm ± 0.25 mm
Standard value: (less than 5,000 sheets)
center 9.25 mm ± 0.25 mm
a - c = 0.5 mm max.
(5,000 sheets or more)
1.5 mm
a
F-18-24
18-84
Chapter 18
T-18-74
6) If the standard value isn'tmet, adjust the value. See the Printer
Manual, Chapter 6, 'Fixing System' 4. 'Disassembly and
assembly' 4.2 'After fixing unit disassembly'
Remark The paper is delivered from the side paper delivery tray.
18.5.1.7 PANEL
T-18-75
Operation method 1) Select this item, then press the OK key to start the operation.
2) Press the stop key (the clear key on printer models) to end the
operation.
18.5.1.8 PART-CHK
18.5.1.8.1 CL 0000-5428
T-18-76
18-85
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18.5.1.9 CLEAR
T-18-77
18.5.1.10 MISC-R
T-18-78
18.5.1.11 MISC-P
T-18-79
18-86
Chapter 18
T-18-80
T-18-81
18.5.1.12 SYSTEM
T-18-82
18-87
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18.5.2 FEEDER
T-18-83
Caution Execute this item when you have replaced the ADF controller
PCB, document placement sensor, pre-registration sensor, final
document detection sensor or reverse outlet sensor.
Operation method 1) Paste black paper (solid black) on the final document
detection sensor in the document tray.
2) Close the ADF, select this item, then press the OK key.
18.5.3.1 COPIER
18.5.3.1.1 LASER
LD-ADJ-Y/M/C 0007-5909
T-18-84
18-88
Chapter 18
Reference The tilt correction motor may get locked when the tilt amount in
Information the horizontal scanning direction exceeds the expected range,
and consequently color displacement cannot be corrected even
though automatic registration is conducted.
When this symptom occurs, use this mode to make the tilt
correction motor return to the center position automatically.
(If you try to do this operation manually by opening the scanner
unit, you may touch the lens. For this reason, be sure to do it by
the automatic operation.)
18.5.3.1.2 MISC-P
KEY-HIST 0001-2419
- KEY-HIST (Prints the operation panel's key input history.)
1) Select this item.
2) Press the OK key to start printing.
HIST-PRT 0006-1033
- HIST-PRT (Prints the jam history and error history.)
1) Select this item.
2) Press the OK key to start printing.
TRS-DATA 0006-1037
- TRS-DATA (Moves the data received in memory to the BOX.)
1) Select this item.
2) Press the OK key to start printing.
18-89
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18.6.1.1 BODY
T-18-85
Caution The setting value takes effect after the main power switch is
turned OFF/ON.
1: INCH (5R4E)
2: A (3R3E)
3: AB/INCH (6R5E)
T-18-86
1: Full model
T-18-87
18-90
Chapter 18
T-18-88
18.6.1.2 USER
T-18-89
18.6.1.3 ACC
T-18-90
1: ON
18-91
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
T-18-91
Setting values 0 to 2
18.6.1.4 INT-FACE
T-18-92
Setting 0: Normal mode (no PS print server unit) (value at time of factory
values shipment)
1: Not used
2: Not used
4: Not used
5: Not used
Caution When 1 is selected as the setting value, the following user mode items are
restored to their initial values:
- System management settings > Network settings > TCP/IP settings > IP
address settings > IP address
- System management settings > Network settings > TCP/IP settings > IP
address settings > Sub-net mask
- System management settings > Network settings > TCP/IP settings > IP
address settings > Gateway address
18-92
Chapter 18
- System management settings > Network settings > TCP/IP settings > IP
address setting > DHCP use
- System management settings > Network settings > TCP/IP settings > IP
address settings > RARP use
- System management settings > Network settings > TCP/IP settings > IP
address settings > BOOTP use
- System management settings > Network settings > Spool function use
- System management settings > Network settings > TCP/IP settings >
RAW setting
- System management settings > Network settings > TCP/IP settings >
LPD setting
- System management settings > Network settings > TCP/IP settings > IPP
printing
The items above are not restored when the setting value is returned to "0:
Normal mode", so must be set again as needed.
18-93
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18.6.2 SORTER
T-18-93
Setting values 0:Normal width (5 mm), 1: Large width (10 mm) (value at time
of factory shipment)
F-18-25
18.6.3 BOARD
T-18-94
Setting values 0: Even without UFR board, copier operates as copy model
without values displaying E codes.
18-94
Chapter 18
18.6.4.1 COPIER
18.6.4.1.1 BODY
SCANSLCT 0001-2693
Used to turn ON/OFF function that calculates scan area from selected paper size.
18-95
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
3: A-FOOLSCAP
4: FORIO
5: OFFICIO
6: E-OFFICIO
7: A-OFFICIO
8: M-OFFICIO
9: B-OFFICIO
ORG-LTR 0006-1164
Used to set special paper size not compatible with DF size recognition.
0: LTR (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: G-LTR
2: A-LTR
3: EXECUTIVE
ORG-LTRR 0006-1167
Used to set special paper size not compatible with DF size recognition.
0: LTR-R (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: G-LTR-R
2: A-LTR-R
3: EXECUTIVE-R
UI-BOX 0006-1168
Used to select whether to display operation panel box screen.
0: Don't display
1: Display (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
UI-SEND 0006-1170
Used to select whether to display operation panel send screen.
0: Don't display
1: Display (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
UI-FAX 0006-1171
Used to select whether to display operation panel fax screen.
0: Don't display
1: Display (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
UI-EXT 0006-1172
Used to select whether to display operation panel extension screen.
0: Don't display
1: Display (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
C4HTR-DT 0006-1174
Cassette heater: Sets lighting ratio of cassette on 4th level.
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
C2HTR-DT 0006-1175
Cassette heater: Sets lighting ratio of cassette on 2nd level.
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
18-96
Chapter 18
Y-PTN 0006-1178
Used to eliminate 100 mm horizontal lines.
0: Don't imprint Y dot patterns on intermediate transfer belt.
1: Imprint Y dot patterns on intermediate transfer belt (only when reading color documents; value at time of factory
shipment/value after RAM clear).
2: Imprint more Y dot patterns on intermediate transfer belt than when value of 1 is set.
K dot patterns are imprinted on intermediate transfer belt during monochrome document reading only when value of
2 is set.
SCR-SLCT 0006-1180
Used to select half-tone process for photographic printing paper/photo mode.
0: Use error diffusion method
1: Use low-line-count screen (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
2: Use high-line-count screen
TMC-SLCT 0006-1181
Used to select coefficient used in error diffusion process.
0: Low granularity/low dot stability for Y/M/C/Bk
1: Y/M/C -> Low granularity, low dot stability, Bk -> high granularity, low dot stability (value at time of factory
shipment/value after RAM clear)
2: High granularity/low dot stability for Y/M/C/Bk
LOW-DZL 0006-1182
Used to change document illumination lamp lighting (document size detection operation) time.
0: Normal operation (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: Dazzle reduction mode (Document illumination lamp is lit only once momentarily to detect document size.)
D-CLN-TM 0006-1183
Cleans light-sensitive drum surface.
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
CAL-SW 0006-1186
Used to switch condition for executing calibration control.
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
CLN-PTH 0006-1187
Sets threshold value (number of sheets) for starting drum cleaning sequence.
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
CLN-VTH 0006-1190
Sets threshold value (image density) for starting drum cleaning sequence.
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
DEVL-VTH 0006-1194
Sets threshold value (video count) for starting toner forcible consumption sequence.
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
FTPTXPN 0006-1213
Used to specify port (FTP) number to send to.
0 to 65535 (16-bit value) (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 21)
18-97
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
PRNT-ORD 0006-1214
Used to switch order of output to side tray.
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
SLPOFF01 to 12 0006-1215
Used to turn sleep mode OFF as way to eliminate condensation: January to December.
Whenever possible, avoid using these settings during normal operation.
INTPPR-1 0006-1216
Sets interval (number of sheets) for executing image stabilization control (adjustment set 1) between sheets.
0.50 to 1000 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 100)
DWNSQ-SW 0006-1219
Used to improve tray loading during one-sided continuous printing.
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
IMG-OFF 0006-1222
Forcibly adds trailing-edge blank on second side of two-sided sheets.
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
PRN-FLG 0006-1223
Used to select area flag for PDL images.
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
SCN-FLG 0006-1225
Used to select area flag for copy images.
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
T-LW-LVL 0006-1226
Used to switch timing for display of remaining toner volume warning message.
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
DVTGT-Y/M/C/K 0006-1228
developer concentration target value offsets
Whenever possible, avoid using these settings during normal operation.
NWERR-SW 0006-1229
Used to select whether to display network error messages.
0: Don't display
1: Display (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
FX-SPD 0006-1232
Used to adjust fixing roller speed.
-2 to 2 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
Increasing the setting value increases the fixing roller's speed (in 0.8% increments).
Setting this value automatically increases the operation speed of the paper delivery vertical path motor (the speed
increases by the same ratio as the speed of the fixing roller).
EX-PS-SP 0006-1233
Used to adjust paper delivery vertical path motor speed.
-2 to 2 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
FX-N-ROT 0006-1236
Used to turn fixing motor idle after warmup ON/OFF.
18-98
Chapter 18
18-99
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
NS-CMD5 0007-6192
T-18-95
1: disable
NS-GSAPI 0007-6194
T-18-96
1: disable
NS-NTLM 0007-6196
T-18-97
1: disable it
NS-PLNWS 0007-6202
T-18-98
1: disable
18-100
Chapter 18
NS-PLN 0007-6204
T-18-99
1: disable
NS-LGN 0007-6206
T-18-100
1: disable
SVMD-ENT 0007-7319
T-18-101
Setting Values 0: [User Mode key] -> Press [2] and [8] simultaneously -> [User
Mode key] [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear]
1: [User Mode key] -> Press [4] and [9] simultaneously -> [User
Mode key]
MEAP-DSP 0006-8669
T-18-102
Disabling screen transition from the MEAP screen to the standard screen
18-101
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
MEAP-PN 0006-8671
T-18-103
Setting the port No. of HTTP server used for MEAP application
Note Do not use 1 to 1023 excepting 80 (HTTP) if specifying the port No. of
HTTP server as MEAP port.
LSUB-DWY 0007-6213
Switching DC bias voltage of the lower auxiliary brush
Settings:
0: Bias is standard
1: Bias is reduced
[Factory default/After RAM clear: 0]
Increasing DC bias of the lower auxiliary brush has the effect of retaining/charging remaining transfer toner.
(Countermeasures against fogged image)
However, faulty image such as mark of the auxiliary brush and filming may occur as a result. Set this mode to '1'
if such faulty image occurs.
LSUB-DWM 0007-6214
Switching DC bias voltage of the lower auxiliary brush
Settings:
0: Bias is standard
1: Bias is reduced
[Factory default/After RAM clear: 0]
Increasing DC bias of the lower auxiliary brush has the effect of retaining/charging remaining transfer toner.
(Countermeasures against fogged image)
However, faulty image such as mark of the auxiliary brush and filming may occur as a result. Set this mode to '1'
if such faulty image occurs.
LSUB-DWC 0007-6215
Switching DC bias voltage of the lower auxiliary brush
Settings:
0: Bias is standard
1: Bias is reduced
[Factory default/After RAM clear: 0]
Increasing DC bias of the lower auxiliary brush has the effect of retaining/charging remaining transfer toner.
(Countermeasures against fogged image)
However, faulty image such as mark of the auxiliary brush and filming may occur as a result. Set this mode to '1'
if such faulty image occurs.
18-102
Chapter 18
BKTC-DWN 0007-6216
Countermeasures against fogged image due to Bk supply
Settings:
0: OFF
1: ON
[Factory default/After RAM clear: 0]
Set this mode to [1 (countermeasures: ON)] when fogged image due to Bk supply occurs.
ANIM-SW 0006-8676
T-18-104
DA-PORT 0006-8679
T-18-105
1: Open
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>STS-PORT
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CMD-PORT
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SSH-SW
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DA-PORT
DA-CNCT 0006-8705
T-18-106
Setting connection to DA
Settings 1: DA is used
18-103
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>STS-PORT
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CMD-PORT
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SSH-SW
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DA-PORT
CHNG-STS 0006-8722
T-18-107
Setting the port number for status connection under TUIF over
TCP/IP
Settings 1-65535
CHNG-CMD 0006-8727
T-18-108
SSH-SW 0006-8737
T-18-109
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CMD-PORT
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>SSH-SW
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DA-PORT
18-104
Chapter 18
RMT-LGIN 0006-8760
T-18-110
RE-PKEY 0006-8763
T-18-111
HDD-TMP 0007-6132
T-18-112
Caution The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has
been turned off and then on again.
HDD-TIM 0007-6134
T-18-113
Use it to set the time interval allowed before a low temperature error is identified
Caution The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and
then on again.
18-105
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
HDD-SW 0007-6135
T-18-114
Caution The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been
turned off and then on again
Settings 0: indicate
1: do not indicate
at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
DV-RT-LG 0007-6222
Switching the developing assembly idle rotation time of first thing in the morning
Settings
0: 1 minute
1: 2 minutes
[Factory default/After RAM clear: 0]
Default of idle rotation time is 1 minute since iR C3200/iR C3220 Dcon V12.1 However, use this mode to set 2
minutes if any trouble (faulty image etc.) occurs due to reduction of the time.
DH-TMG 0007-7315
T-18-115
Setting up a threshold for the accumulated number of outputs for the Dhalf control
sequence operation trigger.
Control If the fixing unit is lower than a specified temperature when the machine is turned on
or recovered from the sleep mode, use this mode to make automatic full adjustments
during initial multiple rotations.
At this time, the Dhalf control is performed only if the number of outputs accumulated
since the last Dhalf control exceeds the value specified in this Service Mode.
Changing the timing of or canceling the Dhalf control (according to the number of
accumulated outputs) by using this mode can reduce the downtime in the morning. (A
measure for a complaint about the downtime in the morning)
Meanwhile, there is a possibility that gray scale (half-tone image) might be degraded
when the Dhalf control is cancelled.
With regard to the accumulated number of outputs, a small-size copy is regarded as 1
count, and a large-size copy is regarded as 2 counts.
When the Dhalf control is performed first thing in the morning or from the User Mode
(quick correction, full correction), the accumulated number of outputs is reset.
Settings 1 to 5000 [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear: 1000]
18-106
Chapter 18
18.6.4.1.2 USER
SIZE-DET 0001-2745
Used to turn document size detection function ON/OFF.
0: OFF
1: ON (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear) (When pressure plate opens/closes, optics don't
light, eliminating dazzle.)
DATE-DSP 0006-1247
Used to switch date display.
0: 'YYMM/DD
1: DD/MM'YY
2: MM/DD/YY
MB-CCV 0006-1248
Used to select whether to restrict mailbox control card users.
0: Don't restrict
1: Restrict
TRY-STP 0006-1253
Used to set mode in which output stops when tray is full.
0: Normal mode (Interrupted when finisher tray is full.)
1: Interrupted only by height detection
CNT-DISP 0006-1254
Used to select whether to display serial number when counter check key is pressed.
0: Display serial number.
1: Don't display serial number.
OP-SZ-DT 0006-1255
Used to turn document size detection when pressure plate is open ON/OFF.
0: Enter document size in control panel.
1: Detect document when start key is turned ON with pressure plate open.
NW-SCAN 0006-1258
Used to select whether to permit network scan function.
0: Don't permit
1: Permit (Invalid when UFR board or open interface board isn't connected.)
HDCR-DSP 0006-1259
Used to turn off display of user mode hard disk clear mode and switch clear operations.
0: Don't display and don't clear
1: Clear once with zeroes
2: Clear once with random data
3: Clear 3 times with random data (mode displayed for settings 1 to 3)
JOB-INVL 0006-1262
Used to set job interval during interrupt.
0: Standard setting (Output next job continuously during interrupt copy job.)
1: Start output of next job after last sheet of interrupt copy job has been delivered.
2: Start output of next job after last sheet of any job has been delivered.
18-107
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
LGSW-DSP 0006-1264
Used to select whether to display "Log display ON/OFF setting" on user mode screen.
0: Don't display "Log display ON/OFF setting"
1: Display "Log display ON/OFF setting"
P-CRG-LF 0006-1266
Used to select operation performed when drum unit has reached end of service life.
0: Don't stop
1: Stop
PCL-COPY 0006-1267
Used to set compatible mode for "COPIES" PCL command.
0: Perform control on each page individually, according to value of COPIES command specified for each page (value
at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear).
1: Compatible (other controller) mode (not in use)
2: Reserved
FREG-SW 0006-8770
T-18-116
1: Display
IFAX-SZL 0006-8775
T-18-117
IFAX-PGD 0006-8777
T-18-118
18-108
Chapter 18
MEAPSAFE 0006-8774
T-18-119
1: Safe mode
TRAY-FLL 0006-8786
T-18-120
AFN-PSWD 0006-8779
T-18-121
18-109
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
DPT-ID-7 0007-7320
T-18-122
Setting Values 0: As before [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear]
RUI-RJT 0007-7321
T-18-123
Setting Values 0: Invalid [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear]
1: Valid
CTM-S06 0006-8781
T-18-124
18-110
Chapter 18
CTM-S07 0006-8782
T-18-125
18.6.4.1.3 CST
U1-NAME 0001-2753
Used to turn paper name display when U1 paper size group is detected ON/OFF.
0: Display "U1" on touch panel (default).
1: Display paper name set by "CST-U1" service mode item.
U2-NAME 0006-1276
Used to turn paper name display when U2 paper size group is detected ON/OFF.
0: Display "U2" on touch panel (default).
1: Display paper name set by "CST-U2" service mode item.
CST-U1 0006-1277
Used to specify paper name used by U1 paper size group.
CST-U2 0006-1278
Used to specify paper name used by U2 paper size group.
24: FOOLSCAP (CST-U2: Default)
25: Australian FOOLSCAP
26: OFFICIO
27: Ecuador OFFICIO
28: Bolivia OFFICIO
29: Argentine LETTER
30: Argentine LETTER-R
31: Government LETTER
32: Government LETTER-R
34: Government LEGAL
35: FOLIO
36: Argentine OFFICIO
37: Mexico OFFICIO
38: EXECTIVE (CST-U2: Default)
18-111
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18.6.4.1.4 ACC
STPL-LMT 0001-2748
Used to restrict number of sheets for saddle binding.
0: 5 sheets (no white band)
1: 10 sheets (no white band)
2: 10 sheets (white band)
3: 15 sheets (no white band) (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
DF-MUTE 0006-1268
DADF silent reading mode
0: Normal mode (750 mm/s) (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: Silent mode (420 mm/s)
SC-TYPE 0006-1270
Used to switch type of coin vendor-compatible model
Whenever possible, avoid using this setting during normal operation.
18.6.4.1.5 INT-FACE
AP-OPT 0001-2751
Used to set whether printing from application PrintMe in PS print server unit is possible.
0: Printing permitted for all department IDs (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
1: Printing refused (printing is only possible for specified department ID).
AP-ACCNT 0005-9725
Used to set (CPCA) department ID for printing (print jobs) from application PrintMe in PS print server unit.
0 to 9999999 (Value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear: 0)
AP-CODE 0006-5130
T-18-126
18.6.4.2 BOARD
18-112
Chapter 18
18.7.1.1 NETWORK
T-18-127
Caution Use this item when checking the connection to the network at
time of installation or when there is a network connection
problem.
+/- OK
F-18-26
18-113
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
T-18-128
2) Connect the network cable to the copier and turn the main power
switch ON.
5) Select the COPIER > TEST > NETWORK > PING service mode
item, enter the IP address checked in Step 4 on the operation panel's
numeric keypad, and press the OK key.
6) Select the COPIER > TEST > NETWORK > PING service mode
item, enter the loop back address* (127.0.0.1), and press the OK
key followed by the start key.
*The loop back address returns the signal in front of the NIC,
enabling checking of the local TCP/IP settings.
7) Select the COPIER > TEST > NETWORK > PING service mode
item, enter the local host address (local IP address), then press the
OK key.
18-114
Chapter 18
18.8.1.1 Overview
The COPIER/COUNTER screen is shown below. The items are described starting on the next page.
F-18-27
18-115
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
T-18-129
<Example>
[1]: Displays the part name. In this example, the intermediate transfer belt unit.
[2]: Displays the counter value (actual number of sheets used). The value is cleared by pressing the clear key when
the part is replaced.
[3]: Displays the limit value (number of sheets as guideline for replacement). You can select the item and change the
value with the numeric keypad. After changing the value, press the OK key.
[4]: Displays the ratio of the counter value to the limit value.
[5]: When the ratio is between 90% and 100%, a single exclamation mark (!) is displayed.
When the ratio is over 100%, two exclamation marks (!!) appear. In the example above, no exclamation marks would
appear.
[6]: Displays the predicted number of days until replacement. The example above shows 82 days.
18.8.1.2 TOTAL
18-116
Chapter 18
18-117
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18.8.1.3 PICK-UP
18.8.1.3.1 C1 0001-2811
Cassette 1 paper feed total counter
Displays number of sheets fed from cassette 1.
Returns to "00000000" after reaching "99999999".
18.8.1.3.2 C2 0006-1307
Cassette 2 paper feed total counter
Displays number of sheets fed from cassette 2.
Returns to "00000000" after reaching "99999999".
18.8.1.3.3 C3 0006-1308
Cassette 3 paper feed total counter
Displays number of sheets fed from cassette 3 (top level of cassette pedestal).
Returns to "00000000" after reaching "99999999".
18.8.1.3.4 C4 0006-1309
Cassette 4 paper feed total counter
Displays number of sheets fed from cassette 4 (bottom level of cassette pedestal).
Returns to "00000000" after reaching "99999999".
18.8.1.3.5 MF 0006-1310
Manual paper feed total counter
Displays number of sheets fed from manual paper feed unit.
Returns to "00000000" after reaching "99999999".
18.8.1.3.6 DK 0006-1311
Deck paper feed total counter
Displays number of sheets fed from deck paper feed unit.
Returns to "00000000" after reaching "99999999".
18.8.1.4 FEEDER
18-118
Chapter 18
18.8.1.5 JAM
18.8.1.5.5 MF 0006-1320
Jam counter for multi-feeder
18.8.1.5.6 C1 0006-1322
Jam counter for cassette 1
18.8.1.5.7 C2 0006-1324
Jam counter for cassette 2
18.8.1.5.8 C3 0006-1326
Jam counter for cassette 3
18.8.1.5.9 C4 0006-1327
Jam counter for cassette 4
18.8.1.5.10 DK 0006-1328
Jam counter for side paper deck
18.8.1.6 DRBL-1
18-119
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18.8.1.7 DRBL-2
18-120
Chapter 18
18-121
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 18
18-122
Chapter 19 Upgrading
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
19.1 Outline
19.1.1 Construction of Firmware 0000-5449
The iR C3200 is taken as an example from this section. (i.e., The information described from here are common in iR
C3200 series.)
The construction of the machine's firmware is as follows:
T-19-1
Rcon ROM Control of the reader controller Reader controller PCB Soldered to a flash ROM
G3Fax board
19-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
The service support tool (SST, hereafter) provides the following functions:
SST
HDD
Downloading firmware
Firmware
Flash ROM
Uploading backup data
Backup data
Downloading backup data
Back up RAM
F-19-2
To use the SST, you must first set the machine to download mode.
The machine's download mode consists of 2 types, selected by pressing a combination of appropriate keys (keypad)
when starting up the machine.
[1] normal mode: 1 + 7
after startup, start service mode, and make the following selections:
COPIER>Function>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD
[2] safe mode: 2 + 8
19-2
Chapter 19
on keypad, 2 + 8
Main power on keypad, 1 + 7
switch ON
Download control
program Boot ROM Boot program
(safe mode)
HDD
System program
In service mode:
COPIER > Function >
SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD
Download control
program
(normal mode)
F-19-3
19-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
The following shows combinations of functions that may be used in association with the SST and the machine when
the machine is in download mode:
T-19-2
19-4
Chapter 19
19.1.3 Network Interface of the Machine with the SST in Use 0000-5451
The machine communicates with the SST using the Ethernet protocol (TCP/IP).
The machine offers the following 2 sets of network settings:
user environment network settings (user mode>system control settings>network settings)
service network settings (IP address: 172.16.1.100; subnet mask: 255.255.255.0, fixed)
The network settings are dependent on how the machine is started up.
The user environment settings are retained while the service settings are selected.
You need not change the user mode network settings before or after the use of the SST.
iRC3200
Power OFF
Power ON in response to 1 + 7 or 2 + 8 on keypad
iRC3200
Service PC
SST in use
iRC3200
19-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
If you start up the machine by pressing 1 + 7, the machine indicates 'FIXIP' in the upper right of the LCD to
distinguish its state from normal.
F-19-5
19-6
Chapter 19
TokenRing I/F
disabled
Ethernet I/F
enabled
Power OFF
Power ON by s1 + 7 or 2 + 8 on keypad
iRC3200
PC for service
TokenRing I/F
disabled
Ethernet I/F
enabled
SST in use
F-19-6
19-7
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
You will be registering the firmware stored on the system CD to the SST.
Before Starting the Work
Keep the following on hand:
- PC to which SST v1.61 or later has been installed.
- system CD for iRC3200
(in the case of Netware support, iRC3200N system CD)
Registering the Firmware
1) Start up the PC.
2) Set the system CD to the PC.
3) Start up the SST.
4) Click "Next"under "Data management"
F-19-7
19-8
Chapter 19
F-19-8
F-19-9
19-9
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
7) Select the drive in which you have set the system CD, and click "Search"
F-19-10
8) When the list of firmware items contained on the system CD has appeared, click "Register All" when it becomes
enabled.
F-19-11
19-10
Chapter 19
F-19-12
Procedure
1) Start up the PC.
2) Check the network settings of the PC.
Type "IPCONFIG" in response to the command prompt, and press the Return key.
Check to see that the network settings are as follows:
IP address: 172.16.1.160 (other than 172.16.1.0, 172.16.1.100, 172.16.1.255)
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: any
19-11
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-13
IP address: 172.16.1.160
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
IP address: 172.16.1.100
Cross cable
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
10Base-T: category 3, 5
100Base-TX: category 5
F-19-14
19-12
Chapter 19
5) While holding down the keys (keypad) suited to the download mode you are going to use, turn on the machine's
main power switch.
- if normal mode, 1 + 7
enter source mode, and make the following selections : COPIER>Function>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD
- if safe mode, 2 + 8
6) Start up the SST.
If you are connecting your PC to a different network after using the SST, you must be sure to change the PC network
settings to suit the settings of the new network.
If you connect to a different network using the IP address you used for the SST, the possible presence of the same IP
address on the network can cause serious problems to the network functions.
F-19-15
19-13
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-16
F-19-17
19-14
Chapter 19
F-19-18
F-19-19
19-15
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-20
13) When the machine has made a connection and brings up the following screen, click "OK"
F-19-21
19-16
Chapter 19
You will be setting up partitions on the HDD and formatting (initializing) them for use by the main controller.
HDD
DOSDEV
FSTDEV
Formatting all partitions DOSDEV2
(only if in safe mode)
FSTPDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
BOOTDEV
DOSDEV5
F-19-22
E602-0001
- Indicates that the BOOTDEV partition, in which the system program are stored, cannot be found at time of start-up.
- To correct, format all partitions in safe mode, and download the following: system, language, RUI.
19-17
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
HDD
FSTPDEV
FSTDEV
DOSDEV2 May be formatted in normal mode
DOSDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
BOOTDEV May be formatted in safe mode*
DOSDEV5
F-19-23
T-19-3
19-18
Chapter 19
E602-0x01
- Indicates the presence of a data error in the identified partition.
- To correct, format the identified partition.
T-19-4
DOSDEV3 DOSDEV3
PDLDEV PDLDEV
DOSDEV4 DOSDEV4
DOSDEV5 DOSDEV5
BOOTDEV BOOTDEV
FSTDEV and FSTPDEV retains image data as it accumulates while DOSDEV and DOSDEV2 retains its associated
data; these 4 partitions, therefore, must be formatted at the same time.
To do so, select FSTDEV using the SST.
The actual formatting of FSTDEV and PDLDEV takes place when the machine is started up the next time, and it
takes as long as the following:
FSTDEV:2 min (approx.)
PDLDEV:5 min (approx.)
all partitions:7 min (approx.; i.e., FSTDEV + PDLDEV)
The times vary according to the state of the HDD, and the progress of formatting is indicated by means of a progress
bar.
19-19
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-24
F-19-25
19-20
Chapter 19
F-19-26
F-19-27
19-21
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-28
6) When the machine has made a connection and brings up the following screen, click "OK"
F-19-29
19-22
Chapter 19
7) Click "Format".
F-19-30
8) Select the partition you want to format form the list, and click "Start".
To format all partitions, click "Start" shown for all partitions (enabled if in safe mode).
F-19-31
19-23
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
T-19-5
Normal Mode
F-19-32
T-19-6
Safe Mode
19-24
Chapter 19
9) When the machine indicates the message for confirmation for the last time, click "Start".
F-19-33
10) When the machine indicates the message to indicate the end of formatting, click "OK".
F-19-34
19-25
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
If you have formatted all partitions or BOOTDEV, you must download the following: system, language, RUI. If you
fail to download system, an error (E602-0002) will occur when the main power is turned on.
Formatting of PDLDEV and DOSDEV2 takes place when the main power is turned on the next time.
Although varying according to the state of the HDD, formatting lasts as long as the following: for all partitions, about
7 min; for PDLDEV, about 5 min; for DOSDEV2, about 2 min.
The progress bar indicated at time of power-on will advance gradually while formatting is taking place.
Turning off the power at this time prevents access to the HDD, causing E0602.
You must not turn off the machine's main power while the progress bar is shown.
19-26
Chapter 19
SST
iRC3200 Main controller block
System
HDD
(System-Main)
(System-Sub) Download
(ICC Profile) BOOTDEV
iRC3200N*
(System-Main)
System (System-Sub)
(System-Main) (ICC Profile)
(System-Sub)
(ICC Profile)
The system software comes in 3 types, selected depending on the country of installation and support of NetWare.
In the case of Japan, an appropriate model must be selected with reference to the presence/absence of support for
NetWare.
T-19-7
(to iRC3200/3200S)
(to iRC3200N)
19-27
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
T-19-8
Notation Description
E602-0002
- the system software for the main CPU cannot be found when the machine is started up.
- to correct, download the system software.
E602-0006
- the system file cannot be found for the sub CPU when the machine is started up.
- to correct, download the system software.
E602-0007
- the IC profile cannot be found when the machine is started up.
- to correct, download the system software.
Procedure
Download Mode
if E602-0002 is indicated, safe mode
otherwise, normal mode
19-28
Chapter 19
F-19-36
F-19-37
19-29
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-38
F-19-39
19-30
Chapter 19
F-19-40
6) When a connection has been made and the following screen has appeared, click [OK].
F-19-41
19-31
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-42
F-19-43
19-32
Chapter 19
F-19-44
Never turn off the machine while the following screen is shown. Otherwise, writing to the HDD will be suspended,
preventing the machine to start up.
19-33
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-45
If the machine fails to start up, execute formatting (BOOTDEV) using HDFormat and download the following:
system software, language files, and RUI files.
19-34
Chapter 19
iRC3200
Network
LCD
RUI(en)
Version check
System
RUI(it)
System Language
Language-XXen RUI-XXen
Language-XXit RUI-XXit
Language RUI
Network PC
F-19-46
T-19-9
Check the versions of the system software and language files. Select on the RUI.
- If the versions are correct, selections may be made in - A specific language may be
user mode: selected for a specific PC.
Turn off and then on the main power so that the system
language will be used:
System Language
19-35
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
T-19-10
de German it Italian
en English ja Japanese
fr French
E744
- Indicates that the version of the system software and that of the language files do not mach.
- Uses the (built-in) system language for the LCD when the main power is turned off and then on.
- To correct, download the language that matches the version of the system software.
SST
HDD
Language
XXen Download
XXja BOOTDEV
Language-XXen
RUI Language-XXja
XXen RUI-XXen
XXja
RUI-XXja
F-19-47
Procedure
Downloading may take place when the machine is in normal or in safe mode.
The following describes downloading of the language files; both language and RUI files may be downloaded in
common among models (here, the iRC3200 is selected):
19-36
Chapter 19
F-19-48
F-19-49
19-37
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-50
F-19-51
19-38
Chapter 19
F-19-52
6) When a connection has been made and the following screen has appeared, click [OK].
F-19-53
19-39
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-54
F-19-55
19-40
Chapter 19
F-19-56
Never turn off the machine while the following screen is indicated. Otherwise, writing to the HDD will be suspended,
preventing the machine from starting up.
19-41
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-57
If the machine fails to start up, execute formatting (BOOTDEV) using HDFormat, and download the following:
system software, language files, RUI files.
T-19-11
19-42
Chapter 19
PC for service
Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)
Select a function
suited to the type
of boot ROM. May be upgraded
by DIMM replacement
iRC3200
SST
Japan
iRC3200
Boot (COPY)
iRC3200L
Boot (LIPS) Download Boot ROM
Outside Japan (Flash ROM DIMM)
iRC3200
Boot (COPY)
iRC3200N Only if boot of
Boot (PSPCL) same type Main controller block
F-19-58
The type of boot ROM mounted to the machine may be checked using service mode:
COPIER > Display > VERSION > BOOT-ROM
Copy:xx.yyC
LIPS: xx.yyL (Japan)
PSPCL: xx.yyN (outside Japan)
19-43
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-59
19-44
Chapter 19
2) Select "Boot"for the iRC3200 (if a LIPS model, select iRC3200L; if a PSPCL model, select iRC3200N); then,
click [Connect].
F-19-60
F-19-61
19-45
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-62
F-19-63
19-46
Chapter 19
6) When a connection has been made and the following screen has appeared, click [OK].
F-19-64
If the wrong type of boot ROM has been selected, the following screen will appear; select the correct model:
F-19-65
19-47
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-66
F-19-67
19-48
Chapter 19
F-19-68
After Downloading
When you have upgraded the boot ROM, be sure to turn off and then on the machine's main power switch so that the
new version will be validated.
Never turn off the machine while the following screen is indicated. Otherwise, the machine will fail writting to the
boot ROM and may not start up.
19-49
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-69
The DC controller/reader controller files are downloaded by way of the main controller block.
Both DC controller PCB and the reader controller PCB are equipped with boot ROMs, permitting retries if
downloading fails.
19-50
Chapter 19
iRC3200
PC for service
Power cable
Flash ROM
CPU Power
supply
Power supply cable
Boot ROM control signal
DC controller PCB
F-19-70
Unless the DC controller has started up normally, the power supply control signal will not be validated, not supplying
the reader unit with power and not permitting downloading of reader controller files.
Making Pre-Checks
F-19-71
19-51
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
Procedure
The following describes downloading of DC controller files (both DC controller and reader controller files are
shared in common among models; herein, the iRC3200 is selected):
F-19-72
19-52
Chapter 19
F-19-73
F-19-74
19-53
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-75
F-19-76
19-54
Chapter 19
6) When a connection has been made and the following screen has appeared, click [OK].
F-19-77
F-19-78
19-55
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-79
F-19-80
19-56
Chapter 19
After Downloading
If you have downloaded DC controller or reader controller files, be sure to turn off and then on the main power
switch. You cannot download the DC controller and reader controller files in succession.
Never turn off the machine while the following screen is indicated. Otherwise, writing to "DCON/RCON"can fail,
indicated by the following error codes:
DCON:E733
RCON:E732
F-19-81
19-57
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
The G3Fax files are downloaded by way of the main controller block.
iRC3200
PC for service G3Fax
(Flash ROM DIMM)
Upgrading may be
by DIMM replacement
SST
Downloading
iRC3200 G3Fax
CPU (Flash ROM DIMM)
G3Fax
Main controller
PCB G3 fax board
Downloading possible
only in normal mode
F-19-82
19-58
Chapter 19
Procedure
Use normal mode for downloading.
F-19-83
19-59
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-84
F-19-85
19-60
Chapter 19
F-19-86
F-19-87
19-61
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
6) When a connection has been made and the following screen has appeared, click [OK].
F-19-88
F-19-89
19-62
Chapter 19
F-19-90
F-19-91
19-63
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
After Downloading
When you have downloaded G3Fax files, be sure to turn off and then on the machine's main power switch.
F-19-92
If the G3 fax board fails to operate, be sure to replace the flash ROM DIMM on the G3 fax board.
19-64
Chapter 19
The machine's backup data is stored on the SRAM PCB, DC controller PCB, and reader controller PCB.
Any backup data is selected with reference to its file name used when uploading it.
T-19-12
If you plan to replace the DC controller PCB or the reader controller PCB, it is a good idea to upload its data in
advance, and download it after replacement so that parts counter readings and the like may be retained.
F-19-93
19-65
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
If you download the SramImg data that has previously been uploaded from a specific machine to a machine with a
different serial number, the image data, user mode settings, and service mode settings stored in Box or the like will
all be lost.
Be sure not to download the SramImg data to any other machine.
Procedure
Use normal mode for downloading.
F-19-94
19-66
Chapter 19
F-19-95
F-19-96
19-67
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-97
F-19-98
19-68
Chapter 19
6) When a connection has been made and the following screen has appeared, click [OK].
F-19-99
F-19-100
19-69
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-101
19-70
Chapter 19
9) When uploading has ended, enter a file name to use, an click [Save].
F-19-102
F-19-103
19-71
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
Procedure
Use normal mode to download.
F-19-104
19-72
Chapter 19
F-19-105
F-19-106
19-73
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-107
F-19-108
19-74
Chapter 19
6) When a connection has been made and the following screen has appeared, click [OK].
F-19-109
F-19-110
19-75
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 19
F-19-111
F-19-112
19-76
Chapter 20 Service Tools
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
Contents
In addition to the standard tools set, the following special tools are required when servicing the machine:
T-20-1
3 Tester FY9-3038 A
extension pin
20-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
Chapter 20
T-20-2
5 Lubricating oil Lubrication; i.e., drive Silicone oil Tool No.: CK-0551 (20 g)
areas, friction areas.
7 Lubricating oil Lubrication; e.g., Silicone oil Tool No.: FY9-6011 (50 cc)
scanner rail
20-2
http://www.manuals4you.com
PARTS CATALOG
iR C3200/Color
imageRUNNER C3200
Aug 20 2004
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
Contents
1-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
NUMERICAL INDEX
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220
FIGURE FIGURE FIGURE
PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER &
KEY NO. KEY NO. KEY NO
FB6-3261-000 105 - 1 FB6-3359-000 365 - 11 FB6-3465-000 315 - 31
FB6-3262-000 105 - 2 FB6-3360-000 365 - 12 FB6-3466-000 315 - 32
FB6-3263-000 105 - 3 FB6-3361-000 365 - 13 FB6-3467-000 315 - 33
FB6-3273-000 321 - 1 FB6-3366-000 105 - 12 FB6-3470-000 315 - 35
FB6-3275-000 321 - 5A FB6-3371-000 103 - 5 FB6-3471-000 315 - 36
FB6-3277-000 103 - 25 FB6-3376-000 100 - 49 FB6-3472-000 315 - 2
FB6-3278-000 103 - 21 FB6-3380-000 310 - 1 FB6-3473-000 315 - 77
FB6-3279-000 103 - 22 FB6-3386-000 310 - 2 FB6-3474-000 315 - 78
FB6-3280-000 103 - 23 FB6-3387-000 310 - 3 FB6-3475-000 300 - 1
FB6-3281-000 103 - 24 FB6-3388-000 310 - 4 FB6-3478-000 300 - 2
FB6-3282-000 101 - 45 FB6-3389-000 310 - 5 FB6-3479-000 300 - 3
FB6-3283-000 101 - 46 FB6-3390-000 310 - 6 FB6-3480-000 300 - 4
FB6-3285-000 103 - 27 FB6-3391-000 310 - 7 FB6-3481-000 300 - 5
FB6-3288-000 103 - 3 FB6-3392-000 310 - 8 FB6-3482-000 300 - 6
FB6-3289-000 103 - 4 FB6-3393-000 310 - 9 FB6-3483-000 300 - 7
FB6-3291-000 321 - 2 FB6-3394-000 310 - 10 FB6-3484-000 300 - 8
FB6-3292-000 321 - 3 FB6-3395-000 310 - 11 FB6-3485-000 300 - 9
FB6-3293-000 321 - 4 FB6-3396-010 310 - 12 FB6-3486-000 300 - 10
FB6-3302-000 315 - 11 FB6-3397-000 310 - 13 FB6-3487-000 300 - 11
FB6-3303-000 315 - 12 FB6-3399-000 310 - 15 FB6-3488-000 300 - 12
FB6-3305-000 315 - 14 FB6-3402-000 310 - 18 FB6-3489-000 300 - 13
FB6-3306-000 315 - 15 FB6-3403-000 310 - 19 FB6-3490-000 300 - 14
FB6-3308-000 315 - 16 FB6-3404-000 310 - 20 FB6-3491-000 300 - 15
FB6-3309-000 315 - 17 FB6-3405-000 310 - 21 FB6-3492-000 102 - 17
FB6-3310-000 315 - 18 FB6-3406-000 310 - 22 FB6-3493-000 102 - 16
FB6-3311-000 315 - 19 FB6-3408-000 310 - 23 FB6-3494-000 102 - 15
FB6-3313-000 100 - 22A FB6-3410-000 310 - 17 FB6-3495-000 102 - 28
FB6-3313-000 315 - 20 FB6-3410-000 315 - 27 FB6-3497-000 102 - 27
FB6-3314-000 315 - 1 FB6-3411-000 310 - 24 FB6-3499-000 300 - 17A
FB6-3315-000 315 - 21 FB6-3413-000 310 - 29 FB6-3503-000 100 - 22B
FB6-3316-000 106 - 5 FB6-3440-000 107 - 1 FB6-3504-000 100 - 2
FB6-3317-000 315 - 26 FB6-3442-000 102 - 2 FB6-3506-000 300 - 16
FB6-3320-000 315 - 22 FB6-3443-000 100 - 1 FB6-3507-000 102 - 10
FB6-3323-000 315 - 24 FB6-3450-000 316 - 1 FB6-3508-000 316 - 11
FB6-3331-000 100 - 22C FB6-3451-000 316 - 2 FB6-3522-000 300 - 23
FB6-3332-000 100 - 22D FB6-3452-000 316 - 3 FB6-3523-000 300 - 24
FB6-3346-000 365 - 3 FB6-3454-000 316 - 4 FB6-3524-000 300 - 25
FB6-3348-000 365 - 4 FB6-3455-000 316 - 5 FB6-3526-000 106 - 6
FB6-3349-000 365 - 5 FB6-3456-000 316 - 6 FB6-3527-000 106 - 6
FB6-3350-000 365 - 6 FB6-3457-000 316 - 7 FB6-3528-000 106 - 6
FB6-3351-000 365 - 7 FB6-3458-000 316 - 8 FB6-3529-000 106 - 6
FB6-3356-000 365 - 8 FB6-3459-000 316 - 9 FB6-3532-000 351 - 5
FB6-3357-000 365 - 9 FB6-3463-000 315 - 29 FB6-3532-000 351A - 5
FB6-3358-000 365 - 10 FB6-3464-000 315 - 30 FB6-3534-000 351 - 7
1-2
NUMERICAL INDEX
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220
FIGURE FIGURE FIGURE
PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER &
KEY NO. KEY NO. KEY NO
FB6-3534-000 351A - 7 FB6-3595-000 360 - 19 FB6-3662-000 810 - 20
FB6-3541-000 351 - 10 FB6-3599-000 360 - 22 FB6-3663-000 810 - 21
FB6-3544-000 351 - 11 FB6-3600-000 330 - 3 FB6-3664-000 810 - 22
FB6-3544-000 351A - 11 FB6-3600-000 360 - 23 FB6-3665-000 810 - 23
FB6-3545-000 351 - 12 FB6-3602-000 361 - 5 FB6-3666-000 810 - 24
FB6-3545-000 351A - 12 FB6-3603-000 361 - 6 FB6-3667-000 810 - 25
FB6-3547-000 125 - 7 FB6-3604-000 361 - 1 FB6-3668-000 810 - 26
FB6-3547-000 125A - 7 FB6-3606-000 361 - 7 FB6-3669-000 810 - 43C
FB6-3551-020 125 - 9 FB6-3610-000 350 - 1 FB6-3670-000 810 - 28
FB6-3551-020 125A - 9 FB6-3610-000 361 - 9 FB6-3671-000 810 - 29
FB6-3552-000 125 - 10 FB6-3611-000 350 - 2 FB6-3673-000 810 - 30
FB6-3552-000 125A - 10 FB6-3611-000 361 - 10 FB6-3675-000 810 - 32
FB6-3553-000 125 - 11 FB6-3612-000 350 - 3 FB6-3676-000 810 - 33
FB6-3553-000 125A - 11 FB6-3612-000 361 - 28 FB6-3677-000 810 - 34
FB6-3554-000 125 - 12 FB6-3613-000 361 - 11 FB6-3678-000 810 - 35
FB6-3554-000 125A - 12 FB6-3614-000 361 - 12 FB6-3679-000 106 - 1
FB6-3555-000 125 - 13 FB6-3617-000 361 - 24B FB6-3683-000 330 - 5
FB6-3555-000 125A - 13 FB6-3618-000 361 - 13 FB6-3684-000 330 - 6
FB6-3555-000 361 - 3 FB6-3620-000 361 - 15 FB6-3684-000 360 - 25
FB6-3557-000 125 - 2 FB6-3621-000 361 - 16 FB6-3686-000 330 - 7
FB6-3561-000 100 - 24 FB6-3622-000 361 - 42 FB6-3686-000 360 - 26
FB6-3561-000 100 - 25 FB6-3623-000 361 - 17 FB6-3689-000 106 - 8
FB6-3562-000 100 - 26 FB6-3626-000 361 - 18 FB6-3693-000 106 - 9
FB6-3562-000 100 - 30 FB6-3627-000 361 - 25 FB6-3694-000 330 - 12
FB6-3564-000 351 - 13 FB6-3629-020 360 - 72 FB6-3695-000 330 - 13
FB6-3564-000 351A - 13 FB6-3630-000 360 - 73 FB6-3698-000 330 - 8
FB6-3566-000 100 - 32 FB6-3631-000 101 - 42 FB6-3698-000 360 - 29
FB6-3569-000 100 - 33 FB6-3638-000 330 - 4 FB6-3700-000 350 - 4
FB6-3572-000 360 - 2 FB6-3638-000 360 - 24 FB6-3702-000 350 - 5
FB6-3576-000 360 - 5 FB6-3643-000 810 - 6 FB6-3703-000 350 - 6
FB6-3577-000 360 - 6 FB6-3644-000 810 - 7 FB6-3705-000 350 - 8
FB6-3578-000 360 - 7 FB6-3645-020 810 - 8 FB6-3706-000 350 - 9
FB6-3579-000 330 - 1 FB6-3646-000 810 - 9 FB6-3707-000 350 - 10
FB6-3579-000 360 - 8 FB6-3647-020 810 - 10 FB6-3722-000 100 - 3
FB6-3580-000 360 - 9 FB6-3648-000 810 - 52 FB6-3728-000 360 - 31
FB6-3581-000 360 - 10 FB6-3649-030 810 - 43A FB6-3729-000 361 - 19
FB6-3583-000 360 - 11 FB6-3650-030 810 - 43B FB6-3765-000 100 - 4
FB6-3584-000 360 - 12 FB6-3651-000 810 - 13 FB6-3766-000 100 - 5
FB6-3585-000 360 - 13 FB6-3652-000 810 - 43G FB6-3767-000 100 - 6
FB6-3586-000 361 - 26 FB6-3653-000 810 - 15 FB6-3768-000 100 - 7
FB6-3588-000 330 - 2 FB6-3657-000 810 - 16 FB6-3769-000 100 - 8
FB6-3588-000 360 - 14 FB6-3658-000 810 - 17 FB6-3771-000 100 - 36
FB6-3589-000 360 - 15 FB6-3659-000 810 - 18 FB6-3771-000 100 - 50
FB6-3590-000 360 - 16 FB6-3660-000 810 - 19 FB6-3775-000 100 - 9
1-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
NUMERICAL INDEX
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220
FIGURE FIGURE FIGURE
PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER &
KEY NO. KEY NO. KEY NO
FB6-3776-000 100 - 10 FB6-3866-000 125 - 3 FB6-3961-000 102 - 9
FB6-3777-000 100 - 11 FB6-3866-000 125A - 3 FB6-3962-000 102 - 8
FB6-3778-000 100 - 12 FB6-3867-000 125 - 4 FB6-3963-000 102 - 7
FB6-3785-000 100 - 13 FB6-3867-000 125A - 4 FB6-3964-000 360 - 51
FB6-3788-000 100 - 17A FB6-3869-000 351 - 36 FB6-4849-000 315 - 10
FB6-3791-020 100 - 19 FB6-3869-000 351A - 36 FB6-4850-000 315 - 13
FB6-3792-000 100 - 20 FB6-3874-000 351 - 37 FB6-4851-000 315 - 23
FB6-3793-000 100 - 41 FB6-3874-000 351A - 37 FB6-4852-000 310 - 16
FB6-3797-000 192 - 1 FB6-3875-000 351 - 6 FB6-4862-000 361 - 4
FB6-3800-000 104 - 6 FB6-3876-000 125 - 14 FB6-4863-000 315 - 85
FB6-3801-000 104 - 7 FB6-3876-000 125A - 14 FB6-4867-000 106 - 6
FB6-3807-000 104 - 8 FB6-3877-000 351 - 8 FB6-4868-000 106 - 15
FB6-3819-020 101 - 27 FB6-3877-000 351A - 8 FB6-4869-000 106 - 16
FB6-3820-020 101 - 28 FB6-3878-000 315 - 34A FB6-4870-000 100 - 14
FB6-3821-020 101 - 29 FB6-3879-000 810 - 5 FB6-4873-000 315 - 25
FB6-3822-020 101 - 30 FB6-3880-000 360 - 30 FB6-4873-000 360 - 1
FB6-3827-000 101 - 11 FB6-3882-020 101 - 41A FB6-4873-000 361 - 2
FB6-3828-020 101 - 12 FB6-3883-000 101 - 41D FB6-4890-000 100 - 44
FB6-3829-000 101 - 13 FB6-3885-000 810 - 44 FB6-4908-000 330 - 9
FB6-3830-000 101 - 14 FB6-3886-000 100 - 52 FB6-4908-000 360 - 20
FB6-3831-000 101 - 15 FB6-3888-000 360 - 3 FB6-4909-000 810 - 41
FB6-3832-000 101 - 16 FB6-3889-000 360 - 4 FB6-4918-000 330 - 10
FB6-3833-000 101 - 17 FB6-3890-000 360 - 17 FB6-4918-000 360 - 27
FB6-3834-000 100 - 14 FB6-3891-000 360 - 18 FB6-4919-000 125 - 8
FB6-3835-000 100 - 15 FB6-3892-000 361 - 43 FB6-4919-000 125A - 8
FB6-3839-000 105 - 13 FB6-3893-000 360 - 34 FB6-4920-000 100 - 44
FB6-3843-000 361 - 20 FB6-3894-000 100 - 44 FB6-4923-000 100 - 44
FB6-3846-000 350 - 19 FB6-3895-000 100 - 44 FB6-4937-000 316 - 12
FB6-3846-000 361 - 21 FB6-3896-000 100 - 44 FB6-4938-000 315 - 80
FB6-3847-000 350 - 20 FB6-3897-000 351 - 27 FB6-5060-000 102 - 4
FB6-3847-000 361 - 22 FB6-3932-000 106 - 4 FB6-5450-000 100 - 45
FB6-3848-000 350 - 21 FB6-3933-000 106 - 2 FB6-5451-000 100 - 46
FB6-3848-000 361 - 23 FB6-3934-000 330 - 30 FB6-5781-000 351A - 6
FB6-3850-000 560 - 7A FB6-3934-000 360 - 40 FB6-5786-000 351A - 38
FB6-3853-000 560 - 4 FB6-3935-000 350 - 7 FB6-5787-000 351A - 39
FB6-3854-000 560 - 5 FB6-3936-000 350 - 22 FB6-5790-000 351A - 40
FB6-3855-000 560 - 6 FB6-3939-000 560 - 12D FB6-5791-000 351A - 41
FB6-3858-000 315 - 81 FB6-3944-000 130 - 5 FB6-5792-000 351A - 42
FB6-3859-000 315 - 82 FB6-3945-000 130 - 6 FB6-5793-000 125A - 2
FB6-3860-000 101 - 41B FB6-3946-000 130 - 7 FB6-5795-000 351A - 43
FB6-3862-000 101 - 10J FB6-3947-000 130 - 8 FB6-5796-000 351A - 3
FB6-3863-000 315 - 83 FB6-3950-000 100 - 16 FB6-5800-000 100 - 44
FB6-3864-000 315 - 84 FB6-3951-000 130 - 9 FB6-6213-000 130 - 21
FB6-3864-000 365 - 14 FB6-3953-000 130 - 20 FB6-6214-000 300 - 23
1-4
NUMERICAL INDEX
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220
FIGURE FIGURE FIGURE
PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER &
KEY NO. KEY NO. KEY NO
FB6-6215-000 300 - 25 FF6-2079-000 360 - 32 FG3-2312-000 360 - 69
FB6-6216-000 361 - 21 FF6-2081-000 330 - 15 FG3-2313-000 360 - 78
FB6-6217-000 315 - 81 FF6-2081-000 360 - 33 FG3-2314-000 101 - 10F
FB6-6218-000 315 - 82 FF6-2085-000 101 - 9 FG3-2315-000 321 - 9
FB6-6222-000 350 - 23 FF6-2099-000 101 - 31 FG3-2318-000 321 - 10
FB6-6222-000 361 - 45 FF6-2100-000 108 - 2 FG3-2319-000 103 - 6
FB6-6378-000 810 - 2 FF6-2101-000 365 - 16 FG3-2320-000 535 - 33
FB6-6379-000 810 - 3 FF6-2102-000 365 - 17 FG3-2321-000 535 - 34
FB6-6380-000 535 - 2 FF6-2104-000 130 - 10 FG3-2326-000 270 - 3
FB6-6381-000 810 - 36 FF6-2106-000 104 - 9 FG3-2340-000 305 - 4
FB6-6382-000 900 - 25 FF6-2107-000 104 - 4 FG3-2341-000 305 - 4
FB6-6385-000 100 - 44 FF6-2110-000 101 - 32 FG3-2342-000 305 - 5
FB6-6386-000 100 - 44 FF6-2114-000 101 - 10C FG3-2344-000 272 - 13
FB6-6387-000 100 - 44 FF6-2116-000 361 - 27 FG3-2345-000 107 - 3
FB6-6388-000 100 - 44 FF6-2117-000 361 - 8 FG3-2346-000 105 - 6
FB6-6389-000 100 - 44 FF6-2118-000 361 - 14 FG3-2347-000 102 - 18
FB6-6545-000 535 - 25 FF6-2127-000 560 - 7 FG3-2348-000 102 - 11
FC5-0166-000 100 - 37 FF6-2128-000 361 - 44 FG3-2350-000 108 - 9
FC5-0166-000 100 - 51 FF6-2129-000 365 - 18 FG3-2351-000 108 - 10
FC5-0166-000 125 - 1 FF6-2130-000 100 - 24 FG3-2352-000 105 - 21
FC5-0166-000 125A - 1 FF6-2131-000 351 - 14 FG3-2353-000 105 - 22
FC5-0563-000 300 - 26 FF6-2131-000 351A - 14 FG3-2354-000 105 - 23
FF2-5915-000 105 - 4 FF6-2132-000 100 - 42 FG3-2362-000 900 - 8
FF3-4436-000 910 - 4A FF6-2134-000 315 - 34 FG3-2363-000 900 - 9
FF5-6279-000 351 - 1 FF6-2136-000 315 - 28 FG3-2364-000 105 - 24
FF6-2016-000 103 - 13 FF6-2141-000 106 - 10 FG3-2365-000 535 - 28
FF6-2017-000 103 - 19 FF6-2143-000 330 - 22 FG3-2366-000 107 - 8
FF6-2032-000 537 - 3 FF6-2143-000 360 - 52 FG3-2367-000 535 - 35
FF6-2033-000 104 - 17 FF6-2145-000 351 - 9 FG3-2368-000 535 - 36
FF6-2034-000 105 - 11 FF6-2147-000 360 - 21 FG3-2372-000 251 - 1
FF6-2038-000 101 - 7 FF6-2344-000 351A - 15 FG3-2372-000 272 - 14
FF6-2039-000 104 - 5 FF6-2345-000 351A - 44 FG3-2374-000 101 - 10G
FF6-2044-000 280 - 1 FF6-2363-000 310 - 14 FG3-2375-000 101 - 10H
FF6-2046-000 321 - 5 FG3-2299-000 106 - 12 FG3-2380-000 260 - 3
FF6-2047-000 103 - 8 FG3-2301-000 316 - 10 FG3-2381-000 305 - 1
FF6-2054-000 365 - 15 FG3-2302-000 310 - 59 FG3-2383-000 107 - 5
FF6-2058-000 310 - 25 FG3-2303-000 315 - 75 FG3-2385-000 981 - 3
FF6-2059-000 310 - 26 FG3-2304-000 315 - 76 FG3-2387-000 980 - 1
FF6-2063-000 102 - 19 FG3-2305-000 365 - 29 FG3-2390-000 108 - 14
FF6-2064-000 300 - 17 FG3-2306-000 365 - 1 FG3-2392-000 251 - 2
FF6-2065-000 315 - 37 FG3-2309-000 105 - 19 FG3-2393-000 305 - 1
FF6-2070-000 351 - 15 FG3-2310-000 105 - 20 FG3-2395-000 305 - 2
FF6-2075-030 361 - 24 FG3-2311-000 351 - 32 FG3-2396-000 980 - 2
FF6-2079-000 330 - 14 FG3-2311-000 351A - 32 FG3-2644-000 900 - 10
1-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
NUMERICAL INDEX
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220
FIGURE FIGURE FIGURE
PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER &
KEY NO. KEY NO. KEY NO
FG3-2645-000 900 - 11 FG6-9000-000 101 - 8 FG6-9663-020 271 -
FG3-2646-020 900 - 12 FG6-9004-000 272 - 15 FG6-9666-000 900 - 18
FG3-2729-000 900 - 4 FG6-9005-000 101 - 19 FG6-9671-000 108 - 11
FG3-2854-000 900 - 15 FG6-9008-000 192 - FG6-9673-000 980 -
FG3-2855-000 900 - 16 FG6-9011-040 280 - FG6-9674-000 981 -
FG3-2856-000 900 - 17 FG6-9012-000 100 - 21 FG6-9676-000 900 - 18
FG3-3002-000 360 - 71 FG6-9013-000 120 - FG6-9678-020 900 - 20
FG3-3004-000 105 - 5 FG6-9015-000 107 - 6 FG6-9700-000 810 -
FG3-3005-000 105 - 26 FG6-9015-000 120 - 9 FG6-9749-000 305 - 7
FG3-3010-000 351A - 48 FG6-9016-000 194 - FG9-3986-000 102 - 26
FG3-3011-000 930 - FG6-9019-000 100 - 22 FH2-5006-000 100 - 23
FG3-3020-000 910 - 4 FG6-9021-000 365 - FH2-5824-000 108 - 13
FG3-3136-000 900 - 19 FG6-9022-000 365 - FH2-5825-000 B - J565
FG3-3287-000 900 - 13 FG6-9025-000 260 - FH2-6480-000 B - J950
FG3-3668-000 900 - 15 FG6-9028-070 310 - FH2-6488-000 910 - 11
FG3-3973-000 193 - 3 FG6-9041-000 300 - 28 FH2-6552-000 108 - 4
FG6-8927-000 100 - 17 FG6-9042-000 316 - FH2-6855-000 B - J565
FG6-8933-000 130 - FG6-9044-000 300 - FH2-7019-000 900 - 5
FG6-8934-000 130 - FG6-9050-000 351 - FH2-7019-000 B - J1210
FG6-8935-000 130 - FG6-9052-000 125 - FH2-7037-000 130 - 11
FG6-8936-000 130 - 16 FG6-9058-000 360 - FH2-7078-000 910 - 3
FG6-8937-000 130 - 13 FG6-9059-000 361 - FH2-7079-000 910 - 2
FG6-8938-000 130 - 14 FG6-9060-000 360 - 79 FH2-7080-000 910 - 1
FG6-8939-000 130 - 15 FG6-9065-000 193 - FH2-7081-000 910 - 8
FG6-8941-000 130 - FG6-9068-000 350 - FH2-7082-000 910 - 9
FG6-8942-060 535 - FG6-9069-150 810 - FH2-9249-000 108 - 8
FG6-8945-020 100 - 18 FG6-9070-150 810 - FH5-1033-000 900 - 6
FG6-8946-000 108 - 3 FG6-9079-010 280 - 11 FH5-1051-000 271 - 3
FG6-8956-000 107 - 2 FG6-9080-000 315 - FH6-0834-000 130 - 12
FG6-8960-000 321 - FG6-9081-000 315 - FH6-1253-020 360 - 74
FG6-8962-000 460 - FG6-9164-000 130 - 17 FH6-1579-000 194 - 1
FG6-8964-000 251 - FG6-9165-000 130 - 18 FH6-1972-000 260 - 1
FG6-8966-000 270 - FG6-9166-000 130 - 19 FH6-1973-000 270 - 1
FG6-8968-000 190 - FG6-9644-000 810 - 38 FH6-1973-000 315 - 38
FG6-8970-050 910 - 10 FG6-9645-070 810 - 43 FH6-1974-000 360 - 35
FG6-8971-050 910 - 10 FG6-9646-000 810 - 38 FH6-1975-000 351 - 16
FG6-8981-000 251 - 3 FG6-9647-000 810 - 38 FH6-1975-000 351A - 16
FG6-8989-000 537 - FG6-9654-000 351A - FH6-1979-000 192 - 2
FG6-8991-000 101 - 10 FG6-9655-000 125A - FH6-1979-000 910 - 6
FG6-8992-020 101 - 41 FG6-9662-000 271 - 2 FH6-1980-000 190 - 2
FG6-8993-000 560 - FG6-9662-000 271 - 4 FH6-1981-000 191 - 1
FG6-8995-000 191 - FG6-9662-000 271 - 9 FH6-1982-000 193 - 1
FG6-8997-000 560 - 12 FG6-9662-000 271 - 504 FH6-1984-000 351A - 49
FG6-8999-000 272 - FG6-9662-000 271 - 507 FH6-5052-000 360 - 36
1-6
NUMERICAL INDEX
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220
FIGURE FIGURE FIGURE
PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER &
KEY NO. KEY NO. KEY NO
FH6-5053-000 315 - 39 FS2-1544-000 351A - 19 FS6-1067-000 351A - 45
FH6-5054-000 101 - 43 FS2-2783-000 315 - 41 FS6-2785-000 120 - 7
FH6-5055-000 310 - 27 FS5-0353-000 351 - 20 FS6-3001-000 360 - 45
FH6-5056-000 360 - 37 FS5-0353-000 351A - 20 FS6-3002-000 360 - 46
FH7-4739-000 810 - 40 FS5-1209-000 315 - 42 FS6-3003-000 360 - 47
FH7-4742-000 305 - 6 FS5-1581-000 272 - 3 FS6-8116-000 300 - 27
FH7-6345-000 810 - 43D FS5-1595-000 100 - 22E FS7-0128-000 350 - 12
FH7-6357-000 107 - 7 FS5-1595-000 315 - 44 FS7-0128-000 361 - 30
FH7-7312-000 107 - 4 FS5-1595-000 315 - 44 FS7-0579-000 104 - 19
FH7-7312-000 120 - 5 FS5-1595-000 360 - 41 FS7-2360-000 360 - 48
FH7-7312-000 272 - 2 FS5-1595-000 361 - 29 FS7-2781-000 535 - 19
FH7-7312-000 310 - 28 FS5-1597-000 310 - 31 FS7-2782-000 535 - 20
FH7-7312-000 315 - 40 FS5-1597-000 315 - 46 FS7-2783-000 535 - 21
FH7-7312-000 316 - 13 FS5-3989-000 351 - 21 FS7-2784-000 535 - 32
FH7-7312-000 351 - 17 FS5-3989-000 351A - 21 FS7-2785-000 103 - 14
FH7-7312-000 351A - 17 FS5-3989-000 360 - 42 FS7-2787-000 315 - 51
FH7-7312-000 360 - 38 FS5-6488-000 280 - 2 FS7-2788-000 100 - 22F
FH7-7312-000 365 - 19 FS5-6945-000 315 - 47 FS7-2788-000 360 - 49
FH7-7312-000 365 - 19 FS5-6946-000 350 - 11 FS7-2788-000 361 - 31
FH7-7312-000 810 - 42 FS5-6947-000 810 - 45 FS7-2789-000 100 - 22G
FH7-7462-000 105 - 14 FS5-6948-000 330 - 18 FS7-2790-000 365 - 23
FH7-7527-000 910 - 7 FS5-6948-000 360 - 43 FS7-2791-000 365 - 24
FH7-7528-000 910 - 7 FS5-6949-000 101 - 33 FS7-2792-000 365 - 25
FH7-7586-020 810 - 43E FS5-6950-000 330 - 19 FS7-2793-000 365 - 26
FH7-7587-000 810 - 43F FS5-6950-000 360 - 44 FS7-2796-000 105 - 7
FH7-7600-010 316 - 14 FS5-6955-000 365 - 2 FS7-2796-000 365 - 27
FH7-7601-000 321 - 6 FS5-6957-000 537 - 1 FS7-2797-000 310 - 33
FH7-7602-000 103 - 7 FS5-9161-000 100 - 47 FS7-2798-000 310 - 34
FM1-0350-000 300 - FS5-9274-000 100 - 34 FS7-2800-000 310 - 35
FM1-0351-000 361 - FS5-9753-000 365 - 21 FS7-2801-000 310 - 36
FM1-0352-000 360 - FS5-9754-000 101 - 34 FS7-2802-000 310 - 37
FM1-0354-000 315 - FS5-9758-000 105 - 8 FS7-2803-000 310 - 38
FM1-0357-000 460 - FS5-9758-000 365 - 22 FS7-2804-000 300 - 20
FM1-0408-000 910 - 10 FS5-9760-000 105 - 15 FS7-2805-000 300 - 19
FM1-0409-000 910 - 10 FS5-9761-000 315 - 86 FS7-2806-000 300 - 18
FS1-1187-000 351 - 18 FS6-1055-000 315 - 48 FS7-2807-000 102 - 14
FS1-1205-000 310 - 30 FS6-1057-000 315 - 49 FS7-2808-000 102 - 13
FS1-1213-000 310 - 60 FS6-1058-000 315 - 50 FS7-2809-000 315 - 54
FS1-1465-000 330 - 17 FS6-1059-000 125 - 17 FS7-2810-000 315 - 55
FS1-1465-000 360 - 39 FS6-1059-000 125A - 17 FS7-2811-000 315 - 3
FS1-1512-000 315 - 43 FS6-1060-000 104 - 18 FS7-2812-000 315 - 56
FS1-9010-000 120 - 6 FS6-1062-000 535 - 18 FS7-2813-000 315 - 79
FS1-9010-000 537 - 4 FS6-1063-000 310 - 32 FS7-2814-000 810 - 46
FS2-1544-000 351 - 19 FS6-1066-000 560 - 12E FS7-2815-000 810 - 47
1-7
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
NUMERICAL INDEX
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220
FIGURE FIGURE FIGURE
PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER &
KEY NO. KEY NO. KEY NO
FS7-2816-000 810 - 48 FS7-2862-000 330 - 16 FU3-0304-000 272 - 8
FS7-2817-000 810 - 49 FS7-2862-000 360 - 70 FU3-0305-000 272 - 9
FS7-2818-000 330 - 20 FS7-2863-000 315 - 87 FU3-0306-000 272 - 10
FS7-2822-000 330 - 24 FS7-2865-000 102 - 25 FU3-0308-000 101 - 36
FS7-2822-000 360 - 54 FS7-2866-000 351A - 46 FU3-0309-000 101 - 37
FS7-2823-000 350 - 13 FS7-2867-000 360 - 50 FU3-0310-000 360 - 56
FS7-2825-000 272 - 5 FS7-5909-000 310 - 39 FU3-0311-000 360 - 57
FS7-2826-000 101 - 35 FS7-5910-000 310 - 40 FU3-0312-000 330 - 26
FS7-2828-000 350 - 14 FS7-8329-000 460 - 1 FU3-0312-000 360 - 58
FS7-2828-000 361 - 32 FS7-8332-000 100 - 53 FU3-0313-000 330 - 27
FS7-2829-000 330 - 25 FS7-8332-000 101 - 49 FU3-0313-000 360 - 59
FS7-2829-000 360 - 55 FS7-8335-000 460 - 1 FU3-0314-000 330 - 28
FS7-2830-000 361 - 33 FU3-0266-040 535 - 22 FU3-0314-000 360 - 60
FS7-2831-000 361 - 35 FU3-0267-000 535 - 23 FU3-0315-000 330 - 29
FS7-2832-000 360 - 76 FU3-0268-000 535 - 24 FU3-0315-000 360 - 61
FS7-2833-000 101 - 44 FU3-0270-000 315 - 58 FU3-0316-000 361 - 36
FS7-2834-000 125 - 18 FU3-0271-000 315 - 59 FU3-0317-000 350 - 16
FS7-2834-000 125A - 18 FU3-0272-000 315 - 60 FU3-0317-000 361 - 37
FS7-2835-000 280 - 3 FU3-0273-000 315 - 61 FU3-0318-000 360 - 77
FS7-2838-000 271 - 5 FU3-0274-000 315 - 62 FU3-0319-000 351 - 22
FS7-2839-000 315 - 57 FU3-0275-000 315 - 63 FU3-0319-000 351A - 22
FS7-2840-000 537 - 5 FU3-0276-000 315 - 64 FU3-0322-000 351 - 23
FS7-2842-000 104 - 21 FU3-0277-000 315 - 65 FU3-0322-000 351A - 23
FS7-2843-000 104 - 22 FU3-0277-000 361 - 34 FU3-0323-000 351 - 24
FS7-2844-000 101 - 10D FU3-0278-000 315 - 66 FU3-0323-000 351A - 24
FS7-2845-000 101 - 10E FU3-0280-000 310 - 41 FU3-0324-000 351 - 25
FS7-2846-000 560 - 8 FU3-0282-000 310 - 43 FU3-0324-000 351A - 25
FS7-2847-000 106 - 7 FU3-0283-000 310 - 44 FU3-0325-000 125 - 19
FS7-2848-000 105 - 16 FU3-0284-000 310 - 45 FU3-0325-000 125A - 19
FS7-2849-000 101 - 47 FU3-0285-000 260 - 2 FU3-0332-000 271 - 6
FS7-2850-000 321 - 7 FU3-0288-000 310 - 47 FU3-0333-000 271 - 7
FS7-2851-000 321 - 8 FU3-0289-000 310 - 48 FU3-0334-000 271 - 8
FS7-2852-000 810 - 50 FU3-0290-000 310 - 49 FU3-0337-000 270 - 2
FS7-2853-000 105 - 17 FU3-0291-000 310 - 50 FU3-0338-000 280 - 4
FS7-2854-000 120 - 8 FU3-0292-000 310 - 51 FU3-0339-000 280 - 5
FS7-2855-000 100 - 35 FU3-0293-000 300 - 21 FU3-0340-000 280 - 6
FS7-2856-000 560 - 10 FU3-0294-000 300 - 22 FU3-0341-000 280 - 7
FS7-2857-000 560 - 11 FU3-0295-000 315 - 67 FU3-0342-000 280 - 8
FS7-2859-000 351 - 30 FU3-0296-000 315 - 68 FU3-0343-000 104 - 23
FS7-2859-000 351A - 30 FU3-0297-000 315 - 69 FU3-0344-000 560 - 12F
FS7-2860-000 315 - 52 FU3-0298-000 315 - 70 FU3-0345-000 104 - 33
FS7-2860-000 315 - 52 FU3-0301-000 350 - 15 FU3-0347-000 310 - 53
FS7-2861-000 330 - 23 FU3-0302-000 272 - 6 FU3-0349-000 310 - 42
FS7-2861-000 360 - 53 FU3-0303-000 272 - 7 FU3-0350-000 310 - 52
1-8
NUMERICAL INDEX
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220
FIGURE FIGURE FIGURE
PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER &
KEY NO. KEY NO. KEY NO
FU3-0352-000 310 - 46 NPN B - J609 NPN B - J766
FU3-0546-000 271 - 10 NPN B - J610 NPN B - J768
FY7-0376-000 900 - 20 NPN B - J612 NPN B - J803
NPN 100 - NPN B - J613 NPN B - J804
NPN 101 - NPN B - J614 NPN B - J805
NPN 102 - NPN B - J616 NPN B - J806
NPN 103 - NPN B - J617 NPN B - J809
NPN 104 - NPN B - J618 NPN B - J810
NPN 105 - NPN B - J620 NPN B - J811
NPN 106 - NPN B - J650 NPN B - J812
NPN 107 - NPN B - J651 NPN B - J813
NPN 108 - NPN B - J652 NPN B - J814
NPN 305 - NPN B - J653 NPN B - J820
NPN 330 - NPN B - J660 NPN B - J854
NPN 900 - NPN B - J661 NPN B - J855
NPN 910 - NPN B - J662 NPN B - J856
NPN B - NPN B - J663 NPN B - J857
NPN B - J2 NPN B - J668 NPN B - J858
NPN B - J3 NPN B - J670 NPN B - J859
NPN B - J11 NPN B - J672 NPN B - J860
NPN B - J44 NPN B - J674 NPN B - J861
NPN B - J93 NPN B - J676 NPN B - J862
NPN B - J309 NPN B - J677 NPN B - J863
NPN B - J310 NPN B - J678 NPN B - J864
NPN B - J311 NPN B - J679 NPN B - J865
NPN B - J312 NPN B - J700 NPN B - J960
NPN B - J313 NPN B - J704 NPN B - J961
NPN B - J314 NPN B - J705 NPN B - J992
NPN B - J315 NPN B - J706 NPN B - J1112
NPN B - J316 NPN B - J707 NPN B - J1114
NPN B - J405 NPN B - J709 NPN B - J1126
NPN B - J408 NPN B - J710 NPN B - J1401
NPN B - J409 NPN B - J711 PCB B - J1
NPN B - J410 NPN B - J712 PCB B - J2
NPN B - J411 NPN B - J716 PCB B - J3
NPN B - J412 NPN B - J721 PCB B - J3
NPN B - J413 NPN B - J754 PCB B - J5
NPN B - J414 NPN B - J758 PCB B - J7
NPN B - J540 NPN B - J760 PCB B - J8
NPN B - J559 NPN B - J761 PCB B - J11
NPN B - J565 NPN B - J762 PCB B - J13
NPN B - J605 NPN B - J763 PCB B - J50
NPN B - J606 NPN B - J764 PCB B - J51
NPN B - J608 NPN B - J765 PCB B - J52
1-9
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
NUMERICAL INDEX
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220
FIGURE FIGURE FIGURE
PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER &
KEY NO. KEY NO. KEY NO
PCB B - J53 PCB B - J87 PCB B - J300
PCB B - J54 PCB B - J88 PCB B - J301
PCB B - J56 PCB B - J88 PCB B - J302
PCB B - J57 PCB B - J89 PCB B - J303
PCB B - J58 PCB B - J90 PCB B - J304
PCB B - J59 PCB B - J91 PCB B - J305
PCB B - J60 PCB B - J92 PCB B - J306
PCB B - J61 PCB B - J94 PCB B - J307
PCB B - J62 PCB B - J95 PCB B - J308
PCB B - J64 PCB B - J97 PCB B - J440
PCB B - J66 PCB B - J99 PCB B - J441
PCB B - J67 PCB B - J100 PCB B - J442
PCB B - J68 PCB B - J102 PCB B - J511
PCB B - J69 PCB B - J103 PCB B - J514
PCB B - J70 PCB B - J104 PCB B - J520
PCB B - J70C PCB B - J105 PCB B - J538
PCB B - J70K PCB B - J106 PCB B - J564
PCB B - J70M PCB B - J107 PCB B - J607
PCB B - J70Y PCB B - J108 PCB B - J611
PCB B - J71 PCB B - J108 PCB B - J615
PCB B - J71C PCB B - J109 PCB B - J619
PCB B - J71K PCB B - J109 PCB B - J713
PCB B - J71M PCB B - J110 PCB B - J714
PCB B - J71Y PCB B - J111 PCB B - J759
PCB B - J72C PCB B - J112 PCB B - J816
PCB B - J72K PCB B - J113 PCB B - J956
PCB B - J72M PCB B - J114 PCB B - J957
PCB B - J72Y PCB B - J115 PCB B - J958
PCB B - J73CK PCB B - J116 PCB B - J959
PCB B - J73YM PCB B - J117 PCB B - J992
PCB B - J74 PCB B - J118 PCB B - J1110
PCB B - J75 PCB B - J120 PCB B - J1111
PCB B - J76 PCB B - J123 PCB B - J1112
PCB B - J77 PCB B - J124 PCB B - J1113
PCB B - J78 PCB B - J125 PCB B - J1114
PCB B - J79 PCB B - J126 PCB B - J1115
PCB B - J80 PCB B - J127 PCB B - J1116
PCB B - J81 PCB B - J128 PCB B - J1117
PCB B - J82 PCB B - J129 PCB B - J1123
PCB B - J83 PCB B - J131 PCB B - J1204
PCB B - J84CK PCB B - J132 PCB B - J1207
PCB B - J84YM PCB B - J153 PCB B - J1208
PCB B - J85 PCB B - J154 PCB B - J1209
PCB B - J86 PCB B - J155 PCB B - J1209
1-10
NUMERICAL INDEX
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220
FIGURE FIGURE FIGURE
PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER &
KEY NO. KEY NO. KEY NO
PCB B - J1210 RB1-8945-000 310 - 55 VS1-0842-003 B - J308
PCB B - J1213 RB2-0493-000 361 - 38 VS1-0842-003 B - J313
PCB B - J1215 RB2-0493-000 810 - 39 VS1-0842-003 B - J314
PCB B - J1216 RB2-5850-000 315 - 72 VS1-0842-003 B - J315
PCB B - J1225 RB2-6925-000 321 - 5B VS1-0842-003 B - J316
PCB B - J1301 RB2-7043-000 272 - 11 VS1-0842-004 B - J155
PCB B - J1302 RB9-0255-000 361 - 39 VS1-0842-009 B - J53
PCB B - J1303 RG5-5469-000 251 - 4 VS1-0842-012 B - J1000
PCB B - J1304 RG5-5469-000 272 - 4 VS1-5057-002 105 - 28
PCB B - J1305 RH7-6037-000 105 - 18 VS1-5057-002 272 - 12
PCB B - J1309 RH7-7129-000 315 - 73 VS1-5057-002 305 - 2A
PCB B - J1311 RS5-1060-000 350 - 17 VS1-5057-002 310 - 59A
PCB B - J1315 RS5-1060-000 361 - 40 VS1-5057-002 315 - 75A
PCB B - J1316 RS5-1101-000 125 - 20 VS1-5057-002 360 - 69A
PCB B - J1318 RS5-1101-000 125A - 20 VS1-5057-002 900 - 11A
PCB B - J1336 RS5-1324-000 351 - 28 VS1-5057-002 B - J410
PCB B - J1342 RS5-1324-000 351A - 28 VS1-5057-002 B - J411
PCB B - J1342 RS5-1325-000 350 - 18 VS1-5057-002 B - J412
PCB B - J1400 RS5-1325-000 351 - 29 VS1-5057-002 B - J531
PCB B - J1401 RS5-1325-000 360 - 63 VS1-5057-002 B - J536
PCB B - J1501 RS5-1325-000 361 - 41 VS1-5057-002 B - J537
PCB B - J1502 RS5-1567-000 310 - 56 VS1-5057-002 B - J557
PCB B - J1503 RS5-1567-000 315 - 74 VS1-5057-002 B - J668
PCB B - J1504 RU5-8126-000 460 - 1 VS1-5057-002 B - J670
PCB B - J1505 SYS B - J512 VS1-5057-002 B - J672
PCB B - J1507 SYS B - J522 VS1-5057-002 B - J674
PCB B - J1508 SYS B - J524 VS1-5057-002 B - J707
PCB B - J1509 SYS B - J531 VS1-5057-002 B - J762
PCB B - J1510 SYS B - J539 VS1-5057-002 B - J805
PCB B - J1511 SYS B - J557 VS1-5057-002 B - J815
PCB B - J1512 SYS B - J560 VS1-5057-002 B - J857
PCB B - J1513 SYS B - J950 VS1-5057-002 B - J863
RB1-2152-000 315 - 71 SYS B - J1101 VS1-5057-003 105 - 19B
RB1-2152-000 365 - 28 SYS B - J1115 VS1-5057-003 190 - 3
RB1-6484-000 106 - 11 SYS B - J1122 VS1-5057-003 193 - 2
RB1-6486-000 125 - 5 SYS B - J1207 VS1-5057-003 272 - 13A
RB1-6486-000 125A - 5 SYS B - J1520 VS1-5057-003 305 - 2B
RB1-6539-000 310 - 54 VS1-0842-003 B - J301 VS1-5057-003 315 - 76A
RB1-6653-000 330 - 31 VS1-0842-003 B - J302 VS1-5057-003 351A - 48A
RB1-6653-000 360 - 62 VS1-0842-003 B - J303 VS1-5057-003 360 - 78A
RB1-6666-000 125 - 21 VS1-0842-003 B - J304 VS1-5057-003 900 - 12A
RB1-6666-000 125A - 21 VS1-0842-003 B - J305 VS1-5057-003 B - J407
RB1-6666-000 351 - 26 VS1-0842-003 B - J306 VS1-5057-003 B - J540
RB1-6666-000 351A - 26 VS1-0842-003 B - J307 VS1-5057-003 B - J669
1-11
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
NUMERICAL INDEX
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220
FIGURE FIGURE FIGURE
PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER &
KEY NO. KEY NO. KEY NO
VS1-5057-003 B - J671 VS1-5820-008 B - J962 VS1-6225-009 B - J603
VS1-5057-003 B - J673 VS1-5824-002 B - J66 VS1-6225-009 B - J604
VS1-5057-003 B - J675 VS1-5824-002 B - J74 VS1-6225-012 B - J115
VS1-5057-003 B - J700 VS1-5824-002 B - J106 VS1-6225-018 B - J117
VS1-5057-003 B - J716 VS1-5824-002 B - J559 VS1-6226-036 B - J117
VS1-5057-003 B - J721 VS1-5824-002 B - J805 VS1-6302-002 B - J91
VS1-5057-003 B - J757 VS1-5824-002 B - J1509 VS1-6302-004 B - J68
VS1-5057-003 B - J806 VS1-5824-003 B - J88 VS1-6302-004 B - J440
VS1-5057-003 B - J812 VS1-5824-003 B - J407 VS1-6302-006 B - J71
VS1-5057-003 B - J820 VS1-5824-003 B - J414 VS1-6302-007 B - J109
VS1-5057-003 B - J1120 VS1-5824-003 B - J564 VS1-6302-012 B - J560
VS1-5057-003 B - J1126 VS1-5824-003 B - J803 VS1-6302-012 B - J1311
VS1-5057-004 105 - 19C VS1-5824-003 B - J804 VS1-6302-012 B - J1504
VS1-5057-004 107 - 5A VS1-5824-003 B - J806 VS1-6302-014 B - J61
VS1-5057-004 B - J562 VS1-5824-004 B - J562 VS1-6313-009 B - J802
VS1-5057-004 B - J720 VS1-5824-006 B - J98 VS1-6313-010 B - J126
VS1-5057-004 B - J813 VS1-5824-012 B - J116 VS1-6313-010 B - J129
VS1-5057-005 105 - 19D VS1-5824-012 B - J120 VS1-6313-010 B - J801
VS1-5057-005 B - J708 VS1-5824-013 B - J114 VS1-6313-011 B - J109
VS1-5057-006 315 - 75B VS1-5824-013 B - J118 VS1-6313-012 B - J406
VS1-5057-006 360 - 69B VS1-5976-004 B - J154 VS1-6313-013 B - J102
VS1-5057-006 B - J98 VS1-5976-009 B - J153 VS1-6313-013 B - J108
VS1-5057-006 B - J413 VS1-5976-012 B - J54 VS1-6313-013 B - J127
VS1-5057-006 B - J756 VS1-5976-012 B - J69 VS1-6313-013 B - J403
VS1-5057-008 260 - 3A VS1-6084-007 B - J103 VS1-6313-013 B - J441
VS1-5057-008 B - J851 VS1-6197-014 B - J103 VS1-6313-014 B - J104
VS1-5057-010 900 - 11B VS1-6225-003 B - J309 VS1-6313-014 B - J442
VS1-5057-010 B - J521 VS1-6225-003 B - J310 VS1-6313-014 B - J852
VS1-5057-012 900 - 13A VS1-6225-003 B - J311 VS1-6313-015 B - J750
VS1-5057-012 B - J524 VS1-6225-003 B - J312 VS1-6313-015 B - J755
VS1-5057-012 B - J1000 VS1-6225-003 B - J607 VS1-6313-016 B - J107
VS1-5452-007 B - J103 VS1-6225-003 B - J611 VS1-6313-017 B - J105
VS1-5452-007 B - J950 VS1-6225-003 B - J615 VS1-6313-018 B - J510
VS1-5452-007 B - J963 VS1-6225-003 B - J619 VS1-6313-018 B - J511
VS1-5452-008 B - J950 VS1-6225-004 B - J605 VS1-6313-018 B - J1121
VS1-5452-008 B - J962 VS1-6225-004 B - J609 VS1-6313-018 B - J1304
VS1-5729-002 B - J96 VS1-6225-004 B - J613 VS1-6313-020 B - J92
VS1-5729-002 B - J1100 VS1-6225-004 B - J617 VS1-6313-020 B - J131
VS1-5729-004 B - J561 VS1-6225-005 B - J606 VS1-6313-020 B - J512
VS1-5820-002 108 - 10A VS1-6225-005 B - J610 VS1-6313-020 B - J1103
VS1-5820-002 B - J558 VS1-6225-005 B - J614 VS1-6313-020 B - J1309
VS1-5820-007 108 - 10B VS1-6225-005 B - J618 VS1-6314-002 B - J1316
VS1-5820-007 B - J963 VS1-6225-009 B - J600 VS1-6314-003 B - J752
VS1-5820-008 108 - 10C VS1-6225-009 B - J601 VS1-6314-003 B - J956
1-12
NUMERICAL INDEX
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220
FIGURE FIGURE FIGURE
PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER &
KEY NO. KEY NO. KEY NO
VS1-6314-003 B - J958 VS1-6314-011 B - J800 VS1-6314-020 B - J75
VS1-6314-003 B - J964 VS1-6314-011 B - J1110 VS1-6314-020 B - J88
VS1-6314-003 B - J965 VS1-6314-011 B - J1116 VS1-6314-020 B - J131
VS1-6314-003 B - J1124 VS1-6314-012 B - J76 VS1-6314-020 B - J512
VS1-6314-003 B - J1125 VS1-6314-012 B - J87 VS1-6314-020 B - J1102
VS1-6314-004 B - J404 VS1-6314-012 B - J703 VS1-6314-020 B - J1309
VS1-6314-004 B - J539 VS1-6314-013 B - J80 VS1-6318-003 102 - 26
VS1-6314-004 B - J953 VS1-6314-013 B - J89 VS1-6318-003 102 - 26A
VS1-6314-004 B - J1336 VS1-6314-013 B - J102 VS1-6318-003 321 - 10A
VS1-6314-005 B - J50 VS1-6314-013 B - J108 VS1-6318-003 365 - 29A
VS1-6314-005 B - J522 VS1-6314-013 B - J127 VS1-6318-003 B - J752
VS1-6314-005 B - J807 VS1-6314-013 B - J403 VS1-6318-003 B - J964
VS1-6314-005 B - J808 VS1-6314-013 B - J406 VS1-6318-003 B - J965
VS1-6314-005 B - J957 VS1-6314-013 B - J441 VS1-6318-003 B - J1124
VS1-6314-005 B - J959 VS1-6314-013 B - J702 VS1-6318-003 B - J1125
VS1-6314-005 B - J1508 VS1-6314-013 B - J1111 VS1-6318-004 103 - 6A
VS1-6314-006 B - J538 VS1-6314-013 B - J1117 VS1-6318-004 365 - 1A
VS1-6314-006 B - J952 VS1-6314-014 B - J51 VS1-6318-004 B - J404
VS1-6314-006 B - J960 VS1-6314-014 B - J104 VS1-6318-004 B - J953
VS1-6314-006 B - J1225 VS1-6314-014 B - J123 VS1-6318-005 102 - 18A
VS1-6314-006 B - J1318 VS1-6314-014 B - J128 VS1-6318-005 B - J807
VS1-6314-006 B - J1513 VS1-6314-014 B - J132 VS1-6318-005 B - J808
VS1-6314-008 B - J111 VS1-6314-014 B - J300 VS1-6318-006 105 - 25
VS1-6314-008 B - J535 VS1-6314-014 B - J442 VS1-6318-006 B - J952
VS1-6314-008 B - J769 VS1-6314-014 B - J850 VS1-6318-008 270 - 3A
VS1-6314-008 B - J1213 VS1-6314-014 B - J852 VS1-6318-008 900 - 11C
VS1-6314-008 B - J1315 VS1-6314-014 B - J951 VS1-6318-008 B - J535
VS1-6314-008 B - J1507 VS1-6314-015 B - J750 VS1-6318-008 B - J769
VS1-6314-009 B - J520 VS1-6314-016 B - J72C VS1-6318-009 106 - 13
VS1-6314-009 B - J701 VS1-6314-016 B - J72K VS1-6318-009 B - J703
VS1-6314-010 B - J73CK VS1-6314-016 B - J72M VS1-6318-010 102 - 18B
VS1-6314-010 B - J73YM VS1-6314-016 B - J72Y VS1-6318-010 981 - 3A
VS1-6314-010 B - J90 VS1-6314-016 B - J77 VS1-6318-010 B - J801
VS1-6314-010 B - J95 VS1-6314-016 B - J78 VS1-6318-010 B - J1104
VS1-6314-010 B - J97 VS1-6314-016 B - J79 VS1-6318-010 B - J1105
VS1-6314-010 B - J99 VS1-6314-016 B - J94 VS1-6318-011 105 - 20A
VS1-6314-010 B - J126 VS1-6314-016 B - J107 VS1-6318-011 B - J800
VS1-6314-010 B - J129 VS1-6314-016 B - J110 VS1-6318-012 106 - 14
VS1-6314-010 B - J801 VS1-6314-016 B - J755 VS1-6318-012 B - J701
VS1-6314-010 B - J802 VS1-6314-017 B - J105 VS1-6318-013 105 - 19E
VS1-6314-010 B - J1104 VS1-6314-018 B - J510 VS1-6318-013 B - J702
VS1-6314-010 B - J1105 VS1-6314-018 B - J511 VS1-6318-014 105 - 27
VS1-6314-010 B - J1305 VS1-6314-018 B - J1121 VS1-6318-014 310 - 57
VS1-6314-011 B - J109 VS1-6314-018 B - J1304 VS1-6318-014 B - J850
1-13
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
NUMERICAL INDEX
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220
FIGURE FIGURE FIGURE
PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER &
KEY NO. KEY NO. KEY NO
VS1-6318-014 B - J852 VS1-6321-003 B - J676 VS1-6321-004 B - J854
VS1-6318-014 B - J951 VS1-6321-003 B - J677 VS1-6321-004 B - J860
VS1-6318-020 980 - 3 VS1-6321-003 B - J678 VS1-6321-004 B - J961
VS1-6318-020 B - J1102 VS1-6321-003 B - J679 VS1-6321-005 B - J408
VS1-6318-020 B - J1103 VS1-6321-003 B - J700 VS1-6321-005 B - J704
VS1-6319-026 365 - 1B VS1-6321-003 B - J706 VS1-6321-005 B - J705
VS1-6319-026 B - J403 VS1-6321-003 B - J709 VS1-6321-005 B - J708
VS1-6319-030 105 - 6A VS1-6321-003 B - J710 VS1-6321-005 B - J809
VS1-6319-030 B - J750 VS1-6321-003 B - J711 VS1-6321-005 B - J810
VS1-6319-036 105 - 26C VS1-6321-003 B - J712 VS1-6321-006 B - J413
VS1-6319-036 B - J510 VS1-6321-003 B - J713 VS1-6321-006 B - J756
VS1-6319-036 B - J1121 VS1-6321-003 B - J716 VS1-6321-008 B - J514
VS1-6319-040 B - J512 VS1-6321-003 B - J721 VS1-6321-008 B - J814
VS1-6320-003 B - J764 VS1-6321-003 B - J754 VS1-6321-008 B - J851
VS1-6321-002 B - J1 VS1-6321-003 B - J757 VS1-6321-008 B - J1511
VS1-6321-002 B - J410 VS1-6321-003 B - J758 VS1-6321-010 B - J521
VS1-6321-002 B - J411 VS1-6321-003 B - J759 VS1-6321-010 B - J523
VS1-6321-002 B - J412 VS1-6321-003 B - J760 VS1-6321-012 B - J524
VS1-6321-002 B - J531 VS1-6321-003 B - J765 VS1-6361-002 B - J93
VS1-6321-002 B - J536 VS1-6321-003 B - J766 VS1-6361-004 B - J70
VS1-6321-002 B - J537 VS1-6321-003 B - J768 VS1-6361-004 B - J1505
VS1-6321-002 B - J557 VS1-6321-003 B - J811 VS1-6361-006 B - J59
VS1-6321-002 B - J668 VS1-6321-003 B - J812 VS1-6361-006 B - J1502
VS1-6321-002 B - J670 VS1-6321-003 B - J820 VS1-6361-008 B - J60
VS1-6321-002 B - J672 VS1-6321-003 B - J855 VS1-6361-008 B - J1501
VS1-6321-002 B - J674 VS1-6321-003 B - J856 VS1-6361-010 B - J1208
VS1-6321-002 B - J707 VS1-6321-003 B - J858 VS1-6361-010 B - J1503
VS1-6321-002 B - J714 VS1-6321-003 B - J859 VS1-6380-002 B - J10
VS1-6321-002 B - J762 VS1-6321-003 B - J861 VS1-6380-003 B - J57
VS1-6321-002 B - J815 VS1-6321-003 B - J862 VS1-6380-003 B - J95
VS1-6321-002 B - J816 VS1-6321-003 B - J864 VS1-6380-004 B - J58
VS1-6321-002 B - J857 VS1-6321-003 B - J865 VS1-6380-006 B - J56
VS1-6321-002 B - J863 VS1-6321-003 B - J1113 VS1-6407-080 B - J113
VS1-6321-002 B - J1122 VS1-6321-003 B - J1120 VS1-6407-080 B - J1216
VS1-6321-002 B - J1123 VS1-6321-003 B - J1126 VS1-6492-009 B - J600
VS1-6321-002 B - J1510 VS1-6321-003 B - J1512 VS1-6492-009 B - J601
VS1-6321-003 B - J405 VS1-6321-004 B - J650 VS1-6492-009 B - J603
VS1-6321-003 B - J407 VS1-6321-004 B - J651 VS1-6492-009 B - J604
VS1-6321-003 B - J409 VS1-6321-004 B - J652 VS1-6507-018 B - J117
VS1-6321-003 B - J540 VS1-6321-004 B - J653 VS1-6757-009 B - J802
VS1-6321-003 B - J669 VS1-6321-004 B - J720 VS1-6757-010 B - J802
VS1-6321-003 B - J671 VS1-6321-004 B - J761 VS1-6910-008 B - J654
VS1-6321-003 B - J673 VS1-6321-004 B - J763 VS1-6910-009 B - J655
VS1-6321-003 B - J675 VS1-6321-004 B - J813 VS1-6917-019 B - J802
1-14
NUMERICAL INDEX
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220
FIGURE FIGURE FIGURE
PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER &
KEY NO. KEY NO. KEY NO
VS1-6918-019 B - J802 VS3-5083-012 B - J64 WS3-5160-000 B - J64
VS1-6919-025 365 - 1C VS3-5083-012 B - J100 WS3-5160-000 B - J67
VS1-6919-025 B - J406 VS3-5083-013 B - J70C WS3-5160-000 B - J70C
VS1-6919-031 105 - 6B VS3-5083-013 B - J70K WS3-5160-000 B - J70K
VS1-6919-031 B - J755 VS3-5083-013 B - J70M WS3-5160-000 B - J70M
VS1-6920-025 360 - 64 VS3-5083-013 B - J70Y WS3-5160-000 B - J70Y
VS1-6920-031 B - J755 VS3-5084-002 B - J7 WS3-5160-000 B - J71C
VS1-6930-002 B - J660 VS3-5084-003 B - J3 WS3-5160-000 B - J71K
VS1-6930-002 B - J661 VS3-5084-004 B - J8 WS3-5160-000 B - J71M
VS1-6930-002 B - J662 VS3-5121-002 B - J10 WS3-5160-000 B - J71Y
VS1-6930-002 B - J663 VS3-5121-003 B - J95 WS3-5160-000 B - J81
VS1-6930-003 B - J660 VS4-0001-003 B - J12 WS3-5160-000 B - J82
VS1-6930-003 B - J661 VS4-0002-003 B - J12 WS3-5160-000 B - J83
VS1-6930-003 B - J662 VS4-0002-003 B - J13 WS3-5160-000 B - J84CK
VS1-6930-003 B - J663 VT2-5161-020 B - J126 WS3-5160-000 B - J84YM
VS1-6930-008 B - J124 VT2-5161-020 B - J129 WS3-5160-000 B - J85
VS1-6930-008 B - J654 VT2-5161-022 B - J109 WS3-5160-000 B - J86
VS1-6930-009 B - J125 VT2-5161-026 B - J102 WS3-5160-000 B - J96
VS1-6930-009 B - J655 VT2-5161-026 B - J108 WS3-5160-000 B - J100
VS3-0276-007 B - J108 VT2-5161-026 B - J127 WS3-5160-000 B - J561
VS3-5080-002 B - J52 VT2-5161-026 B - J403 WS3-5160-000 B - J1100
VS3-5080-002 B - J558 VT2-5161-026 B - J441 WS3-5160-000 B - J1101
VS3-5080-012 B - J608 VT2-5161-028 B - J104 WS3-5231-000 B - J108
VS3-5080-012 B - J612 VT2-5161-028 B - J442 WS3-5291-000 B - J10
VS3-5080-012 B - J616 VT2-5161-030 B - J750 WS3-5291-000 B - J95
VS3-5080-012 B - J620 VT2-5161-032 B - J107 WS3-5292-000 B - J10
VS3-5083-002 B - J62 VT2-5161-034 B - J105 WS3-5292-000 B - J56
VS3-5083-002 B - J96 VT2-5161-036 B - J510 WS3-5292-000 B - J57
VS3-5083-002 B - J1100 VT2-5161-036 B - J511 WS3-5292-000 B - J58
VS3-5083-002 B - J1101 VT2-5161-036 B - J1121 WS3-5292-000 B - J95
VS3-5083-003 B - J5 VT2-5161-036 B - J1304 WS3-5301-000 B - J96
VS3-5083-003 B - J71C VT2-5161-040 B - J131 WS3-5301-000 B - J561
VS3-5083-003 B - J71K VT2-5161-040 B - J512 WS3-5301-000 B - J1100
VS3-5083-003 B - J71M VT2-5161-040 B - J1309 WS3-5358-000 B - J66
VS3-5083-003 B - J71Y WA7-2645-000 900 - 14 WS3-5358-000 B - J74
VS3-5083-004 B - J81 WA7-3053-000 900 - 22 WS3-5358-000 B - J88
VS3-5083-004 B - J85 WC1-5129-000 305 - 3 WS3-5358-000 B - J98
VS3-5083-004 B - J561 WC2-5332-000 102 - 12 WS3-5358-000 B - J106
VS3-5083-005 B - J67 WM2-5210-000 900 - 21 WS3-5358-000 B - J114
VS3-5083-005 B - J82 WS3-5159-000 B - J3 WS3-5358-000 B - J116
VS3-5083-005 B - J84CK WS3-5159-000 B - J7 WS3-5358-000 B - J118
VS3-5083-005 B - J84YM WS3-5159-000 B - J8 WS3-5358-000 B - J120
VS3-5083-005 B - J86 WS3-5160-000 B - J5 WS3-5358-000 B - J407
VS3-5083-007 B - J83 WS3-5160-000 B - J62 WS3-5358-000 B - J414
1-15
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
NUMERICAL INDEX
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220
FIGURE FIGURE FIGURE
PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER &
KEY NO. KEY NO. KEY NO
WS3-5358-000 B - J559 WT2-5639-000 810 - 53 XB1-2402-007 910 - 503
WS3-5358-000 B - J562 X62-5133-000 B - J44 XB1-2403-007 910 - 504
WS3-5358-000 B - J564 X65-5854-000 B - J44 XB1-2403-009 900 - 503
WS3-5358-000 B - J1509 XA9-0605-000 100 - 18E XB1-2404-007 193 - 501
WS3-5569-000 B - J71 XA9-0624-000 537 - 6 XB1-3300-607 310 - 505
WS3-5569-000 B - J109 XA9-0633-000 100 - 43 XB2-4231-209 105 - 503
WS3-5592-000 B - J59 XA9-0656-000 310 - 58 XB2-4300-607 107 - 501
WS3-5592-000 B - J60 XA9-0724-000 351 - 35 XB2-8300-607 108 - 502
WS3-5592-000 B - J1208 XA9-0724-000 351A - 35 XB2-8300-607 130 - 501
WS3-5592-000 B - J1501 XA9-0774-000 100 - 29 XB2-8300-607 300 - 501
WS3-5592-000 B - J1502 XA9-0782-000 108 - 12 XB2-8300-607 535 - 502
WS3-5592-000 B - J1503 XA9-0783-000 100 - 54 XB2-8300-807 101 - 502
WS3-5596-000 B - J950 XA9-0838-000 101 - 6 XB2-8300-807 108 - 506
WS3-5680-000 B - J61 XA9-0896-000 900 - 7 XB2-8300-807 361 - 502
WS3-5680-000 B - J68 XA9-1030-000 107 - 9 XB2-8300-807 810 - 501
WS3-5680-000 B - J91 XA9-1401-000 106 - 505 XB2-8301-009 101 - 505
WS3-5680-000 B - J440 XA9-1412-000 330 - 11 XB2-8301-009 105 - 511
WS3-5680-000 B - J560 XA9-1412-000 360 - 28 XB2-8301-207 810 - 502
WS3-5680-000 B - J1311 XA9-1484-000 810 - 11 XB2-8400-807 105 - 504
WS3-5680-000 B - J1504 XB1-2260-407 272 - 501 XB2-8400-807 315 - 504
WS3-5721-000 B - J802 XB1-2260-807 900 - 501 XB2-8401-007 315 - 514
WS3-5730-000 B - J803 XB1-2300-407 101 - 506 XB2-8401-607 102 - 508
WS3-5730-000 B - J804 XB1-2300-407 330 - 501 XB3-6300-600 101 - 503
WS3-5730-000 B - J805 XB1-2300-407 360 - 501 XB3-6300-600 102 - 504
WS3-5730-000 B - J806 XB1-2300-407 537 - 501 XB3-6300-600 260 - 501
WS3-5759-000 B - J70 XB1-2300-409 900 - 26 XB3-6300-600 310 - 501
WS3-5759-000 B - J93 XB1-2300-507 104 - 509 XB3-6300-800 104 - 503
WS3-5759-000 B - J1505 XB1-2300-607 104 - 502 XB3-6300-800 106 - 502
WS3-5822-000 B - J802 XB1-2300-607 130 - 503 XB3-6300-800 106 - 505
WS3-5824-000 B - J802 XB1-2300-607 351A - 507 XB3-6300-800 107 - 502
WS4-0217-000 B - J12 XB1-2300-607 535 - 501 XB3-6300-800 120 - 501
WS4-0217-000 B - J13 XB1-2300-607 910 - 501 XB3-6300-800 270 - 501
WS4-0219-000 B - J12 XB1-2300-807 108 - 503 XB3-6300-800 272 - 502
WS5-5074-000 B - J1 XB1-2300-807 360 - 504 XB3-6300-800 315 - 501
WT1-5155-000 B - J52 XB1-2400-407 102 - 511 XB3-6300-800 351 - 501
WT1-5155-000 B - J558 XB1-2400-603 910 - 502 XB3-6300-800 351A - 501
WT1-5155-000 B - J608 XB1-2400-607 105 - 502 XB3-6300-800 365 - 501
WT1-5155-000 B - J612 XB1-2400-607 107 - 503 XB3-6400-800 100 - 502
WT1-5155-000 B - J616 XB1-2400-607 108 - 504 XB3-6400-800 101 - 509
WT1-5155-000 B - J620 XB1-2400-607 305 - 501 XB3-6400-800 102 - 502
WT2-5565-000 102 - 18C XB1-2400-607 360 - 502 XB3-6400-800 103 - 508
WT2-5565-000 105 - 29 XB1-2400-607 900 - 502 XB3-6400-800 104 - 508
WT2-5565-000 260 - 3B XB1-2400-607 930 - 501 XB3-6400-800 105 - 501
WT2-5565-000 270 - 3B XB1-2400-807 100 - 505 XB3-6400-800 106 - 504
1-16
NUMERICAL INDEX
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220
FIGURE FIGURE FIGURE
PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER &
KEY NO. KEY NO. KEY NO
XB3-6400-800 107 - 504 XB6-7300-607 321 - 502 XD2-1100-502 315 - 510
XB3-6400-800 108 - 501 XB6-7300-607 900 - 504 XD2-1100-502 330 - 507
XB3-6400-800 271 - 501 XB6-7300-805 351A - 510 XD2-1100-502 350 - 503
XB3-6400-800 330 - 502 XB6-7300-807 103 - 506 XD2-1100-502 351 - 504
XB3-6400-800 351 - 502 XB6-7300-807 300 - 502 XD2-1100-502 351A - 504
XB3-6400-800 351A - 502 XB6-7301-607 900 - 508 XD2-1100-502 360 - 508
XB3-6400-800 360 - 503 XB6-7400-607 350 - 501 XD2-1100-502 361 - 504
XB4-5300-607 104 - 501 XB6-7400-607 361 - 508 XD2-1100-502 365 - 503
XB4-5300-607 560 - 502 XD1-1104-135 105 - 506 XD2-1100-502 535 - 506
XB4-5300-807 100 - 501 XD1-1104-135 321 - 503 XD2-1100-502 560 - 504
XB4-5300-807 101 - 501 XD1-1104-135 360 - 506 XD2-1100-642 103 - 502
XB4-5300-807 103 - 505 XD1-1104-137 365 - 504 XD2-1100-642 271 - 505
XB4-5300-807 125 - 501 XD1-1104-138 810 - 506 XD2-1100-642 315 - 512
XB4-5300-807 125A - 501 XD1-1104-635 351A - 508 XD2-1100-642 330 - 508
XB4-5300-807 130 - 502 XD1-1105-235 900 - 509 XD2-1100-642 351 - 505
XB4-5300-807 272 - 503 XD1-1106-212 270 - 503 XD2-1100-642 351A - 505
XB4-5300-807 321 - 501 XD1-1106-212 535 - 504 XD2-1100-642 360 - 509
XB4-5300-807 351 - 503 XD1-1106-222 102 - 503 XD2-1100-642 535 - 507
XB4-5300-807 351A - 503 XD1-1106-235 316 - 502 XD2-1100-642 810 - 504
XB4-5300-807 361 - 503 XD1-1108-212 535 - 511 XD2-1100-802 102 - 501
XB4-5300-807 535 - 503 XD1-1108-225 535 - 505 XD2-2300-402 350 - 504
XB4-5300-807 537 - 502 XD1-1108-239 100 - 508 XD2-2300-602 330 - 504
XB4-5300-807 980 - 501 XD1-3100-407 108 - 505 XD2-2300-602 360 - 510
XB4-5300-807 981 - 501 XD1-4200-402 910 - 505 XD3-1300-102 101 - 507
XB4-5301-007 130 - 504 XD2-1100-242 105 - 507 XD3-1300-102 360 - 511
XB4-5301-007 315 - 502 XD2-1100-242 351 - 506 XD3-2200-102 315 - 513
XB4-5400-807 100 - 503 XD2-1100-242 351A - 506 XD3-2200-102 361 - 505
XB4-5400-807 315 - 508 XD2-1100-282 315 - 516 XD3-2200-102 560 - 501
XB4-5400-807 316 - 501 XD2-1100-282 360 - 513 XD3-2200-122 310 - 504
XB4-5400-807 330 - 503 XD2-1100-282 361 - 509 XD3-2200-122 330 - 505
XB4-5400-807 350 - 502 XD2-1100-322 272 - 504 XD3-2200-122 360 - 512
XB4-5400-807 360 - 505 XD2-1100-322 321 - 504 XD3-2200-122 361 - 506
XB4-5401-007 100 - 504 XD2-1100-322 330 - 506 XD3-2200-142 272 - 506
XB4-5401-007 315 - 503 XD2-1100-322 360 - 507 XD3-2200-142 315 - 515
XB4-5401-207 310 - 502 XD2-1100-322 810 - 503 XD3-2200-162 280 - 502
XB4-5403-007 192 - 501 XD2-1100-402 361 - 501 XD3-2200-182 271 - 506
XB4-5403-507 190 - 501 XD2-1100-502 103 - 501 XD3-2200-202 535 - 508
XB4-5403-507 194 - 501 XD2-1100-502 104 - 507 XD3-2300-142 810 - 505
XB4-6260-807 105 - 510 XD2-1100-502 125 - 502 XF9-0733-000 360 - 65
XB4-7300-609 100 - 507 XD2-1100-502 125A - 502 XF9-0734-000 360 - 66
XB6-7300-407 103 - 507 XD2-1100-502 270 - 502 XF9-0735-000 360 - 67
XB6-7300-407 104 - 505 XD2-1100-502 272 - 505 XF9-0736-000 351 - 31
XB6-7300-607 271 - 502 XD2-1100-502 280 - 503 XF9-0736-000 351A - 31
XB6-7300-607 280 - 501 XD2-1100-502 310 - 503 XG9-0177-000 102 - 6
1-17
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
NUMERICAL INDEX
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER C3200/C3220
FIGURE FIGURE FIGURE
PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER & PARTS NUMBER &
KEY NO. KEY NO. KEY NO
XG9-0211-000 315 - 7
XG9-0245-000 535 - 26
XG9-0264-000 271 - 11
XG9-0415-000 535 - 27
XG9-0476-000 102 - 5
XG9-0477-000 810 - 12
XG9-0478-000 810 - 14
XG9-0513-000 351A - 47
XG9-0520-000 330 - 21
XG9-0520-000 360 - 68
XG9-0532-000 280 - 10
XH9-0059-000 102 - 3
XZ1-1300-605 351A - 509
XZ9-0428-000 101 - 38
XZ9-0556-000 351A - 50
1-18
iR C3200/C3220/Color imageRUNNER
C3200/C3220
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
220V 50Hz F14-2591-000UKF00001-
220V 50Hz F14-2594-000JAF00001-
100V F14-5501-000JNG00001-
100V F14-5516-000JLZ00001-
230V F14-5527-000JNL00001-
230V F14-5528-000JPK00001-
120V F14-5536-000JNC00001-
120V F14-5537-000JND00001-
120V F14-5539-000JPM00001-
230V F14-5547-000JNP00001-
230V F14-5548-000JNL00001-
230V F14-5557-000JNF00001-
230V F14-5558-000JPG00001-
230V F14-5567-000JNQ00001-
230V F14-5577-000JNJ00001-
230V F14-5578-000JPH00001-
230V F14-5587-000JNK00001-
230V F14-5588-000JPJ00001-
230V F14-5597-000JNE00001-
230V F14-5598-000JPF00001-
F24-2105-000
100V F24-5206-000
100V F24-5215-000XJV00001-
230V F24-5236-000
230V F24-5245-000
F26-3201-000
F31-9751-000
F32-3501-000
Contents
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
930 DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY ............................................................2-110
980 H.V. TRANSFORMER PCB ASSEMBLY........................................................2-111
981 2ND TRANSFER H.V.T. PCB ASSEMBLY.....................................................2-112
B LIST OF CONNECTORS ................................................................................2-113
FIGURE A
ASSEMBLY LOCATION DIAGRAM
321
130
120
537
351 351A
351
191
CASSETTE
300
272
INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER
BELT DRIVE ASSEMBLY
271
FIXING DRIVE ASSEMBLY
280
260 193
981
2-1
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER BELT ASSEMBLY MULTI FEED TRAY ASSEMBLY
535 316
560
310
810 315
365
125 125A
2-2
DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY
DC
930
CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
900
910
980
270
190
2-3
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
PLAIN TYPE
DUPLEX TYPE
194
360
2-4
READER ASSEMBLY
SEE CATALOG
Color Image Reader-C1
2-5
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 100
EXTERNAL COVERS, PANELS, ETC.
PRINTER TYPE PRINTER TYPE
36 36 21
36
PRINTER TYPE 502 5 502
43 37
40 43 50 503
8
41
PRINTER TYPE 45
37
51
4 507
19 47 50
6 508 50 507
48
27 17A
502 17 47
508
12 9
42 501 46
38 51 14 53 23
20
7
502 51 56 49 10
100V
22D 11
49
52
22G 22B
27 501
39 22F 22C
22E
33 34 34
35
22F 502
29 2
33 22F
22A 22E 504 22C 22G
28 22E
22A 22F 1
25 32 35 22E
26 28 EXCEPT S3200,V3200 18C
16 22 18E
505 18E 55
24 505
SEE FIGURE
18A
125,125A 18B
SEE FIGURE 130
30 3 18E
PLAIN TYPE 15 54
EXCEPT S3200,V3200 18E18D 44
13
18
2-6
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-7
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
28 FB2-4456-000 2 SEAL
29 XA9-0774-000 2 SCREW,RS,M4X16
34 FS5-9274-000 2 SCREW,STEPPED,M5X2.5
MLT,MLX,JCK,JCL,JBC
44 FB6-4923-000 1 EMBLEM
JBQ,JCJ,JAF,RQY
2-8
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
MLH,MLW,MSN,SSY,RLZ
44 FB6-3894-000 1 EMBLEM
, RQZ
JNB,JPK,JNL,JPG,JPH,JP
44 FB6-6386-000 1 EMBLEM
J,JPF
54 XA9-0783-000 1 SCREW,RS,M4X12
2-9
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 101
MACHINE FRONT PLATE
10F
(J714)
10A (J708) 10
10E (J713)
501 10J
501
10B 10G 509
10D 41C
10H
9 41B
509
41D
509
41D
7 6 10C
41A
509
6
46 501
20
40
506 18
47 41
502
(J707) 509 38
(SL2) 45
1 509
2
43 509 50 13 19
507
TO FIGURE 104 505
44 42 Z
38 509
502 19
505 17
509 509 19
509 3 509 5 505 16
SEE FIGURE 191 2
1 505
30 503 15 23
509 29 19
27 28 14
32 502
503
22
31 33
35 34
503 502
48
24
509
36 503
8 37
503 25
26
49
26 12
21
21 4
26 21 11
2-10
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
6 XA9-0838-000 2 SCREW,W/WASHER,M4X16
23 FB6-3202-000 4 BUSHING
2-11
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
33 FS5-6949-000 4 SPACER
2-12
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-13
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 102
INTERNAL COMPONENTS 1
502
502
501
502 5
(J1125)
502 A
(J1125) 22 502
26A
26
26
OLD B
28
NEW 502
19
502 10
100/220/240V
(J12) 22
502 508 1
SEE FIGURE
305
23
502 504 (J11) 27 508
24
502
503 4 502
6 25
7 23
503 504
8 9 502 11
(J808) (SW2) 10
(SW3)
(J807)
(J810)
502 2
12 (J809) 5 A 502
(J810)
9 8 16 (J809) 501
18B 503 502 511
7 14 15
18C 6
503
(J801) (J808) (J11)
13
17
18
(J807)
B
18A SEE FIGURE
305
18A
100/220/240V
502
502
3
2-14
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
5 XG9-0476-000 2 BUSHING
2-15
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-16
FIGURE 103
INTERNAL COMPONENTS 2
6A
6
(J953)
7
507
(J961)
(EV1)
508 27
26
507
508
8
507
3 22
SEE FIGURE 535
4
505 506
25
24
23
506
21
508
508
2
508
1 508
15
508 17
502
502
10 508
19 14
14 9
12
501 508
11
502
502
11
501
12
13
2-17
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-18
FIGURE 104
INTERNAL COMPONENTS 3
508
33 508
508 507
508
D
C TO FIGURE
509
B 508
101
A 20 Z
D 31
5
C 509
3
508 508
509
508
2
508
501
B
502
11 SEE FIGURE 537
16 25
17 501
505
509 508
503 26
A 26
21 23 4 505
508
13 24
10 7 1 508
19
8
508 501
14
6
502 12
9
22 508
15
18
10
2-19
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
12 FB6-3117-000 1 FEEDSCREW
13 FB6-3118-000 1 SHEET
16 FB6-3152-000 1 GUIDE
18 FS6-1060-000 1 BUSHING
2-20
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-21
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 105
INTERNAL COMPONENTS 4
23 24
(J620)
29 (J115)
22 (J616) (J117)
(J604)
(J603)
21 (J612) (J601) (J619)
501
(J120) (J600) (J615)
(J611)
(J608) (J118) (J607) 502
29
501
(J116)
29
(J114)
29 (J952)
25 501
(J951)
27
A
SEE FIGURE460
5 510
B 12
511
511
501
(J750) SEE FIGURE
321 (J537)
28
6B 28
19E (J511) (J1123)
(J755) 6
(J702) 506 511 26C
7 6A 2 (J510)
19C 8 511
19 511 3 29
(J562)
1
(J708) 19D 26
4
(J709) 19B
(J707) (J716) 502
28
14 20A
(PS5)
503 (J709) (J800)
503 A
18 (J96) 11
(MSW5)
(MSW6) (J95)
501
13 18
15 (J802)
9
20
B 17 10
501 507
506
16
504
2-22
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
8 FS5-9758-000 2 SCREW,STEPPED,M3
2-23
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-24
FIGURE 106
INTERNAL COMPONENTS 5
504
S3200,V3200
504
16
SEE FIGURE 310
15
504
504 6
SEE FIGURE
315
504
SEE FIGURE 310
14
13
(J703)
(J701)
504
SEE FIGURE 365
2 5
SEE FIGURE
502
10 504
351,351A
504
504
504
4 504
504
502
SEE FIGURE 810
11 504 SEE FIGURE 560
504
DUPLEX TYPE
505
SEE FIGURE 360
504
9 7
1
8 1
12
8
505 (J442)
(J403)
(J404)
SEE FIGURE 330
2-25
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
JPN EXCEPT
6 FB6-3526-000 1 LABEL, SIZE, MANUAL FEED
S3200,V3200
DUPLEX TYPE
12 FG3-2299-000 1 CABLE, DUPLEXING CONNECT
J403,404,442
2-26
FIGURE 107
MACHINE REAR PLATE 1
504 5A 4
3 504
501 (J720)
(J10) 504
8
SEE FIGURE 260
1
504
SEE FIGURE 280
504
504 504
504
2-27
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-28
FIGURE 108
MACHINE REAR PLATE 2
14 501
(J769) 501
(J111)
501 501
501
SEE FIGURE 930
501
3
1
504 501 501
PRINTER
TYPE 505
13 9 501
(J83)
(J561) 11
(J565) 501
503 10A
10C
504 506
(J558)
505 DUPLEX TYPE
(J963)
10B
10 (J962)
(J950) 2
501
503
501
501
SEE FIGURE 980
8 501 12
6
SEE FIGURE 910
502 5 502
501
SEE FIGURE 900
501 501
502
2-29
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-30
FIGURE 120
DOOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY
6
4 5
501
8 9
(PS23)
(J811)
(MSW1)
(MSW2)
3
501
2
7
1
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
6 FS1-9010-000 1 SCREW,STEPPED,M3X2.2
2-31
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 125
VERTICAL PATH PANEL ASSEMBLY (OLD)
4 8
3
19
502
20 5
7
501
21
12
20
17 17 6 13 502
18 18 14
17
17
18 13
18
17 9
6
18
17 16
18
15
10
11
501
2-32
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
17 FS6-1059-000 8 BUSHING
2-33
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 125A
VERTICAL PATH PANEL ASSEMBLY (NEW)
4 8
3
19
502
20 5
7
501
21
12
20
17 17 6 13 502
18 18 14
17
17
18 13
18
17 9
6
18
17 16
18
15
10
11
501
2-34
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
17 FS6-1059-000 8 BUSHING
2-35
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 130
CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY
3
4
9
7
21 1
8
6
12 19 10
(J1114)
(J1110)
18 (J1116)
(J3)
16
(J1111) (J1117)
(J2)
502
13
503
11 502
20
503
(J1112) 20
503
20
504 501
15
(J1) 14 503
503 (J1113)
17
2-36
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
MSN,SSX,QLZ,SLZ,TLZ,
Fig.130 FG6-8934-000 1 CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY UKF,JCK,JBC,JBQ,JCJ,
JAF
2-37
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 190
FIXING EXHAUST FAN ASSEMBLY
1
501
(J812)
(FM2) 3
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-38
FIGURE 191
CLEANING COOLING FAN ASSEMBLY
(FM4)
(J716)
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-39
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 192
MACHINE EXHAUST FAN ASSEMBLY
(J820)
(FM3)
501
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-40
FIGURE 193
DELIVERY COOLING FAN ASSEMBLY
2 (FM5)
(J700)
1 501
NOTE : This assembly does not include the part shown with key No.3
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-41
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 194
MULTI FAN ASSEMBLY (DUPLEX TYPE)
(J721)
(FM6)
501
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-42
FIGURE 251
DRUM DRIVE ASSEMBLY
4
(J301)
(J303) (J302)
(J304)
1 (J311) (J309)
(J312) (J310)
(J70M) 2
(J70K)
(J70Y)
(J70C)
(J654)
(J655) (J663)
(J662)
(J661)
(J660)
2-43
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-44
FIGURE 260
PICK-UP MOTOR DRIVE ASSEMBLY
1 2
(M6)
501
2
(J854)
(J851)
(M7)
3
(J860)
3B
501 1 3A
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-45
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 270
DEVELOPING DRIVE ASSEMBLY
502
503
2
501 502
503
(M15)
(J653)
2
502
503
2 502
(M14) 503
(J652)
2
1
(J653)
501 1
(J652)
3B 501 (M13)
(J701) (J651)
(J651)
1
(J650)
3 501
(M12)
(J650)
(J769) (J110)
501 1
3A
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-46
FIGURE 271
INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER BELT DRIVE ASSEMBLY
10
506 505
1
11 11
1 504
505
2 4
507
9
507
5
505
8
505 501
506
6
(M1)
505
(J93)
(J814)
505
502
502
2-47
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
1 FB2-6285-000 2 SHIM
2-48
FIGURE 272
TONER CARTRIDGE DRIVE ASSEMBLY
4
1
12
(J309)
(J310)
(M20) (J668) 14 (J311)
(J669) (M21) (J670) (J301) (J312)
504
(J671) (M22) (J672) 11
(J302)
13A (J673) (M23) (J674) (J303) 5
(J675) (J304)
13 15 505
3 504
(PS1) (J676) 503 11
8 (PS2) (J677)
(PS3) (J678) 5
(PS4) (J679) 505
2 501 3
505
6
506
502
505
7
506 10
9
3
505
3
505
2-49
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
3 FS5-1581-000 4 BUSHING
11 RB2-7043-000 2 COUPLING
J669,671,673,675 J676-
13 FG3-2344-000 1 CABLE, TONER CARTRIDGE
679
2-50
FIGURE 280
FIXING DRIVE ASSEMBLY
503
1
503
7
8
3
503
6 10 501
2
503 503
5
9
5
503
2
502
4
503
11 10
(M24)
(J813) 501
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2 FS5-6488-000 2 WASHER
9 FB6-3237-000 1 WASHER
2-51
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 300
CASSETTE
17A
28
501
14
14
17
501
27
5
10
3
21
2
19
6 8
19
21
7
16
22
4 12
502
18
13
15
16 26
25
20
11
23
24 1
9
NOTE : This assembly does not include the parts shown with key No. 26 and 28.
2-52
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
5 FB6-3481-000 1 RACK, 1
6 FB6-3482-000 1 RACK, 2
22 FU3-0294-000 1 GEAR, 7T
2-53
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-54
FIGURE 305
CASSETTE HEATER ASSEMBLY (OPTION)
1
7 (J105)
2A
2
4 (J12) (J815)
3
(J13)
(J1120)
(SW53)
6
(J1120) 2B
5
(J816)
(J11)
(J11)
501
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-55
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 310
PAPER PICK-UP ASSEMBLY
52 504
503 56
23
53
32 29
504
(PS16,17)
(J858,864) 28
58 30
502
501 (SL3,4)
(J857,863) 56
43 35
27 18
(PS7,19) 19
(J859,865) 40
(PS14,20) 28 50 39
(J856,862) 24
(PS15,18) 45
(J855,861) 49
57 51 11
28 28 46
(J850,852) 39
(J858,864) 44
59 15 47
35 12
(J859,865)
(J857,863) 502 48
30 38
(J855,861) 42
59A 502 20
(J856,862)
16
8
6 4
35 33
10 31
9
37
7 5
54
3
35
504
25 2
13
55 502
36
26 60 22
34
14 17 1
22
505 41
21
2-56
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
PS7,14-20
28 FH7-7312-000 4 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER J859,856,855,858
J864,861,865,862
30 FS1-1205-000 2 BUSHING
2-57
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
31 FS5-1597-000 1 BUSHING
32 FS6-1063-000 1 BUSHING
54 RB1-6539-000 1 DAMPER
55 RB1-8945-000 1 JOINT
56 RS5-1567-000 2 BUSHING
58 XA9-0656-000 1 SCREW,RS,M3X10
J850,855-859 J852,861-
59 FG3-2302-000 1 CABLE, PAPER PICK-UP
865
60 FS1-1213-000 1 BUSHING
2-58
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-59
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 315
MULTI FEED ASSEMBLY
501 77
B 83
503
79 78
504
501
A
502 84
16 82 52 SEE FIGURE 316
44
52
44
20
31
55
17 55
10 2
19
51 B
510 54
48
7 50 3
88
6
A
58
512
5
41
81
26
48
21 510
61 51
11 12
18
40
(PS26)
41
5
(J764) 512
(OHP1,2) 59
73 (J765,766)
: Figure 316
2-60
501
1 39
4 (J762) 64
34A 40
501 (PS10)
38 (SL1) 67 35 36 80
(J760)
33
(M9)
(J761)
(M8) 34A
(J763)
28
34
501
508 57
63 9 8
38
D C 27 512
62 29
56 35
501
DUPLEX TYPE 14 37
510 65
513 66 30
68
512 13
60 88
7
510 32
71 46
43
504 47
510 72
65
513
510
43 C
75A 75B
42
(J762)
68
D (J756)
76
70
75
(J757)
(J760) 514
87 (J755) (J761) 76A 15
74
86 (J763) 515
(J766) 23 69
(J764)
516
87 (J765) 49
508
85 501
86 44
52 504
25 25
22
501 44 516 24
52
DUPLEX TYPE
2-61
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
5 FA1-0056-000 2 BUSHING
29 FB6-3463-000 1 CLUTCH
2-62
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
42 FS5-1209-000 1 BUSHING
46 FS5-1597-000 1 BUSHING
48 FS6-1055-000 2 BUSHING
50 FS6-1058-000 1 BUSHING
2-63
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
72 RB2-5850-000 2 PRISM
74 RS5-1567-000 1 BUSHING
86 FS5-9761-000 2 SCREW,STEPPED,M3
2-64
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
88 FB2-6285-000 2 SHIM
2-65
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 316
MULTI FEED TRAY ASSEMBLY
501
12
(PS9)
9
(J759)
(J758)
13
(J756)
7
10 (J758)
11 502
14
6 501
: Figure 315
2-66
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
7 FB6-3457-000 1 RACK
2-67
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 321
PATTERN READER ASSEMBLY
502
3
502
4
502
7 2
503
504
501
7
1
501 503
504
(J964)
9
501
(J965)
(TPS1)
(J960) 6
501
9 5A
8
5B
(J952)
(J951)
5A
10
(J964)
10A (J957) 5
(J960)
10A
(J959)
(J965)
2-68
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J951,952,957,959,960
10 FG3-2318-000 1 CABLE, REGIST. PAPER DETECT
J964,965
2-69
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 330
FIXING FEEDER ASSEMBLY (PLAIN TYPE)
502
508
26
505 12
2
507 502
1
13 502
28
502
19
29 25 A
31
21
17
508 506 504
18
27
505 503
10
9
20 7
502
23 504 11
22
503
502 7
15 A 18
14
502 506
4
8
501
506 502
5 502
24
30
15 6
16
502
3
2-70
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
11 XA9-1412-000 1 NUT,HEX,M5
17 FS1-1465-000 1 BUSHING
19 FS5-6950-000 1 COLLAR
2-71
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-72
FIGURE 350
FACE-UP DELIVERY ASSEMBLY (PLAIN TYPE)
16
18
503
12
502
13
503
11
15
B
6 502
A
22
22
5 19
22 8
20
502
504
21
3
C
2
501
502
A
C 9
4
10
1
23
17 14
503
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-73
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
11 FS5-6946-000 1 ROLLER, 2
17 RS5-1060-000 1 BUSHING
22 FB6-3936-000 3 PAD
2-74
FIGURE 351
DELIVERY VERTICAL PATH ASSEMBLY (OLD)
(J710)
36 14
(J703) 32
(J706) 14
(J712) (J711) 506
(J701)
5
(J705) 506
13 A
7
(J704)
17 20 26
16 (PS8)
502 (J710) 20
20
A
20
(PS12)
23 (J711) 506
35 (M11) 22
(J705) 19 17 37 8
504 3
29 17 4
11
12 2
(PS6) 30
(J706) 8
501
(M10) 503
16 (J704)
502
28
25 15 505
24
29 1
(PS13)
(J712)
502 27 18
17
9 21
18
27 31
9 21
6
10
2-75
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
4 FB5-9803-000 4 RING
8 FB6-3877-000 2 COLLAR
PS6,8,12,13
17 FH7-7312-000 4 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER
J706,710,711,712
18 FS1-1187-000 2 BUSHING
19 FS2-1544-000 1 BUSHING
28 RS5-1324-000 1 BUSHING
2-76
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
35 XA9-0724-000 2 SCREW,RS,M3X8
2-77
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 351A
DELIVERY VERTICAL PATH ASSEMBLY (NEW)
36 14
(J710)
(J703) 32 14
(J706) 506
5
(J712) (J711) 506
(J701)
(J705) 13 A
7
26
(J704)
A
(PS12)
(J711) 506
22
19 17 37 8
4 3
4
2
30
8
(J1125)
503
28 42
501 505
17
(J1126)
(PS6)
11 (J706) 48
12
48A
507
503 (FM8)
(J1126)
503 43
503
49
510
503 508
50
(PS13) 503
(J712) 509
502 17
503
15
2-78
16 (PS8) 17 20
502 (J710) 20
20
20
(M11) 23
35
(J705)
504
45
501
(M10)
16 (J704)
502
15
25
24
45 41
46 A
40
45
21
B
44
A 47
6
47 46
40
45
31
21
38
41
46
40
44
B 47
47 46
40
39
2-79
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
4 FB5-9803-000 8 RING
8 FB6-3877-000 2 COLLAR
PS6,8,12,13
17 FH7-7312-000 4 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER
J706,710,711,712
19 FS2-1544-000 1 BUSHING
28 RS5-1324-000 1 BUSHING
35 XA9-0724-000 2 SCREW,RS,M3X8
2-80
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
40 FB6-5790-000 4 BUSHING
45 FS6-1067-000 4 BUSHING
50 XZ9-0556-000 1 BUSHING
2-81
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 360
DUPLEXING ASSEMBLY (DUPLEX TYPE)
502 30
509
58
512
14 503
(M26)
(J408)
501 35 508
8
B 68
71 60
44
61
62 31
55 507
16 39
505 509
503 (J406) 59 38
512
79 (J407)
504
(J414)
507 64 (PS22) 73
43 510 78A
501
27 26 78
20 505
50 502 505 72
B 76
505 77
(M25)
(J413)
74
32 28
501 53 510
503 52
505 26
6 43
22 38 502
507 507
7 506
(PS21) 21
(J409) 54
23 505 24
511 29 501
51
503 502
19 501
503
48 504 40
37 70
SEE FIGURE 361
(SL5) 25
(J412)
33
503
: Figure 361
2-82
9
49
34
513
49
41
1 513
63
508 63 1
508 41
2 17 18
5 63
508
46 508
4 63
508
507 (J411)
508 63
(CL2)
2 36
508 63 67
5 47
66 508
45
56
42
15 57
68 13
A 505
15 A
46
3 12
505
68 11 (J410)
505 (CL1)
57
10 (J406) 508 5
36 45 2
507 65
(J411) 5
2
69A 69
(J408) 69B
(J413)
(J409) (J407)
69A
(J410)
69A
(J412)
2-83
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
5 FB6-3576-000 4 SPACER
28 XA9-1412-000 1 NUT,HEX,M5
2-84
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
39 FS1-1465-000 1 BUSHING
44 FS5-6950-000 1 COLLAR
2-85
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-86
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-87
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 361
EXTERNAL DELIVERY COVER ASSEMBLY (DUPLEX
TYPE)
503
43
38
19 506
501
42
21
44
38
506
26
26
24 33
18
26 23
17 25
37 508 502
26 41
24B 504
30
503
501
36
504 4
34
10 505
504 A 27
41
22
35
26
32 28 40
A 26
504
12
508
1 5
31 26
509 503
31
9 29
15 2
45 32 2
41 504 29
509
16
3
39
6 16 14
7
20 13
503
11 8
6
: Figure 360
2-88
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-89
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
39 RB9-0255-000 1 ROLLER
40 RS5-1060-000 1 BUSHING
2-90
FIGURE 365
MULTI PAPER FEED MOUNT ASSEMBLY
21
501 7 25
17 501
26
26
1A
1B
(J404) DUPLEX TYPE
501 1
29A 16
(J403)
22
(J406)
2 27 29
504 (J752)
501
(J405) 15
1C
(J754)
2
19
24
19
3
(PS24) 503
(J405)
DUPLEX TYPE
12
DUPLEX TYPE
501 6
9
11 14
13
28
501 501 4
8
DUPLEX TYPE
501
23
2-91
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
21 FS5-9753-000 1 SCREW,STEPPED,M3
2-92
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-93
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 460
LASER UNIT
NOTE : This assembly does not include the part shown with key No. 1.
Key No. 1
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-94
FIGURE 535
INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER BELT ASSEMBLY
11
25
20
503 508
15
27 37 10
506 507
504
29 26 27
507
22 20
17
30 36 B
34 35
32
31
16
27
502 11 507 505
502 6 21
502 503 504
33 506
503 507 505
20
503 10 507
502 26
14 25
20
506 B
23 9
507 19 506
24
18
4
507 6 A 503
511 C 13
5 503
19 503
12
2
503 18
511 507
5
507 C
A 4 511 503
507
7 8
503
1
3
501
503
503 28
501
2-95
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
4 FB6-2936-000 2 BUSHING
10 FB6-2944-000 4 BUSHING
11 FB6-2945-000 4 BUSHING
15 FB6-2957-000 1 ROLLER
17 FB6-2974-000 1 SCRAPER
18 FS6-1062-000 2 BUSHING
30 FB6-2954-000 4 CONTACT
2-96
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-97
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 537
TRANSFER CLEANING ASSEMBLY
4
501 502
3
6
2
3
501
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
4 FS1-9010-000 1 SCREW,STEPPED,M3X2.2
6 XA9-0624-000 9 SCREW,M3X4
2-98
FIGURE 560
SECONDARY TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
9 12G
501
9
12
12F
12D
12E
12B
12D
9
501
12A
9
12E
504
7A 4
11 502
1
10
8
10
502
2-99
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-100
FIGURE 810
FIXING ASSEMBLY
53
502 38 52
(J802) 501
506 (J802)
(TH2)
(J805)
(J805) (J802)
(J804)
(J803)
(J806)
43F
(H1)
A
A (H2)
13 10
27
11 (TH1)
501
28 (J806)
501 506
23
501
34 43C 43E 43B 501
19 43G 506
501 506
501 (TP1)
501
43D
504
1 26 9
51 3 36 11
45 8 43A
501 504
25
12 24 49
16 6 B 2 43
4
30 46 501
48 15
33
35 (H3) 504
41 32
31 40
14 26
47 B 7
504 505
503 44
20 39
29 21
42
42 12
47 46 25
(PS25) 1
(J803)
5 18 33
(PS27) 37
(J804) 14
32 31
50 41
501
17
501
22
506
2-101
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
11 XA9-1484-000 2 SCREW,TP,M4X20
25 FB6-3667-000 2 BUSHING
2-102
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
31 FA3-0652-000 2 BUSHING
45 FS5-6947-000 1 SPACER
2-103
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-104
FIGURE 900
CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
11 11A
(J1122) 19 (J536) (J535)
(J1400)
(J512) (J521)
(J557) 11A 11C
(J539) 11B
(J1402)
(J536)
(J535)
(J1401)
1
(J521)
(J1121) 504
(J1304) (J1520)
21 (J1522)
(J1309) 504
(J1305)
(J1336) (J1315) A
(J1316) 20 504
25 504
EXCEPT
24 MLT,MLX,JCK,JCL,JBC
26 JBQ,JCJ,JAF,RQZ,RQY 502
5 503
(J1210) 504
509
(J1512)
508
12
18
A (J540) S3200,V3200
504 12A 503 (J523)
(J540) (J1510) S3200,V3200
2 (FM7)
7 13 504
(J524) 501 504
6 (J113)
8
(J1216) 13A
(J112) 504 15
(J44)
(J1208) (J1318) 9
3
(J1215)
(J514) 504
(J1311)
(J1225)
504
(J1213)
(J1202)
14
(J1513) 17 (J1201) 22
504
(J1505) 16 MLT,MLX,JCK,JCL,JBC
(J1511) (J538) JBQ,JCJ,JAF,RQZ,RQY
(J1504) 120/220/240V
(J1207)
(J1503) (J1507) 504
10 (J1203)
2-105
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
MLT,MLX,JCK,JCL,JBC
4 FG3-2729-000 1 UFR BOARD PCB ASSEMBLY JBQ,JCJ,JAF,RQZ,RQY
J1207
7 XA9-0896-000 4 SCREW
J44,514,538,1208,
J1213,1225,1311,1318
10 FG3-2644-000 1 CABLE, CONTROLLER-POWER SUPPLY
J1503-1505
J1507,1511,1513
J512,521,535,536,539
J557,1121,1122,1304
11 FG3-2645-000 1 CABLE, CONTROLLER-I/O
J1305,1309,1315,1316
J1336
S3200,V3200
13 FG3-3287-000 1 CABLE, COIN VENDER
J523,524,1510
EXCEPT
JLZ,JNL,JND,JPM,JNP,JN
18 FG6-9676-000 1 DISTRIBUTION BOARD ASSEMBLY
F,JNQ,JNJ,JNK,JNE,MSK
,MSN,MSL
2-106
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
JLZ,JNL,JND,JPM,JNP,JN
F,JNQ,JNJ,JNK,JNE,JNB,
18 FG6-9666-000 1 DISTRIBUTION BOARD ASSEMBLY
JPK,JNC,JNK,JPG,JPH,J
PJ,JPF
J1520,1522 iR C3200
20 FY7-0376-000 1 NETWORK BOARD PCB ASSEMBLY
Series
J1520,1522 iR C3220
20 FG6-9678-020 1 NETWORK BOARD PCB ASSEMBLY
Series
iR C3200Series 120/220/
22 WA7-3053-000 1 DIMM, M390S3253DT1-C7A, SD-RAM
240V J1201
2-107
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 910
DC POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
504
(J992)
(FM1)
501
6
10 501
(ELCB1)
(J69)
4
(J1000) (J1)
505
7 502
4A 503
(100V)
(120V)
3
(220V RQY) (220V RQY)
2 (220/240V)
(EXCEPT QLZ,JBC,RLZ)
(240V RLZ)
1
11 11
FOR Cassette Feeding Unit-X1 (240V QLZ,JBC)
FOR Plain Pedestal-C1 9
8
2-108
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
220/240V EXCEPT
1 FH2-7080-000 1 CORD, POWER SUPPLY
QLZ,JBC,RLZ J1
2-109
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 930
DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY
501
NOTE : This assembly does not include the part shown with key No. 501.
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-110
FIGURE 980
H.V. TRANSFORMER PCB ASSEMBLY
501
(J1102)
3
(J75)
(J92)
2
(J1103)
501
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-111
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
FIGURE 981
2ND TRANSFER H.V.T. PCB ASSEMBLY
1
3A
(J1105)
3
(J95)
501
501
2
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-112
FIGURE B
LIST OF CONNECTORS
J117
J120 J115
J118
J116
J603
J620 J618
J604
J114 J616
J617
J612
J614
J608
J610
J606
J600 J619
J605 J615
J601
J611
J609
J613
J607
J106
J127
J769 J564
J710
J88
J703
J111
J701
J711 J100
J705 J98
J712
J706 J702
J704
J71 J64
J562 J708
J716
J707
J709
J714
J713
2-113
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
J512
J539
J1122
J536 J1304
J1121 J1309
J1315 J1305
J521 J1336
J1316 J3
J535 J1302 J511
J1318 J1210 J1113 J1116
J510 J1115 J1117
J520
J1114 J1123
J540
J537
J514
J1213 J1513 J2
J1511 J1
J1512 J531
J522 J1110
J1507 J1111
J1112
J557
J523
J1510 J811
J524 J720
J129 J768
J721 J953
S3200,V3200 J132 J961
J820 J104
J105
J851
J858
J854
J850
J812 J860 J859
J857 J852
J856
J855 J864
J700
J863
J865
J992 J861 J862
2-114
J951
J952
J560
J565 J958
J60 J950
J59 J960
J1508
J963 J962 J959
J96 J66
J74
J67
J802
J95
J52
J62
J759
J756
J762
J758
J763 J757
J108 J760
J761
J107 J750 J752
J801
J808
J810
J807
J809
2-115
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
J123
J124
J125
J126
J654
J655
J662 J663
J105 J667
J666
J661
J815
J665
J660
J12 J664
J8
J13
J1120
J816
J11
J102
J406
J413
J407
J409 J411
J408 J414
J410
J412
2-116
J675
J673
J674 J670
J671
J672
J126
J679 J668
J653
J678 J669
J652
J676
J110 J677 OLD NEW
J105 J651 J650
J814 J1126
J93 J1125
J1125
J83 J1125
J91
J70 J813
J51
J1124
J123
J316 J315
J300
J308 J306
J307 J314
J304 J313
J303
J312 J305
J311 J302
J301
J310
J70K
J70C
J309
J70M
J70Y
2-117
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
J113
J1216
J1215
J1400
J1301
J112 J1401
J92
J94
J131 J79
J99
J109 J76
J78
J77
J75
J1103
J97
J72K J72M
J72C
J73CK J73YM
J88 J1102
J87
J72Y
J71K
J71C
J84CK
J81
J85
J71M
J71Y
J82
J80 J86 J84YM
J10 J89 J1105
J1104
J54
J95
J90
J1000
J69
2-118
J1313
J1209
J1342
J1204
J1303
J1302 J1520
J1101 J1521
J1207
J153 J109
J1100 J155
J154 J1522
J56
J53 J108
J5
J57
J58
J95
J7
J1
J3
J1311
J1208
J1202
J44
J1201
J1210 J1203
J1225
J1506 J1212
J1510 J538
J1505
J1503
J1504
2-119
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
J1 PCB INVERTER
J2 PCB INVERTER
J3 PCB INVERTER
J5 PCB DCP1
2-120
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-121
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-122
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-123
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-124
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-125
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-126
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-127
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-128
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-129
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-130
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-131
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-132
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-133
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-134
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-135
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-136
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-137
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-138
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-139
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-140
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-141
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-142
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-143
http://www.manuals4you.com
http://www.manuals4you.com
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-144
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-145
R
FIGURE S
PARTS A SERIAL NUMBER/
& KEY Q'TY DESCRIPTION V
NUMBER N REMARKS
NO. C
K
2-146